Official Software
Ford - Escape 2wd - Workshop Manual - 2005 - 2005
£9.99
Get your hands on the complete Ford factory workshop software
Download now
Check out our popular Ford Escape Manuals below:
Get your hands on the Complete Ford Factory Workshop Software
Download now9.99
Get notified when we add a new FordEscape Manual
We cover 60 Ford vehicles, were you looking for one of these?
Ford - Ranger - Workshop Manual - 1983 - 2011
Ford Focus Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L (2009))
Ford - Fiesta - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2007
Ford Edge 06 07 08 09 2010 Service Repair Manual
Ford Explorer Sport Trac 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-245 4.0L SOHC VIN K SFI (2001))
Ford Ranger Service Repair Manual PDF
Ford - Figo - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010
Ford Fusion Fwd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L (2008))
Ford Focus Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L VIN N (2006))
Ford - Mustang - Parts Catalogue - 1964 - 1973
Ford - F 150 - Workshop Manual - (2008)
Ford Mondeo 2007.5 02.2007 Workshop Manual ((02.2007-))
Ford - KA - Workshop Manual - 1996 - 2008
Ford Focus 2002 Wiring Diagram PDF
Ford Transit 2000.5 01.2000-05.2006 Workshop Manual ((01.2000-05.2006))
Ford Transit Connect Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L (2010))
Ford Explorer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.6L SOHC VIN W (2004))
Ford Ranger 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-153 2.5L SOHC VIN C SFI (1998))
Ford Expedition 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.4L SOHC VIN 5 (2005))
Ford Flex Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2009))
Ford Freestyle Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2005))
Ford - Taurus - Workshop Manual - 2002 - 2002
Ford - Focus ST - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2011
Ford Mustang Workshop Manual (V6-4.0L VIN N (2006))
Ford Explorer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-245 4.0L SOHC VIN K SFI (2001))
Ford Escort Zx2 Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L DOHC VIN 3 (2000))
Ford Fusion Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2009))
Ford Explorer Sport Trac 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.0L VIN E (2002))
Ford Ranger 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.0L VIN E (2001))
Ford Mondeo 2001 10.2000-02.2007 Workshop Manual ((10.2000-02.2007))
Ford Thunderbird Workshop Manual (V6-232 3.8L SC (1989))
Ford Ranger 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN D (2001))
Ford Taurus Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN U (2000))
Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007))
Ford - Ranger Pick-ups - Owners Manual - 1993 - 2005
Ford Freestar Workshop Manual (V6-4.2L VIN 2 (2004))
2001 Ford Ranger Service & Repair Manual
Ford - Focus - Workshop Manual - (2004)
Ford - Ranger - Workshop Manual - (2015)
Ford Mustang Workshop Manual (V8-4.6L SOHC VIN X (2003))
Ford - Ranger Courier - Workshop Manual - 1999 - 1906
Ford Fusion Fwd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L Hybrid (2010))
Ford Explorer 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-4.0L VIN E (1999))
Ford - Focus - Owners Manual - 2007 - 2012
Ford - F 250 - Workshop Manual - 1980 - 1997
Ford Fusion Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2010))
Ford Focus Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L DOHC VIN 3 (2002))
Ford - F 150 - Workshop Manual - 1992 - 1997
Ford Mustang Workshop Manual (V6-3.9L VIN 6 (2004))
Ford Ranger 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN U (1998))
Ford Expedition 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-281 4.6L SOHC (1998))
Ford Windstar Workshop Manual (V6-3.8L VIN 4 (1997))
Ford Taurus Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L DOHC VIN S (2000))
Ford Bronco Workshop Manual (V8-351 5.8L VIN G 2-bbl (1982))
Ford Crown Victoria Workshop Manual (V8-4.6L SOHC VIN 6 (1996))
Ford Thunderbird Workshop Manual (V8-281 4.6L SOHC (1994))
Ford - Explorer - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2000
Ford Explorer 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-245 4.0L SOHC VIN K SFI (2001))
Ford Mustang Workshop Manual (V6-3.8L VIN 4 (1998))
Ford - Focus - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2004
Ford - Ranger - Workshop Manual - 1983 - 2011
Ford Focus Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L (2009))
Ford - Fiesta - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2007
Ford Edge 06 07 08 09 2010 Service Repair Manual
Ford Explorer Sport Trac 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-245 4.0L SOHC VIN K SFI (2001))
Ford Ranger Service Repair Manual PDF
Ford - Figo - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010
Ford Fusion Fwd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L (2008))
Ford Focus Workshop Manual (L4-2.0L VIN N (2006))
Ford - Mustang - Parts Catalogue - 1964 - 1973
Summary of Content
Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 2wd
Engine and year
L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010
P0010
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 9
P0011
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 10
P0012
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020
P0020
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 15
P0021
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 16
P0022
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040
P0040
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 21
P0041
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P005x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060
P0060
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 29
P0061
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0065 - P0069,
( P0066 P0067 P0068 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0068
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0102
P0102 (Part 1)
P0102 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 38
P0103
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 39
P0104
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106
P0106
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 44
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0107
P0107 (Part 1)
P0107 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 45
P0108
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 46
P0109
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112
P0112
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 51
P0113
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 52
P0114
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0116
P0116 (Part 1)
P0116 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 57
P0117
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 58
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0118
P0118 (Part 1)
P0118 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 59
P0119
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0121
P0121 (Part 1)
P0121 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 64
P0122
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 65
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0123
P0123 (Part 1)
P0123 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125
P0125
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 70
P0127
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 71
P0128
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131
P0131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 76
P0132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 77
P0133
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135
P0135
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 82
P0136
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 83
P0138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141
P0141
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 88
P0144
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147
P0147
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 93
P0148
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151
P0151
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 98
P0152
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 99
P0153
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155
P0155
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 104
P0156
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 105
P0158
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164,
( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0161
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0165 - P0169,
( P0166 P0167 P0168 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0167
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171
P0171
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 116
P0172
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 117
P0174
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0175
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0180
P0180 (Part 1)
P0180 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 125
P0181
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 126
P0182
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 127
P0183
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190
P0190
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 132
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0191
P0191 (Part 1)
P0191 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 133
P0192
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 134
P0193
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196
P0196
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 139
P0197
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 140
P0198
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P020x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0210
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217
P0217
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 152
P0218
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 153
P0219
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221
P0221
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 158
P0222
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 159
P0223
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230
P0230
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 164
P0231
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 165
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0232
P0232 (Part 1)
P0232 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 166
P0234
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244,
( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0243
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261
P0261
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 174
P0262
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 175
P0264
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265
P0265
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 180
P0267
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 181
P0268
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270
P0270
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 186
P0271
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 187
P0273
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 188
P0274
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276
P0276
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 193
P0277
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 194
P0279
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280
P0280
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 199
P0282
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 200
P0283
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297
P0297
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 205
P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0298
P0298 (Part 1)
P0298 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x
P030x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 211
P0300
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0310 - P0314: Testing and Inspection
P0310 (Part 1)
P0310 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315
P0315
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 219
P0316
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0320
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325
P0325
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 227
P0326
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330
P0330
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 232
P0331
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0340 - P0344: Testing and Inspection
P0340 (Part 1)
P0340 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349,
( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0345
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350
P0350
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 243
P0351
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 244
P0352
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 245
P0353
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 246
P0354
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355
P0355
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 251
P0356
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 252
P0357
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 253
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0358
P0358 (Part 1)
P0358 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 254
P0359
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0360
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400
P0400
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 263
P0401
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 264
P0402
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 265
P0403
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405
P0405
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 270
P0406
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411
P0411
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 275
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0412
P0412 (Part 1)
P0412 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424,
( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0420
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434,
( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0430
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442
P0442
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 286
P0443
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0445 - P0449,
( P0446 P0447 P0448 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0445 - P0449: Testing and Inspection
P0446 (Part 1)
P0446 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451
P0451
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 294
P0452
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 295
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0453
P0453 (Part 1)
P0453 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 296
P0454
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455
P0455
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 301
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0456
P0456 (Part 1)
P0456 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 302
P0457
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460
P0460
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 307
P0461
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 308
P0462
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 309
P0463
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480
P0480
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 314
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0481
P0481 (Part 1)
P0481 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 315
P0482
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0500
P0500 (Part 1)
P0500 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 321
P0503
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505
P0505
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 326
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0506
P0506 (Part 1)
P0506 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 327
P0507
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514,
( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0510 - P0514: Testing and Inspection
P0511 (Part 1)
P0511 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532
P0532
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 335
P0533
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 336
P0534
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537
P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0537
P0537 (Part 1)
P0537 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 341
P0538
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552
P0552
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 346
P0553
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0575 - P0579,
( P0576 P0577 P0578 0575 0576 0577 0578 0579 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0575 - P0579: Testing and Inspection
P0579 (Part 1)
P0579 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0580 - P0584,
( P0581 P0582 P0583 0580 0581 0582 0583 0584 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0581
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0600
P0600
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0600 > Page 358
P0602
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0600 > Page 359
P0603
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605
P0605
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 364
P0606
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0610 - P0614,
( P0611 P0612 P0613 0610 0611 0612 0613 0614 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0611
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P061F - P061J,
( P061G P061H P061I 061F 061G 061H 061I 061J ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P061F
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0620 - P0624,
( P0621 P0622 P0623 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0620
P0620
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0620 - P0624,
( P0621 P0622 P0623 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0620 > Page 375
P0622
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649,
( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0645 - P0649: Testing and Inspection
P0645 (Part 1)
P0645 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0655 - P0659,
( P0656 P0657 P0658 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0657
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660
P0660
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 386
P0663
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0703
P0703
Cruise Control Related Diagnosis
For diagnosis of code P0703, refer to chart:
P0500-P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Cruise Control system, follow this link: See: Cruise Control/Testing
and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 392
P0704
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705
P0705
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 397
P0707
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 398
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0708
P0708 (Part 1)
P0708 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P071x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0720
P0720
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0720 > Page 406
P0721
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0720 > Page 407
P0722
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0720 > Page 408
P0723
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P073x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P074x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P075x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0760 - P0764,
( P0761 P0762 P0763 0760 0761 0762 0763 0764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P076x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P077x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P078x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0790 - P0794,
( P0791 P0792 P0793 0790 0791 0792 0793 0794 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P079x
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0815 - P0819,
( P0816 P0817 P0818 0815 0816 0817 0818 0819 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0815
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0830 - P0834,
( P0831 P0832 P0833 0830 0831 0832 0833 0834 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0830
P0830
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0830 - P0834,
( P0831 P0832 P0833 0830 0831 0832 0833 0834 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0830 > Page 438
P0833
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0840 - P0844,
( P0841 P0842 P0843 0840 0841 0842 0843 0844 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0840
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0900 - P0904,
( P0901 P0902 P0903 0900 0901 0902 0903 0904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P09xx
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000
P1000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 451
P1001
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100
P1100
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 457
P1101
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112
P1112
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 462
P1114
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115
P1115
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 467
P1116
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 468
P1117
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120
P1120
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 473
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1121
P1121 (Part 1)
P1121 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 474
P1124
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125
P1125
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 479
P1127
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 480
P1128
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 481
P1129
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1130
P1130 (Part 1)
P1130 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 486
P1131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 487
P1132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137
P1137
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 492
P1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150
P1150
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 497
P1151
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 498
P1152
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1156
P1156
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1156 > Page 503
P1157
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1156 > Page 504
P1158
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1184
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229,
( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1229
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1233
P1233
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1233 > Page 516
P1234
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235
P1235
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 521
P1236
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 522
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1237
P1237 (Part 1)
P1237 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 523
P1238
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244,
( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1244
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1245
P1245 (Part 1)
P1245 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 531
P1246
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260
P1260
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 536
P1261
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 537
P1262
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 538
P1263
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 539
P1264
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265
P1265
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 544
P1266
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 545
P1267
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 546
P1268
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270
P1270
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 551
P1271
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 552
P1272
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 553
P1273
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 554
P1274
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275
P1275
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 559
P1276
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 560
P1277
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 561
P1278
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1285
P1285 (Part 1)
P1285 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 566
P1288
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 567
P1289
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294,
( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1290
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299,
( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1299
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309,
( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1309
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1335 - P1339,
( P1336 P1337 P1338 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1336
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380
P1380
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 585
P1381
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 586
P1383
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385
P1385
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 591
P1386
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 592
P1388
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400
P1400
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 598
P1401
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405
P1405
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 603
P1406
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 604
P1408
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 605
P1409
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436
P1436
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 610
P1437
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444,
( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1443
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450
P1450
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 618
P1451
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460
P1460
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 623
P1461
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 624
P1462
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 625
P1463
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 626
P1464
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469,
( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1465 - P1469: Testing and Inspection
P1469 (Part 1)
P1469 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474,
( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1474
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477
P1477
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 637
P1479
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1485 - P1489,
( P1486 P1487 P1488 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1489
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1500
P1500 (Part 1)
P1500 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 646
P1501
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 647
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1502
P1502 (Part 1)
P1502 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 648
P1504
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506
P1506
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 653
P1507
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514,
( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512
P1512
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514,
( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 658
P1513
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516
P1516
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 663
P1517
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 664
P1518
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 665
P1519
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524,
( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1520
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537
P1537
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 673
P1538
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549,
( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1549
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554,
( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1550
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1565
P1565 (Part 1)
P1565 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 684
P1566
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 685
P1567
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 686
P1568
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1572
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1580 - P1584,
( P1581 P1582 P1583 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1582
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634,
( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1633
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635
P1635
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 701
P1636
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 702
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1639
P1639 (Part 1)
P1639 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640
P1640
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640 > Page 707
P1641
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650
P1650
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 712
P1651
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1670 - P1674,
( P1671 P1672 P1673 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1674
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P17xx
P17xx
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P17xx > Page 721
P1703
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705
P1705
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 726
P1709
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729,
( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1729
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780
P1780
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 734
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1781
P1781 (Part 1)
P1781 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1800-P18ZZ > P1800 - P1804,
( P1801 P1802 P1803 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P18xx
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1900
P1900
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1900 > Page 744
P1900 - P1904: Testing and Inspection P1901
P1901 (Part 1)
P1901 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1910 - P1914,
( P1911 P1912 P1913 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1910
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004,
( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2004
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005
P2005
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 756
P2006
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 757
P2007
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 758
P2008
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014,
( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2014
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019,
( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2015
P2015
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019,
( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2015 > Page 766
P2015 - P2019: Testing and Inspection P2019
P2019 (Part 1)
P2019 (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2020 - P2024,
( P2021 P2022 P2023 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2020
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065
P2065
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 774
P2066
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 775
P2067
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 776
P2068
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070
P2070
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 781
P2071
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 782
P2072
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100
P2100
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 788
P2101
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 789
P2104
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105
P2105
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 794
P2106
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 795
P2107
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114,
( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110
P2110
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114,
( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 > Page 800
P2111
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114,
( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 > Page 801
P2112
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124,
( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121
P2121
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124,
( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 > Page 806
P2122
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124,
( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 > Page 807
P2123
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129,
( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126
P2126
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129,
( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 > Page 812
P2127
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129,
( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 > Page 813
P2128
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134,
( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131
P2131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134,
( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 > Page 818
P2132
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134,
( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 > Page 819
P2133
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2135 - P2139,
( P2136 P2137 P2138 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2135
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195
P2195
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 827
P2196
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 828
P2197
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 829
P2198
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259,
( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257
P2257
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259,
( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257 > Page 835
P2258
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270
P2270
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 840
P2271
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 841
P2272
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 842
P2273
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 843
P2274
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2275 - P2279,
( P2276 P2277 P2278 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2275
P2275
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2275 - P2279,
( P2276 P2277 P2278 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2275 > Page 848
P2278
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 855
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 856
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair
AUDIO CONTROL PROTOCOL (ACP) MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Lower the glove box. 3. Remove the 2 ACP module screws. 4.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the ACP module. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 868
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 874
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 875
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 876
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 877
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the
2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module, Driver Side Front
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module, Driver Side Front > Page 883
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module, Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module, Passenger Side Front > Page 886
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 887
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 888
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the front seat and depower the SRS.
2. Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the heated seat module off
the bracket.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 4. Install the front seat and repower the SRS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 893
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 894
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The ABS module can be
damaged if exposed to these charges.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module it must be configured using the vehicle as-built data and
calibrated.
1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). 2. Remove the 3 ABS module screws.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the ABS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Low Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Low Speed Fan Control Relay > Page 904
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Low Speed Fan Control Relay > Page 905
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 906
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 907
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 908
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 912
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR)
NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and WACF are used to monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR (may be referred to as the wide open throttle A/C cutoff [WAC] relay) is wired normally
open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC module and the A/C
clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this
message is sent through the communications network). When A/C is requested, the PCM will
check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP SW, ACCS). If these inputs indicate
A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine RPM,
throttle position), the PCM will ground the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending
voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 913
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 914
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 919
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 920
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 924
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 925
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 930
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 934
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 938
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 939
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 944
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 945
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 946
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 949
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 950
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 951
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 952
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 953
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 954
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 957
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 958
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 959
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
Removal and Installation
1. CAUTION: Prior to removal of the SJB, it is necessary to upload module configuration
information to a diagnostic tool. This
information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the
floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from
the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 965
7. Remove the SJB screw. 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the SJB. 9. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the SJB. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) torque based electronic throttle control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand
(pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the PCM, and an accelerator pedal assembly to
control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable
operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS), and
mechanical throttle body.
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable cam
timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions).
Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators.
- Eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve.
- Better airflow range.
- Packaging (no cable).
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality.
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a warning indicator (wrench light) on the
instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are accompanied by DTCs and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II ETB has the following characteristics 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a
DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle
plate shaft is 17:1.
2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle when no
power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger
than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h
(30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (-0.75
degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable
and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle
plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not
required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle
body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC
valve.
6. The throttle position (TP) sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant throttle position signals are required for
increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage.
- Signal return (ground).
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 969
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and
APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and
pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor
assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts).
- 2 signal return (ground) circuits.
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a
fault. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect
by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value will be substituted for an
incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 970
GEN II ETC System
The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable cam timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal
position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate
corrective action.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 971
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 972
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2)
Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 973
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- Greater than or equal to 5% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on,
engine off.
- Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero
throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up.
- Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0
degrees (hard-stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty
cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle.
- Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle
angle.
- Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable
of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 978
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 979
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
980
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views >
Page 983
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views >
Page 984
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EEPROM)
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate fault code P1635
or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various
hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this
procedure properly may generate fault code P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An
incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for fault code P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and four wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block will display on the diagnostic tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the diagnostic tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. There are other
enhanced diagnostic tools that may have programming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the
VID block is blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an
automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry
into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a diagnostic tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle.
The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Manual data entry must be Carried out if the old module is damaged or incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible diagnostic tool, select and
carry out the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make
certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 83,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
MSOF/ESOF may result in codes P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built
Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the diagnostic tool.
Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and L-M
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft website at www.motorcraft.com. From the
Motorcraft homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
For Ford and L-M technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS
website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using the WDS or New
Generation Star (NGS).
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) > Page 987
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) stud bolt
nut and position the wiring harness aside.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the stud bolts and the PCM.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the PCM cowl seal. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 991
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 992
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Emission Control Systems > EGR Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Control Module: Description and Operation
EGR SYSTEM MODULE (ESM)
Overview
EGR System Module (ESM)
The ESM is an updated DPFE EGR system. It functions in the same manner as the conventional
DPFE system, however the various system components have been integrated into a single
component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake
manifold with a metal gasket that forms the measuring orifice. This arrangement increases system
reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to
the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute
pressure (MAP). The system provides the PCM with a differential DPFE signal, identical to a
traditional DPFE system.
The delta pressure feedback EGR monitor is comprised of a series of electrical tests and functional
tests that monitor various aspects of the EGR system operation.
First, the DPFE sensor input circuit is checked for out of range values (P1400/P0405
P1401/P0406). The EVR output circuit is checked for opens and shorts (P1409/P0403).
NOTE: EGR normally has large amounts of water vapor that are the result of the engine
combustion process. During cold ambient temperatures, under some circumstances, water vapor
can freeze in the DPFE sensor, hoses, as well as other components in the EGR system. In order to
prevent MIL illumination for temporary freezing, the following logic is used.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected below 0°C (32°F), only the EGR system is disabled for
the current driving cycle. A DTC is not stored and the I/M readiness status for the EGR monitor will
not change. The EGR monitor will, however, continue to operate. If the EGR monitor determines
that the malfunction is no longer present, the EGR system will be enabled and normal system
operation will be restored.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected above 0°C (32°F), the EGR system and the EGR monitor
is disabled for the current driving cycle. A DTC is stored and the MIL is illuminated if the
malfunction has been detected on 2 consecutive driving cycles.
After the vehicle has warmed up and normal EGR rates are being commanded by the PCM, the
low flow check is carried out. Since the EGR system is a closed loop system, the EGR system will
deliver the requested EGR flow as long as it has the capability to do so. If the EVR duty cycle is
very high (greater than 80% duty cycle), the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is
evaluated to determine the amount of EGR system restriction. If the differential pressure is below a
calibrated threshold, a low flow malfunction is indicated (P0401/P0406).
Finally, the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is also checked at idle with zero
requested EGR flow to carry out the high flow check. If the differential pressure exceeds a
calibrated limit, it indicates a stuck open EGR valve or debris temporarily lodged under the EGR
valve seat (P0402).
If the inferred ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F), or greater than 60°C (140°F), or the
altitude is greater than 8,000 feet (BARO less than 22.5 in-Hg), the EGR monitor cannot be run
reliably. In these conditions, a timer starts to accumulate the time in these conditions. If the vehicle
leaves these extreme conditions, the timer starts to decrement, and, if conditions permit, will
attempt to complete the EGR flow monitor. If the timer reaches 800 seconds, the EGR monitor is
disabled for the remainder of the current driving cycle and the EGR Monitor I/M Readiness bit will
be set to a ready condition after one such driving cycle. Vehicles will require 2 such driving cycles
for the EGR monitor to be set to a ready condition.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1001
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1005
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1006
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1010
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1011
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1016
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs
Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Control Module DTCs &
Associated Fault PIDs
TSB 07-12-3
06/25/07
RCM FAULT REPORTING USING DTCS AND BIT-MAPPED PARAMETER IDENTIFIERS (PIDS)
- SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2001-2007 Crown Victoria 2002-2007 Taurus 2004-2007 Focus 2005-2007 Five Hundred,
Freestyle, Mustang 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac
2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2007 Explorer 2003-2007 Expedition 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape 2007 E-Series
LINCOLN: 2001-2007 Town Car 2003-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2003-2005 Aviator
2003-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001-2007 Grand Marquis 2002-2005 Sable 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2002-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-7-8 to update the vehicle application.
ISSUE Various 2001-2007 vehicles are equipped with a restraints control module (RCM) that report
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) which provide general fault information. These DTCs require
accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to identify the specific fault. Most
2001-2006 Workshop Manuals (WSM) were written using New Generation STAR Tester (NGS)
terminology and navigation which does not translate well when using Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS), Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) or Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips to assist with navigation of both the WSM and the scan tool
being used.
SERVICE TIPS
DTCs And Associated Fault PIDs Description
Many of the continuous memory and on-demand DTCs that can be present in the RCM provide
general fault information and require accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to
identify the specific concern. DTCs that use fault PIDs are conceptually different from conventional
DTCs.
Conventional DTCs identify a specific concern for a given component and point to a particular
diagnostic path. In the diagnostic path, PIDs are sometimes used to determine the root cause.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1022
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1023
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1024
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1025
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1026
DTCs that use fault PIDs do not identify the specific concern. The DTC identifies the component(s)
or type of component(s) in which the concern exists. The next level, fault PIDs, identifies the
specific device and fault condition. Fault PIDs are available for both on-demand (active) and
continuous memory (historic or intermittent) DTCs. A scan tool must be used to view the DTCs and
their fault PIDs. The table lists those DTCs that are supported by associated fault PIDs. (Figures
1-5)
VIEWING FAULT PIDS USING SCAN TOOLS WSM Direction to FLAG DTC/View Fault PIDs
The information in viewing fault PIDs in the WSM has evolved over the years as the scan tools
have transitioned. Examples of how the WSM may direct you to view fault PIDs are:
^ FLAG DTC XXXXX/Record All Flagged Faults (2001-2006 WS Ms)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1027
^ View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault PIDs (2007 WSM)
^ DataLogger/View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault Pids (2008 and future WSMs)
In each instance the direction is the same (view fault PIDs to identify the specific component and
fault condition) but how they are accessed by the scan tools, as well as the scan tool terminology,
will vary.
FLAG the DTC - View the Fault PIDs
For example, the "Flag" DTC feature is specific to NGS/NGS+. When using IDS/PDS it is
necessary to view the fault PIDs from DataLogger.
Using IDS/PDS
NOTE
WHEN USING IDS/PDS, MOVE THE CURSOR OVER THE PID OR SELECT THE PID TO
DISPLAY ITS DEFINITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN. WHEN USING PDS,
HIGHLIGHT OR MOVE THE STYLUS OVER THE PID TO SEE THE PID DEFINITION.
1. Perform a self test of the RCM and/or OCS module to retrieve on-demand and continuous
memory DTCs.
2. To view the fault PIDs associated with an on-demand DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
3. Monitor all "_OD" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
^ For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_OD PID reads
"FAULT' indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
4. To view the fault PIDs associated with a continuous memory DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
5. Monitor all "_CM" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_CM PID reads
"FAULT" indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
IDS/PDS Fault PID Naming Conventions
The fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS uses a strategy associating it with the DTC. For example,
the fault PIDs 2296_18_OD and 2296_18_CM break down as follows:
^ 2296 - The DTC number minus the "B" (body) or "C" (chassis) designation.
^ 18 - An identifier used to distinguish between each of the fault PIDs associated with the DTC.
^ OD - Identifies the fault PID as an on-demand fault.
^ CM - Identifies the fault PID as a continuous memory (intermittent) fault.
NOTE
THE DTCS AND FAULT PIDS SUPPORTED BY A VEHICLE WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1028
Table lists each of the fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS and their description. (Figures 1-5)
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1029
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1030
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1031
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1032
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1033
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
WARNING:
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the inadvertent deployment of the safety canopy and risk of personal
injury.
- The RCM orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel
area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, a new
RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area
of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
NOTE: When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM
is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
The restraints control module carries out the following functions:
- deploys the air bag(s) in the event of a deployable crash.
- activates the safety belt buckle pretensioners to remove slack from the safety belt.
- monitors the SRS for faults.
- illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected.
- flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected.
- communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs).
- signals the instrument cluster module to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available
and another SRS fault exists.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the RCM will illuminate the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for 6 seconds and then off for 2 seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the
2-digit LFC if a SRS fault exists. The air bag indicator will flash the LFC 5 times, then it will remain
illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical
DTCs through the DLC, to the diagnostic tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the
system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster module to activate an
audible chime. The chime is a series of 5 sets of 5 tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and
the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If 2 or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority
will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides 150 ms of backup power to
deploy the front air bags and pretensioners in the event that the ignition circuit is lost or damaged
during impact.
The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately 1 minute after the battery
ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1034
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct air bag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) operation. If a vehicle equipped with an SRS system has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM is restored to its original condition.
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the inadvertent deployment of the safety canopy and risk of personal
injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE:
- When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM is
being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1035
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Position back the carpet on the LH
and RH tunnel to access the RCM.
4. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2 Pull out and disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the RCM.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1036
1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag RCM retaining bolts is critical for correct system
operation.
Position the RCM and install the 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
2. Connect the small RCM electrical connector.
3. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the large RCM electrical connector.
4. CAUTION: Putting the large RCM electrical wiring connector into the RCM on an angle can
cause bad electrical connections and
damage components.
NOTE: The RCM has been removed for clarity.
Position the large RCM electrical wiring connector into the RCM.
- CAUTION: Do not push the connector to where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is
needed to get the connector into position on the RCM before using the lever to fully seat the
connector.
With the large RCM electrical wiring connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a
subtle audible click is heard and a slight resistance is felt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1037
5. NOTE: The RCM has been removed for clarity.
Connect the large RCM electrical wiring connector. Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into
the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH
center instrument panel finish panel. 8. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs
Seat Belt Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Control Module DTCs &
Associated Fault PIDs
TSB 07-12-3
06/25/07
RCM FAULT REPORTING USING DTCS AND BIT-MAPPED PARAMETER IDENTIFIERS (PIDS)
- SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2001-2007 Crown Victoria 2002-2007 Taurus 2004-2007 Focus 2005-2007 Five Hundred,
Freestyle, Mustang 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac
2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2007 Explorer 2003-2007 Expedition 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape 2007 E-Series
LINCOLN: 2001-2007 Town Car 2003-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2003-2005 Aviator
2003-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001-2007 Grand Marquis 2002-2005 Sable 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2002-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-7-8 to update the vehicle application.
ISSUE Various 2001-2007 vehicles are equipped with a restraints control module (RCM) that report
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) which provide general fault information. These DTCs require
accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to identify the specific fault. Most
2001-2006 Workshop Manuals (WSM) were written using New Generation STAR Tester (NGS)
terminology and navigation which does not translate well when using Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS), Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) or Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips to assist with navigation of both the WSM and the scan tool
being used.
SERVICE TIPS
DTCs And Associated Fault PIDs Description
Many of the continuous memory and on-demand DTCs that can be present in the RCM provide
general fault information and require accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to
identify the specific concern. DTCs that use fault PIDs are conceptually different from conventional
DTCs.
Conventional DTCs identify a specific concern for a given component and point to a particular
diagnostic path. In the diagnostic path, PIDs are sometimes used to determine the root cause.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1042
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1043
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1044
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1045
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1046
DTCs that use fault PIDs do not identify the specific concern. The DTC identifies the component(s)
or type of component(s) in which the concern exists. The next level, fault PIDs, identifies the
specific device and fault condition. Fault PIDs are available for both on-demand (active) and
continuous memory (historic or intermittent) DTCs. A scan tool must be used to view the DTCs and
their fault PIDs. The table lists those DTCs that are supported by associated fault PIDs. (Figures
1-5)
VIEWING FAULT PIDS USING SCAN TOOLS WSM Direction to FLAG DTC/View Fault PIDs
The information in viewing fault PIDs in the WSM has evolved over the years as the scan tools
have transitioned. Examples of how the WSM may direct you to view fault PIDs are:
^ FLAG DTC XXXXX/Record All Flagged Faults (2001-2006 WS Ms)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1047
^ View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault PIDs (2007 WSM)
^ DataLogger/View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault Pids (2008 and future WSMs)
In each instance the direction is the same (view fault PIDs to identify the specific component and
fault condition) but how they are accessed by the scan tools, as well as the scan tool terminology,
will vary.
FLAG the DTC - View the Fault PIDs
For example, the "Flag" DTC feature is specific to NGS/NGS+. When using IDS/PDS it is
necessary to view the fault PIDs from DataLogger.
Using IDS/PDS
NOTE
WHEN USING IDS/PDS, MOVE THE CURSOR OVER THE PID OR SELECT THE PID TO
DISPLAY ITS DEFINITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN. WHEN USING PDS,
HIGHLIGHT OR MOVE THE STYLUS OVER THE PID TO SEE THE PID DEFINITION.
1. Perform a self test of the RCM and/or OCS module to retrieve on-demand and continuous
memory DTCs.
2. To view the fault PIDs associated with an on-demand DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
3. Monitor all "_OD" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
^ For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_OD PID reads
"FAULT' indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
4. To view the fault PIDs associated with a continuous memory DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
5. Monitor all "_CM" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_CM PID reads
"FAULT" indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
IDS/PDS Fault PID Naming Conventions
The fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS uses a strategy associating it with the DTC. For example,
the fault PIDs 2296_18_OD and 2296_18_CM break down as follows:
^ 2296 - The DTC number minus the "B" (body) or "C" (chassis) designation.
^ 18 - An identifier used to distinguish between each of the fault PIDs associated with the DTC.
^ OD - Identifies the fault PID as an on-demand fault.
^ CM - Identifies the fault PID as a continuous memory (intermittent) fault.
NOTE
THE DTCS AND FAULT PIDS SUPPORTED BY A VEHICLE WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
1048
Table lists each of the fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS and their description. (Figures 1-5)
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1053
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1054
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1059
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1060
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1066
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1075
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1076
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1077
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1078
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1084
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1085
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1086
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1087
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 1090
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 1091
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 1092
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 1095
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 1096
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 1097
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1098
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1102
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1103
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the
parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1109
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Power Door Lock Switch, Passenger
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Power Door Lock Switch, Passenger > Page 1114
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1117
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 1120
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 1121
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 1122
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 1123
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1124
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. On Mariner vehicles, remove the 3 screws and the front
door trim panel arm rest. 3. Release the bezel retaining clip from the door trim panel. 4. Release
the locking clips and remove the window control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1128
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1129
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1130
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1131
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1132
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1136
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1137
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1138
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1139
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The seat belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an
air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the recliner handle cover. 3. Remove the seat control switch knob. 4. Remove the 3
screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If equipped, disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the 3 seat control switch screws.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 1144
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 1147
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1148
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the recliner handle cover. 3. Remove the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If removing the outboard passenger seat side cushion shield, remove the 2 screws and slide the
shield forward. Disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- If removing the driver seat side cushion shield, remove the 3 screws. Disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the heated seat switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions,
notes and instructions in the
supplemental restraint system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4 (Engine Compartment, 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1153
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1157
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1158
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 2. Remove the warning indicator switch screw. 3. Disconnect the warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the warning indicator switch. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page
1163
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front > Page 1166
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front > Page 1167
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1170
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1171
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1172
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The harness connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the grommet. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor wire from
the retainer. 5. Remove the 2 front wheel speed sensor wire bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 1175
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
7. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 1176
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Front
Removal and Installation
1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 1177
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Using a suitable tool, remove the
grommet. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor wire connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel
speed sensor wire from the retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor wire bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 1178
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Rear
Removal and Installation
FWD vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
^ To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4WD vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 1184
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1188
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1189
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1190
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 1196
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 1199
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 1202
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake
Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS)/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The BPS, also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control
deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the
brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens
and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open brake pedal position
(BPP) switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to
the PCM did not change states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can
be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1203
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees
counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket.
Installation
CAUTION: The initial installation of a speed control deactivator switch allows for adjustment. If
additional adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
- Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the speed control deactivator switch.
1 Position the speed control deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1204
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1208
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1209
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 steering wheel cover screws and the
steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the 4 steering wheel brace nuts and the steering wheel brace.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in)
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Remove the 4 speed control switch screws and the
speed control switches.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1217
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1218
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure sender.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Apply pipe sealant with Teflon to the oil pressure sender threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Press the tabs simultaneously and remove the blower motor switch. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart (Part 1)
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart (Part 2)
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost (demist
performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the high pressure
cut-off switch.
3. NOTE: A new O-ring seal lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before installing a
new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1237
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1238
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1243
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1246
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 1251
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 1252
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 1253
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1257
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1258
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 2. Remove the warning indicator switch screw. 3. Disconnect the warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the warning indicator switch. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1263
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1264
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
LIGHT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 1269
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 1272
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1273
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REVERSING LAMP SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1277
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1278
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1279
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
STOPLAMP SWITCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the stoplamp switch.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Initial installation of the stoplamp switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new
stoplamp switch.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise to the stop to unlock.
2. With the engine running, fully apply the brake pedal. 3. Install the stoplamp switch and slowly
release the brake pedal. 4. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1284
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1287
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1291
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1292
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The fog lamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Remove the fog lamp switch from the instrument panel. Disconnect the fog lamp switch electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1296
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1300
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1304
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1305
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1306
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1310
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1319
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1320
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1321
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1322
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1326
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1327
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1328
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 1332
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) switch
electrical connector. 3. Rotate the CPP switch clockwise and remove the CPP switch. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 1336
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1340
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1341
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1342
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1343
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1347
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1348
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1349
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Level Input
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
NOTE: The Ford GT will use a piezoelectric sonar type fuel level sensor. The sensor is located in
the tank and the sensor signal is provided as a communications network message by the
instrument cluster to the PCM.
The fuel level input (FLI) is either a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP)
module or a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 1354
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 1355
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 1356
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 1357
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure.
The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance
decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 1362
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP
leak check monitor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 1367
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 1368
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 1369
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
Typical Stand Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1373
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 design types of AT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in
the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1377
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1378
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1379
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1383
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 1391
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 1392
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 1395
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 1396
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 1397
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1398
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM will turn on the heater
by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 1401
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 1402
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 1403
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1407
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 1410
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 1416
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 1417
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1421
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 1424
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1425
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1429
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1430
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1431
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1435
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1438
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity,
the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 1445
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 1446
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1454
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1455
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1456
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1457
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Fuel
Tank Pressure Transducer Sensor
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Fuel
Tank Pressure Transducer Sensor > Page 1462
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 1465
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 1466
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
1467
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1471
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor > Page 1474
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL TEMPERATURE (FRT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
The FRT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRT sensor measures the temperature of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1475
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1479
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1480
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose
of the IES switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in
place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs the ball breaks loose from the magnet rolls up a
conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts
off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open it must be manually reset before restarting the
vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1481
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect
the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1485
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 1488
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Page 1489
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1494
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1495
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1496
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1500
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1501
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1502
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1503
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1511
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1512
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1513
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1519
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor
View 151-16 (Full Body, Left Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1520
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1521
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1522
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1525
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 1526
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1527
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
SENSORS
WARNING:
- The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle
equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in
which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, a new RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed.
In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and correctly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
For these vehicles, the SRS uses up to 5 satellite sensors in addition to the RCM. The RCM is
mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles will have a front impact severity
sensor and it is located in the front-center of the vehicle, mounted on the radiator support bracket.
If the vehicle is equipped with safety canopies, there are 4 additional side impact sensors. The 4
additional sensors are located at the base of each B-pillar and mounted on the C-pillar. The LH and
RH C-pillar mounted side impact sensors are interchangeable. Mounting orientation is critical for
correct operation of all impact and rollover sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1530
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Position the hood latch assembly aside. 1
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2 Remove the hood latch bolts.
3 Position the hood latch aside.
3. Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the radiator support bracket bolt. 5.
Remove the front impact severity sensor bolt. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove
the front impact severity sensor.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the front impact severity sensor.
2. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Align the locator tabs of the front impact severity sensor to the openings in the radiator support
bracket.
3. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag front impact severity sensor retaining bolt is
critical for correct system operation.
Install the front impact severity sensor bolt. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. Install the radiator support bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1531
6. NOTE: Align the hood latch position as previously marked during removal.
Install the hood latch assembly. 1
Position the hood latch.
2 Install the hood latch bolts. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3 Tighten the hood latch nut. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch.
8. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1532
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor
electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1533
1. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Align the side impact sensor locator tabs to the openings in the B-pillar sheet metal.
2. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolts is critical for
correct system operation.
Install the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Connect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 5. Repower
the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1534
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Remove the side impact sensor bolt.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the side impact sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 1535
2. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Align the side impact sensor locator tabs to the openings in the C-pillar sheet metal.
3. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for
correct system operation.
Install the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Install the C-pillar trim panel. 5. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCHES
As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the front safety belt buckles are equipped with
safety belt buckle switches. The safety belt buckle switches are comprised of integrated circuits
called Hall-effect sensors. The safety belt buckle switches (Hall-effect sensors) are located in the
driver and passenger safety belt buckles. The safety belt buckle switches indicate to the restraints
control module (RCM) whether the safety belts are connected or disconnected. The RCM uses this
information in determining the deployment rate of the dual-stage driver and passenger air bag
modules. The RCM also communicates the driver safety belt buckle switch status to the instrument
cluster module, which monitors the information to control the safety belt warning indicator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT TENSION SENSOR
The safety belt tension sensor:
- is part of the front outboard passenger safety belt and retractor assembly.
- is located at the safety belt anchor point.
- is used in conjunction with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system.
- is a 3-wire Hall-effect sensor that is part of the front passenger safety belt and retractor assembly.
The safety belt tension sensor is used by the OCS system to identify the presence of a child safety
seat on the front outboard passenger seat, when the child safety seat is installed according to
manufacturer instructions. The safety belt tension sensor senses the tension on the safety belt
assembly then provides an output to the OCS system electronic control unit (ECU), indicating that
the safety belt assembly is cinched. After sensing the weight applied to the seat by the occupant
and using the safety belt tension sensor input, the OCS system determines how the occupant
should be classified and communicates this information to the restraints control module (RCM). If
the occupant is classified to be a child, the RCM will then automatically deactivate the passenger
air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Pressure Sensor
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Pressure Sensor > Page 1546
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Pressure Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Pressure Sensor > Page 1549
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1550
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR
CAUTION:
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing of the OCS system. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C
(32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum 5-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE:
- For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
- To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCS
ECU electrical connector.
A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the electrical connector from the OCS ECU.
An OCS system service kit (OCS service kit) has the OCS ECU electrical connector glued to the
ECU, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. An OCS system service kit also has an
in-line 10-pin connector between the OCS ECU and the seat wiring harness.
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
The seat occupant classification sensor system is found only on the front passenger seat. The front
passenger seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is comprised of a silicone gel-filled
bladder mounted in the seat cushion, a pressure sensor that is mounted to the seat frame and an
electronic control unit which is also mounted to the seat frame. Pressure is applied to the OCS
bladder when the weight of any occupant or object in the front passenger seat is present. The
pressure is then transferred through a tube, is sensed by the OCS pressure sensor, then
electronically communicated to the OCS electronic control unit. Based on programmed limits, the
OCS electronic control unit will inform the restraints control module (RCM), via a High Speed
Controller Area Network (CAN), of the necessary information. The RCM uses this information in
determining if the passenger air bag module or passenger seat side air bag module is to be
deployed in the event of a deployable collision. The OCS system components (seat cushion foam
pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If installing a
new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad, a new OCS system service
kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be
installed as an assembly.
The OCS system is also used for operation of the passenger Belt Minder. To deactivate or
reactivate the passenger Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators or the owner literature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1553
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- Do not separate components.
CAUTION:
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as
an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS
system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1554
and ECU) must be installed as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the
disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU
electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
- If removing an OCS service kit, refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion element
electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1555
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the set cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU.
10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the
OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly
with the bladder.
Installation
NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. See:
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1556
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for
any foreign objects, before installing the occupant classification sensor to the seat cushion pan. If
any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the
event of an air bag deployment.
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor components through the correct seat
cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly, be careful
not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS
bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can
set a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the restraints control module (RCM).
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result
in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
Install seat cushion trim cover to seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat.
10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1557
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
12. Install the passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the system. Do not prove out the
system at this time.
14. CAUTION:
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing the OCS system: -
Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C
(32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum eight second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE: For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
NOTE: To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1558
- The ignition switch must be cycled after rezeroing the OCS system.
Rezero the occupant classification sensor. With the front passenger seat empty, use a diagnostic tool to trigger the active command and
rezero the occupant classification sensor.
15. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1559
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1560
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- Do not separate components.
CAUTION:
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed
as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit)
inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the
disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU
electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
- If removing an OEM OCS, refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1561
a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion element
electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1562
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan.
9. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through
the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1563
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor assembly, seat cushion pan and support assembly for
any foreign objects before installing the occupant classification sensor assembly to the seat
cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal
injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor components through the correct seat
cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly, be careful
not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness, and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE:
- When installing a service part occupant classification sensor, the seat wire harness pressure
sensor electrical connector is not used.
- Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2 Slide the electronic control unit (ECU) into the seat cushion pan bracket. The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the restraints control module (RCM).
3 Install the rivets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1564
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
7. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips.
1 Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely out of the
way.
5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely out of the way.
8. Install the passenger seat into the vehicle. 9. Repower the system. Do not prove out the system
at this time.
10. CAUTION:
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing the OCS system: Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1565
If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed
and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30
minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum eight second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE: For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
NOTE: To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
- The ignition switch must be cycled after rezeroing the OCS system.
Rezero the occupant classification sensor. With the front passenger seat empty, use a diagnostic tool to trigger the active command and
rezero the occupant classification sensor.
11. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
12. NOTE: When installing a new occupant classification sensor, a prepaid return postcard is
provided with the new occupant classification sensor.
The serial number for the new part and the vehicle identification number (VIN) must be recorded
and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the occupant classification sensor traceability card and return
it along with the complete inoperative occupant classification sensor to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative occupant classification sensor, include the following: seat cushion
foam pad, bladder, electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors
and wire harness (service part occupant classification sensor only).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver > Page 1570
Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver > Page 1571
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt Buckle Sensor > Page 1574
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1575
Seat Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
The seat track position sensor is a Hall-effect sensor located on the driver seat track. The seat
track position sensor informs the restraints control module (RCM) of the driver seat position. Based
on programmed limits, the seat track position sensor will inform the RCM of the driver seat position.
The RCM uses this information in determining the deployment rate of the dual-stage driver air bag
module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1576
Seat Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The seat must be in rearward position.
1. Depower the system. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the
screw and the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the
system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1581
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1589
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1595
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 1598
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls. the position of the TCS.
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch
in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1610
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1611
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1612
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 1617
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 1620
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3. Remove the TSS
sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1623
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1624
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor.
^ To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor > Page 1625
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the VSS are accessed from the top of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1634
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 1639
View 151-24 (Rear Door (RH Side Shown, LH Side Similar))
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 1640
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1643
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1644
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1647
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1648
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1649
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1650
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1651
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1652
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1653
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- The LH front window control switch is shown, all others are similar.
- The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control
switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control
switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1658
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1662
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1663
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1664
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1665
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1666
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1676
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1677
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1678
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1679
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1685
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1686
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1687
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1688
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 1691
Alignment: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 1692
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1693
Alignment: Description and Operation
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. When the wheel tilts out at the top, the camber is
positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, the camber is negative (-).
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1694
The vehicle toe setting: ^
affects tire wear and directional stability.
^ must be checked after adding aftermarket equipment to the vehicle that affects the suspension
system.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, the toe is positive (+) (toe in). When
the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, the toe is negative (-) (toe out). This is
measured in degrees, from side-to-side, and totalled.
Wheel Track
Rear Thrust Angle
^ Rear thrust angle can be defined as a line bisecting the rear toe or simply the direction in which
the rear wheels are pointed.
^ Rear thrust angle = (LR toe - RR toe).
^ If the rear wheels are pointed to the right, the thrust angle is positive; if the rear wheels are
pointed to the left, the thrust angle is negative.
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Dog Tracking
Dog tracking is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned
roads can give the illusion of dog tracking.
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1695
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. ^
A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path
and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (i.e., wind, road crown).
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be flat on-center. ^
Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear
teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
^ In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket
downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster
for the
front suspension are adjustable.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1698
Difference From Standard Position (LH Side)
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1699
Difference From Standard Position (RH Side)
6. Install and tighten the front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1700
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new spring with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) label on the driver's side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary. 3. Remove the higher side coil spring.
1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle.
2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side
coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all 3 coil springs and select the 2 most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1701
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Front
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in
the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie-rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1702
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie-rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. CAUTION: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to
the boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
Rear
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. CAUTION: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of debris to ensure proper clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent debris from entering the joint. Clean the area
using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1703
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
^ Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Locations > Page 1709
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
On some applications there is a pressure test point with a Schrader fitting in the fuel rail that
relieves the fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for repair and diagnostic
procedures. Before repairing or testing the fuel system, read any WARNING, CAUTION, and
HANDLING information. On vehicles not equipped with a Schrader valve, use the Rotunda Fuel
Pressure Test Kit #134-R0087 or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle Speed .....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 680 - 750 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1717
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One
Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
............................. 1.25 - 1.35mm (0.049 - 0.053 in.)
Spark Plug Tightening Torque .............................................................................................................
........................................................ 12 Nm (9 lb.ft.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1732
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type
Spark Plug ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... SP448
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.
4. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before
removing the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1735
1. Inspect the spark plugs.
2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. Install the spark plugs.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before
attaching to the spark plugs.
Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1736
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
^ Clean the spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or wont or loose bearings.
^ Correct the oil leak concern.
^ Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture for excessive idling.
^
Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1737
4. Inspect for normal burning.
^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^
Install a new spark plug.
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by a white or light gray spots and with bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^
Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
^ Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1741
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test-Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. For additional information, refer to the
Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test-Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1742
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is within 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example,
a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 1746
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. CAUTION: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
4. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Drive Belt: Exploded Views
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD)- Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD)- Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1751
Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams
Accessory Drive
2.3L without A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1752
2.3L with A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accessory Drive
Inspection and Verification
CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be
lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur.
Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Visual Inspection Chart
3. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C
compressor engagement chirp, power steering
cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator whine.
4. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Rim
5. NOTE: Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be considered
acceptable. If damage exceeds the acceptable limit or
any chunks are found to be missing from the ribs, a new belt must be installed.
Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be
considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1755
V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling
NOTE: Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt.
6. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and
appropriate action taken.
1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new
belt is not required. 2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50 percent of the rib height. This is not
considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise
is apparent, install a new belt.
3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability
concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a
new belt.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
7. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this,
install a new accessory drive belt. 8. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1756
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1757
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Drive Belt Noise/Flutter
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or an incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
CAUTION: Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^
wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic transmissions.
^ wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual
transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertial
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
re-occurring drive belt squeal can occur under these conditions: ^
if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
^ if the A/C OFF equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs
after several minutes) exceeds specifications.
^ if any of the accessories are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories
should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition, if not, inspect the accessory.
^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Incorrect Drive Belt Installation
CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and can
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Incorrect Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1758
Correct Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following: ^
Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage, especially the mounting pad surface.
If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out
of position. This will result in chirp and squeal noises.
^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick grab or bind. 1.
With the engine OFF, check routing of the accessory drive belt.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension
on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt in the area of the tensioner.
3. Using the suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, move the
tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full
stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make
sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring.
4. Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if
necessary.
5. Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination
and repair any leaks. Install a new accessory drive
belt tensioner as necessary.
6. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to testing the tensioner
dynamically. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner.
Belt Tensioner-Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine
running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner
should move (respond) when the air
conditioning clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory
drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without air conditioning clutch cycling or engine
acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can
cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a
new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory
drive belt tensioner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1759
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1765
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
CABIN AIR FILTER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3.
Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1769
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1770
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
CABIN AIR FILTER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3.
Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
DUST SEPARATOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- The evaporative emissions system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can
cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the 2 fuel vapor hoses from the dust separator. 4. Slide the dust separator out of the
retainer clip in the emission canister bracket. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1777
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and
Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C
Performance Loss
Coolant Line/Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
TSB 04-24-13
12/13/04
ENGINE OVERHEATING AND/OR LOSS OF A/C PERFORMANCE
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape vehicles built between 01/02/04 and 05/22/04 may exhibit an
overheating condition. This condition may be due to a loss of engine coolant from the degas hose.
The degas hose may come into contact with the front end accessory drive (FEAD) belt, damaging
the hose.
The vehicle may also exhibit a loss of A/C performance. In some cases, the customer may only
notice the loss of A/C. The PCM will disable the A/C compressor if the engine temperature reaches
230° F (110° C) or higher (ECT PID). Ensure the cooling system is full and operating properly
before replacing any A/C or climate control components.
ACTION
Replace the degas hose with revised longer hose. Route the revised hose around and below the
radiator drain petcock boss (Figures 1 and 2). Be sure to fasten the standoff clip included with the
hose to the drain petcock boss.
The FEAD belt should also be replaced if there is any indication the belt has been contaminated
with engine coolant. Prior to installing the new belt be sure to clean all pulleys with soap and water.
If the pulley cleaning operation is not performed the new belt may become noisy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C
Performance Loss > Page 1791
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042413A Replace Degas Hose 0.7 Hr.
(Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System)
042413B Replace Degas Hose And 0.9 Hr.
Front End Accessory Drive Belt (Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System And Clean
Pulleys)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8C633 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine
Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
Coolant Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C
Performance Loss
TSB 04-24-13
12/13/04
ENGINE OVERHEATING AND/OR LOSS OF A/C PERFORMANCE
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape vehicles built between 01/02/04 and 05/22/04 may exhibit an
overheating condition. This condition may be due to a loss of engine coolant from the degas hose.
The degas hose may come into contact with the front end accessory drive (FEAD) belt, damaging
the hose.
The vehicle may also exhibit a loss of A/C performance. In some cases, the customer may only
notice the loss of A/C. The PCM will disable the A/C compressor if the engine temperature reaches
230° F (110° C) or higher (ECT PID). Ensure the cooling system is full and operating properly
before replacing any A/C or climate control components.
ACTION
Replace the degas hose with revised longer hose. Route the revised hose around and below the
radiator drain petcock boss (Figures 1 and 2). Be sure to fasten the standoff clip included with the
hose to the drain petcock boss.
The FEAD belt should also be replaced if there is any indication the belt has been contaminated
with engine coolant. Prior to installing the new belt be sure to clean all pulleys with soap and water.
If the pulley cleaning operation is not performed the new belt may become noisy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine
Overheat/A/C Performance Loss > Page 1797
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042413A Replace Degas Hose 0.7 Hr.
(Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System)
042413B Replace Degas Hose And 0.9 Hr.
Front End Accessory Drive Belt (Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System And Clean
Pulleys)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8C633 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 1806
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 1807
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
1813
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
1814
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 1815
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
HEATER HOSE
Heater Hose To Heater Core Connections
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 1816
Heater Hose To Block Connections
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 1817
Heater Hose To Oil Cooler Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. If removing
the heater core hoses, remove the heater hose tie. 4. Release the clamps and remove the
necessary heater hose(s). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR TO COMPRESSOR LINE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1822
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH splash shield. 4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater
electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 6. Remove the suction
accumulator to compressor line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line from the A/C compressor. 8. Remove the
2 suction accumulator to compressor line bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line spring lock coupling.
10. Remove the suction accumulator to compressor line.
11. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1823
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
Compressor Connection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1824
Condenser Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the RH splash shield. 5. If equipped,
disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 6. Remove the compressor to condenser
discharge line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the compressor to condenser discharge line from the compressor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
8. Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut and disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting
compressor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor to condenser discharge line.
10. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1825
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
COMPRESSOR MANIFOLD AND TUBE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the A/C refrigerant. 3. Remove
the 2 compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the spring lock coupling from the suction accumulator. 5. Remove the front bumper
cover. 6. Disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting.
- Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the RH splash shield. 8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater. 9. Disconnect
the A/C compressor electrical connector.
10. Remove the manifold and tube assembly bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1826
11. Remove the A/C compressor manifold and tube assembly.
- Remove and discard the O-rings.
12. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1827
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Evaporator Line
CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch
electrical connector. 5. Remove the condenser to evaporator line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the evaporator core spring lock coupling. 7. Remove the condenser to evaporator
line peanut fitting nut and disconnect the line.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser to evaporator line.
9. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1828
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR TO COMPRESSOR LINE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1829
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH splash shield. 4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater
electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 6. Remove the suction
accumulator to compressor line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line from the A/C compressor. 8. Remove the
2 suction accumulator to compressor line bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line spring lock coupling.
10. Remove the suction accumulator to compressor line.
11. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1830
Compressor Connection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1831
Condenser Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the RH splash shield. 5. If equipped,
disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 6. Remove the compressor to condenser
discharge line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the compressor to condenser discharge line from the compressor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
8. Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut and disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting
compressor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor to condenser discharge line.
10. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
COMPRESSOR MANIFOLD AND TUBE ASSEMBLY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1832
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the A/C refrigerant. 3. Remove
the 2 compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the spring lock coupling from the suction accumulator. 5. Remove the front bumper
cover. 6. Disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting.
- Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the RH splash shield. 8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater. 9. Disconnect
the A/C compressor electrical connector.
10. Remove the manifold and tube assembly bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
11. Remove the A/C compressor manifold and tube assembly.
- Remove and discard the O-rings.
12. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1833
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Condenser to Evaporator Line
CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch
electrical connector. 5. Remove the condenser to evaporator line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the evaporator core spring lock coupling. 7. Remove the condenser to evaporator
line peanut fitting nut and disconnect the line.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser to evaporator line.
9. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1834
- Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Inlet Line
EVAPORATOR INLET LINE
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Loosen the nuts and disconnect the evaporator inlet line fittings.
- Remove and discard the O-rings.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
4. NOTE: New O-ring seals, lubricated in clean mineral oil, must be installed before reconnecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Charge and leak test the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Inlet Line - Orifice Tube
EVAPORATOR INLET LINE - ORIFICE TUBE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 1835
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Loosen the nut and disconnect the evaporator inlet line fitting.
- Remove and discard the O-ring.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the orifice evaporator inlet line spring lock coupling and remove the orifice
evaporator inlet line.
4. NOTE: New O-ring seals, lubricated in clean mineral oil, must be installed before reconnecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Charge and leak test the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-17-3 > Sep > 06 > Steering - Front End Rattle
Noise Turning On Bumps
Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Steering - Front End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps
TSB 06-17-3
09/04/06
STEERING NOISE - CLUNK/RATTLE
FORD: 2005-2007 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-25-9 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some 2005-2007 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a single or multiple clunk/rattle
noise from the front end. This noise typically occurs with the front wheels turned while hitting a
bump such as when turning into a driveway. It is usually more noticeable with hot engine and
ambient air temperatures, and may easily be mistaken for loose sheet metal or a loose
suspension/underhood component. The cause of this noise is an audible hydraulic pressure spike
in the power steering system.
ACTION Install a new power steering return line which contains an internal orifice to reduce the
pressure spike.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the power steering reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Disconnect the power steering return hose from the reservoir by loosening the constant tension
clamp.
4. Remove and discard the lower return line hose clamp, then remove the hose.
5. Install the new return line with the crimped band away from the reservoir. The pre-installed
constant tension clamp will retain the reservoir end of the hose.
6. Install and tighten the screw clamp on the lower end of the hose.
7. Refill the system with Mercon® or Mercon(R)-V fluid and purge the air as described in Section
211-00 of the Workshop Manual.
NOTE
DO NOT FILL WITH TYPE-F FLUID.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
061703A 2005-2007 Escape/Mariner: 0.5 Hr.
Replace Power Steering Return Line (Do Not Use With 3713AE)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-17-3 > Sep > 06 > Steering - Front End Rattle
Noise Turning On Bumps > Page 1844
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-17-3 > Sep > 06 > Steering - Front
End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps
Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Front End Rattle Noise
Turning On Bumps
TSB 06-17-3
09/04/06
STEERING NOISE - CLUNK/RATTLE
FORD: 2005-2007 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-25-9 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some 2005-2007 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a single or multiple clunk/rattle
noise from the front end. This noise typically occurs with the front wheels turned while hitting a
bump such as when turning into a driveway. It is usually more noticeable with hot engine and
ambient air temperatures, and may easily be mistaken for loose sheet metal or a loose
suspension/underhood component. The cause of this noise is an audible hydraulic pressure spike
in the power steering system.
ACTION Install a new power steering return line which contains an internal orifice to reduce the
pressure spike.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the power steering reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Disconnect the power steering return hose from the reservoir by loosening the constant tension
clamp.
4. Remove and discard the lower return line hose clamp, then remove the hose.
5. Install the new return line with the crimped band away from the reservoir. The pre-installed
constant tension clamp will retain the reservoir end of the hose.
6. Install and tighten the screw clamp on the lower end of the hose.
7. Refill the system with Mercon® or Mercon(R)-V fluid and purge the air as described in Section
211-00 of the Workshop Manual.
NOTE
DO NOT FILL WITH TYPE-F FLUID.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
061703A 2005-2007 Escape/Mariner: 0.5 Hr.
Replace Power Steering Return Line (Do Not Use With 3713AE)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-17-3 > Sep > 06 > Steering - Front
End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps > Page 1850
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 1853
Removal and Installation All vehicles
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
NOTE: New O-rings must be installed any time the lines are disconnected from the steering gear.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the power steering fluid into a
suitable drain pan. 3. Remove the power steering pressure line fitting nut.
^ To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.) (2.3L engine).
^ To install, tighten to 73 Nm (54 ft. lbs.) [3.0L (4V) engine].
4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket nut.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) (2.3L engine).
^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.) [3.0L (4V) engine].
3.0L (4V) only
5. Disconnect the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the power steering line clamp plate bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. NOTE: The power steering pressure and return lines are of different diameters and the O-rings
are not interchangeable.
Rotate the clamp plate and remove the power steering pump-to-steering gear pressure line. ^
Install a new high pressure line O-ring.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Fill the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 1854
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 1855
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
NOTE: New O-rings must be installed any time the lines are disconnected from the steering gear.
1. Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. 2. Release the clamp and disconnect the
steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose from the power steering cooler. 3. Remove the steering
gear-to-fluid cooler return hose bracket-to-steering gear stud.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
4. Remove the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose bracket-to-subframe bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Remove the power steering line clamp plate bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
6. NOTE: The power steering pressure and return lines are of different diameters and the O-rings
are not interchangeable.
Rotate the clamp plate and remove the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose. ^
Install a new return hose O-ring seal.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Fill the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type ..................................................................................................... Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Replacement
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement
Brake Fluid Replacement
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Do not allow the master cylinder brake fluid to overflow from the reservoir. Brake fluid
may damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: Bleeding the HCU is required only when removing or installing the HCU, master cylinder, or
opening the lines to the HCU.
NOTE: Make sure that the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark.
1. NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the service bleed function. Access the service bleed function on the diagnostic tool and
follow the directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Replacement > Page 1862
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the reservoir cap. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical
connector. 3. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
4. If equipped with a manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Replacement > Page 1863
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
5. Remove the reservoir.
^ Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir.
^ Pull the reservoir upwards.
6. NOTE: Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid.
Remove and discard the 2 seals.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Clutch Fluid Type .................................................................................................... Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Engine Coolant Capacity .....................................................................................................................
....................................................... 5.3 qts. (5.0L)
Automatic Transmission
Engine Coolant Capacity .....................................................................................................................
....................................................... 6.3 qts. (6.0L)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1871
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant Type ......................................................................................................... Motorcraft
Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Capacity ........................................................................................................
........................................................ 2.4 qts. (2.3L) *
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 1876
Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Type
..................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 75W-90
API GL-4 Gear Oil
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 1881
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 1882
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity.......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................9.5L (10 quarts)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1885
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1886
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check Fluid Level and Condition
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. If your vehicle has been operated for
an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a trailer, the
vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking.
The transmission fluid level should be checked at normal operating temperatures, 66°C - 77°C
(150°F - 170°F), on a level surface. You can check the fluid level without driving if the outside
temperature is above 10°C (50°F). When the vehicle has not been driven, and the outside
temperature is above 10°C (50°F), the fluid level should be between the holes on the indicator. If
the transmission fluid is to be checked when the fluid is at room temperature, the fluid level
indicator could indicate that fluid should be added if the indicator is misread. If fluid is added at this
time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches operating temperature of 66°C 77°C (150°F - 170°F).
Fluid Level Check
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 2. With your foot on the brake,
start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time
for each gear to
engage.
3. Place the range selector in PARK (P) and leave the engine running. 4. Remove the fluid level
indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 5. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is
fully seated in the filler tube.
6. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal and
room temperature.
High Fluid Level
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift or engagement concerns and possible damage. High fluid levels
can be caused by an overheating condition. A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to
become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic
control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission malfunction
and/or damage. If an overfill reading is indicated drain and refill the transmission.
Low Fluid Level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid level indicator, or
not on the fluid level indicator and the outside temperatures are above 10°C (50°F). A low fluid
level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage. This
could also indicate a leak in one of the transmission seals or gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1887
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid than specified could result in
transmission malfunction and/or damage. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift
or engagement concerns and possible damage.
Before adding fluid be sure that the correct type is being used. The type of fluid that should be used
is found on the fluid level indicator, on the handle, in the owner's manual, and in the Specifications.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube. Do not
overfill the fluid.
Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the fluid level. 2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances
should be dark reddish, not brown or black. 3. Hold the fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue
and allow the fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain. 4. If evidence of solid
material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection. 5. If the stain
is a foamy pink color, this may indicate coolant in the transmission. The engine cooling system
should also be inspected at this time. 6. If fluid contamination or transmission failure is confirmed
by the sediment in the bottom of the transmission fluid pan, the transmission must be
disassembled and completely cleaned. This includes the torque converter and cooler lines.
7. Carry out diagnostic checks and adjustments.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill-Without Torque Converter Drain Plug
Material
Draining
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present the transaxle will need
to be overhauled.
Remove the transaxle drain plug.
Refill
1. Using a small amount of pipe sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
2. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 3. Start the engine and run through all
the gears and check fluid level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 1890
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
1. CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or
water-based cleaners.
NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting
them to the cleaner.
Backflush any contaminates out of the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure
line to number 1 and the return line to number 2. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the
hoses and repeat the flushing.
2. Backflush any contaminants out of the radiator in-tank cooler by connecting the flushing machine
pressure line to number 2 and the return line to
number 3. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 1891
3. NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned
or flushed. A new valve should be installed as
part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a remanufactured transaxle.
Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.4 Quarts Note: Service refill capacity is determined by
filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1896
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................. SAE 75W-90 API GL-4 Gear Oil
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1897
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
Material
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug. ^
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1898
5. Remove the transaxle fill plug. 6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level
inspection plug hole.
7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug.
Install the transaxle fill plug. ^
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug. ^
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 4.25L (4.5 Qt)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1903
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
U.S ....................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Motor Oil Canada
....................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 1908
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 1909
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Type
................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft MERCON(R) ATF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 907 g (2 lb.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1914
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... R134a
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK DETECTION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Fluorescent Dye Detection
NOTE: Vehicles are manufactured with R-134a fluorescent dye installed in the refrigerant system
from the factory. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
fluorescent dye under a UV lamp. Since more than 1 leak can exist, make sure to inspect each
component, line, and fitting in the refrigerant system for a leak.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 1917
1. Check for leaks using an approved UV lamp.
- Inspect all the components, lines, and fittings of the refrigerant system.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant. 3. Repair the refrigerant system leak(s). 4. Evacuate
and charge the refrigerant system. 5. After the leak(s) is/are repaired, remove any traces of
fluorescent dye with a general purpose oil solvent.
6. Verify the repair by running the vehicle for a short period of time and rechecking the area of the
leak with an approved UV lamp.
Fluorescent Dye Injection - Using an A/C Center and Dye Injector
NOTE:
- Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the factory to assist in
refrigerant system leak diagnosis using an approved ultraviolet blacklight. It is not necessary to add
additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of
refrigerant has been removed from the system. New suction accumulators and receiver/driers are
shipped with a fluorescent dye wafer included in the desiccant bag which will dissolve after
approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add dye after flushing
or filtering the refrigerant system because a new suction accumulator or receiver/drier is installed
as part of the flushing or filtering procedure. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added
if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting
separation, hose rupture or other damage.
- Before using the R-134a fluorescent dye injector for the first time, refer to the manufacturer
instructions on evacuation of any non-condensable gasses from the hoses.
- Only connect the R-134a fluorescent dye injector to a manifold and gauge set or R-134a
refrigerant center when fluorescent dye is to be injected. The R-134a fluorescent dye injector has a
one-way check valve that will prevent refrigerant system recovery and evacuation.
- The refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with
the engine off.
1. Connect an R-134a A/C center or a manifold and gauge set to the refrigerant system port valves.
2. Verify that the valves on the fluorescent dye injector are closed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 1918
3. Fill the fluorescent dye injector reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 oz) of fluorescent dye. 4. Install the
fluorescent dye injector between the low-pressure gauge port valve and the R-134a refrigerant
center or manifold gauge set. 5. Open all the valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the
refrigerant system. 6. When the fluorescent dye injection is complete, close all the valves. 7.
Recover the refrigerant from the R-134a fluorescent dye injector. 8. Remove the fluorescent dye
injector from the low-pressure gauge port valve and the R-134a A/C center or manifold gauge set.
Fluorescent Dye Injection - Using a Dye Injector Loop Kit
NOTE:
- Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the factory to assist in
refrigerant system leak diagnosis using an approved ultraviolet blacklight. It is not necessary to add
additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of
refrigerant has been removed from the system. New suction accumulators and receiver/driers are
shipped with a fluorescent dye wafer included in the desiccant bag which will dissolve after
approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add dye after flushing
or filtering the refrigerant system because a new suction accumulator or receiver/drier is installed
as part of the flushing or filtering procedure. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added
if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting
separation, hose rupture or other damage.
- Before using the R-134a fluorescent dye injector for the first time, refer to the equipment
manufacturer instructions on evacuation of non-condensable gasses from the hoses.
- The refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F).
1. Verify that the valves on the injector loop kit are closed.
2. Fill the injector loop kit reservoir with 7 ml (0.24 oz) of fluorescent dye. 3. Install the injector loop
kit between the high-pressure and low-pressure gauge port valves.
4. CAUTION: Make sure all tools and hoses are clear of the engine cooling fan and drive belt
before starting the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 1919
Start the engine.
5. Open the high-pressure valve.
6. Open the injector loop kit valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system.
7. Close the high-pressure valve to allow the pressure inside the injector loop kit to equalize with
the suction side of the refrigerant system.
8. NOTE: Close the valves on the injector loop kit while the A/C compressor is operating.
Close the valves on the injector loop kit.
9. NOTE: Leave all the valves on the special tool closed when not in use.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 1920
Disconnect the high-pressure and low-pressure valves and remove the injector loop kit from the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 1921
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION
H10PM Refrigerant Leak Detector With Battery
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. Using a fan to ventilate the area to be
tested before proceeding with the leak detection procedure is helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air, but the fan should be turned off during the actual testing.
1. NOTE: The system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
Leak test the refrigerant system using the refrigerant leak detector. Follow the instructions included
with the leak detector for handling and operation techniques.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant.
- Repair the system.
- Test the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM RECOVERY, EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 1924
1. Prior to recovery, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
center to the low- and high-pressure gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided
by the
equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the refrigerant has been recovered, switch the power supply
OFF. 5. Allow the system to set for approximately 2 minutes and observe the system vacuum
reading. If the vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery
equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 1925
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM RECOVERY, EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using an R-134a Refrigerant Center
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 1926
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant center to the low pressure and high pressure gauge port valves
following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as
possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn off the vacuum pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the
system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5
minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using an R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Connect the R-134a manifold gauge set to the low-side and high-side gauge port valves. 2.
Connect the center (yellow) hose from the manifold gauge set to the suction port on the vacuum
pump. 3. Open all valves on the R-134a manifold gauge set and both gauge port valves. 4. Turn on
the vacuum pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa
(29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the manifold gauge set (not the gauge port valves)
and turn off the vacuum pump. 6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for five minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using an R-134a Refrigerant Center
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 2. Connect an R-134a
A/C center to the low-side and high-side gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment
manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 2. Assemble the
R-134a manifold gauge set, automatic refrigerant charging meter and R-134a supply tank following
the automatic refrigerant
charging meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the automatic refrigerant charging meter operating
instructions. 4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the
engine, select A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge to
complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 1927
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Identification Testing
REFRIGERANT IDENTIFICATION TESTING
Refrigerant Identifier With Air-Radicator
Special Tool(s)
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: An A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used to identify gas samples taken directly from the
refrigeration system or storage containers prior
to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant identifier to obtain the sample for testing.
2. The diagnostic tool will display 1 of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS light emitting diode
(LED) will light. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons, and air will be
displayed on the digital display.
- If the refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an
alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12,
R-22, and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If the hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
Hydrocarbon High be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the user of
potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, and hydrocarbons will also be
displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The diagnostic tool eliminates the effect of
air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is not considered a contaminant,
although air can affect A/C system performance. When the diagnostic tool has determined that a
refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and the air concentration levels are
2% or greater by weight, the diagnostic tool will prompt the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 1928
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT HANDLING
CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the air
conditioning system flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C repair facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this repair.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Flush the air conditioning
system. 4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil Capacity ......................................................................................................................
........................................................... 266 ml. (9 oz.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1933
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Oil Type ........................................................................................................................
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R134a Systems)
* Meeting Ford Specification WSH-M1C231-B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1934
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil
charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1935
Part 2
1. Refer to the chart for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
Refrigerant Oil Adding for New A/C Compressor Installation
NOTE: A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 full rotations clockwise while collecting the
refrigerant oil in a clean measuring cup.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), add
the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 ounces), add
the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces), add 85 ml
(3 ounces) plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
Refrigerant Oil Adding for New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Installation
1. Drill a half-inch hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain the oil into
a clean measuring cup. 2. Add the quantity of oil drained, plus the amount collected during
refrigerant recovery and 60 ml (2 ounces).
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct
adapters to match the amount of PAG oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1936
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 5. Install the dye/lubricant
injector between the low-side gauge port valve and the refrigerant station or manifold gauge set. 6.
Open all the valves and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding,
Components
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding, Components
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Material
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU, master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2
diagnostic tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding,
Components > Page 1941
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Manual Bleed
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected or a new component is
installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding
of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, to the
RH front wheel, and ending with the LH front
wheel.
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end in a container
partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then
hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until the fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the bleeder screw to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
8. Continue bleeding the brake hydraulic system at each wheel. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding,
Components > Page 1942
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Gravity Bleed
Gravity Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected or a new component is
installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding
of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RR wheel, to the LR wheel, to the RF wheel,
and ending with the LF wheel. 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and
submerge the free end in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Loosen the bleeder
screw and leave it open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 5. Tighten the bleeder screw to 16
Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
6. Continue bleeding the brake hydraulic system at each wheel. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1947
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1948
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1949
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1950
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1951
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1952
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1953
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1954
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1955
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1956
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1957
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1963
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1964
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1968
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1969
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1970
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Smart Junction Box > Page 1975
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Smart Junction Box > Page 1976
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Smart Junction Box > Page 1977
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 1980
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 1981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 1982
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 1983
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 1984
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 1985
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1988
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1989
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1990
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1995
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1996
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box > Page 1997
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2000
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2001
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2002
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2003
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2004
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2005
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 2008
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 2009
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 2010
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an OBD
emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs an OBD diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) will be set.
^ The MW is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the ISO standard engine symbol.
^ The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
^ For applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit the PCM will illuminate the MIL until a
profile ignition pickup (PIP) signal is detected. For 2OO5 the following vehicles use a hard wire
circuit: Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis Explorer Sport Trac and Ranger.
^ The MIL will remain illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if:
^ an emission related concern and DTC exists.
^ no PIP signal is detected (applications with a dedicated hard-wire MIL circuit). The PIP signal is
generated in the PCM using the crankshafi position (CKP) sensor. For these applications the MIL
can be helpful in diagnosing a no start.
^ the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
^ the PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (KLOS).
^ the MIL circuit is shorted to ground (applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit).
^ The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if:
^ an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present.
^ the MIL circuit is open (applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit).
^ To turn off the MIL afier a repair a reset command from the diagnostic tool must be sent or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
^ For all MIL concerns go to Symptom Charts.
^ If the MIL flashes at a steady rate a severe misfire condition may exist.
^ If the MIL flashes erratically the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON/ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5% or less. When oil life left is between 5% and 0%,
the ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed. When oil life left reaches 0%, the
ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW message will be displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change [approximately 5,000 miles (8,000
km) or 12 months] perform the following.
1. Press the SET control to access the system check function.
2. Press and release the SET control to display "OIL CHNG XXX% HOLD SET NEW".
3. Press and hold the SET control for 2 seconds to display "OIL CHANGE SET TO 100%".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING:
- Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause
the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2022
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning the
hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Description
and Operation
Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation
Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Tires: Customer Interest Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 2034
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 2035
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 2041
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 2042
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 2048
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 2054
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Wheels: Customer Interest Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 2063
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 2064
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page
2070
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page
2071
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front
> Page 2076
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2077
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and the brake pads are retracted sufficiently to allow
movement of the wheel and tire assembly.
Grasp the tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the
weight of the tire from the front wheel bearings. If movement exists, a new bearing must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2080
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2081
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2082
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2083
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
4WD vehicles
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) wheel
speed sensor ring.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2084
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle.
4WD vehicles
8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2085
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel
bearing snap ring.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
FWD vehicles
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
4WD vehicles
6. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut
Tighten to .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
5 Wheel nuts.
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to ............................................................................
.............................................................................................................. 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the
wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2095
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel studs from the
wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle
- Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
TSB 06-7-1
04/17/06
NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS
FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape,
Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac
LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart.
ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral
tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make
the vehicle neutral tow capable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle
- Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 2100
ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable.
Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions
are included with the kit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle
- Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 2101
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING:
- Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause
the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2105
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning the
hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2112
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of
engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle, and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM determines the phase angle based on air
flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the
PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS
systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system
applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The
elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake
valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) System
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth
equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8
engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The
extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A
crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to
determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed
throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part
and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle
position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired
and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2113
will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related
DTC will also be set when the fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow
of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 2117
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test-Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. For additional information, refer to the
Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test-Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 2118
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is within 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshafts and bearing caps.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts one at a time until finger tight. Stage 2: Tighten to .
..............................................................................................................................................................
....... 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.). Stage 3: Tighten to ......................................................................................
.................................................................................. 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft sprocket bolt ........................................................................................................................
..................................................... 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures
Camshaft: Service and Repair General Procedures
Camshaft Journal Diameter
1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions.
^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary.
Camshaft End Play-OHC Engines
Special Tool(s)
1. Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft end play. 2. Position the
camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the indicator.
4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play.
^ If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install new camshaft and recheck end play.
^ If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head.
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2130
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable
outside the contact area.
^ If excessive pitting or damage is present, install new components as necessary.
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Special Tool(s)
1. Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift.
^ Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading
to figure the camshaft lobe lift.
Camshaft Runout
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2131
1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout.
Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure the camshaft runout. ^
Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading.
^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2132
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshafts
Camshafts
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Check the valve clearance prior to
removal of the camshafts. 3. Remove the timing chain and sprockets.
4. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for assembly reference.
5. CAUTION: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the
camshafts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2133
Remove the camshafts from the engine. ^
Loosen the camshaft bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown, one turn at a time. Repeat until all
the tension is released.
^ Remove the camshaft bearing caps.
^ Remove the camshafts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install the camshafts with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the
Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed without
rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position as noted
in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or installing
the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and pistons.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil.
Install the camshafts, bearing caps and special tool. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3
stages: ^
Stage 1: Tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts one turn at a time until finger tight.
^ Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.).
^ Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the timing chain and sprockets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair General Procedures
Valve Tappet Inspection
1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. 2. Replace components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2138
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Tappets
Valve Tappets
Material
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the camshafts.
3. CAUTION: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their
original positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2142
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of
engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle, and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM determines the phase angle based on air
flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the
PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS
systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system
applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The
elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake
valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) System
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth
equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8
engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The
extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A
crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to
determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed
throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part
and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle
position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired
and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2143
will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related
DTC will also be set when the fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow
of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Bearing clearance ................................................................................................................................
................................ 0.027-0.052 (0.001-0.002 in.) Bearing thickness
.........................................................................................................................................................
1.496-1.520 mm (0.058-0.059 in.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Crank bore diameter
.................................................................................................................................................
53.025-53.045 mm (2.087-2.088 in.) Pin bore diameter
.....................................................................................................................................................
20.965-20.985 mm (0.825-0.826 in.) Length (center-to-center) ..........................................................
........................................................................................................ 154.8 mm (6.094 in.) Side
clearance .............................................................................................................................................
..................... 1.95-3.05 mm (0.076-0.120 in.) Axial clearance ............................................................
.................................................................................................... 0.14-0.36 mm (0.005-0.014 in.)
Connecting rod journal diameter
.............................................................................................................................. 49.980-50.000 mm
(1.967-1.968 in.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Crankshaft
Main bearing journal diameter
................................................................................................................................. 51.980-52.000
min (2.046-2.047 in.) Main bearing clearance
............................................................................................................................................
0.019-0.035 mm (0.0007-0.0013 in.) Main bearing bore diameter
..................................................................................................................................... 57.020-57.038
min (2.244-2.245 in.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service Precautions
Crankshaft: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service Precautions
TSB 06-21-4
10/30/06
2.3L/2.0L DURATEC - NO START/POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE - INSTALL SPECIAL SERVICE
TOOLS PRIOR TO REMOVING CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BOLT
FORD: 2003-2007 Focus 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2007 Ranger 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2006-2007 Milan 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-16-6 to include symptoms, labor operations, and parts.
ISSUE Some 2001-2007 MY vehicles equipped with a 2.0L or 2.3L Duratec Engine may exhibit no
start, loss of engine timing or scraping noise at crankshaft pulley at front of engine. These engines,
(excludes 2.0L SPI and Zetec engines) may experience engine damage if the crankshaft pulley bolt
is loosened during service WITHOUT FIRST INSTALLING THE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS PER
THE WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURE. The crankshaft pulley bolt also retains the crankshaft
cam drive sprocket which is NOT keyed to the crankshaft, so valve timing may shift if the
crankshaft pulley bolt is loosened. If this occurs, the pistons may contact and damage the valves.
ACTION Before ANY repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshafl pulley bolt, engine
valve timing MUST be locked by the Special Service Tools identified in the online Workshop
Manual, Section 303-01 (In-Vehicle Repair: Crankshaft Pulley). Do not attempt to start the engine
without verifying engine cam timing.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE EXACTLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS ENGINE
DAMAGE.
SERVICE TOOLS REQUIRED ARE:
1. Crankshaft Timing Peg ESST Number 303-507 is 2-1/8" (54 mm).
2. Camshaft Alignment Plate ESST Number 303-465.
3. Holding Fixture ESST Number 205-126.
4. Adaptor 205-072-02.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service Precautions > Page 2158
Inspect the crankshaft pulley for rubber protruding from the pulley (Figure 1), loose pulse wheel, or
bent tabs on pulse wheel touching engine front cover. Replace crankshafl pulley with service kit for
respective vehicle line.
NOTE
ESCAPE! MARINER HYBRID 2.3L ATK HEV ENGINE DOES REQUIRE THE SERVICE TOOLS
BUT NO SERVICE KIT WAS RELEASED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062104A 2003-2007 Focus 2.3L 1.5 Hrs.
PZEV 2005-2007 Focus 2.0L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve
Timing Using Special Tools (Do Not Use With 6312A)
062104A 2006-2007 Fusion/Milan 1.6 Hrs.
2.3L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve Timing Using Special Tools
(Do Not Use With 6312A)
062104A 2005-2007 Escape/Mariner 1.6 Hrs.
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service Precautions > Page 2159
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid 2.3L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve
Timing Using Special Tools (Do Not Use With 6312A)
062104A Operation A: 2001-2007 2.0 Hrs.
Ranger 2.3L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve Timing Using
Special Tools (Do Not Use With 6312A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6312 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2160
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft
Main bearing journal diameter
................................................................................................................................. 51.980-52.000
min (2.046-2.047 in.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2161
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
Crankshaft End Play
Special Tool(s)
1. Measure the crankshaft end play. Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure
crankshaft end play. 2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block. 3. Zero the
indicator.
4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play.
^ If crankshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new crankshaft thrust washer or crankshaft
thrust main bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Block Heater: Specifications
Block heater (2.3L) ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Block heater (3.0L) ...........................................
........................................................................................................................................ 21 Nm (15 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2165
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Drain the cooling system.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or
hot components, or damage to the wiring can
occur.
Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
5. Remove the block heater.
^ To install, tighten to 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Expansion/Freeze Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Expansion/Freeze Plug: Service and Repair
Cylinder Block Core Plug Replacement
Special Tool(s)
Material
1. Use a slide hammer or tools suitable to remove the cylinder block core plug. 2. Inspect the
cylinder block plug bore for any damage that would interfere with the correct sealing of the plug. If
the cylinder block plug bore is
damaged, bore for the next oversize plug.
3. NOTE: Oversize plugs are identified by the OS stamped in the flat located on the cup side of the
plug. Coat the cylinder block core plug and bore
lightly with Threadlock - 262 and install the cylinder block core plug.
Cup-Type
1. CAUTION: Use care during this procedure so as not to disturb or distort the cup sealing surface.
CAUTION: When installed, the flanged edge must be below the chamfered edge of the bore to
effectively seal the bore.
Use a tool suitable to seat the cup-type cylinder block core plug.
Expansion-Type
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Expansion/Freeze Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2169
1. CAUTION: Do not contact the crown when installing an expansion-type cylinder block core plug.
This could expand the plug before seating and
result in leakage.
Use tool suitable to seat the expansion-type cylinder block core plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service
Precautions
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt
Service Precautions
TSB 06-21-4
10/30/06
2.3L/2.0L DURATEC - NO START/POSSIBLE ENGINE DAMAGE - INSTALL SPECIAL SERVICE
TOOLS PRIOR TO REMOVING CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BOLT
FORD: 2003-2007 Focus 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2007 Ranger 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2006-2007 Milan 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-16-6 to include symptoms, labor operations, and parts.
ISSUE Some 2001-2007 MY vehicles equipped with a 2.0L or 2.3L Duratec Engine may exhibit no
start, loss of engine timing or scraping noise at crankshaft pulley at front of engine. These engines,
(excludes 2.0L SPI and Zetec engines) may experience engine damage if the crankshaft pulley bolt
is loosened during service WITHOUT FIRST INSTALLING THE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS PER
THE WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURE. The crankshaft pulley bolt also retains the crankshaft
cam drive sprocket which is NOT keyed to the crankshaft, so valve timing may shift if the
crankshaft pulley bolt is loosened. If this occurs, the pistons may contact and damage the valves.
ACTION Before ANY repair requiring loosening or removal of the crankshafl pulley bolt, engine
valve timing MUST be locked by the Special Service Tools identified in the online Workshop
Manual, Section 303-01 (In-Vehicle Repair: Crankshaft Pulley). Do not attempt to start the engine
without verifying engine cam timing.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE EXACTLY CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS ENGINE
DAMAGE.
SERVICE TOOLS REQUIRED ARE:
1. Crankshaft Timing Peg ESST Number 303-507 is 2-1/8" (54 mm).
2. Camshaft Alignment Plate ESST Number 303-465.
3. Holding Fixture ESST Number 205-126.
4. Adaptor 205-072-02.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service
Precautions > Page 2174
Inspect the crankshaft pulley for rubber protruding from the pulley (Figure 1), loose pulse wheel, or
bent tabs on pulse wheel touching engine front cover. Replace crankshafl pulley with service kit for
respective vehicle line.
NOTE
ESCAPE! MARINER HYBRID 2.3L ATK HEV ENGINE DOES REQUIRE THE SERVICE TOOLS
BUT NO SERVICE KIT WAS RELEASED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062104A 2003-2007 Focus 2.3L 1.5 Hrs.
PZEV 2005-2007 Focus 2.0L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve
Timing Using Special Tools (Do Not Use With 6312A)
062104A 2006-2007 Fusion/Milan 1.6 Hrs.
2.3L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve Timing Using Special Tools
(Do Not Use With 6312A)
062104A 2005-2007 Escape/Mariner 1.6 Hrs.
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Crankshaft - Pulley Bolt Service
Precautions > Page 2175
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid 2.3L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve
Timing Using Special Tools (Do Not Use With 6312A)
062104A Operation A: 2001-2007 2.0 Hrs.
Ranger 2.3L: Replace Crankshaft Pulley, Includes Time To Lock Engine Valve Timing Using
Special Tools (Do Not Use With 6312A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6312 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2176
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Tighten the Crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages:
Stage 1: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
.................................. 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.) . Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees (1/4 turn).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2177
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Diagrams
Lower End Components-Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2178
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2179
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. 3.
Remove the valve cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2180
4. CAUTION: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the normal
direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at TDC. ^
The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
5. CAUTION: The special tool 303-465 is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent
engine rotation can result in engine damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the special tool cannot be installed, rotate the
crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the special tool in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
6. Remove the engine plug bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2181
7. NOTE: The special tool will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning past TDC.
However, the crankshaft can still be rotated in the
counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during the crankshaft
pulley removal and installation.
Install the special tool.
8. Install the special tools.
9. CAUTION: Failure to hold the crankshaft pulley in place while loosening the bolt can result in
damage to the engine.
CAUTION: If the crankshaft sprocket diamond washer comes off with the crankshaft pulley it must
be installed back onto the crankshaft.
Remove the crankshaft pulley. ^
Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
^ Remove the crankshaft pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2182
Installation
1. NOTE: Do not reuse the crankshaft pulley bolt.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil on the seal area before installing.
Install the crankshaft pulley and hand-tighten the bolt.
2. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
NOTE: This step will correctly align the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft.
Install a standard 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt through the crankshaft pulley and
thread it into the front cover. ^
Rotate the pulley as necessary to align the bolt holes.
3. CAUTION: Failure to hold the crankshaft pulley in place while tightening the bolt can cause
damage to the engine front cover.
Using the special tools to hold the crankshaft pulley in place, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2
stages: ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees (1/4 turn).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2183
5. Remove the special tool.
6. Remove the special tool.
7. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the engine 2 complete revolutions.
8. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft until the No. 1 piston is at TDC.
9. Install the special tool.
10. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2184
Using the 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt, check the position of the crankshaft pulley. ^
If it is not possible to install the bolt, correct the engine timing.
11. Using the special tool, check the position of the camshafts.
^ If it is not possible to install the special tool, correct the engine timing.
12. Remove the 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt.
13. Install the engine plug bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
14. Install the accessory drive belt. 15. Install the valve cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Piston
Diameter (1) .........................................................................................................................................
.......................... 87.5-87.51 mm (3.444-3.445 in.) Diameter (2)
.............................................................................................................................................................
87.51-87.52 mm (3.4452-3.4456 in.) Diameter (3) ..............................................................................
................................................................................... 87.52-87.53 min (3.444-3.446 in.)
Piston-to-bore clearance
..........................................................................................................................................
0.025-0.045 min (0.0009-0.0017 in.) Ring groove width - top
...........................................................................................................................................
1.203-1.205 min (0.0473-0.0474 in.) Ring groove width - 2nd
..............................................................................................................................................
1.17-1.19 min (0.0460-0.0468 in.) Ring groove width - oil
............................................................................................................................................
2.501-2.503 min (0.0984-0.0985 in.) Piston skirt coating thickness
................................................................................................................................... 0.008-0.020 min
(0.0003-0.0007 in.)
Piston Pin
Diameter ..............................................................................................................................................
.................... 20.995-21.0 min (0.8266-0.8268 in.) Length ..................................................................
............................................................................................................ 59.6-60.4 min (2.346-2.377
in.) Piston-to-pin clearance
............................................................................................................................................
0.008-0.016 min (0.0003-0.0006 in.) Pin-to-rod clearance ..................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Press fit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Pin: Specifications
Piston Pin
Diameter ..............................................................................................................................................
.................... 20.995-21.0 min (0.8266-0.8268 in.) Length ..................................................................
............................................................................................................ 59.6-60.4 min (2.346-2.377
in.) Piston-to-pin clearance
............................................................................................................................................
0.008-0.016 min (0.0003-0.0006 in.) Pin-to-rod clearance ..................................................................
............................................................................................................................ Press fit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Rings
Ring groove width - top
...........................................................................................................................................
1.203-1.205 min (0.0473-0.0474 in.) Ring groove width - 2nd
..............................................................................................................................................
1.17-1.19 min (0.0460-0.0468 in.) Ring groove width - oil
............................................................................................................................................
2.501-2.503 min (0.0984-0.0985 in.) Width - top .................................................................................
................................................................................ 1.17-1.185 mm (0.0460-0.0466 in.) Width - 2nd
..............................................................................................................................................................
1.197-1.199 mm (0.0471-0.0472 in.) Width - oil ..................................................................................
...................................................................................... 2.38-2.45 mm (0.093-0.096 in.) Ring gap (in
bore) - top
................................................................................................................................................... 0.
16-0.31 mm (0.006-0.012 in.) Ring gap (in bore) - 2nd
...................................................................................................................................................
0.33-0.48 mm (0.012-0.018 in.) Ring gap (in bore) - oil
........................................................................................................................................................
0.2-0.7 mm (0.007-0.027 in.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example,
a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2198
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. CAUTION: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
4. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Cover: Specifications
Valve Cover
Tighten in the sequence shown to
.............................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm
(89 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2205
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
Valve Cover
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2206
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. 3.
Disconnect the crankcase vent hose. 4. Remove the 2 coolant vent tube bracket nuts.
^ Position the vent tube and brackets aside.
5. Disconnect the camshaft position(CMP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the fuel rail
pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the cylinder head
temperature(CHT) sensor electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the vacuum tube from the intake
manifold.
^ Detach the pin-type retainer and position the vacuum tube aside.
9. Remove the 2 accelerator cable bracket nuts.
^ Position the accelerator cable and brackets aside.
10. Remove the power steering tube bracket nut.
^ Position the power steering tube and bracket aside.
11. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the valve cover studs and position the harness
aside. 12. Remove the 14 valve cover retainers, the valve cover and gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2207
2. NOTE: Clean and inspect the gasket. Install a new gasket, if necessary.
Install the valve cover, gasket and retainers. ^
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Position the wiring harness and attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover
studs. 4. Position the power steering tube and bracket.
^ Tighten the nut to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.).
5. Position the accelerator control cable and brackets.
^ Tighten the nuts to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.).
6. Attach the vacuum tube and the pin-type retainer to the intake manifold. 7. Connect the CHT
sensor electrical connector. 8. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical
connector. 9. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.
10. Install the coolant vent tube, brackets and nuts.
^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.).
11. Connect the crankcase vent hose. 12. Install the ignition coil-on-plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide: Service and Repair
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
1. Measure the inner diameter of the valve guides in two directions where indicated. 2. If the valve
guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Seat: Service and Repair
Valve Stem Diameter
1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the
diameter is within specification.
^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary.
Valve Inspection
1. Inspect the following valve areas:
1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring 2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or
scores 3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking 4. The valve margin
for wear
Valve Seat Inspection
Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
CAUTION: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance.
1. Check the valve head and seat.
^ Check valve angles.
^ Check margin width.
^ Be sure margin width is within specification.
2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if
abnormalities are found.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures
Valve Spring: Service and Repair General Procedures
Valve Spring Free Length
1. Measure the free length of each valve spring.
^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary.
Valve Spring Squareness
1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring.
^ Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square.
Install a new valve spring if out of square.
Valve Spring Strength
Special Tool(s)
1. Use a Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the
specified valve spring length.
^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2218
Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Springs
Valve Springs
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the camshafts.
3. CAUTION: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their
original positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets.
4. WARNING: Always wear protective goggles when working with compressed air. This can
prevent injury. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed
air from the cylinder until the valve spring, valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 2219
Unscrew the spark plug on cylinder No. 1 and connect the compressed air supply.
5. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side.
Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring. ^
Using the special tools, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet, using some grease
and a small screwdriver.
^ Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
Installation
1. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet.
Using the special tools, install the valve spring. ^
Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer.
^ Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some grease and a small
screwdriver.
2. NOTE: Do not tighten the spark plug at this time.
Disconnect the compressed air supply and install the spark plug.
3. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders. 4. Tighten the
spark plugs to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 5. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them. 6.
Install the camshafts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Valve: Service and Repair
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. CAUTION: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
4. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Drive Belt: Exploded Views
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD)- Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD)- Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2228
Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams
Accessory Drive
2.3L without A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2229
2.3L with A/C
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accessory Drive
Inspection and Verification
CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be
lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur.
Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Visual Inspection Chart
3. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C
compressor engagement chirp, power steering
cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator whine.
4. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Rim
5. NOTE: Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be considered
acceptable. If damage exceeds the acceptable limit or
any chunks are found to be missing from the ribs, a new belt must be installed.
Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be
considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2232
V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling
NOTE: Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt.
6. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and
appropriate action taken.
1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new
belt is not required. 2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50 percent of the rib height. This is not
considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise
is apparent, install a new belt.
3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability
concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a
new belt.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
7. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this,
install a new accessory drive belt. 8. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2233
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2234
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Drive Belt Noise/Flutter
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or an incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
CAUTION: Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^
wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic transmissions.
^ wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual
transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertial
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
re-occurring drive belt squeal can occur under these conditions: ^
if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
^ if the A/C OFF equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs
after several minutes) exceeds specifications.
^ if any of the accessories are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories
should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition, if not, inspect the accessory.
^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Incorrect Drive Belt Installation
CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and can
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Incorrect Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2235
Correct Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following: ^
Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage, especially the mounting pad surface.
If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out
of position. This will result in chirp and squeal noises.
^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick grab or bind. 1.
With the engine OFF, check routing of the accessory drive belt.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension
on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt in the area of the tensioner.
3. Using the suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, move the
tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full
stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make
sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring.
4. Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if
necessary.
5. Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination
and repair any leaks. Install a new accessory drive
belt tensioner as necessary.
6. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to testing the tensioner
dynamically. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner.
Belt Tensioner-Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine
running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner
should move (respond) when the air
conditioning clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory
drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without air conditioning clutch cycling or engine
acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can
cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a
new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory
drive belt tensioner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2236
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4.
Remove the 2 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Mount: Service and Repair
Engine Mount
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the engine coolant degas bottle.
3. Install the special tool. 4. Remove the engine mount bracket bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2243
5. Use the special tool to raise the engine 25 mm (0 98 inch).
6. Remove the 2 nuts and the engine mount bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Vehicles that are not equipped with A/C have 2 idler pulleys.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4.
Loosen the bolt and remove the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm)
......................................................................................................................................................
29-39 psi (200-268 kPa)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications > Page 2252
Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications
Oil capacity ..........................................................................................................................................
........................................ 4.1 qts. + 0.4 qt. with filter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2253
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil
Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating
temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5.
The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check
the following possible sources:
^ insufficient oil
^ oil leakage
^ worn or damaged oil pump
^ oil pump screen cover and tube
^ excessive main bearing clearance
^ excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
^ chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Oil Level Indicator and Tube
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the oil level indictor. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil level indicator tube.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Remove and discard the oil level indicator tube O-ring seal. 6. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 4.25L (4.5 Qt)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2261
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
U.S ....................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Motor Oil Canada
....................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
Oil Cooler
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the oil drain plug and drain the engine oil.
^ To install, tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove and discard the oil filter.
^ To install, tighten 3⁄4 of a turn after the filter gasket makes contact with the oil filter adapter.
5. Drain the engine cooling system. 6. Disconnect the 2 coolant hoses from the oil cooler. 7.
Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
8. NOTE: Discard the gasket. Remove the 4 bolts and the oil filter adapter.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
9. CAUTION: If metal or aluminum material is present in the oil cooler, mechanical concerns exist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2265
Position the oil filter adapter in a vise and remove the oil cooler bolt and oil cooler. ^
Inspect the oil cooler.
^ To install, tighten to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system. 12. Fill
the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Filter Adapter: Specifications
Oil filter adapter bolts ...........................................................................................................................
.................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2269
Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair
Oil Filter Adapter
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Drain the engine cooling system. 4. Disconnect the 2 coolant hoses from the oil cooler. 5.
Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
6. NOTE: Discard the gasket.
Remove the 4 bolts and the oil filter adapter. ^
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil pan bolts
Install the 2 rear oil pan bolts finger-tight.
Install the remaining oil pan bolts. To install, tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2273
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
Oil Pan
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine oil, then install the drain
plug.
^ To install, tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the oil level indicator and tube. 4. Remove the 4 lower engine front cover bolts. 5.
Remove the 4 oil pan-to-bell housing bolts. 6. Remove the 13 bolts and the oil pan.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces
of sealant.
Clean and inspect all mating surfaces.
2. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 4 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be
removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal
surface cleaner. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 4 minutes, whichever is longer.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of applying the
silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply a 2.5-mm (0.09 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan. Install the oil pan.
Install the 2 rear oil pan bolts finger-tight.
3. Install the 4 oil pan-to-bell housing bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the 4 lower engine front cover bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Install the remaining oil pan bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2274
^ To install, tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
6. Install the oil level indicator and tube. 7. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2278
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2279
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure sender.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Apply pipe sealant with Teflon to the oil pressure sender threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pan.
3. NOTE: Discard the gasket and clean and inspect the gasket mating surfaces.
Remove the 2 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube. ^
To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm)
......................................................................................................................................................
29-39 psi (200-268 kPa)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications > Page 2288
Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications
Oil capacity ..........................................................................................................................................
........................................ 4.1 qts. + 0.4 qt. with filter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2289
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil
Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating
temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5.
The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check
the following possible sources:
^ insufficient oil
^ oil leakage
^ worn or damaged oil pump
^ oil pump screen cover and tube
^ excessive main bearing clearance
^ excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
^ chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Intake manifold bolts ............................................................................................................................
.................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2296
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
Intake Manifold
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2297
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the throttle body. 3. Remove the fuel
rail. 4. Remove the oil level indicator and tube. 5. Disconnect the intake manifold vacuum hose and
pin-type retainer.
^ Position the vacuum hose aside.
6. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum tube
^ Depress the quick release locking ring.
^ Pull the vacuum tube out of the quick release fitting.
7. Disconnect the fuel vapor return hose from the intake manifold. 8. Disconnect the idle air
control(IAC) motor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2298
9. Disconnect the swirl control valve electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector.
^ Detach the electrical connector pin-type retainer.
11. Disconnect the temperature manifold absolute pressure (TMAP) sensor electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector.
^ Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer and position the wiring harness aside.
13. NOTE: There are 3 different size bolts used. Mark the location of the bolts to make sure they
are installed in the correct location.
Remove the 8 bolts and position the intake manifold aside to access the crankcase vent hose
clamp and the EGR tube. ^
To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.).
14. Release the clamp and disconnect the crankcase vent hose. 15. Remove the exhaust gas
recirculation tube.
^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
16. Remove the intake manifold and gaskets. 17. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Inspect and install new intake manifold gaskets if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Diagrams
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Diagrams
Lower End Components-Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2303
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2304
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the flexplate or flywheel.
3. CAUTION: If the oil pan is not removed damage to the rear oil seal retainer joint can occur.
Remove the 17 bolts and the oil pan.
4. Remove the 6 bolts and the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate onto the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2305
2. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate and bolts.
^ To install, tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces
of sealant.
Clean and inspect all the oil pan and cylinder block mating surfaces.
4. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 4 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be
removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal
surface cleaner. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 4 minutes, whichever is longer.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of applying the
silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply a 2.5-mm (0.09 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan. Install the oil pan.
Install the 2 oil pan bolts finger-tight.
5. Install the 4 bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2306
6. Install the remaining oil pan bolts and tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm
(18 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the flexplate or flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification
Cylinder Head Gasket: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket
Identification
TSB 06-18-16
09/18/06
IDENTIFYING THE CORRECT REPLACEMENT HEAD GASKET FOR CERTAIN
REMANUFACTURED ENGINES - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 1999-2006 Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang 2000-2005
Thunderbird 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Crown Victoria, Crown Victoria 2005 Five Hundred,
Freestyle 1997-2005 Expedition 1997-2006 E-Series, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty 1999-2003
Windstar 1999-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Escape, Explorer Sport Trac, Ranger 2004-2005 Freestar, Freestar 2006 F-53
Motorhome Chassis
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2001-2002 Continental 2001-200 Town Car 1998-2004
Navigator, Navigator 2003-2004 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001 Cougar 2001-2005 Sable 2001-2006 Grand Marquis 2003-2006 Marauder 2005
Montego 1997-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
ISSUE On various vehicles when servicing the head gasket on certain Ford remanufactured
engines, it is critical to determine the type of remanufactured engine that is being serviced, in order
to identify the correct replacement gasket.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a SID (for
originally equipment level thickness head gasket) or OVR (for oversized service level thicker head
gasket) remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use this TSB to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a STD or OVR remanufactured engine
when replacing a head gasket. This will ensure that you obtain the proper head gasket (thicker for
OVR-oversized) for the engine you are repairing, as the engine may have milled engine block deck,
milled cylinder head deck, or an over sized bore in the cylinders. This information will be needed
when ordering parts. The parts catalogs already reflect the correct service numbers, as long as this
additional information is available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2311
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2312
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2313
For certain remanufactured engines, the long block assembly will be uniquely identified with a build
date, reman code, service part number, and serial number. This metal tag will be marked with STD,
or with OVR (Figures 1-6).
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Diagrams
Front Crankshaft Seal: Diagrams
Lower End Components-Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2317
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2318
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
2. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the
seal.
Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front oil seal.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2319
1. NOTE: Remove the through-bolt from the special tool.
NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front oil seal.
2. Install the crankshaft pulley.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
Valve Seals
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2323
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the camshafts.
3. CAUTION: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their
original positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets.
4. WARNING: Always wear protective goggles when working with compressed air. This can
prevent injury. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed
air from the cylinder until the valve spring, valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed.
Unscrew the spark plug on cylinder No. 1 and connect the compressed air supply.
5. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side.
Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring. ^
Using the special tools, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet, using some grease
and a small screwdriver.
^ Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
6. Using the special tools, remove and discard the valve seal.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2324
1. Install the valve stem seal installation sleeve.
2. Using the special tool, install the valve seal.
3. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet.
Using the special tools, install the valve spring. ^
Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer.
^ Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some grease and a small
screwdriver.
4. NOTE: Do not tighten the spark plug at this time.
Disconnect the compressed air supply and install the spark plug.
5. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders. 6. Tighten the
spark plugs to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 7. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them. 8.
Install the camshafts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2329
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2330
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure sender.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Apply pipe sealant with Teflon to the oil pressure sender threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft sprocket bolt ........................................................................................................................
..................................................... 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Guide: Specifications
Timing chain guide bolts ......................................................................................................................
................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing chain tensioner bolts ................................................................................................................
................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Engine front cover bolts
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following specifications:
Tighten the 8-mm bolts to
......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Nm (89 inch lbs.). Tighten the 13-mm bolts to
...........................................................................................................................................................
48 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2347
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Special Tool(s)
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2348
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2349
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
CAUTION: The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together by friction,
using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the crankshaft
sprocket is also unfastened if you loosen the pulley. Therefore, the engine must be retimed each
time the damper is removed. Otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt and idler
pulleys. 3. Remove the engine mount. 4. Remove the valve cover.
5. CAUTION: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the normal
direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at TDC. ^
The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
6. CAUTION: The special tool 303-465 is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent
engine rotation can result in engine damage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2350
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the special tool cannot be installed, rotate the
crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the special tool in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
7. Remove the engine plug bolt.
8. NOTE: The special tool will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning past TDC.
However, the crankshaft can still be rotated in the
counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during the crankshaft
pulley removal and installation.
Install the special tool.
9. Install the special tools.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2351
10. CAUTION: Failure to hold the crankshaft pulley in place while loosening the bolt can result in
damage to the engine.
CAUTION: If the crankshaft sprocket diamond washer comes off with the crankshaft pulley it must
be installed back onto the crankshaft.
Remove the crankshaft pulley. ^
Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
^ Remove the crankshaft pulley.
11. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the
seal.
Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front oil seal.
12. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
13. Remove the 2 power steering pump bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2352
14. NOTE: The bolt under the power steering pressure tube will remain with the power steering
pump.
Remove the remaining bolts and position the power steering pump aside.
15. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
16. NOTE: Whenever the CKP sensor is removed, a new one must be installed, using the
alignment jig supplied with the new part.
Remove and discard the CKP sensor.
17. Remove the bolts and the engine front cover.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive disks or other abrasive
means to clean sealing surfaces. These tools cause
scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Clean and inspect the mounting surfaces of the engine and the front cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2353
2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of
applying the silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply a 2.5-mm (0.09 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the cylinder head and oil pan
joint areas. Apply a 2.5-mm (0.09 inch) bead of silicone casket and sealant to the front cover.
3. Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following
specifications:
^ Tighten the 8-mm bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
^ Tighten the 13-mm bolts to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2354
4. NOTE: The bolt under the power steering pressure tube will remain with the power steering
pump.
Position the power steering pump and install the bolts. ^
Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the 2 remaining power steering pump bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
6. Install the coolant pump pulley and bolts.
^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
7. NOTE: Remove the through-bolt from the special tool.
NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front oil seal.
8. NOTE: Do not reuse the crankshaft pulley bolt.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil on the seal area before installing.
Install the crankshaft pulley and hand-tighten the bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2355
9. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
NOTE: This step will correctly align the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft.
Install a standard 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt through the crankshaft pulley and
thread it into the front cover. ^
Rotate the pulley as necessary to align the bolt holes.
10. CAUTION: Failure to hold the crankshaft pulley in place while tightening the bolt can cause
damage to the engine front cover.
Using the special tools to hold the crankshaft pulley in place, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2
stages: ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 100 Nm (74 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees (1/4 turn).
11. Remove the 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt.
12. Remove the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2356
13. Remove the special tool.
14. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the engine 2 complete revolutions.
15. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft until the No. 1 piston is at TDC.
16. Install the special tool.
17. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Using the 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt, check the position of the crankshaft pulley. ^
If it is not possible to install the bolt, correct the engine timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2357
18. Using the special tool, check the position of the camshafts.
^ If it is not possible to install the special tool, correct the engine timing.
19. Install the CKP sensor.
^ Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
20. Adjust the CKP sensor alignment jig.
^ Tighten the bolts to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs.).
21. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
22. Remove the 6-mm (0.23 inch) x 18-mm (0.7 inch) bolt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2358
23. Install the engine plug bolt.
^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
24. Install the accessory drive belt and idler pulleys. 25. Install the engine mount. 26. Install the
valve cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2363
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of
engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle, and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM determines the phase angle based on air
flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the
PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS
systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system
applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The
elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake
valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) System
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth
equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8
engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The
extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A
crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to
determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed
throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part
and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle
position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired
and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2364
will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related
DTC will also be set when the fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow
of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations > Page 2370
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
On some applications there is a pressure test point with a Schrader fitting in the fuel rail that
relieves the fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for repair and diagnostic
procedures. Before repairing or testing the fuel system, read any WARNING, CAUTION, and
HANDLING information. On vehicles not equipped with a Schrader valve, use the Rotunda Fuel
Pressure Test Kit #134-R0087 or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle Speed .....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 680 - 750 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2378
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
............................. 1.25 - 1.35mm (0.049 - 0.053 in.)
Spark Plug Tightening Torque .............................................................................................................
........................................................ 12 Nm (9 lb.ft.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2393
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type
Spark Plug ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... SP448
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.
4. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before
removing the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2396
1. Inspect the spark plugs.
2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. Install the spark plugs.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before
attaching to the spark plugs.
Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2397
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
^ Clean the spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or wont or loose bearings.
^ Correct the oil leak concern.
^ Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture for excessive idling.
^
Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2398
4. Inspect for normal burning.
^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^
Install a new spark plug.
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by a white or light gray spots and with bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^
Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
^ Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2402
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test-Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. For additional information, refer to the
Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test-Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2403
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is within 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example,
a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2407
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. CAUTION: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
4. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component
Information > Specifications
Drive Pulley: Specifications
Coolant pump pulley bolts ...................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PUMP
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the
lower splash shield. 4. Release the 2 clamps and disconnect the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump
heater hoses. 5. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 6. Remove the 2
bolts and the auxiliary coolant flow pump.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with water if needed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair
Bypass Tube-2.3L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the
intake manifold. 4. Disconnect and remove the coolant bypass tube. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Engine Coolant Capacity .....................................................................................................................
....................................................... 5.3 qts. (5.0L)
Automatic Transmission
Engine Coolant Capacity .....................................................................................................................
....................................................... 6.3 qts. (6.0L)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2423
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant Type ......................................................................................................... Motorcraft
Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine
Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
Coolant Line/Hose: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
TSB 04-24-13
12/13/04
ENGINE OVERHEATING AND/OR LOSS OF A/C PERFORMANCE
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape vehicles built between 01/02/04 and 05/22/04 may exhibit an
overheating condition. This condition may be due to a loss of engine coolant from the degas hose.
The degas hose may come into contact with the front end accessory drive (FEAD) belt, damaging
the hose.
The vehicle may also exhibit a loss of A/C performance. In some cases, the customer may only
notice the loss of A/C. The PCM will disable the A/C compressor if the engine temperature reaches
230° F (110° C) or higher (ECT PID). Ensure the cooling system is full and operating properly
before replacing any A/C or climate control components.
ACTION
Replace the degas hose with revised longer hose. Route the revised hose around and below the
radiator drain petcock boss (Figures 1 and 2). Be sure to fasten the standoff clip included with the
hose to the drain petcock boss.
The FEAD belt should also be replaced if there is any indication the belt has been contaminated
with engine coolant. Prior to installing the new belt be sure to clean all pulleys with soap and water.
If the pulley cleaning operation is not performed the new belt may become noisy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine
Overheat/A/C Performance Loss > Page 2432
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042413A Replace Degas Hose 0.7 Hr.
(Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System)
042413B Replace Degas Hose And 0.9 Hr.
Front End Accessory Drive Belt (Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System And Clean
Pulleys)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8C633 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling
System - Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
Coolant Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C
Performance Loss
TSB 04-24-13
12/13/04
ENGINE OVERHEATING AND/OR LOSS OF A/C PERFORMANCE
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape vehicles built between 01/02/04 and 05/22/04 may exhibit an
overheating condition. This condition may be due to a loss of engine coolant from the degas hose.
The degas hose may come into contact with the front end accessory drive (FEAD) belt, damaging
the hose.
The vehicle may also exhibit a loss of A/C performance. In some cases, the customer may only
notice the loss of A/C. The PCM will disable the A/C compressor if the engine temperature reaches
230° F (110° C) or higher (ECT PID). Ensure the cooling system is full and operating properly
before replacing any A/C or climate control components.
ACTION
Replace the degas hose with revised longer hose. Route the revised hose around and below the
radiator drain petcock boss (Figures 1 and 2). Be sure to fasten the standoff clip included with the
hose to the drain petcock boss.
The FEAD belt should also be replaced if there is any indication the belt has been contaminated
with engine coolant. Prior to installing the new belt be sure to clean all pulleys with soap and water.
If the pulley cleaning operation is not performed the new belt may become noisy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Line/Hose: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling
System - Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss > Page 2438
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042413A Replace Degas Hose 0.7 Hr.
(Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System)
042413B Replace Degas Hose And 0.9 Hr.
Front End Accessory Drive Belt (Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System And Clean
Pulleys)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8C633 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine
Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
Coolant Reservoir: Customer Interest Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
TSB 04-24-13
12/13/04
ENGINE OVERHEATING AND/OR LOSS OF A/C PERFORMANCE
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape vehicles built between 01/02/04 and 05/22/04 may exhibit an
overheating condition. This condition may be due to a loss of engine coolant from the degas hose.
The degas hose may come into contact with the front end accessory drive (FEAD) belt, damaging
the hose.
The vehicle may also exhibit a loss of A/C performance. In some cases, the customer may only
notice the loss of A/C. The PCM will disable the A/C compressor if the engine temperature reaches
230° F (110° C) or higher (ECT PID). Ensure the cooling system is full and operating properly
before replacing any A/C or climate control components.
ACTION
Replace the degas hose with revised longer hose. Route the revised hose around and below the
radiator drain petcock boss (Figures 1 and 2). Be sure to fasten the standoff clip included with the
hose to the drain petcock boss.
The FEAD belt should also be replaced if there is any indication the belt has been contaminated
with engine coolant. Prior to installing the new belt be sure to clean all pulleys with soap and water.
If the pulley cleaning operation is not performed the new belt may become noisy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System - Engine
Overheat/A/C Performance Loss > Page 2447
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042413A Replace Degas Hose 0.7 Hr.
(Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System)
042413B Replace Degas Hose And 0.9 Hr.
Front End Accessory Drive Belt (Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System And Clean
Pulleys)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8C633 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System
- Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss
Coolant Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Engine Overheat/A/C
Performance Loss
TSB 04-24-13
12/13/04
ENGINE OVERHEATING AND/OR LOSS OF A/C PERFORMANCE
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape vehicles built between 01/02/04 and 05/22/04 may exhibit an
overheating condition. This condition may be due to a loss of engine coolant from the degas hose.
The degas hose may come into contact with the front end accessory drive (FEAD) belt, damaging
the hose.
The vehicle may also exhibit a loss of A/C performance. In some cases, the customer may only
notice the loss of A/C. The PCM will disable the A/C compressor if the engine temperature reaches
230° F (110° C) or higher (ECT PID). Ensure the cooling system is full and operating properly
before replacing any A/C or climate control components.
ACTION
Replace the degas hose with revised longer hose. Route the revised hose around and below the
radiator drain petcock boss (Figures 1 and 2). Be sure to fasten the standoff clip included with the
hose to the drain petcock boss.
The FEAD belt should also be replaced if there is any indication the belt has been contaminated
with engine coolant. Prior to installing the new belt be sure to clean all pulleys with soap and water.
If the pulley cleaning operation is not performed the new belt may become noisy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 04-24-13 > Dec > 04 > Cooling System
- Engine Overheat/A/C Performance Loss > Page 2453
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042413A Replace Degas Hose 0.7 Hr.
(Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System)
042413B Replace Degas Hose And 0.9 Hr.
Front End Accessory Drive Belt (Includes Time To Drain And Fill The Cooling System And Clean
Pulleys)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8C633 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2454
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Disconnect
the radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the degas bottle.
2.3L vehicles
4. Disconnect the degas bottle-to-coolant bypass housing hose.
All vehicles
5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.).
6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose.
^ Remove the degas bottle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2455
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 2461
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2464
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation
FAN CONTROL
Five Hundred/Freestyle/Montego, Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Town Car: FCV Duty Cycle
Output From PCM (negative Duty Cycle)
LS, Thunderbird: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM
The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C
on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs.
For variable speed electric fan(s):
The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly)
receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the
power applied to the fan motor).
For relay controlled fans:
The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC) (single speed fan applications),
low fan control (LFC), medium fan control (MFC), and/or high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some
applications will have the xFC circuit wired to 2 separate relays.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2465
2.0L Focus (with A/C) And Taurus/Sable: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart
2.0L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart
Freestar, Monterey: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart
For 3-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium, and high tan control
(FC), cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the table.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2466
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
1. Inspect the fan blade and shroud for any foreign materials. Clear the obstruction and continue
the test procedure. 2. Rotate the fan to see if any contact between the shroud and blade exists. If
contact is observed, install a new fan shroud assembly. 3. Rotate the fan by hand. The fan should
rotate freely (no resistance should be felt, the fan will free-wheel with minimum effort). If any
resistance is
present, install a new fan assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2467
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the radiator grille. 3. Remove the
front impact severity sensor. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Remove the center support lower bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
6. Remove the nut and the center support.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connectors 8. Remove the 6 cooling fan bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
9. NOTE: Remove the LH cooling fan first and slide the RH cooling fan to the left side to remove.
Remove the LH and the RH cooling fans.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2478
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2482
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2483
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2484
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Fan Shroud: Testing and Inspection
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
1. Inspect the fan blade and shroud for any foreign materials. Clear the obstruction and continue
the test procedure. 2. Rotate the fan to see if any contact between the shroud and blade exists. If
contact is observed, install a new fan shroud assembly. 3. Rotate the fan by hand. The fan should
rotate freely (no resistance should be felt, the fan will free-wheel with minimum effort). If any
resistance is
present, install a new fan assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 2488
Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the radiator grille. 3. Remove the
front impact severity sensor. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Remove the center support lower bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
6. Remove the nut and the center support.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connectors 8. Remove the 6 cooling fan bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
9. NOTE: Remove the LH cooling fan first and slide the RH cooling fan to the left side to remove.
Remove the LH and the RH cooling fans.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2497
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2498
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2504
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2505
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2506
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
HEATER CORE
WARNING: Carbon monoxide is colorless, odorless and dangerous. If it is necessary to operate
the engine with the vehicle in a closed area such as a garage, always use an exhaust collector to
vent the exhaust gases outside the closed area.
1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores were
good and did not require replacement. If a heater
core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by carrying out the plugged heater core
component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking
the heater system thoroughly as follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose-to-heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and
appear as a leak in the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specification clamps can cause leakage at
the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater
water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: The heater core inlet hose will become too hot to handle if the system is working
correctly.
1. Verify the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3.
When the engine coolant reaches a normal operating temperature, feel the heater core inlet and
outlet hoses to see if they are hot.
If the inlet hose is not hot: the thermostat is not working correctly.
If the outlet hose is not hot: the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be restricted or plugged.
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the pressure tester to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Clamp off the heater hoses.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the pressure tester in the heater
water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, the plug, and the adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the pressure tester to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed
valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7.
Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater
water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater water hoses do not leak, remove
the
heater core from the vehicle and perform the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3.
Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes.
Then connect the pressure tester to the adapter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2507
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2508
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Release the 2 clamps and disconnect the 2 heater hoses from the
heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the screw and the temperature blend door lever. 5. Remove the 3 screws and the
heater core cover. 6. Remove the heater core from the housing.
7. NOTE:
- Make sure the temperature blend door actuator and switch are in the correct position when
installing the temperature blend door lever.
- Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2517
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2518
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2524
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2525
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2526
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
HEATER HOSE
Heater Hose To Heater Core Connections
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2527
Heater Hose To Block Connections
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2528
Heater Hose To Oil Cooler Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. If removing
the heater core hoses, remove the heater hose tie. 4. Release the clamps and remove the
necessary heater hose(s). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
Radiator Leak Test, Removed From the Vehicle
CAUTION: Never leak test an aluminum radiator in the same water that copper/brass radiators are
tested in. Flux and caustic cleaners can be present in the cleaning tank and they will damage
aluminum radiators.
NOTE: Always install plugs in the oil cooler fittings before leak testing or cleaning any radiator.
NOTE: Clean the radiator before leak testing to avoid contamination of the tank.
1. Leak test the radiator in clean water with 138 kPa (20 psi) air pressure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 2532
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator-2.3L
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the
cooling fan motor and shroud. 4. Disconnect the upper radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the
radiator. 5. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator. 6. Disconnect the lower degas
bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator. 7. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 8.
Disconnect the 2 transaxle cooling hoses from the radiator. 9. Remove the radiator.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2542
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2546
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2547
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2548
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
If the thermostat opening voltage is greater than 0.75 volt and less than 78°C (173°F), install a new
thermostat. If the thermostat opening voltage is less than 0.75 volt and greater than 78°C (173°F),
the thermostat is good and a new thermostat is not required.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2552
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
Thermostat
A new thermostat should be installed only after the following electrical and mechanical tests have
been carried out.
Thermostat-Electrical Test (3.0L Only)
NOTE: The electrical thermostat test is most accurate if carried out indoors at less than 37.8°C
(100°F) ambient air. This test can be carried out with or without the hood open and with the engine
warm or cold.
1. Check the engine coolant level. Fill as needed. 2. With the ignition OFF, attach the Rotunda 73
Digital Multimeter to the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. It may be used to monitor
sensor voltage values between 0-5 volts.
3. NOTE: Running this test with the vehicle in gear or with the A/C compressor clutch engaged
(running) will cause incorrect diagnosis.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and allow the engine to idle throughout this test. Allow the engine to run for two
minutes, then record the ECT voltage. Record the
ECT voltage every 60 seconds. When the ECT voltage trend changes direction or only changes
slightly (0.03 volt or less) from the previous reading, record this as the thermostat opening voltage.
Use the voltage and corresponding coolant temperature chart listed below.
5. If the thermostat opening voltage is greater than 0.75 volt and less than 78°C (173°F), install a
new thermostat. 6. If the thermostat opening voltage is less than 0.75 volt and greater than 78°C
(173°F), the thermostat is good and a new thermostat is not required.
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Thermostat-Mechanical Test
1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Immerse the thermostat housing and thermostat in a boiling
antifreeze and water mixture. 3. See the General Specifications chart for thermostat opening
temperatures. See: Specifications/General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications
Thermostat Housing: Specifications
Thermostat housing bolts ....................................................................................................................
................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2556
Thermostat Housing: Diagrams
Thermostat Housing-2.3L
NOTE: The thermostat and thermostat housing are serviced as an assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2557
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing-2.3L
NOTE: The thermostat and thermostat housing are serviced as an assembly.
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the
accessory drive belt. 4. Disconnect the heater hose at the thermostat housing. 5. Disconnect the
lower radiator hose at the thermostat housing. 6. Remove the 3 bolts, thermostat housing and
gasket.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Clean and inspect the gasket, replace if necessary.
8. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump >
Component Information > Specifications
Drive Pulley: Specifications
Coolant pump pulley bolts ...................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Catalyst and Exhaust Systems Overview
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen
carbon dioxide (C02) and water vapor (H20). However~ it also contains carbon monoxide (CO)
oxides of nitrogen (NO) hydrogen (H) and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO NO and HCs
are major air pollutants and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold front exhaust pipe front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S) rear exhaust pipe catalyst HO2S a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes.
Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
PCM. For information on the OBD catalyst monitor refer to the description for the Catalyst
Efficiency Monitor in this section.
The number of HO2S used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on the
vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV ULEV PZEV). On most vehicles only 2 HO2S are used
in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S1 1/H02S21) before the catalyst will be used for
primary fuel control while the ones afier the catalyst (H02S12/H02S22) will be used to monitor
catalyst efficiency. However some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) will use 3 HO2S sensors
for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S1 1/H02S21) located before the catalyst are
used for primary fuel control the stream 2 sensors (H02S12/H02S22) are used to monitor the
light-off catalyst and the stream 3 sensors (H02S13/H02S23) located afier the catalyst are used for
long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore afi oxygen sensor control). Current
PZEV vehicles use only a 4-cylinder engine so only the Bank 1 HO2S will be used.
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 301°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the
exhaust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2566
manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it will
light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the
catalyst lights of{ the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7: 1) for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NO conversion efficiency.
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO)
unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NO) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past
another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally the exhaust
emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Note: On some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust
stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1) one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream
2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted afier the light-off catalyst.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2567
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located afier the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line
with the light off catalyst or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts forming a
Y pipe configuration.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
The 3-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium
(Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and
CO and the reduction reaction of NO. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always
operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For information on the HO2S refer to PCM Inputs
in this section.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter-2.3L Manifold
Special Tool(s)
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2570
Removal
1. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 2. Remove the 2 catalytic converter bracket bolts. 3. Remove
the 6 heat shield bolts and the heat shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2571
4. NOTE: If installing a new converter, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the catalyst
monitoring sensor for installation in the new
converter.
Disconnect the HO2S and the catalyst monitoring sensor electrical connectors.
5. Remove and discard the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. 6. Remove the catalytic converter from the
vehicle.
^ Discard the exhaust manifold gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.03 inch) replace the catalytic converter.
Inspect the catalytic converter for warpage across the manifold flange area.
2. Position a new exhaust manifold gasket on the engine.
3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to
develop an exhaust leak.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause
the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages.
Position the catalytic converter and tighten the 7 exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown. ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: Apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the sensors before installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2572
If installing a new converter, install the HO2S and the catalyst monitoring sensor using the special
tool. ^
Tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
5. Connect the H02S and the catalyst monitoring sensor electrical connectors. 6. Position the heat
shield and install the 6 heat shield bolts.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Install the 2 catalytic converter bracket bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. Install the exhaust flexible pipe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2573
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to
separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust
catalytic converter nuts.
^ To install tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic
converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly. 7. Separate the converter from the
muffler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages.
Exhaust Manifold nuts
Tighten the 7 exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown.
Stage 1: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
........................................... 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten to ....................................................
..................................................................................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2577
Exhaust Manifold: Testing and Inspection
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust manifold for evidence of exhaust gas
leaks. 2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket surfaces, or other damage that
would make it unfit for further use.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Diagrams
Exhaust Pipe: Diagrams
Exhaust System-Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Dual Converter Y-Pipe
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Dual Converter Y-Pipe
Dual Converter Y-Pipe
Special Tool(s)
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Dual Converter Y-Pipe > Page 2583
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to
separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Dual Converter Y-Pipe > Page 2584
2. NOTE: If installing a new dual converter Y-pipe, remove the catalyst monitor sensor for
installation in the new dual converter Y-pipe.
NOTE: Apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor before installation.
Using the special tool, disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the dual converter Y-pipe to hang from the flexible end. Support the dual
converter Y-pipe.
Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^
To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the Y-pipe. 5. Remove and discard the 4 dual
converter Y-pipe nuts and remove the Y-pipe.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new dual converter Y-pipe gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Dual Converter Y-Pipe > Page 2585
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Flexible Pipe
Exhaust Flexible Pipe
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to
separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust
catalytic converter nuts.
^ To install, tighten the nuts to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust flexible pipe nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger and remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 5. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Muffler: Service and Repair
Muffler
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to
separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust
catalytic converter nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic
converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly. 7. Separate the muffler from the
catalytic converter. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to
separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove and discard the resonator exhaust hanger and remove the resonator. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new resonator gasket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
Removal and Installation
1. CAUTION: Prior to removal of the SJB, it is necessary to upload module configuration
information to a diagnostic tool. This
information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the
floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from
the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
2598
7. Remove the SJB screw. 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the SJB. 9. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the SJB. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) torque based electronic throttle control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand
(pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the PCM, and an accelerator pedal assembly to
control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable
operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS), and
mechanical throttle body.
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable cam
timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions).
Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators.
- Eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve.
- Better airflow range.
- Packaging (no cable).
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality.
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a warning indicator (wrench light) on the
instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are accompanied by DTCs and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II ETB has the following characteristics 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a
DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle
plate shaft is 17:1.
2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle when no
power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger
than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h
(30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (-0.75
degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable
and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle
plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not
required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle
body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC
valve.
6. The throttle position (TP) sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant throttle position signals are required for
increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage.
- Signal return (ground).
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2602
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and
APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and
pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor
assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts).
- 2 signal return (ground) circuits.
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a
fault. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect
by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value will be substituted for an
incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2603
GEN II ETC System
The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable cam timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal
position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate
corrective action.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2604
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2605
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2)
Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2606
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- Greater than or equal to 5% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on,
engine off.
- Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero
throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up.
- Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0
degrees (hard-stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty
cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle.
- Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle
angle.
- Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable
of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 2611
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 2612
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2613
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 2616
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 2617
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EEPROM)
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate fault code P1635
or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various
hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this
procedure properly may generate fault code P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An
incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for fault code P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and four wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block will display on the diagnostic tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the diagnostic tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. There are other
enhanced diagnostic tools that may have programming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the
VID block is blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an
automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry
into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a diagnostic tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle.
The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Manual data entry must be Carried out if the old module is damaged or incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible diagnostic tool, select and
carry out the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make
certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 83,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
MSOF/ESOF may result in codes P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built
Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the diagnostic tool.
Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and L-M
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft website at www.motorcraft.com. From the
Motorcraft homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
For Ford and L-M technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS
website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using the WDS or New
Generation Star (NGS).
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) > Page 2620
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) stud bolt
nut and position the wiring harness aside.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the stud bolts and the PCM.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the PCM cowl seal. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2624
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2625
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Emission Control Systems > EGR Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Control Module: Description and Operation
EGR SYSTEM MODULE (ESM)
Overview
EGR System Module (ESM)
The ESM is an updated DPFE EGR system. It functions in the same manner as the conventional
DPFE system, however the various system components have been integrated into a single
component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake
manifold with a metal gasket that forms the measuring orifice. This arrangement increases system
reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to
the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute
pressure (MAP). The system provides the PCM with a differential DPFE signal, identical to a
traditional DPFE system.
The delta pressure feedback EGR monitor is comprised of a series of electrical tests and functional
tests that monitor various aspects of the EGR system operation.
First, the DPFE sensor input circuit is checked for out of range values (P1400/P0405
P1401/P0406). The EVR output circuit is checked for opens and shorts (P1409/P0403).
NOTE: EGR normally has large amounts of water vapor that are the result of the engine
combustion process. During cold ambient temperatures, under some circumstances, water vapor
can freeze in the DPFE sensor, hoses, as well as other components in the EGR system. In order to
prevent MIL illumination for temporary freezing, the following logic is used.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected below 0°C (32°F), only the EGR system is disabled for
the current driving cycle. A DTC is not stored and the I/M readiness status for the EGR monitor will
not change. The EGR monitor will, however, continue to operate. If the EGR monitor determines
that the malfunction is no longer present, the EGR system will be enabled and normal system
operation will be restored.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected above 0°C (32°F), the EGR system and the EGR monitor
is disabled for the current driving cycle. A DTC is stored and the MIL is illuminated if the
malfunction has been detected on 2 consecutive driving cycles.
After the vehicle has warmed up and normal EGR rates are being commanded by the PCM, the
low flow check is carried out. Since the EGR system is a closed loop system, the EGR system will
deliver the requested EGR flow as long as it has the capability to do so. If the EVR duty cycle is
very high (greater than 80% duty cycle), the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is
evaluated to determine the amount of EGR system restriction. If the differential pressure is below a
calibrated threshold, a low flow malfunction is indicated (P0401/P0406).
Finally, the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is also checked at idle with zero
requested EGR flow to carry out the high flow check. If the differential pressure exceeds a
calibrated limit, it indicates a stuck open EGR valve or debris temporarily lodged under the EGR
valve seat (P0402).
If the inferred ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F), or greater than 60°C (140°F), or the
altitude is greater than 8,000 feet (BARO less than 22.5 in-Hg), the EGR monitor cannot be run
reliably. In these conditions, a timer starts to accumulate the time in these conditions. If the vehicle
leaves these extreme conditions, the timer starts to decrement, and, if conditions permit, will
attempt to complete the EGR flow monitor. If the timer reaches 800 seconds, the EGR monitor is
disabled for the remainder of the current driving cycle and the EGR Monitor I/M Readiness bit will
be set to a ready condition after one such driving cycle. Vehicles will require 2 such driving cycles
for the EGR monitor to be set to a ready condition.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2634
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2638
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2639
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2643
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2644
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2649
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2658
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2659
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2660
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2661
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2665
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2666
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2667
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 2671
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) switch
electrical connector. 3. Rotate the CPP switch clockwise and remove the CPP switch. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2675
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2679
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2680
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2681
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2682
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2686
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2687
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2688
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Level Input
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
NOTE: The Ford GT will use a piezoelectric sonar type fuel level sensor. The sensor is located in
the tank and the sensor signal is provided as a communications network message by the
instrument cluster to the PCM.
The fuel level input (FLI) is either a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP)
module or a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 2693
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 2694
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 2695
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Level Input > Page 2696
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure.
The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance
decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 2701
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP
leak check monitor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 2706
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 2707
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 2708
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
Typical Stand Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2712
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 design types of AT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in
the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2716
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2717
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2718
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2722
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 2730
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 2731
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2734
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2735
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2736
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2737
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM will turn on the heater
by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2740
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2741
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2742
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2746
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2749
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 2755
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 2756
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2760
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 2763
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2764
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2768
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2769
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2770
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2774
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2777
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity,
the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 2784
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 2785
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2793
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2794
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2795
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2796
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Fuel
Tank Pressure Transducer Sensor
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Fuel
Tank Pressure Transducer Sensor > Page 2801
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 2804
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 2805
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2806
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2810
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor > Page 2813
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL TEMPERATURE (FRT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
The FRT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRT sensor measures the temperature of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2814
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2818
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2819
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose
of the IES switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in
place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs the ball breaks loose from the magnet rolls up a
conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts
off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open it must be manually reset before restarting the
vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2820
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect
the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2824
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 2827
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Page 2828
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2833
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2834
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2835
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2839
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2840
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2841
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2842
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2850
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2851
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2852
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations > Page 2858
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
On some applications there is a pressure test point with a Schrader fitting in the fuel rail that
relieves the fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for repair and diagnostic
procedures. Before repairing or testing the fuel system, read any WARNING, CAUTION, and
HANDLING information. On vehicles not equipped with a Schrader valve, use the Rotunda Fuel
Pressure Test Kit #134-R0087 or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle Speed .....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 680 - 750 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2866
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
............................. 1.25 - 1.35mm (0.049 - 0.053 in.)
Spark Plug Tightening Torque .............................................................................................................
........................................................ 12 Nm (9 lb.ft.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2881
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type
Spark Plug ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... SP448
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.
4. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before
removing the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2884
1. Inspect the spark plugs.
2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. Install the spark plugs.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before
attaching to the spark plugs.
Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2885
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
^ Clean the spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or wont or loose bearings.
^ Correct the oil leak concern.
^ Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture for excessive idling.
^
Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2886
4. Inspect for normal burning.
^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^
Install a new spark plug.
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by a white or light gray spots and with bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^
Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
^ Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2890
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test-Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. For additional information, refer to the
Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test-Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2891
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is within 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For example,
a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Specifications > Page 2895
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. CAUTION: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: A midrange clearance is the most desirable:
^ Intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 inch)
^ Exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 inch)
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet
thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location.
4. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2903
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2904
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2905
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2906
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
Typical Stand Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2910
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 design types of AT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in
the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
Removal and Installation
1. CAUTION: Prior to removal of the SJB, it is necessary to upload module configuration
information to a diagnostic tool. This
information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the
floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from
the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2914
7. Remove the SJB screw. 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the SJB. 9. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the SJB. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2918
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2921
Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS)/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The BPS, also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control
deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the
brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens
and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open brake pedal position
(BPP) switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to
the PCM did not change states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can
be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2925
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2926
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2927
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 2931
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) switch
electrical connector. 3. Rotate the CPP switch clockwise and remove the CPP switch. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2935
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2939
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2940
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2941
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2942
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) torque based electronic throttle control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand
(pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the PCM, and an accelerator pedal assembly to
control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable
operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS), and
mechanical throttle body.
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable cam
timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions).
Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators.
- Eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve.
- Better airflow range.
- Packaging (no cable).
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality.
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a warning indicator (wrench light) on the
instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are accompanied by DTCs and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II ETB has the following characteristics 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a
DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle
plate shaft is 17:1.
2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle when no
power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger
than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h
(30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (-0.75
degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable
and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle
plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not
required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle
body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC
valve.
6. The throttle position (TP) sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant throttle position signals are required for
increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage.
- Signal return (ground).
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2951
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and
APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and
pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor
assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts).
- 2 signal return (ground) circuits.
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a
fault. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect
by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value will be substituted for an
incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2952
GEN II ETC System
The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable cam timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal
position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate
corrective action.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2953
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2954
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2)
Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2955
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- Greater than or equal to 5% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on,
engine off.
- Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero
throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up.
- Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0
degrees (hard-stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty
cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle.
- Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle
angle.
- Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable
of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
2960
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
2961
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2962
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2966
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EEPROM)
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate fault code P1635
or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various
hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this
procedure properly may generate fault code P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An
incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for fault code P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and four wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block will display on the diagnostic tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the diagnostic tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. There are other
enhanced diagnostic tools that may have programming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the
VID block is blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an
automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry
into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a diagnostic tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle.
The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Manual data entry must be Carried out if the old module is damaged or incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible diagnostic tool, select and
carry out the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make
certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 83,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
MSOF/ESOF may result in codes P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built
Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the diagnostic tool.
Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and L-M
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft website at www.motorcraft.com. From the
Motorcraft homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
For Ford and L-M technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS
website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using the WDS or New
Generation Star (NGS).
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) >
Page 2969
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) stud bolt
nut and position the wiring harness aside.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the stud bolts and the PCM.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the PCM cowl seal. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2973
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2974
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2975
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Input
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Level Input
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
NOTE: The Ford GT will use a piezoelectric sonar type fuel level sensor. The sensor is located in
the tank and the sensor signal is provided as a communications network message by the
instrument cluster to the PCM.
The fuel level input (FLI) is either a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP)
module or a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Input > Page 2980
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Input > Page 2981
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Input > Page 2982
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Input > Page 2983
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure.
The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance
decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 2988
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pump Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pump Signal: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM)
Applications Using a Fuel Pump Relay for Fuel Pump On/Off Control
The FPM circuit is spliced into the fuel pump power (FP PWR) circuit and is used by the PCM for
diagnostic purposes. The PCM sources a low current voltage down the FPM circuit. With the fuel
pump off, this voltage is pulled low by the path to ground through the fuel pump. With the fuel pump
off and the FPM circuit low, the PCM can verify that the FPM circuit and the FP PWR circuit are
complete from the FPM splice through the fuel pump to ground. This also confirms that the FP
PWR or FPM circuits are not shorted to power. With the fuel pump on, voltage is now being
supplied from the fuel pump relay to the FP PWR and FPM circuits. With the fuel pump on and the
FPM circuit high, the PCM can verify that the FP PWR circuit from the fuel pump relay to the FPM
splice is complete. It can also verify that the fuel pump relay contacts are closed and there is a B+
supply to the fuel pump relay.
Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) Applications
Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals
NOTE: The Ford GT uses 2 FPDMs to control fuel for the dual-injection fuel delivery system. The
PCM will individually monitor both FPDMs through their FPM circuits.
The FPDM communicates diagnostic information to the PCM through the FPM circuit. This
information is sent by the FPDM as a duty cycle signal. The 3 duty cycle signals that may be sent
are listed in the table.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP
leak check monitor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 2996
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 2997
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 2998
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3002
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE (APPLICATIONS WITHOUT ETC)
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED, also some
IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine
vacuum to operate.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- No touch start.
- Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up.
- Idle (corrects for engine load).
- Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function).
- Over-temperature idle boost.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3003
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the 3 screws, the pin-type retainer and the
upper and lower snow shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the
IAC valve.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
- Inspect the gasket and install new as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3008
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3009
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3010
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3011
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3012
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3013
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3014
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3015
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3016
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3017
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3018
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3019
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3020
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3021
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3022
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3023
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3024
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3025
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3026
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3027
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3028
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3029
Information Bus: Description and Operation
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
The SJB is connected to the medium speed controller area network (CAN) communications bus. If
one of the bus wires becomes shorted to ground or voltage, communications can continue at a
reduced level. Check circuits 1847 (WH/OG), and 1848 (PK/OG) between the SJB C2280a, the
instrument cluster C220 and the data link connector (DLC) C251. Total resistance values must not
be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, there is an open circuit in the medium
speed CAN, damage to the DLC C251, or damage to the SJB C2280a. Since both the SJB and the
instrument cluster share network termination responsibilities, a problem in either of these modules
can result in a medium speed CAN failure.
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
The PCM is on the high speed CAN. The PCM controls the engine for better fuel economy,
emissions control, failure mode detection and storage, and all passive anti-theft system (PATS)
functions. If one of the bus wires becomes shorted to ground or voltage, communications can
continue at a reduced level. Check the high speed CAN circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK),
between the PCM C175b and the DLC C251. Total resistance values must not be more than 5
ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, there is an open circuit in the high speed CAN,
damage to the DLC C251, damage to the PCM C175b, or a problem in the in-line connector. Since
both the PCM and the instrument cluster share network termination responsibilities, a problem in
either of these modules can result in a high speed CAN failure.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster is on the high speed CAN. It is an analog face cluster with a digital
odometer. The instrument cluster displays a variety of information. If one of the bus wires becomes
shorted to ground or voltage, communications can continue at a reduced level. Check the high
speed CAN circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK) between the instrument cluster C220 and the DLC
C251. Total resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5
ohms, there is an open circuit in the CAN network, damage to the DLC C251, damage to the
instrument cluster C220, or a problem in the in-line connector. Since both the PCM and the
instrument cluster share network termination responsibilities, a problem in either of these modules
can result in a high speed CAN failure.
Restraint Control Module (RCM)
The RCM is on the international standards organization (ISO) 9141 communication network. The
RCM controls the deployment of the air bags based on sensor input. The ISO 9141 communication
network will not function if the wire is shorted to ground or battery voltage. Check the network
circuit between the RCM C2041a and the DLC C251. Total resistance value must not be more than
5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, there is an open circuit in the ISO 9141
communication network, damage to the DLC C251, damage to the RCM C2041a, or a problem in
the in-line connector.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
The ABS module is on the high speed CAN. The ABS module controls the brake pressure to the 4
wheels to keep the vehicle under control while braking. If one of the bus wires becomes shorted to
ground or voltage, communications can continue at a reduced level. Check the high speed CAN
circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK), between the ABS module C155 and the DLC C251. Total
resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, there is an
open circuit in the high speed CAN, damage to the DLC C251, damage to the ABS module C155,
or a problem in the in-line connector.
Parking Aid Module
The parking aid module is connected to the ISO 9141 communication network. The parking aid
module receives input from sensors in the rear bumper that detect close objects when the
transmission is in REVERSE, and the vehicle speed is above 0 km/h (0 mph) and below 8 km/h (5
mph). The ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to ground or
battery voltage. Check the network circuit between the parking aid module C4014 and the DLC
C251. Total resistance value must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms,
there is an open circuit in the ISO 9141 communication network, damage to the DLC C251,
damage to the parking aid module connector, or a problem in the in-line connector.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module
The 4WD control module is on the high speed CAN. The 4WD control module regulates the duty
cycle to the active torque coupling between FWD and 4WD when more traction is required. Check
the high speed CAN circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK), between the 4WD control module C3253
and the DLC C251. Total resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is
more than 5 ohms, there is an open circuit in the high speed CAN, damage to the DLC C251,
damage to the 4WD control module C3253, or a problem in the in-line connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network
Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Communications Network
Principles of Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The vehicle has 3 module communication networks: high speed and medium speed CAN network,
which are comprised of unshielded twisted pair cable, and the international standards organization
(ISO) 9141 communication network, which is a single wire network. All 3 networks are connected to
the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by
allowing a diagnostic tester to be able to diagnose and control any module on the 3 networks from
the connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering column and
the radio.
The high speed and medium speed CAN remain operational even with the severing of one of the
bus wires. Communications will also continue if one of the bus wires is shorted to ground or
voltage. If any of the termination resistors are lost, communication is not possible.
The ISO 9141 communication network does not permit intermodule communication. When the
diagnostic tool communicates to modules on the ISO 9141 communication network, the diagnostic
tool must ask for all information; the modules cannot initiate communications.
The ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to ground or battery
voltage. Also, if one of the modules on the ISO 9141 communication network loses power or shorts
internally, communication to that module will fail.
Inspection and Verification
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Smart junction box (SJB) fuse 7 (10A)
- Wiring harness
- Network connections
- Data link connector (DLC) C251
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic
tool to the data link connector and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool
menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
5. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 6. GO to Pinpoint Test PC. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
PINPOINT TEST PC: DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS NETWORK TEST
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3032
PC1
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module C155
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3033
Data Link Connector (DLC) C251
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3034
Instrument Cluster C220
Parking Aid Module C4014
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3035
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) C175b
Restraint Control Module (RCM) C2041a
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3036
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280a
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280b
Test A: The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Does Not Respond to The Diagnostic Tool
PINPOINT TEST A: THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3037
A1-A2
Normal Operation
The PCM communicates with the diagnostic tool through the high speed CAN communications
network, circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK). If one of the bus wires becomes shorted to ground or
voltage, communications can continue at a reduced level. The PCM and instrument cluster share
network termination responsibilities with the use of a split termination resistor in each module. If
either of these termination resistors is lost, network communication is not possible. Check circuits
1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK) between the PCM C175b and the data link connector (DLC) C251. Total
resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms there is an
open in one of the high speed CAN circuits, damage to the DLC C251, damage to the PCM C175b,
or a problem in an in-line connector.
Possible Causes
- high speed CAN circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK) open
- DLC C251
- PCM C175b
- PCM
- instrument cluster
- PCM or instrument cluster termination resistors
Test B: The Restraint Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond to The Diagnostic Tool
PINPOINT TEST B: THE RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3038
B1-B2
Normal Operation
The RCM communicates with the diagnostic tool through the ISO 9141 communication network
circuit 70 (LB/WH). If circuit 70 (LB/WH) becomes open or shorted to ground, communication to
that module is not possible. Check circuit 70 (LB/WH) between the RCM C2041a and the data link
connector (DLC) C251. Total resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is
more than 5 ohms there is an open in the ISO 9141 communication network circuit, damage to the
DLC C251, or damage to the RCM C2041a.
Possible Causes
- ISO 9141 communication network circuit 70 (LB/WH) open
- DLC C251
- RCM C2041a
- RCM
Test C: The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Does Not Respond to The Diagnostic Tool
PINPOINT TEST C: THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND
TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3039
C1-C2
Normal Operation
The ABS module communicates with the diagnostic tool through the high speed CAN
communications network, circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK). If one of the bus wires becomes
shorted to ground or voltage, communication can continue at a reduced level. Check circuits 1908
(WH) and 1909 (BK) between the ABS module C155 and the data link connector (DLC) C251.
Total resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms there
is an open in one of the high speed CAN circuits, damage to the DLC C251, damage to the ABS
module C155, or a problem in an in-line connector.
Possible Causes
- high speed CAN circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK) open
- DLC C251
- C155
- ABS module
Test E: The Parking Aid Module Does Not Respond to The Diagnostic Tool
PINPOINT TEST E: THE PARKING AID MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
TOOL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3040
E1-E2
Normal Operation
The parking aid module communicates with the diagnostic tool through the ISO 9141
communication network circuit 70 (LB/WH). If circuit 70 (LB/WH) becomes open or shorted to
ground, communication to that module is not possible. Check circuit 70 (LB/WH) between the
parking aid module C4014 and the data link connector (DLC) C251. Total resistance values must
not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms, there is an open in circuit 70
(LB/WH), damage to the DLC C251, damage to the parking aid module C4014, or a problem in an
in-line connector.
Possible Causes
- ISO 9141 communication network circuit 70 (LB/WH) open
- DLC C251
- C4014
- parking aid module
Test F: No International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 Communication Network
Communication
PINPOINT TEST F: NO INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (ISO) 9141
COMMUNICATION NETWORK COMMUNICATION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3041
F1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3042
F2-F7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3043
F7-F9
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3044
F10-F11
Normal Operation
The parking aid module and the restraint control module (RCM) communicate with the diagnostic
tool through the ISO 9141 communication network circuit 70 (LB/WH). If circuit 70 (LB/WH)
becomes open or shorted to ground, communication to those modules is not possible. Check circuit
70 (LB/WH) between the parking aid module C4014, RCM C2041a and the data link connector
(DLC) C251. Total resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than
5 ohms, there is an open in circuit 70 (LB/WH), damage to the DLC C251, damage to the parking
aid module, the RCM, or a problem in one of the in-line connectors. If, after individual checks of
each circuit leading to a module show resistance values less than 5 ohms and no in-line connector
issues present, the data link diagnostics test must be run with the module in question
disconnected. If the data link diagnostics test passes with the module in question disconnected, the
module is the source of the concern. A new module should be installed.
Possible Causes
NOTE: Although the ABS module does not use the ISO 9141 communication network for
communication, it is connected to ISO 9141 communication network circuit 70 (LB/WH), and should
be tested to eliminate the module as a potential source of network problems.
- ISO 9141 communication network circuit 70 (LB/WH) shorted to ground or open
- DLC C251
- parking aid module (if equipped)
- RCM
- ABS module
Test G: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (CAN) Communication
PINPOINT TEST G: NO MEDIUM SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
COMMUNICATION
G1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3045
G1-G3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3046
G3-G4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3047
G5-G7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3048
G8-G9
Normal Operation
The medium speed CAN has an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits 1847 (WH/OG) and 1848
(PK/OG). The smart junction box (SJB) and the instrument cluster are the only modules on the
medium speed CAN. Total network resistance values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the
resistance is more than 5 ohms, there is an open in one of the medium speed CAN circuits,
damage to the data link connector (DLC) C251, damage to one of the network module connectors,
or damage to an in-line connector. Since both the SJB and the instrument cluster share network
termination responsibilities, a problem in either of these modules can result in a medium speed
CAN failure.
Possible Causes
- medium speed CAN circuits 1847 (WH/OG) and 1848 (PK/OG) shorted to ground or open
- SJB power circuit 1052 (TN/BK) open
- SJB ground circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- DLC C251
- SJB
- instrument cluster
- battery junction box (BJB) fuse 19 (40A)
Test H: No High Speed Controller Area Network (CAN) Communication
PINPOINT TEST H: NO HIGH SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
COMMUNICATION
H1-H2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3049
H2-H5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3050
H6-H8
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3051
H8-H10
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3052
H11-H14
Normal Operation
The high speed CAN has an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK). The
powertrain control module (PCM), anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, four-wheel drive (4WD)
control module, and the instrument cluster are all on the high speed CAN. Total network resistance
values must not be more than 5 ohms. If the resistance is more than 5 ohms there is an open in
one of the high speed CAN circuits, damage to the data link connector (DLC) C251, damage to one
of the network module connectors, or damage to an in-line connector. Since both the PCM and the
instrument cluster share network termination responsibilities, a problem in either of these modules
can result in a high speed CAN failure.
Possible Causes
- high speed CAN circuits 1908 (WH) and 1909 (BK) shorted to ground or open
- PCM
- instrument cluster
- ABS module
- 4WD control module
Test I: No Module/Network Communication - No Power to The Diagnostic Tool
PINPOINT TEST I: NO MODULE/NETWORK COMMUNICATION - NO POWER TO THE
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3053
I1-I4
I4 Continued
Normal Operation
The diagnostic tool is connected to the DLC C251 to communicate with both the high speed and
medium speed controller area network (CAN), as
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3054
well as with the international standards organization (ISO) 9141 communication network. If
communication cannot be established, the diagnostic tool and the DLC C251 must be checked for
damage. If the diagnostic tool and the DLC C251 are OK, circuits 956 (OG/LG), 570 (BK/WH), and
57 (BK) must be checked for an open condition.
Possible Causes
- DLC C251
- diagnostic tool
- circuit 57 (BK) open
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 956 (OG/LG) open
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3055
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3056
Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Module Configuration
Initial Inspection
MODULE CONFIGURATION
Definition of Terms
Calibration Update: Some modules are designed to be flashed or reflashed with complete new
software packages. This process of reflashing the module is a calibration update.
Programmable Parameters: These are options contained within the existing software. These
include items such as tire size, customer preference items, and anti-theft options. The current
settings are downloaded from an existing module then uploaded to a new module. They can also
be configured using the diagnostic tool. Programming parameters is very different from updating
calibrations as no software is changed, only the options already contained in the software.
Module Programming Methods
Some modules must be programmed as part of the repair procedure. If this procedure is not
followed, the module will not function correctly and may set a number of diagnostic trouble codes
(DTC)s, including B2477 or P1639, which indicate that some necessary data has not been
programmed into the module.
Modules that need programming should not be exchanged between vehicles. In most cases the
parameter values or settings are unique to that vehicle, and if not set correctly cause concerns or
faults.
The Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) automatically attempts to retrieve the module
configuration information from all modules. If the module cannot communicate, the diagnostic tool
either requests the As-Built data or displays a list of items that need to be manually configured. The
WDS programs the module based on the data entered.
For diagnostic tool information, refer to the general procedures.
There are 3 different methods that are used for module programming: programmable module installation (PMI)
- calibration update
- programmable parameters
Some modules do not support all 3 methods.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) The PMI method is used when a new, programmable
module is installed in the vehicle. It is no longer necessary to command the diagnostic tool to
gather module option content from the old module. The diagnostic tool (WDS only) automatically
obtains any available module option content information from the old module during the vehicle ID
routine that runs when the diagnostic tool is initially connected to the vehicle. It is important to
connect the WDS to the vehicle and allow it to identify the vehicle and obtain configuration data
prior to removing any modules.
Calibration Update Calibration update is used to install a new calibration and strategy into a
module.
Programmable Parameters This method is used to configure parameters that may be modified. Not
all features controlled by the module are listed in this configuration method. Refer to the
Programmable Parameters Index for a list of features by system.
If a module that has been modified using programmable parameters needs to be installed, the PMI
procedure maintains the parameters in their altered state if the WDS is able to communicate with
the old module during vehicle ID. Otherwise, programmable parameters may be needed to return
them to the altered state.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
Some powertrain control modules (PCM)s contain a memory area called a VID block.
The PCM VID block may contain the factory settings for the configurable modules unless the PCM
is flashed with a new calibration, in which case some PCM parameters may be modified.
As-Built Data Center
The As-Built Data Center maintains a record of the vehicle configuration in a database. The vehicle
identification number (VIN) is required to obtain this information. The As-Built Data Center records
the applicable module configurations stored in each module before the vehicle leaves the factory.
The As-Built Data Center always reflects the original build of the vehicle as it left the factory. Only
contact the As-Built Data Center when directed to do so by the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3057
Configurable Modules
The vehicle contains the following configurable modules: Smart Junction Box (SJB)
- Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module
- Instrument Cluster
- Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Programmable Parameters Index
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3058
Information Bus: Service and Repair
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) When the Original Body Chassis Electrical
Module is Not Available
1. Install the new module. 2. Using the VCM and the latest version of the service function card,
SELECT: Programmable Module Installation. 3. Select the module being installed. 4. Follow the
on-screen instructions. 5. SELECT: Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU and press trigger. 6.
Follow the on-screen instructions. 7. The VCM attempts to retrieve the module data from the
powertrain control module (PCM).
- If the module data is available, go to Step A.
- If the VCM displays: Call As-Built Data Center, go to Step B.
Step A 1. SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU. Press trigger. 2. The VCM completes
loading the retrieved data and displays Module Download Successful. 3. Test the module for
correct operation.
Step B 1. Press the trigger. 2. If the VCM asks for vehicle data, enter the vehicle data, then press
store. 3. The VCM asks for module data line 1. Enter the data and press store. 4. The VCM then
asks if there is an additional line of data available for that address. Select YES or NO depending on
the information in the As Built
Data Sheet.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the answer is NO for Step 4. 6. The VCM should show a screen
stating that the module data was stored. Press the trigger. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions. 8.
SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU. Press the trigger. 9. The VCM completes loading the
retrieved data and displays Module Download Successful.
10. Test the module for correct operation.
Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) When the Original Body Chassis Electrical
Module is Available
1. With the original module still installed, using the VCM and the latest version of the service
function card, SELECT: Programmable Module
Installation.
2. Select the module being installed and press the trigger. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4.
SELECT: Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU. Press the trigger. 5. Follow the on-screen
instructions. 6. INSTALL new module, SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU. Press the
trigger. 7. The VCM completes loading the retrieved data and displays Module Download
Successful. 8. Test the module for correct operation.
Using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) When the Original Body Chassis Electrical Module
is Not Available
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the WDS and ID the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox
icon, select and highlight Module Programming. Then highlight the module that was installed and
press the check mark. 4. Select and highlight Programmable Module Installation. Then highlight the
module that was installed and press the check mark. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the
ignition key to the OFF position and press the check mark. 6. The WDS retrieves the module data
from the PCM, automatically downloads the data into the new module, and displays Module
Configuration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3059
Complete.
7. If the data is not available in the PCM, the WDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built
Data Center. Retrieve the data from
WWW.FMCDEALER.COM at this time and press the check mark.
8. Enter the module data (the module address and line are displayed to the left of the 3 entry
boxes) and press the check mark. 9. The WDS downloads the data into the new module and
displays Operation Successful - Programming Complete.
10. Test the module for correct operation.
Using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) When the Original Body Chassis Electrical Module
is Available
1. Connect the WDS and ID the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select and highlight
Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select and highlight Programmable Module
Installation. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and
press the check mark. 5. Install the new module and press the check mark. 6. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 7. The module
configuration is complete. 8. Test the module for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3060
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3064
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3065
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3066
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3070
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3071
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an OBD
emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs an OBD diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) will be set.
^ The MW is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the ISO standard engine symbol.
^ The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
^ For applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit the PCM will illuminate the MIL until a
profile ignition pickup (PIP) signal is detected. For 2OO5 the following vehicles use a hard wire
circuit: Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis Explorer Sport Trac and Ranger.
^ The MIL will remain illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if:
^ an emission related concern and DTC exists.
^ no PIP signal is detected (applications with a dedicated hard-wire MIL circuit). The PIP signal is
generated in the PCM using the crankshafi position (CKP) sensor. For these applications the MIL
can be helpful in diagnosing a no start.
^ the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
^ the PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (KLOS).
^ the MIL circuit is shorted to ground (applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit).
^ The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if:
^ an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present.
^ the MIL circuit is open (applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit).
^ To turn off the MIL afier a repair a reset command from the diagnostic tool must be sent or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
^ For all MIL concerns go to Symptom Charts.
^ If the MIL flashes at a steady rate a severe misfire condition may exist.
^ If the MIL flashes erratically the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3078
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3086
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3087
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3090
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3091
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3092
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3093
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM will turn on the heater
by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3096
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3097
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3098
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3102
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3105
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
> Page 3111
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
> Page 3112
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
Removal and Installation
1. CAUTION: Prior to removal of the SJB, it is necessary to upload module configuration
information to a diagnostic tool. This
information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the
floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from
the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3117
7. Remove the SJB screw. 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the SJB. 9. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the SJB. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) torque based electronic throttle control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand
(pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the PCM, and an accelerator pedal assembly to
control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable
operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS), and
mechanical throttle body.
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable cam
timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions).
Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators.
- Eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve.
- Better airflow range.
- Packaging (no cable).
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality.
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a warning indicator (wrench light) on the
instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are accompanied by DTCs and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II ETB has the following characteristics 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a
DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle
plate shaft is 17:1.
2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore
parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle when no
power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger
than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h
(30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (-0.75
degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable
and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle
plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not
required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle
body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC
valve.
6. The throttle position (TP) sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The
redundant throttle position signals are required for
increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage.
- Signal return (ground).
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3121
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and
APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and
pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor
assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts).
- 2 signal return (ground) circuits.
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts).
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts).
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a
fault. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect
by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value will be substituted for an
incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3122
GEN II ETC System
The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable cam timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal
position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate
corrective action.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3123
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3124
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1)
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2)
Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check:
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check:
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3125
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- Greater than or equal to 5% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on,
engine off.
- Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero
throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up.
- Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0
degrees (hard-stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty
cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle.
- Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle
angle.
- Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable
of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3130
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3131
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3132
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3135
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3136
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EEPROM)
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
integrated circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate fault code P1635
or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various
hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this
procedure properly may generate fault code P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An
incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for fault code P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and four wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block will display on the diagnostic tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the diagnostic tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again
to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. There are other
enhanced diagnostic tools that may have programming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturer's user manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the
VID block is blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an
automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry
into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
the use of a diagnostic tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle.
The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Manual data entry must be Carried out if the old module is damaged or incapable of
communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible diagnostic tool, select and
carry out the Module/Parameter programming, referring to the manufacturer's user manual. Make
certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile,
(rev/mile = 83,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
MSOF/ESOF may result in codes P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built
Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the diagnostic tool.
Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and L-M
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft website at www.motorcraft.com. From the
Motorcraft homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As Built Data.
For Ford and L-M technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS
website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using the WDS or New
Generation Star (NGS).
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) > Page 3139
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) stud bolt
nut and position the wiring harness aside.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the stud bolts and the PCM.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the PCM cowl seal. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3143
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3144
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3152
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3153
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3154
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3155
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3159
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3160
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3161
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3165
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) switch
electrical connector. 3. Rotate the CPP switch clockwise and remove the CPP switch. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3169
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3173
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3174
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3175
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3176
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3180
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3181
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The CHT sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature.
The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer
coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM
would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling
system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a
result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe
cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home
capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling
Strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3182
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Detach the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor
cover and position aside. 3. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the
CHT.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level
Input
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Level Input
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
NOTE: The Ford GT will use a piezoelectric sonar type fuel level sensor. The sensor is located in
the tank and the sensor signal is provided as a communications network message by the
instrument cluster to the PCM.
The fuel level input (FLI) is either a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP)
module or a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level
Input > Page 3187
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level
Input > Page 3188
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level
Input > Page 3189
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level
Input > Page 3190
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail
Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure.
The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance
decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail
Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3195
Fuel Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP
leak check monitor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 3200
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 3201
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor > Page 3202
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
Typical Stand Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 3206
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 design types of AT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in
the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3210
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3211
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3212
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3216
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable cam timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3224
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3225
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3228
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3229
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3230
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3231
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM will turn on the heater
by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3234
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3235
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR
Exploded View
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3236
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3240
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3243
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 3249
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 3250
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3254
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3257
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3258
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
3262
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
3263
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
3264
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3268
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3271
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity,
the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3275
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3278
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3279
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3283
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3284
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3285
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3289
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of
engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle, and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM determines the phase angle based on air
flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the
PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS
systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system
applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The
elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake
valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) System
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth
equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8
engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The
extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A
crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to
determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed
throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part
and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle
position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired
and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3290
will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related
DTC will also be set when the fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow
of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3294
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3297
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity,
the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation
Secondary Air Injection Bypass Solenoid
For information on the secondary air injection bypass solenoid, refer to the description of the
Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation
AIR DIVERTER VALVE
Air Injection (AIR) Diverter Valve
The secondary AIR diverter valve is used with the electric AIR pump to provide on/off control of air
to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the electric AIR pump is on and vacuum is
supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the electric AIR
pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check valve disk is
held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents the back
flow of the exhaust into the secondary AIR system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation
Electric Secondary Air Injection Pump
For information on the electric secondary air injection pump, refer to the description of the
Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Catalyst and Exhaust Systems Overview
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen
carbon dioxide (C02) and water vapor (H20). However~ it also contains carbon monoxide (CO)
oxides of nitrogen (NO) hydrogen (H) and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO NO and HCs
are major air pollutants and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold front exhaust pipe front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S) rear exhaust pipe catalyst HO2S a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes.
Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on-board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
PCM. For information on the OBD catalyst monitor refer to the description for the Catalyst
Efficiency Monitor in this section.
The number of HO2S used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on the
vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV ULEV PZEV). On most vehicles only 2 HO2S are used
in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S1 1/H02S21) before the catalyst will be used for
primary fuel control while the ones afier the catalyst (H02S12/H02S22) will be used to monitor
catalyst efficiency. However some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) will use 3 HO2S sensors
for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S1 1/H02S21) located before the catalyst are
used for primary fuel control the stream 2 sensors (H02S12/H02S22) are used to monitor the
light-off catalyst and the stream 3 sensors (H02S13/H02S23) located afier the catalyst are used for
long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore afi oxygen sensor control). Current
PZEV vehicles use only a 4-cylinder engine so only the Bank 1 HO2S will be used.
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 301°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the
exhaust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3312
manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it will
light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the
catalyst lights of{ the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7: 1) for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NO conversion efficiency.
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO)
unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NO) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past
another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally the exhaust
emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Note: On some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust
stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1) one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream
2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted afier the light-off catalyst.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3313
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located afier the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line
with the light off catalyst or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts forming a
Y pipe configuration.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
The 3-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium
(Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and
CO and the reduction reaction of NO. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always
operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. For information on the HO2S refer to PCM Inputs
in this section.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter-2.3L Manifold
Special Tool(s)
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3316
Removal
1. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 2. Remove the 2 catalytic converter bracket bolts. 3. Remove
the 6 heat shield bolts and the heat shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3317
4. NOTE: If installing a new converter, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the catalyst
monitoring sensor for installation in the new
converter.
Disconnect the HO2S and the catalyst monitoring sensor electrical connectors.
5. Remove and discard the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. 6. Remove the catalytic converter from the
vehicle.
^ Discard the exhaust manifold gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.03 inch) replace the catalytic converter.
Inspect the catalytic converter for warpage across the manifold flange area.
2. Position a new exhaust manifold gasket on the engine.
3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to
develop an exhaust leak.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause
the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages.
Position the catalytic converter and tighten the 7 exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown. ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: Apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the sensors before installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3318
If installing a new converter, install the HO2S and the catalyst monitoring sensor using the special
tool. ^
Tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
5. Connect the H02S and the catalyst monitoring sensor electrical connectors. 6. Position the heat
shield and install the 6 heat shield bolts.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Install the 2 catalytic converter bracket bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. Install the exhaust flexible pipe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3319
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to
separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust
catalytic converter nuts.
^ To install tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic
converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly. 7. Separate the converter from the
muffler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3324
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve
For information on the EVAP canister purge valve, refer to the description of the Evaporative
Emission Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3325
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Removal
WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can
cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister
purge valve electrical connector.
3. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3326
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. Push the connector toward the tube to release pressure.
- Press the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling button and pull the fuel vapor tube to
disconnect.
4. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. 1
Press the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling lock tabs.
2 Disconnect the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling.
5. Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister purge valve from the bracket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the EVAP canister purge valve tab snaps and locks into place on the
bracket.
Install the EVAP canister purge valve on the bracket.
2. NOTE:
- Make sure the collar on the fuel vapor tube is inserted fully into the quick connect coupling before
the locking tab is locked.
- Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
Install the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. 1
Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube.
2 Press the quick connect coupling locking tab into position. Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3327
3. CAUTION: Make sure the vapor tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure the
tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
Install the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
4. Connect the EVAP canister purge valve electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery ground
cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
DUST SEPARATOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- The evaporative emissions system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can
cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Disconnect the 2 fuel vapor hoses from the dust separator. 4. Slide the dust separator out of the
retainer clip in the emission canister bracket. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can
cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3334
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
vent solenoid electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the fuel vapor hose from the dust separator.
5. Squeeze the coupling opposite of the release tabs and pull to release the fuel vapor tube quick
connect coupling from the EVAP canister. 6. Remove the 2 nuts, 3 bolts and the EVAP canister
assembly.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Carry out the evaporative emission system leak
test. See: Testing and Inspection/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test 9. Carry out the
evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Evaporative
Emission Repair Verification Drive
Cycle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair
FUEL VAPOR CONTROL TUBE ASSEMBLY VALVE
Disconnect Tool, Fuel Pipe
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can
cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3338
1. Remove the fuel tank.
2. Squeeze the coupling opposite the release tabs and pull to release the fuel vapor tube quick
connect coupling from the fuel vapor control tube
assembly valve fitting.
3. Squeeze the coupling opposite of the release tabs and pull to release the fuel vapor control
assembly valve tube quick connect coupling from the
evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister vent solenoid.
4. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve quick connect
coupling from the fuel filter vapor tube. Remove the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3339
1. CAUTION: Make sure the vapor tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure the
tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
Install the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve and install the fuel vapor tube quick connect
coupling onto the fuel filter vapor tube. Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
2. Press the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve quick connect coupling onto the EVAP canister
fitting until it locks in place and is fully seated.
- Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged.
3. Press the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling onto the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve
fitting until it locks in place and is fully seated.
- Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
4. Install the fuel tank. 5. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test 6. Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing
and Inspection/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive
Cycle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation
Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation
CANISTER VENT (CV) SOLENOID
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
For information on the CV solenoid, refer to the description of the Evaporative Emission Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3346
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3347
Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation
CANISTER VENT (CV) SOLENOID
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the EVAP leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP canister from the
atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in
the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3348
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can
cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister assembly. 4. Disconnect the fuel vapor hose
from the EVAP canister vent solenoid. 5. Release the evaporative emission canister vent solenoid
from the evaporative hydrocarbon filter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3349
- Apply oil to the EVAP canister vent solenoid O-ring seal prior to installation.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Carry out the evaporative emission system leak
test. See: Testing and Inspection/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test 8. Carry out the
evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Evaporative
Emission Repair Verification Drive
Cycle
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Control Module: Description and Operation
EGR SYSTEM MODULE (ESM)
Overview
EGR System Module (ESM)
The ESM is an updated DPFE EGR system. It functions in the same manner as the conventional
DPFE system, however the various system components have been integrated into a single
component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake
manifold with a metal gasket that forms the measuring orifice. This arrangement increases system
reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to
the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute
pressure (MAP). The system provides the PCM with a differential DPFE signal, identical to a
traditional DPFE system.
The delta pressure feedback EGR monitor is comprised of a series of electrical tests and functional
tests that monitor various aspects of the EGR system operation.
First, the DPFE sensor input circuit is checked for out of range values (P1400/P0405
P1401/P0406). The EVR output circuit is checked for opens and shorts (P1409/P0403).
NOTE: EGR normally has large amounts of water vapor that are the result of the engine
combustion process. During cold ambient temperatures, under some circumstances, water vapor
can freeze in the DPFE sensor, hoses, as well as other components in the EGR system. In order to
prevent MIL illumination for temporary freezing, the following logic is used.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected below 0°C (32°F), only the EGR system is disabled for
the current driving cycle. A DTC is not stored and the I/M readiness status for the EGR monitor will
not change. The EGR monitor will, however, continue to operate. If the EGR monitor determines
that the malfunction is no longer present, the EGR system will be enabled and normal system
operation will be restored.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected above 0°C (32°F), the EGR system and the EGR monitor
is disabled for the current driving cycle. A DTC is stored and the MIL is illuminated if the
malfunction has been detected on 2 consecutive driving cycles.
After the vehicle has warmed up and normal EGR rates are being commanded by the PCM, the
low flow check is carried out. Since the EGR system is a closed loop system, the EGR system will
deliver the requested EGR flow as long as it has the capability to do so. If the EVR duty cycle is
very high (greater than 80% duty cycle), the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is
evaluated to determine the amount of EGR system restriction. If the differential pressure is below a
calibrated threshold, a low flow malfunction is indicated (P0401/P0406).
Finally, the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is also checked at idle with zero
requested EGR flow to carry out the high flow check. If the differential pressure exceeds a
calibrated limit, it indicates a stuck open EGR valve or debris temporarily lodged under the EGR
valve seat (P0402).
If the inferred ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F), or greater than 60°C (140°F), or the
altitude is greater than 8,000 feet (BARO less than 22.5 in-Hg), the EGR monitor cannot be run
reliably. In these conditions, a timer starts to accumulate the time in these conditions. If the vehicle
leaves these extreme conditions, the timer starts to decrement, and, if conditions permit, will
attempt to complete the EGR flow monitor. If the timer reaches 800 seconds, the EGR monitor is
disabled for the remainder of the current driving cycle and the EGR Monitor I/M Readiness bit will
be set to a ready condition after one such driving cycle. Vehicles will require 2 such driving cycles
for the EGR monitor to be set to a ready condition.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3357
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
EGR VACUUM REGULATOR (EVR) SOLENOID
For information on the EVR solenoid, refer to Exhaust Gas Recirculation Systems Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY
Orifice Tube Assembly
The orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake
manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and 2 pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a
measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential
across the orifice is picked up by the DPFE sensor which provides feedback to the PCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3364
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3365
EGR Valve: Description and Operation
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE
Typical EGR Valve
Test Graph
The EGR valve in the DPFE system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated. The valve increases or
decreases the flow of exhaust gas recirculation. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm
overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa
(1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa
(4.5 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not
measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3366
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the
air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical
connector. 5. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant outlet. 6. Disconnect the coolant
hose from the EGR valve. 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve.
- Discard the gasket.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Clean and inspect the EGR gasket mating surfaces.
9. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System > Page 3372
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System > Page 3373
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Separator: Service and Repair
CRANKCASE VENT OIL SEPARATOR
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the intake manifold. 3. Remove
the 8 bolts and the crankcase vent oil separator.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Clean the engine block mating surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the intake manifold.
3. Disengage the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve cap from the two tabs and remove the
PCV valve. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Emission Control
Systems > EGR Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Control Module: Description and Operation
EGR SYSTEM MODULE (ESM)
Overview
EGR System Module (ESM)
The ESM is an updated DPFE EGR system. It functions in the same manner as the conventional
DPFE system, however the various system components have been integrated into a single
component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake
manifold with a metal gasket that forms the measuring orifice. This arrangement increases system
reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to
the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute
pressure (MAP). The system provides the PCM with a differential DPFE signal, identical to a
traditional DPFE system.
The delta pressure feedback EGR monitor is comprised of a series of electrical tests and functional
tests that monitor various aspects of the EGR system operation.
First, the DPFE sensor input circuit is checked for out of range values (P1400/P0405
P1401/P0406). The EVR output circuit is checked for opens and shorts (P1409/P0403).
NOTE: EGR normally has large amounts of water vapor that are the result of the engine
combustion process. During cold ambient temperatures, under some circumstances, water vapor
can freeze in the DPFE sensor, hoses, as well as other components in the EGR system. In order to
prevent MIL illumination for temporary freezing, the following logic is used.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected below 0°C (32°F), only the EGR system is disabled for
the current driving cycle. A DTC is not stored and the I/M readiness status for the EGR monitor will
not change. The EGR monitor will, however, continue to operate. If the EGR monitor determines
that the malfunction is no longer present, the EGR system will be enabled and normal system
operation will be restored.
If an EGR system malfunction is detected above 0°C (32°F), the EGR system and the EGR monitor
is disabled for the current driving cycle. A DTC is stored and the MIL is illuminated if the
malfunction has been detected on 2 consecutive driving cycles.
After the vehicle has warmed up and normal EGR rates are being commanded by the PCM, the
low flow check is carried out. Since the EGR system is a closed loop system, the EGR system will
deliver the requested EGR flow as long as it has the capability to do so. If the EVR duty cycle is
very high (greater than 80% duty cycle), the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is
evaluated to determine the amount of EGR system restriction. If the differential pressure is below a
calibrated threshold, a low flow malfunction is indicated (P0401/P0406).
Finally, the differential pressure indicated by the DPFE sensor is also checked at idle with zero
requested EGR flow to carry out the high flow check. If the differential pressure exceeds a
calibrated limit, it indicates a stuck open EGR valve or debris temporarily lodged under the EGR
valve seat (P0402).
If the inferred ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F), or greater than 60°C (140°F), or the
altitude is greater than 8,000 feet (BARO less than 22.5 in-Hg), the EGR monitor cannot be run
reliably. In these conditions, a timer starts to accumulate the time in these conditions. If the vehicle
leaves these extreme conditions, the timer starts to decrement, and, if conditions permit, will
attempt to complete the EGR flow monitor. If the timer reaches 800 seconds, the EGR monitor is
disabled for the remainder of the current driving cycle and the EGR Monitor I/M Readiness bit will
be set to a ready condition after one such driving cycle. Vehicles will require 2 such driving cycles
for the EGR monitor to be set to a ready condition.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SYSTEM
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System Operation
The differential pressure feedback EGR system consists of a differential pressure feedback EGR
sensor, EGR vacuum regulator (EVR) solenoid, EGR valve, orifice tube assembly, powertrain
control module (PCM), and connecting wires and vacuum hoses. Operation of the system is as
follows:
1. The DPFE system receives signals from the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or
cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor, intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and crankshaft
position (CKP) sensor to provide information on engine operating conditions to the PCM. The
engine must be warm, stable, and running at a moderate load and RPM before the EGR system is
activated. The PCM deactivates EGR during idle, extended wide open throttle, or whenever a
failure is detected in an EGR component or EGR required input.
2. The PCM calculates the desired amount of EGR flow for a given engine condition. It then
determines the desired pressure drop across the
metering orifice required to achieve that flow and outputs the corresponding signal to the EVR
solenoid.
3. The EVR solenoid receives a variable duty cycle signal (0 to 100%). The higher the duty cycle
the more vacuum the solenoid diverts to the EGR
valve.
4. The increase in vacuum acting on the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the valve spring and
begins to lift the EGR valve pintle off its seat, causing
exhaust gas to flow into the intake manifold.
5. Exhaust gas flowing through the EGR valve must first pass through the EGR metering orifice.
With one side of the orifice exposed to exhaust
backpressure and the other to the intake manifold, a pressure drop is created across the orifice
whenever there is EGR flow. When the EGR valve closes, there is no longer flow across the
metering orifice and pressure on both sides of the orifice is the same. The PCM constantly targets
a desired pressure drop across the metering orifice to achieve the desired EGR flow.
6. The DPFE sensor measures the actual pressure drop across the metering orifice and relays a
proportional voltage signal (0 to 5 volts) to the PCM.
The PCM uses this feedback signal to correct for any errors in achieving the desired EGR flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 3391
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR (DPFE) Sensor
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
For information on the DPFE sensor, refer to the description of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) System > Page 3392
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR (DPFE) SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR (DPFE) Sensor
The tube mounted DPFE sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic DPFE sensors and
uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Locations > Page 3398
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
On some applications there is a pressure test point with a Schrader fitting in the fuel rail that
relieves the fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for repair and diagnostic
procedures. Before repairing or testing the fuel system, read any WARNING, CAUTION, and
HANDLING information. On vehicles not equipped with a Schrader valve, use the Rotunda Fuel
Pressure Test Kit #134-R0087 or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle Speed .....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 680 - 750 RPM
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3410
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3411
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accelerator cable from the rubber plunger.
2. Position the plunger rearward and remove the cable from the accelerator pedal. 3. Remove the 2
bolts and the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3412
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3420
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3424
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3425
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3426
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3427
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information >
Specifications
Fuel: Specifications
Fuel Type .............................................................................................................................................
................................................ Unleaded 87 Octane
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
FUEL CAP INDICATOR LAMP
The fuel cap indicator lamp (FCIL) is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The
PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines that there is a failure
in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be
detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
NOTE: The FCIL on the Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Explorer Sport Trac, and Ranger is a
dedicated output signal that is controlled by the PCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire
hazard.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 3. After the
engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply
manifold pressure has been released. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. When fuel
system service is complete, install the fuel pump relay.
6. NOTE: It may take more than 1 key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
7. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications
Resistance ...........................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 11 - 18 Ohms
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3442
Fuel Injector: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Fuel Injector Flow and Leakage ...................................................................................... Refer to
Pinpoint Test HC13 at Computers and Control Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3445
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3446
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3447
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3448
Fuel Injector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3449
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3450
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3451
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
Fuel Injectors
For information on the fuel injectors, refer to the description of the Fuel Systems
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3456
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3457
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3458
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Regulator
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel Pressure Regulator
The fuel pressure regulator is attached to the fuel rail downstream of the fuel injectors. It regulates
the fuel pressure supplied to the fuel injectors. The regulator is a diaphragm-operated relief valve.
One side of the diaphragm senses the fuel pressure and the other side is connected to the intake
manifold vacuum. Fuel pressure is established by a spring preload applied to the diaphragm.
Balancing one side of the diaphragm with manifold vacuum maintains a constant fuel pressure drop
across the fuel injectors. Fuel pressure is high when engine vacuum is low. Excess fuel is
bypassed through the fuel pressure regulator and returned through the fuel return line to the fuel
tank.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Fuel Tank Pressure Transducer Sensor
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Fuel Tank Pressure Transducer Sensor > Page 3463
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail Pressure/Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 3466
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 3467
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3468
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3472
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
On some applications there is a pressure test point with a Schrader fitting in the fuel rail that
relieves the fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for repair and diagnostic
procedures. Before repairing or testing the fuel system, read any WARNING, CAUTION, and
HANDLING information. On vehicles not equipped with a Schrader valve, use the Rotunda Fuel
Pressure Test Kit #134-R0087 or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER
The fuel rail pulse damper is located on the fuel rail and reduces the fuel system noise caused by
the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold
vacuum to avoid fuel spillage if the pulse damper diaphragm ruptures. (The fuel rail pulse damper
should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator; it does not regulate the fuel rail pressure.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations > Page 3481
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
On some applications there is a pressure test point with a Schrader fitting in the fuel rail that
relieves the fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for repair and diagnostic
procedures. Before repairing or testing the fuel system, read any WARNING, CAUTION, and
HANDLING information. On vehicles not equipped with a Schrader valve, use the Rotunda Fuel
Pressure Test Kit #134-R0087 or equivalent.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3485
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3489
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3490
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL
Exploded View
Removal
WARNING: -
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 3494
3. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
NOTE: Carefully release the locking tabs to avoid breakage.
Release the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick release coupling primary locking tab.
4. Rotate the primary locking tab to the fully opened position and squeeze the secondary locking
tabs to release the locking mechanism.
5. Push the locking mechanism outward and release the tube. 6. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure
and temperature vacuum tube and electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the 4 fuel injector electrical
connectors. 8. Remove the 2 fuel rail bolts and detach the wiring retainers from the fuel rail.
9. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly and then remove the spacers.
10. Remove the 4 fuel injector retainer clips and the fuel injectors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 3495
- Remove and discard the 8 fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary
O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak.
Do not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil.
Install the fuel injectors and the retainer clips.
2. Position the fuel rail spacers and the fuel rail. 3. Install the fuel rail bolts and attach the wiring
retainers.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature
vacuum tube and electrical connector.
6. NOTE:
- Make sure the collar on the fuel tube is inserted fully into the quick release coupling before the
locking tang is locked.
- Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting a tube into the connector.
Connect the fuel tube quick release coupling. Connect the quick lock coupling to the tube.
- Press the quick connect coupling locking tangs into position.
- Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
7. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair
FUEL LINES
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3499
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3500
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3501
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- The evaporative emissions system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, and
possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquid fuel are present in the area. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be
relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire hazard.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
4. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3502
NOTE: Carefully release the locking tabs to avoid breakage.
Release the fuel rail-to-fuel supply tube quick connect coupling primary locking tab.
5. Rotate the primary locking tab to the fully opened position and squeeze the secondary locking
tabs to release the locking mechanism.
6. Push the locking mechanism outward and release the fuel supply tube.
7. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
NOTE: If the vapor tube or retainer clip is broken or damaged, install a suitable fuel tube
disconnect tool to separate the retainer clip legs. Once the retainer clip legs have separated, lift the
clip out of the connector housing, lifting the stamped side of the connector body.
Disconnect the remaining fuel supply tube quick connect coupling and remove the fuel supply tube.
Push the connector toward the tube to release the pressure.
- Press the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling button and pull the fuel supply tube to
disconnect.
- Remove the fuel supply tube.
8. To access fuel vapor quick connect coupling on the intake manifold, remove the LH lower splash
shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3503
9. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
NOTE: If the vapor tube or retainer clip is broken or damaged, install a suitable fuel tube
disconnect tool to separate the retainer clip legs. Once the retainer clip legs have separated, lift the
clip out of the connector housing, lifting the stamped side of the connector body.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube quick connect couplings from the intake manifold and the emissions
canister purge valve. Push the connector toward the tube to release the pressure.
- Press the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling button and pull the fuel vapor tube to
disconnect.
10. Detach the fuel vapor tube retainers.
- Remove the fuel vapor tube.
11. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling from the evaporative emissions (EVAP)
canister purge valve. 1
Press the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling locking tabs.
2 Disconnect the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling.
12. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Disconnect the fuel supply jumper tube and the fuel vapor tube quick connect couplings. 1
Press the quick connect coupling locking tabs.
2 Disconnect the fuel supply jumper tube and the fuel vapor tube quick connect couplings.
13. Release the fuel supply and fuel vapor tubes from the frame-mounted retainer clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3504
14. Unclip the fuel tube retainer clip from the mounting stud to service the fuel supply and vapor
tubes as an assembly. The retainer clip will also open
to service the tubes individually. Remove the fuel supply and fuel vapor tubes from the vehicle.
Installation
1. Install the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor tubes.
- Make sure the retainer clips snap into place when installing onto the studs. Pull on the clips to
make sure they are correctly seated.
2. NOTE: Make sure the tubes are correctly snapped into the clip and the clip is snapped securely
into the subframe.
Install the fuel supply and fuel vapor tubes into the frame-mounted retainer clips.
3. NOTE:
- Make sure the collar on the fuel tube is inserted fully into the quick connect coupling before the
locking tab is locked.
- Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting a tube into the connector.
Connect the fuel supply jumper tube and the fuel vapor tube quick connect couplings. 1
Connect the quick connect couplings.
2 Press the quick connect coupling locking tabs into position. Pull on the fittings to make sure they are fully engaged.
4. NOTE:
- Make sure the collar on the fuel tube is inserted fully into the quick connect coupling before the
locking tab is locked.
- Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting a tube into the connector.
Connect the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling to the EVAP canister purge valve. 1
Connect the quick connect couplings to the EVAP canister purge valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3505
2 Press the quick connect coupling locking tab into position. Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
5. Install the fuel vapor tube.
- Attach the fuel vapor tube retainers.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel vapor tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make
sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the
tube.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tubes before inserting the tubes into the connectors.
Connect the fuel vapor tube quick connect couplings to the intake manifold and the EVAP canister
purge valve.
7. Install the LH lower splash shield.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel supply tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make
sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the
tube.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting a tube into the connector.
Install the fuel supply tube and connect the quick connect coupling.
9. NOTE:
- Make sure the collar on the fuel tube is inserted fully into the quick connect coupling before the
locking tang is locked.
- Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting a tube into the connector.
Connect the fuel tube to fuel rail quick connect coupling. Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube.
- Press the quick connect coupling locking tab into position.
- Pull on the fitting to make sure it is fully engaged.
10. Connect the battery ground cable. 11. Turn the ignition key to the ON position to pressurize the
fuel system. 12. Visually inspect the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3510
Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3511
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
- The evaporative emissions system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not
present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery
ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, and
possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquid fuel are present in the area. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be
relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard.
- The fuel in the tank may be pressurized. Remove the fuel tank cap slowly. If a hissing sound is
heard, wait until the condition stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. If these precautions are
not followed, fuel may spray and cause personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3.
Disconnect the battery ground cable. 4. Remove the 2 fuel filler pipe mounting screws. 5. Remove
the rivets and the fuel tank tube shield. 6. Remove the remaining fuel filler pipe mounting screw.
7. CAUTION: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the
connector retaining clip area before separating the tube.
Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve quick connect
coupling from the fuel tank filler tube.
8. Detach the fuel vapor vent hose retainer clips. 9. Disconnect the fuel vapor vent hose from the
evaporative emissions canister. 10. Reposition the clamp and disconnect the fuel filler pipe hose
from the fuel tank.
- Remove the fuel tank filler pipe as a complete assembly.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3512
1. Position the fuel tank filler pipe assembly in the vehicle.
- Install the fuel filler pipe hose and clamp onto the fuel tank.
- Tighten to 4 Nm (36 lb-in).
2. Connect the fuel vapor vent hose to the evaporative emissions canister. 3. Attach the fuel vapor
vent hose retainer clips.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the vapor tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure the
tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
Connect the fuel vapor control tube assembly valve quick connect coupling onto the fuel tank filler
tube. Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged.
5. Install the fuel filler pipe mounting screw.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Using the special tool, install the fuel tank tube shield with new rivets. 7. Install the 2 fuel filler
pipe mounting screws.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (42 lb-in).
8. Turn the ignition key to the ON position to pressurize the fuel system. 9. Visually inspect the fuel
system for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 05-18-4 > Sep > 05 > Fuel
System - Fuel Tank Slow to Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off
Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Fuel System - Fuel Tank Slow to Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off
TSB 05-18-4
09/22/05
SLOW FUEL FILL - REPEAT FILLING STATION PUMP SHUT-OFF
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a slow fuel fill or
frequent filling station pump shut-offs, when refueling.
ACTION Install a revised fuel tank filler pipe. The revised pipe has an improved radius to increase
the fuel flow rate. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 310-01A.
NOTE
THIS CONDITION MAY STILL OCCUR ON SOME VEHICLES EVEN AFTER THE REVISED
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE HAS BEEN INSTALLED. SOME FILLING STATION PUMPS MAY
DELIVER FUEL AT A RATE GREATER THAN THE DOT SPECIFICATION, OR MAY USE
NOZZLE DESIGNS THAT ARE OVERLY SENSITIVE AND TEND TO SHUT OFF
PREMATURELY. THIS IS NORMAL.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051804A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner: 0.7 Hr.
Install A Revised Filler Neck (Do Not Use With 9034A)
051804B 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid: 0.8 Hr.
Install A Revised Filler Neck (Do Not Use With 9034A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A089 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 05-18-4 > Sep
> 05 > Fuel System - Fuel Tank Slow to Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off
Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Tank Slow to Fill/Nozzle Shuts
Off
TSB 05-18-4
09/22/05
SLOW FUEL FILL - REPEAT FILLING STATION PUMP SHUT-OFF
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a slow fuel fill or
frequent filling station pump shut-offs, when refueling.
ACTION Install a revised fuel tank filler pipe. The revised pipe has an improved radius to increase
the fuel flow rate. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 310-01A.
NOTE
THIS CONDITION MAY STILL OCCUR ON SOME VEHICLES EVEN AFTER THE REVISED
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE HAS BEEN INSTALLED. SOME FILLING STATION PUMPS MAY
DELIVER FUEL AT A RATE GREATER THAN THE DOT SPECIFICATION, OR MAY USE
NOZZLE DESIGNS THAT ARE OVERLY SENSITIVE AND TEND TO SHUT OFF
PREMATURELY. THIS IS NORMAL.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051804A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner: 0.7 Hr.
Install A Revised Filler Neck (Do Not Use With 9034A)
051804B 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid: 0.8 Hr.
Install A Revised Filler Neck (Do Not Use With 9034A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A089 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 3530
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 3531
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 3532
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel
System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
Fuel Tank Vent: Customer Interest Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
TSB 08-5-5
03/17/08
SLOW FUEL FILL AND/OR DTC P0451
FORD: 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner
2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-25-7 to update the Title and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a slow fuel fill concern or a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) P0451 present. The condition may be caused by water/moisture or other
contamination entering the fuel filler vent line and then freezing and/or causing a blockage.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition by relocating the fuel filler
vent line.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
When performing this procedure it is not necessary to:
^ Drain any fuel from the tank
^ Remove the stone shield from the filler pipe
^ Disconnect the filler pipe from the fuel tank
NOTE
ANY WATER/MOISTURE OR OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE EVAPORATIVE VENT SYSTEM MUST
BE REMOVED.
1. With the vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the left rear wheel.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap.
4. Remove the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws.
5. Remove the single lower filler pipe mounting screw.
6. Carefully pull the upper end of the filler pipe away from the inner wheel well to gain access to the
vent line.
7. Cut any tape or plastic straps holding the black plastic convoluted vent line to the filler pipe or
underbody.
8. Pull the black plastic convoluted vent line underneath the vehicle.
9. Remove the vent line from the dust separator attached to the canister assembly and clear out
the line using compressed air.
10. Inspect the dust separator for water/moisture or any obstruction. If water/moisture or
obstructions are present follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 310-00 pinpoint test A. If no
water/moisture or obstructions are present reattach vent line to dust separator and continue to next
step.
11. Remove but do not discard the spider screen (vent cap) from the end of the vent line.
12. Measuring from the open end of the vent line, cut off and discard the last 13" (35 cm).
13. Reinstall the spider screen (vent cap) in the vent line.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel
System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 > Page 3541
14. Route the shortened vent line and spider screen (vent cap) as shown in Figure 1.
15. Push the spider screen (vent cap) at least 2" (50 mm) into the open subframe and body section
alignment hole.
16. Secure the vent line to the fuel tank strap with a plastic tie strap.
17. Reposition the filler pipe into its original position.
18. Install the lower filler pipe mounting screw and tighten to 89 lb-in (10 N.m).
19. Install the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws and tighten to 27 lb-in (3 N.m).
20. Install the fuel filler cap.
21. Reinstall the wheel and tighten to 98 lb-ft (133 N.m).
22. Lower the vehicle from the hoist.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
080505A 2005-2008 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid And Mariner, 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid: Relocate Fuel Filler Vent Hose. Includes
Time to Remove Left Rear Wheel, Fuel Cap And Partially Remove The Fuel Filler Pipe And Shield
(Do Not Use With 9030A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A089 55
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar >
08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
Fuel Tank Vent: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
TSB 08-5-5
03/17/08
SLOW FUEL FILL AND/OR DTC P0451
FORD: 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner
2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-25-7 to update the Title and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a slow fuel fill concern or a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) P0451 present. The condition may be caused by water/moisture or other
contamination entering the fuel filler vent line and then freezing and/or causing a blockage.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition by relocating the fuel filler
vent line.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
When performing this procedure it is not necessary to:
^ Drain any fuel from the tank
^ Remove the stone shield from the filler pipe
^ Disconnect the filler pipe from the fuel tank
NOTE
ANY WATER/MOISTURE OR OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE EVAPORATIVE VENT SYSTEM MUST
BE REMOVED.
1. With the vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the left rear wheel.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap.
4. Remove the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws.
5. Remove the single lower filler pipe mounting screw.
6. Carefully pull the upper end of the filler pipe away from the inner wheel well to gain access to the
vent line.
7. Cut any tape or plastic straps holding the black plastic convoluted vent line to the filler pipe or
underbody.
8. Pull the black plastic convoluted vent line underneath the vehicle.
9. Remove the vent line from the dust separator attached to the canister assembly and clear out
the line using compressed air.
10. Inspect the dust separator for water/moisture or any obstruction. If water/moisture or
obstructions are present follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 310-00 pinpoint test A. If no
water/moisture or obstructions are present reattach vent line to dust separator and continue to next
step.
11. Remove but do not discard the spider screen (vent cap) from the end of the vent line.
12. Measuring from the open end of the vent line, cut off and discard the last 13" (35 cm).
13. Reinstall the spider screen (vent cap) in the vent line.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar >
08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 > Page 3547
14. Route the shortened vent line and spider screen (vent cap) as shown in Figure 1.
15. Push the spider screen (vent cap) at least 2" (50 mm) into the open subframe and body section
alignment hole.
16. Secure the vent line to the fuel tank strap with a plastic tie strap.
17. Reposition the filler pipe into its original position.
18. Install the lower filler pipe mounting screw and tighten to 89 lb-in (10 N.m).
19. Install the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws and tighten to 27 lb-in (3 N.m).
20. Install the fuel filler cap.
21. Reinstall the wheel and tighten to 98 lb-ft (133 N.m).
22. Lower the vehicle from the hoist.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
080505A 2005-2008 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid And Mariner, 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid: Relocate Fuel Filler Vent Hose. Includes
Time to Remove Left Rear Wheel, Fuel Cap And Partially Remove The Fuel Filler Pipe And Shield
(Do Not Use With 9030A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A089 55
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3554
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor > Page 3557
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL TEMPERATURE (FRT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
The FRT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRT sensor measures the temperature of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3558
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3562
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE (APPLICATIONS WITHOUT ETC)
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED, also some
IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine
vacuum to operate.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- No touch start.
- Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up.
- Idle (corrects for engine load).
- Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function).
- Over-temperature idle boost.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3563
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the 3 screws, the pin-type retainer and the
upper and lower snow shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the
IAC valve.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
- Inspect the gasket and install new as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3567
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3568
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose
of the IES switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in
place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs the ball breaks loose from the magnet rolls up a
conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts
off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open it must be manually reset before restarting the
vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3569
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect
the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3573
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
Vehicles with automatic transaxle
2. Disconnect the vacuum tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
All vehicles
3. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 4. Loosen the 2 clamps and
remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
5. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from
entering the engine.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3577
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3578
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3583
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3587
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3588
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3592
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3593
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Resonator: Service and Repair
INTAKE AIR RESONATOR
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3597
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the LH inner fender splash shield. 3. Remove the bolt and the air intake resonator.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Make sure that the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
For information on the APP sensor, refer to the description for Torque Based Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3605
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3606
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3607
Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. If the hot wire electronic
sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3608
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Tank Pressure
Transducer Sensor
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Tank Pressure
Transducer Sensor > Page 3613
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 3616
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Rail
Pressure/Temperature Sensor > Page 3617
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3618
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3622
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail
Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The fuel return line
to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The relationship between fuel pressure
and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. Both
pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the
fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of
the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width
to decrease.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail
Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor > Page 3625
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
FUEL RAIL TEMPERATURE (FRT) SENSOR
Fuel Rail Temperature (FRT) Sensor
The FRT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRT sensor measures the temperature of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3626
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3630
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3631
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose
of the IES switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in
place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs the ball breaks loose from the magnet rolls up a
conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts
off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open it must be manually reset before restarting the
vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3632
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect
the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3636
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic
Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic
Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3639
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3640
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body System Overview
Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body System Overview
THROTTLE BODY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NOTE: This overview is for applications without electronic throttle control (ETC). For ETC
applications, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
The throttle body system meters air to the engine during idle, part throttle, and wide open throttle
(WOT) conditions. The throttle body system consists of an idle air control (IAC) valve assembly, an
idle air orifice, single or dual bores with butterfly valve throttle plates, and a throttle position (TP)
sensor. One other source of idle air flow is the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) system. The
combined idle air flow (from idle air orifice IAC flow and PCV flow) is measured by the MAF sensor
on all applications.
During idle, the throttle body assembly provides a set amount of air flow to the engine through the
idle air passage and the PCV valve. The IAC valve assembly provides additional air when
commanded by the PCM to maintain the proper engine idle speed under varying conditions. The
IAC valve assembly mounts directly to the intake manifold assembly in most applications. Idle
speed is controlled by the PCM and cannot be adjusted.
NOTE: The traditional idle air adjust procedure and the throttle return screw are no longer used on
OBD applications.
Throttle rotation is controlled by a cam/cable linkage to slow the initial opening rate of the throttle
plate. The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides a signal to the PCM. Some throttle
body applications provide an air supply channel upstream of the throttle plate to provide fresh air to
the PCV or IAC systems. Other throttle body applications provide individual vacuum taps
downstream of the throttle plate for PCV return, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR), evaporative
emission (EVAP), and miscellaneous control signals.
THROTTLE BODY SYSTEM HARDWARE
The major components of the throttle body assembly include the TP sensor, the IAC valve
assembly, and the throttle body housing assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body System Overview > Page 3645
Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body Housing
THROTTLE BODY HOUSING
The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece aluminum or plastic casting with an air
passage and a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle
(or closed) position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the throttle return stop. The
throttle return stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The
setting also establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the
closed plate air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area.
This sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation.
Features of the Throttle Body Assembly include:
1. Idle air control (IAC) valve assembly mounted directly to the throttle body assembly (some
vehicles). 2. A pre-set stop to locate the WOT position. 3. An air supply channel upstream of the
throttle plate to provide fresh air to the PCV system (some vehicles only). 4. Individual vacuum taps
for PCV, EGR, EVAP and miscellaneous control signals (some vehicles only). 5. PCV air return (if
applicable). 6. A throttle body-mounted TP sensor. 7. A sealant/coating on the throttle bore and
throttle plate makes the throttle body air flow tolerant to engine intake sludge accumulation. These
throttle body assemblies MUST NOT BE CLEANED and have a white/black attention decal
advising not to clean.
8. A non-adjustable stop screw for close plate idle air flow.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3646
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
THROTTLE BODY
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and cannot be cleaned, or
possible damage to the throttle body can occur.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Remove the upper
snow shield screw and pin-type retainer.
- Remove the upper snow shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Detach the accelerator and speed control cables from the throttle body. 5. Disconnect the throttle
position sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle body.
- Inspect the throttle body gasket and install new as necessary.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CABLE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3650
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the screw, pin-type retainer and the accelerator control cover shield.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: Vehicles use either a push-on design or slide-on design accelerator cable connector at
the throttle body. The slide-on design supersedes
the push-on design and is used as a replacement on all vehicles.
Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3651
3. Squeeze the tabs and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. 4. Remove the nuts and
the accelerator cable-to-valve cover stud brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Remove the accelerator cable grommet from the dash panel.
6. Remove the accelerator cable from the rubber plunger.
7. Position the plunger rearward and remove the cable from the accelerator pedal.
- Remove the accelerator cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3655
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR
For information on the electronic throttle body position sensor, refer to the description of the ETB in
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3658
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors the throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed the standards set by government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3659
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV)
Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV)
WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent Injury, be
careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated.
The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator
controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with
this system to indicate shutter position.
The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below approximately 2,600 RPM. The shutter is in the
closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake manifold. Above approximately
2,600 RPM the motorized unit is energized. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM
initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to
approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open.
1. The PCM uses the TP sensor and CKP signals to determine activation of the IMTV system.
There must be a positive change in voltage from the
TP sensor along with the increase in RPM to open the shutter.
2. The PCM uses the information from the input signals to control the IMTV. 3. When commanded
on by the PCM, the motorized actuator shutter opens up the end of the vertical separating wall at
high engine speeds to allow
both sides of the manifold to blend together.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Oder 1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3675
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3676
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3677
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3681
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3682
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3683
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3684
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
TSB 05-22-8
11/14/05
WDS COP KIT DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - COIL ON PLUG (COP) IGNITION SYSTEMS - ENGINE
MISFIRE OR ROUGH RUNNING
FORD: 1996-1999 Taurus SHO 1998-2006 Crown Victoria, Mustang 2000 Taurus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2003-2006 Focus 2004-2006 Taurus 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2006
E-Series, Expedition, F-150 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion, F-53 2001-2006
Escape 2002-2005 Explorer 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1998-2002 Continental 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 LS
1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1998-2006 Grand Marquis 2000 Sable 2004-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Montego
2002-2005 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-16-01 to update the vehicle applications and model years.
NOTE
FOLLOW THIS TSB PROCEDURE ONLY IF THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC MISFIRE TSBs/SSMs
RELEASED FOR THE VEHICLE SYMPTOM BEING EXPERIENCED.
ISSUE Approximately 50% of coil on plug (COP) coils returned for warranty do not have a problem.
ACTION The misfiring cylinder must be identified through Self-Test misfire codes or through WDS
Power Balance. Rule out base engine problems, rule out fuel problems, and then look at ignition
problems (be sure to rule out coil primary circuit issues). Once the above steps have been
completed, and the issue is in the secondary part of the ignition system, the oscilloscope procedure
outlined in this TSB can isolate the difference between a coil or spark plug problem.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The optional WDS COP Kit available through Rotunda will provide more accurate diagnosis and
help reduce replacement of non-defective parts. The Kit (418-F5528) can be purchased through
1-800-ROTUNDA.
The following material will detail the diagnostic steps on WDS to take the guesswork out of misfire
diagnosis using the COP Kit. The following procedure is for cylinder specific misfires and not
random misfires. Random misfires have a different root cause and are not covered by this TSB.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 3689
Misfire Definition: A misfiring cylinder is lacking power relative to the other cylinders. The causes
for a cylinder specific misfire could be fuel, spark, or mechanical problems.
Perform a thorough visual inspection. If no visible concerns are found use the following WDS tools
for misfire diagnosis:
^ Self-test (Check for codes first)
Power Balance (Identify the cylinder of concern)
^ Relative Compression (Rule out a possible mechanical issue)
^ Fuel (Make sure fuel injectors are not restricted)
^ Ignition (Make sure spark plugs and coils are working properly)
^ Oscilloscope (Detailed signal analysis)
NOTE
USE THE ENCYCLOPEDIA BUTTON IN THE LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE SCREEN FOR
DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE WDS TOOL BEING DISPLAYED.
If there is a self-test code identifying a particular cylinder then you just need to determine if it is a
fuel, ignition, or possibly a mechanical problem. Proceed to Step 2 after running Relative
Compression to rule out any mechanical issues. If there is no self-test code and the customer
concern is a miss, proceed to Step 1.
Step 1: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Power Balance)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 3690
The cylinder specific miss has to be identified as shown in the example in Figure 2 in order to
proceed with the remaining steps. If the miss does not occur at idle (in the bay), try to brake torque
the engine. This extra loading should reproduce the miss in the bay. If the miss cannot be
reproduced during brake torque, select Relative Compression under Powertrain on WDS before
going on a road test to rule out mechanical problems. If Relative Compression shows a problem
then the base engine issue must be serviced. If Relative Compression results are good (Figure 3),
road test under as many different driving conditions as possible until the miss occurs on Power
Balance. Some misses may be very intermiffent so be patient and concentrate on steady load
conditions. Once a cylinder dropout is identified proceed to Step 2.
Step 2: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Fuel System Test)
Run Fuel System Test on WDS to determine if there may be a fuel problem. After completing fuel
Pressure/Leakdown test, select Injector flow to isolate
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 3691
a restricted injector as shown in Figure 4. If all the injectors are within specification, proceed to
Step 3.
Step 3: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Ignition System Test)
Run Ignition System Test on WDS to determine if there is an ignition problem. Look at both
duration (DUR) and kilovolts (KV) and look for values that standout from the rest as shown in
Figure 5 and Figure 6.
NOTE
LIVE DISPLAY HAS TO AVERAGE IGNITION VALUES BECAUSE THERE IS TOO MUCH DATA
TO DISPLAY. MAKE A CAPTURE TO VIEW EACH ENGINE EVENT WITHOUT AVERAGING.
THIS CAN BE HELPFUL WHEN THE PROBLEM IS INTERMITTENT. IF THE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 3692
MISS IS EXTREMELY INTERMITTENT AND DOES NOT SHOW UP IN IGNITION, PROCEED TO
STEP 4.
If either spark duration or peak KV on the Red Probe (Suspect Cylinder) are offset from the values
displayed on the Black Probe (Known Good Cylinder) then the problem is in the ignition system.
Rule out coil primary circuit issues before proceeding to coil secondary issues such as the spark
plug , coil boot, or possibly the coil. Use the WDS Oscilloscope with the COP kit to determine if the
issue is the coil or the spark plug.
Step 4: (Select Toolbox, then Oscilloscope)
WARNING
SECONDARY IGNITION VOLTAGES ARE VERY HIGH. KEEP HANDS AND TOOLS AWAY
FROM THE END OF THE COIL THAT SUPPLIES THE SPARK.
SET-UP: With the engine off, pull the suspect coil from the cylinder well and turn it upside down so
the coil cannot spark to any other surface as shown in Figure 1. Wrap a clean shop cloth around
the hard shell of the coil to help keep the coil propped up and stable.
CAUTION
THE COIL BOOT CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE COIL SPARKS TO ANOTHER SURFACE DURING
THIS PROCEDURE.
Keep the coil connected to the harness and leave the WDS COP clip attached to the coil. Route
the coil clip wire and cable away from the coil being tested as well as other coils to avoid noise
interference. Disconnect the injector of the cylinder being tested so raw fuel is not washing the
cylinder. This is a stress test for the coil. The type of waveform displayed on the oscilloscope will
show whether a coil or the plug is the problem if all previous steps have been followed. Keep hands
and tools away from the end of the coil that supplies the spark.
COP Stress Test Procedure:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 3693
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 3694
Go to the Oscilloscope Tool and select Channel 3, then select Auto, then select
COP_STRESS_TEST_RED. This pre-configured setting will zoom-in on the peak firing of the coil
being tested. Start the engine and be sure the coil is not sparking to any surface. If the coil is
sparking to other surfaces, turn the engine off immediately and readjust the coil so it cannot spark
to any other surface. Restart the engine and touch the Red Man icon to start the oscilloscope. All
settings are pre-configured and no adjustments are necessary. Compare the waveform you get
with the examples provided in Figures 7, 8, and 9). Figure 7 is a good waveform. If your waveform
is similar to Figure 7 the coil is working correctly. Suspect the spark plug.
Figure 8 and Figure 9 are examples of problem coils. Replace the coil if the waveform is similar to
Figures 8 or 9. The coil is causing the misfire when the peak firing appears like those shown in
Figures 8 and 9. Notice the difference in the peak-firing signal when compared to the good peak
signal in Figure 7.
Figure 9 shows a more dramatic fault in the peak failure.
Most root causes of misfire issues can be identified quickly using the steps outlined above. Some
misfire issues can be difficult making the oscilloscope an important part of your diagnostic toolbox.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 05-13-4
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 3695
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3698
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3699
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3700
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3701
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3702
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3703
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 3704
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP)
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil On Plug (COP)
COIL ON PLUG (COP)
The COP ignition operates similar to standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per
plug. COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP Failure
Mode Effects Management (FMEM).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 3707
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack
COIL PACK
Horizontal Connector 6-Tower Coil Pack
Series 5 6-Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 3708
Four-Tower Coil Packs
The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed,
voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil.
The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the
secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as one spark
plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next
time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine
firing order.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3709
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to
the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 3713
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3717
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3718
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3719
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3724
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3729
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3730
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
F-150 Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.
1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the
sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to
select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or
circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (only used on F-150
4.2L applications) and the 2 pin connector variable reluctance type sensor used on all other vehicle
applications.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3731
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor
electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and the CMP.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
4. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8 (Engine, rear)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3735
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3736
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is
adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse
wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM The trigger wheel has a
total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed
information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the PCM uses the CKP signal to
synchronize the ignition system and track the rotation of the crankshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3737
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Timing Peg, Crankshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3738
3. Remove the plug.
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley bolt to position the number one cylinder at top dead center and install
the special tool. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6.
Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6-mm (0.23-in) x 18-mm (0.7-in) standard bolt in the crankshaft pulley.
2. Install the CKP sensor and the bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. NOTE: The CKP sensor alignment tool is supplied with the new sensor and is not available
separately.
Adjust the CKP sensor with the alignment jig. Tighten the CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 6-mm (0.23-in) bolt from the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3746
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3747
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3748
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the intake manifold. 4. Remove the bolt and the knock sensor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
............................. 1.25 - 1.35mm (0.049 - 0.053 in.)
Spark Plug Tightening Torque .............................................................................................................
........................................................ 12 Nm (9 lb.ft.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3752
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type
Spark Plug ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... SP448
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.
4. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before
removing the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3755
1. Inspect the spark plugs.
2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. Install the spark plugs.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before
attaching to the spark plugs.
Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3756
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
^ Clean the spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or wont or loose bearings.
^ Correct the oil leak concern.
^ Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture for excessive idling.
^
Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3757
4. Inspect for normal burning.
^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^
Install a new spark plug.
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by a white or light gray spots and with bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^
Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
^ Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls. the position of the TCS.
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch
in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3780
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3781
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3782
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3787
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3790
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3. Remove the TSS
sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3793
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3794
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor.
^ To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3795
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the VSS are accessed from the top of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General
PCM Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3804
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3805
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair
Overdrive Servo
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. NOTE: Servicing the intermediate/overdrive servo in the vehicle is only recommended in the
event of a leak. If the servo has failed it will be
necessary to remove and disassemble the transaxle to inspect the intermediate/overdrive band
assembly and direct clutch for damage.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid cooler line bracket and bolt and position it aside.
4. WARNING: The servo is under pressure. Servo and servo cover are under high spring force.
Use caution when removing servo cover.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3820
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to remove the retaining ring.
Using the special tool, remove the servo retaining ring. 1
Install the special tool.
2 Compress the servo assembly by tightening the bolt.
3 Remove the retaining ring.
5. Remove the servo cover assembly. 6. Remove the intermediate and overdrive servo piston and
return spring. 7. Wipe the servo piston and the servo cover cap with a lint free cloth.
8. CAUTION: Do not clean the rubber sealing surfaces of the servo piston and the servo cover cap
with cleaning solvent or damage to the sealing
surface may result.
Inspect the servo piston for cracks on its pressure surfaces and in the sealing area. Look for
damage near the point where the servo piston is attached to the servo rod.
9. Squeeze the servo piston lip for flexibility. If the lip feels brittle, install a new piston.
10. Inspect the servo retainer spring for cracks, breaks or deformation.
Installation
1. Install the return spring and the intermediate overdrive servo piston. 2. Install the servo cover
cap.
3. Install the special tool.
4. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to install the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to install the
retaining ring.
NOTE: If the servo cover will not seat deep enough in the bore to install the servo cover retaining
ring, use a blunt punch or small hammer and gently tap the cover around the outer edge until the
servo cover retaining ring can be installed.
Tighten the special tool bolt. ^
Install the servo cover retaining ring.
5. If the case is stamped WG, install a wide-groove snap ring, or the servo will be damaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3821
6. Loosen the special tool bolt.
^ When the spring tension is released, remove the special tool.
7. Install the transmission fluid cooler line and bolt.
^ Tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
8. Install the LH splash shield and the 7 retainers.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)..
9. Start the vehicle. Place the transmission range selector lever in each gear and allow to engage.
Check for leaks.
10. Check the transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 3829
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 3830
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity.......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................9.5L (10 quarts)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3833
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 3834
Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check Fluid Level and Condition
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. If your vehicle has been operated for
an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a trailer, the
vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking.
The transmission fluid level should be checked at normal operating temperatures, 66°C - 77°C
(150°F - 170°F), on a level surface. You can check the fluid level without driving if the outside
temperature is above 10°C (50°F). When the vehicle has not been driven, and the outside
temperature is above 10°C (50°F), the fluid level should be between the holes on the indicator. If
the transmission fluid is to be checked when the fluid is at room temperature, the fluid level
indicator could indicate that fluid should be added if the indicator is misread. If fluid is added at this
time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches operating temperature of 66°C 77°C (150°F - 170°F).
Fluid Level Check
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 2. With your foot on the brake,
start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time
for each gear to
engage.
3. Place the range selector in PARK (P) and leave the engine running. 4. Remove the fluid level
indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 5. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is
fully seated in the filler tube.
6. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal and
room temperature.
High Fluid Level
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift or engagement concerns and possible damage. High fluid levels
can be caused by an overheating condition. A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to
become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic
control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission malfunction
and/or damage. If an overfill reading is indicated drain and refill the transmission.
Low Fluid Level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid level indicator, or
not on the fluid level indicator and the outside temperatures are above 10°C (50°F). A low fluid
level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage. This
could also indicate a leak in one of the transmission seals or gaskets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 3835
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid than specified could result in
transmission malfunction and/or damage. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift
or engagement concerns and possible damage.
Before adding fluid be sure that the correct type is being used. The type of fluid that should be used
is found on the fluid level indicator, on the handle, in the owner's manual, and in the Specifications.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube. Do not
overfill the fluid.
Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the fluid level. 2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances
should be dark reddish, not brown or black. 3. Hold the fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue
and allow the fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain. 4. If evidence of solid
material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection. 5. If the stain
is a foamy pink color, this may indicate coolant in the transmission. The engine cooling system
should also be inspected at this time. 6. If fluid contamination or transmission failure is confirmed
by the sediment in the bottom of the transmission fluid pan, the transmission must be
disassembled and completely cleaned. This includes the torque converter and cooler lines.
7. Carry out diagnostic checks and adjustments.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill-Without Torque Converter Drain Plug
Material
Draining
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present the transaxle will need
to be overhauled.
Remove the transaxle drain plug.
Refill
1. Using a small amount of pipe sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
2. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 3. Start the engine and run through all
the gears and check fluid level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 3838
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
1. CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or
water-based cleaners.
NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting
them to the cleaner.
Backflush any contaminates out of the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure
line to number 1 and the return line to number 2. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the
hoses and repeat the flushing.
2. Backflush any contaminants out of the radiator in-tank cooler by connecting the flushing machine
pressure line to number 2 and the return line to
number 3. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 3839
3. NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned
or flushed. A new valve should be installed as
part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a remanufactured transaxle.
Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Locations
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3843
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Main Control Cover
Tighten bolts and studs in the indicated sequence
.................................................................................................................................... 13 Nm (10 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH
Differential Seals-LH
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3858
2. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Remove the LH halfshaft.
4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft.
3. Using a small amount of pipe sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
4. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine and run through all
the gears and check fluid level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3859
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH
Differential Seals-RH
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3860
2. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. 3. Remove the RH halfshaft. 4.
If equipped, remove the Power Takeoff (PTO).
5. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal.
6. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential
seal.
Installation
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3861
2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
3. If equipped, install the PTO. 4. Install the RH halfshaft.
5. Using a small amount of pipe sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
6. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and run through all
the gears and check fluid level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls. the position of the TCS.
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch
in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3872
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3873
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3874
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
3879
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
3882
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3. Remove the TSS
sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 3885
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 3886
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor.
^ To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 3887
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3892
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3893
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3894
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3895
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3896
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3897
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3898
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3899
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3900
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3901
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3902
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3903
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3904
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3905
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3906
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3907
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3908
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3909
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3910
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3911
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
37-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3912
Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3913
Shift Interlock: Description and Operation
Shift Interlock System
The shift interlock system prevents the gear shift lever from being moved out of the PARK (P)
position. The ignition switch must be in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed to move the
gearshift lever out of the PARK position. The brake pedal position is detected by the Brake Pedal
Position (BPP) switch.
The manual override button will mechanically bypass the electronic portion of the shift interlock
system and allow the gearshift lever to be moved out of the PARK position. The manual override
button is part of the gearshift lever assembly.
To override the brake shift interlock, remove the tethered cap on the gear shift bezel with a small
screwdriver. With the brake pedal depressed, insert a small screwdriver into the access hole, press
down and pull the gear shift lever out of PARK.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter A/T: > 05-4-5 > Mar > 05 > A/T - Shifter Release
Button Cap Falls Off
Shifter A/T: Customer Interest A/T - Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
TSB 05-4-5
03/07/05
SHIFTER RELEASE BUTTON CAP FALLS OFF
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape/Mariner and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a loose gear selector
button cap. The button cap may fall off, and will not stay in place when re-seated.
ACTION Replace the gear selector button cap only, it is not necessary to replace the entire gear
selector lever. For additional information, see the latest Escape/Mariner Workshop Manual CD,
Section 307-05 Selector Lever Button.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050405A 2005 Escape/Escape 0.2 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner: Replace Shifter Button
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C488 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter A/T: > 05-4-5 > Mar > 05 > A/T Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
Shifter A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
TSB 05-4-5
03/07/05
SHIFTER RELEASE BUTTON CAP FALLS OFF
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape/Mariner and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a loose gear selector
button cap. The button cap may fall off, and will not stay in place when re-seated.
ACTION Replace the gear selector button cap only, it is not necessary to replace the entire gear
selector lever. For additional information, see the latest Escape/Mariner Workshop Manual CD,
Section 307-05 Selector Lever Button.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050405A 2005 Escape/Escape 0.2 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner: Replace Shifter Button
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C488 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Button
Selector Lever Button
Removal
1. Remove the loose selector lever button by carefully prying the button out with a screwdriver.
Installation
1. Install a new selector lever button by pressing the button into the selector lever until it clicks into
place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3932
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever
Transmission Selector Lever
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3933
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Remove the shift cable from the gearshift assembly.
1 Disconnect the shift cable end from the gearshift lever.
2 Remove the shift cable from the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3934
6. Remove the shifter.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the 4 bolts and remove the shifter.
Installation
1. Install the shifter assembly.
1 Install the shifter and the 4 bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2 Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the upper center console assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3935
3. Install the upper shift lever trim ring.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
4. Adjust the shift cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3936
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Bezel
Selector Lever Bezel
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3937
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Disconnect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
6. Remove the set screw.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3938
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the plastic straw inside of the lever does not come out.
Remove the knob and wiring by pulling straight up on the knob.
8. Carefully pry up the 4 bezel clips and remove the bezel.
9. Remove the gearshift bezel.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3939
1. Install the gearshift bezel. 2. Feed the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector wire harness
into the opening in the dash and install the knob.
3. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the set screw or damage to the plastic straw will occur.
Install the set screw.
4. Connect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
5. Install the top finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3940
6. Install the upper shift lever trim ring.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
7. Move the shifter through all gears from PARK to DRIVE several times making sure that the
screw is not too tight.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3941
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Knob
Selector Lever Knob
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Place the floor shift selector lever in the
(D) position.
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Disconnect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3942
6. Remove the set screw.
7. Remove the knob and wiring by pulling straight Up on the knob.
8. Remove and discard the shifter straw by pulling it straight up.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3943
1. Lightly lubricate the shifter straw with multi-purpose grease, and install it into the shifter bore by
pushing straight down. 2. Feed the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector wire harness into
the opening in the dash and install the knob.
3. Install the set screw.
4. Connect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
5. Install the top finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Button > Page 3944
6. Install the upper shift lever trim ring.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
7. Move the shifter through all gears from PARK to DRIVE several times making sure that the
screw is not too tight.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position.
2. Loosen the bolt for the Z-bracket and rotate the Z-bracket counterclockwise to allow access to
the shift cable bracket.
3. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable by turning it 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise.
4. Place the transmission manual control lever in the DRIVE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3949
5. Tighten the cable adjustment ring by turning it clockwise 1⁄4 turn.
6. Rotate the Z-bracket clockwise over the shift cable end fitting.
^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3950
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Transmission Selector Lever Cable
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the floor shift selector level in the (D) position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3951
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Remove the shift cable from the gearshift assembly.
1 Disconnect the shift cable end from the gearshift lever.
2 Remove the shift cable from the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3952
6. Remove the 2 nuts for the shift cable.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Loosen the bolt for the Z-bracket and rotate the Z-bracket counterclockwise to allow access to
the shift cable bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
8. Disconnect the shift cable end from the manual lever.
9. Remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3953
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
^ Adjust the shift cable after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T
- Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
TSB 07-5-6
03/19/07
CD4E - ENGINE STALLING ON ENGAGEMENT/STOPPING
FORD: 2005-2008 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E automatic transaxle
and built from 8/1/2004 through 2/15/2007 may exhibit an engine stall when coming to a stop or
when engaging the transmission into drive or reverse. This condition may be intermittent and often
occurs after extended drives. There may be no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored. This may
be caused by internal wear in the torque converter which prevents it from unlocking.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect and repair all non transaxle codes per Workshop Manual (WSM) and Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manuals.
2. Use the Integrated Diagnostic System equipment to monitor the PIDs (Parameter Identification)
for TC_SLIPACT as the stall is occurring.
a. If the slip is greater than 20 RPM, the stalling is not transaxle related. Repair following PC/ED
procedures for engine stalling condition.
b. If TC_SLIPACT is less than 20 RPM with the transmission in park or neutral, torque converter
internal failure is the most likely cause, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the transaxle assembly and check the rotation of the torque converter in the bell
housing. A failed converter will be difficult to rotate.
4. Remove the torque converter, drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) and refill the CD4E
transmission assembly using MERCON(R) V ATF.
5. Install a new torque converter and reinstall the transaxle assembly.
6. Back flush the transmission cooler system as described in the WSM, Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.2 Hrs.
4X2 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T
- Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement > Page 3962
12650D)
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.8 Hrs.
4X4 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
12650D)
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.9 Hrs.
4X2 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
12650D)
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 7.5 Hrs.
4X4 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar
> 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
TSB 07-5-6
03/19/07
CD4E - ENGINE STALLING ON ENGAGEMENT/STOPPING
FORD: 2005-2008 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E automatic transaxle
and built from 8/1/2004 through 2/15/2007 may exhibit an engine stall when coming to a stop or
when engaging the transmission into drive or reverse. This condition may be intermittent and often
occurs after extended drives. There may be no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored. This may
be caused by internal wear in the torque converter which prevents it from unlocking.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect and repair all non transaxle codes per Workshop Manual (WSM) and Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manuals.
2. Use the Integrated Diagnostic System equipment to monitor the PIDs (Parameter Identification)
for TC_SLIPACT as the stall is occurring.
a. If the slip is greater than 20 RPM, the stalling is not transaxle related. Repair following PC/ED
procedures for engine stalling condition.
b. If TC_SLIPACT is less than 20 RPM with the transmission in park or neutral, torque converter
internal failure is the most likely cause, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the transaxle assembly and check the rotation of the torque converter in the bell
housing. A failed converter will be difficult to rotate.
4. Remove the torque converter, drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) and refill the CD4E
transmission assembly using MERCON(R) V ATF.
5. Install a new torque converter and reinstall the transaxle assembly.
6. Back flush the transmission cooler system as described in the WSM, Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.2 Hrs.
4X2 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar
> 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement > Page 3968
12650D)
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.8 Hrs.
4X4 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
12650D)
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.9 Hrs.
4X2 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
12650D)
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 7.5 Hrs.
4X4 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3969
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Diagnosis
Prior to installing a new or remanufactured torque converter, all diagnostic procedures must be
followed. This is to prevent the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque
converters. Only after a complete diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new
or remanufactured torque converter. Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows:
1. Preliminary Inspection. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial
Inspection/Preliminary Inspection
2. Know and Understand the Customers Concern. 3. Verify the Concern-Carry out the Torque
Converter Operation Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests
and General Diagnostics/Torque Converter Diagnosis
4. Carry out Diagnostic Procedures.
^ Carry out On-Board Diagnostics. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Displaying & Reading Trouble Codes ^
Repair all non-transmission DTCs first.
^ Repair all transmission DTCs.
^ Rerun on-board diagnostics to verify repair.
^ Carry out Line Pressure Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test
^ Carry out Stall Speed Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Stall Speed Test
^ Carry out Diagnosis by Symptom Routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom.See: Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic
Routines ^
Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine will
list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each component
listed, diagnose, and repair as required, before repairing the torque converter.
Torque Converter Clutch Operation Test
This test verifies that the torque converter clutch control system and the torque converter are
operating correctly. Carry out the test as follows:
1. Carry out On-Board Diagnostic Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble
Codes/Displaying & Reading Trouble Codes Refer to Computers and Control Systems.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 3. Bring engine to normal operating temperature by driving
the vehicle at highway speeds for approximately 15 minutes in (D) position. 4. After normal
operating temperatures are reached, maintain a constant vehicle speed of about 80 km/h (50 mph)
and tap the brake pedal with the
left foot.
5. Engine rpm should increase when the brake pedal is tapped, and should decrease about 5
seconds after the brake pedal is released. If this does not
occur, refer to Torque Converter Operation Concerns. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines/Torque Converter
Concerns 240/340-242/342 If the vehicle is at a stop and stalls in (D) at idle, move the transaxle
range selector lever to the manual 1 position. Refer to Torque Converter Operation Concerns. See:
Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/Diagnostic Routines/Torque Converter Concerns 240/340-242/342 Refer to Diagnosis
By Symptom. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines Repair as required. If the vehicle does not stall in
manual 1, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom.See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
TSB 09-25-4
12/28/09
CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT
FORD: 2001-2008 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service
Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may
experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When
overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid
bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler
bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold
Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7K177 55
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3976
Transmission Cooler: Capacity Specifications
Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3977
Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications
Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3978
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
Transaxle Cooling
Transmission With an Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with a transmission fluid cooler integral to
the radiator which cannot be repaired separately. The integral transmission fluid cooler transfers
heat from the transmission fluid to the engine coolant. The auxiliary transmission fluid cooler
transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air.
The transmission fluid cooling system, with an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, consists of the
following: ^
an in-tank fluid cooler inlet tube
^ a non-repairable in-tank transmission fluid cooler
^ an in-tank fluid cooler return tube
^ an auxiliary fluid cooler
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
When fluid leakage is found in the auxiliary fluid cooler, a new auxiliary fluid cooler should be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3981
Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3982
Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Transaxle Cooling
Transaxle Cooling
CAUTION: Whenever the transaxle has been disassembled to install new parts a new transmission
fluid cooler should be installed and the fluid cooler lines should be flushed.
NOTE: Cleaning and backflushing the transmission fluid cooling system as outlined will keep
contamination from reentering the transaxle and causing a repeat repair.
When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material
may have been carried into torque converter and transmission fluid cooler. These contaminants are
a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the system before the
transaxle is put back in use.
Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transmission Fluid Cooler
CAUTION: Whenever a transaxle has been disassembled to install new parts or because the valve
body sticks from foreign material, the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler must be
cleaned by using a suitable cleaner. Under no circumstances should an attempt be made to clean
converters by hand agitation with solvent.
When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material
or band material can be carried into the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler. These
contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle concerns and must be removed from the
system before the transaxle is returned for repair.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test
NOTE: The transaxle linkage adjustment, fluid level and line pressure must be within specification
before carrying out this test. For transmission fluid level checking procedures, refer to Preliminary
Inspection. For transaxle line pressure testing, refer to Special Testing Procedures.
1. Check the transmission fluid level and fill as necessary. 2. Remove the transmission fluid level
indicator from fluid filler tube and install funnel in fluid filler tube. 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL,
position it on a hoist. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler lines for damage. Install new
transmission fluid cooler
lines as needed.
4. Disconnect cooler return line (rear line) by separating the tubing from the cooler line rubber
hose. 5. Plug the cooler line to avoid transmission fluid loss. 6. Connect one end of a hose to the
cooler return line hose and route the other end of the hose up to a point where it can be inserted
into the funnel at
the fluid filler tube.
7. Start the engine and run at idle with transaxle in NEUTRAL range until the automatic
transmission fluid is warm. Temperature is important to the
flow rate measurement. Carry out the Fluid Cooler Flow Test. ^
Option 1: Once fluid flow no longer has air bubbles in it, remove the rubber hose from the funnel
and insert it into liter container. After 15 seconds, install the hose into the funnel and measure the
amount of automatic transmission fluid in the container. The rate of flow should be approximately
28 - 34 oz. (0.83 - 1.0 liter) in 15 seconds.
^ Option 2: Once fluid flow no longer has air bubbles in it, remove the rubber hose from the funnel
and insert it into a liter container. As soon as one liter (1.06 quart) is dispensed into the container,
install the hose into the funnel. One liter of automatic transmission fluid should flow through the
cooling system in approximately 15-17 seconds.
8. Once adequate flow is determined, shut off the engine, remove the extension hose and
reassemble the cooler line with the constant tension clamp. 9. If flow is inadequate, stop the
engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return line and connect it to the converter-out line. If
flow is now
liberal, carry out backflushing and cleaning procedure. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler
Backflushing and Cleaning. Refer to transaxle fluid cooler diagnosis in Transmission Fluid Cooler.
If flow is still not liberal, repair the pump or converter.
10. Check the transmission fluid level and adjust as required.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Transmission Cooler: Procedures
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
1. CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or
water-based cleaners.
NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting
them to the cleaner.
Backflush any contaminates out of the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure
line to number 1 and the return line to number 2. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the
hoses and repeat the flushing.
2. Backflush any contaminants out of the radiator in-tank cooler by connecting the flushing machine
pressure line to number 2 and the return line to
number 3. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3985
3. NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned
or flushed. A new valve should be installed as
part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a remanufactured transaxle.
Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3986
Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tube clamps and disconnect the rubber hoses from the
auxiliary cooler.
4. Remove the bolts for the auxiliary and remove the cooler.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 6. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Cooler Bypass Valve
Cooler Bypass Valve
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3987
Material
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3988
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the driver side splash shield. 3.
Remove and discard the transmission fluid cooler line from the pump area of the case.
^ Remove the transmission fluid cooler line from the transaxle.
4. Remove the transmission fluid cooler line bracket nut. 5. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler
hose from the auxiliary cooler.
6. NOTE: Do not remove the steel line from the converter housing.
Remove the transmission fluid cooler hose from the converter housing and the lower fitting of the
radiator. Discard the hose.
7. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower LH side of the main control cover.
Installation
CAUTION: The thermal bypass valve is flow directional. The cooler bypass valve must be installed
with the end cap facing up. If not installed correctly, internal damage to the transaxle will result.
NOTE: The thermal cooler bypass valve cannot be successfully cleaned by back flushing, flushing
or disassembly. For vehicles that are equipped with this cold weather bypass valve, a new valve
should be installed whenever the transaxle is being overhauled.
1. Install the 2 studs to the lower LH side of the main control cover.
^ Tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
2. Position the thermal bypass valve onto the studs and loosely install the 2 nuts. 3. Install the
transmission fluid cooler line into the case fitting.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
4. Tighten the 2 cooler bypass valve retaining nuts.
^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the converter housing tube. Pull the red clip off the
constant tension clamp to activate the clamp. 6. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the
auxiliary fluid cooler lower fitting. Pull the red clip off the constant tension clamp to activate the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3989
clamp.
7. Connect the plastic retaining clip onto the frame. 8. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto
the upper fitting of the cooler bypass valve. Install the other end of the hose to the lower radiator
fitting. Pull the red clip off the constant tension clamps to activate the clamp.
9. Start the vehicle and check the transmission fluid level.
^ Fill the transaxle with clean MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM meeting Ford
specification MERCON(R) V.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3990
2. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tube clamps and disconnect the rubber hoses from the
auxiliary cooler.
3. Disconnect the upper fluid cooler rubber hose from the radiator. 4. Disconnect the lower fluid
cooler rubber hose from the radiator.
5. Disconnect and remove the front cooler tube from the transaxle case.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
6. Disconnect and remove the rear cooler tube from the transaxle case.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3991
7. Disconnect and remove the fluid cooler tube bracket from the transaxle case.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 9. Remove the fluid cooler tubes from
under the vehicle and install new as necessary.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch,
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls. the position of the TCS.
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch
in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Lower, Front
Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 3999
3. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and the cross brace.
5. Remove the bolt for the mount and the 2 bolts for the brace.
6. Remove the rear bolt and remove the brace. 7. Remove the 2 bolts from the mount and remove
the mount.
Installation
1. Install a new mount onto the brace and install the bolts.
^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4000
2. Position the brace in place and install the nut.
^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the 2 bolts for the brace.
^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the bolt for the mount.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the cross brace and the 4 bolts.
^ Tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4001
6. Install the LH splash shield and the 7 retainers.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Install the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4002
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Lower, Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Rear, 2.3L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4003
3. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the mount through bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs.).
6. Remove the 1 retaining bolt and the 2 nuts for the mount and remove the mount.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4004
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair LH
Transaxle Support Insulator-LH
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4005
2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly.
4. Install the special tools.
5. Install the special tools.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Lower, Front > Page 4006
6. Remove the upper transaxle mount through bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.).
7. Remove the 4 upper transaxle mount bolts and remove the mount.
^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4010
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4011
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4012
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure Test
Port, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4020
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4023
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3. Remove the TSS
sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4026
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4027
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor.
^ To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4028
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket
Valve Body: Service and Repair Main Control Cover and Gasket
Main Control Cover and Gasket
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the breather tube and disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake tube and the air cleaner cover.
5. Disconnect the vent hose from the main control cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4034
6. Remove the LH splash shield.
7. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
8. Remove the main control cover bolts, cooler bypass studs and the cover.
9. NOTE: Do not discard the gasket. It is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a
new gasket as necessary.
Remove the main control cover gasket.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4035
1. NOTE: The main control cover gasket is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install
a new gasket as necessary.
Install the main control cover gasket.
2. NOTE: Install studs in locations 3 and 11.
Install the main control cover. ^
Tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.), in sequence shown.
3. Using a small amount of pipe sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4036
4. Install the LH splash shield.
5. Connect the vent hose to the main control cover.
6. Install the intake tube and the air cleaner cover.
7. Install the breather tube and connect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 8.
Install the battery tray. 9. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid.
10. Start the engine and run through all the gears for a total of 5 minutes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4037
Valve Body: Service and Repair Main Control Valve Body
Main Control Valve Body
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4038
5. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector and the Transmission Range (TR)
sensor electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the shift cable.
7. Remove the shift cable and bracket and position it aside.
8. Remove the vent tube hose from the main control cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4039
9. Remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
11. Remove the main control cover bolts, studs and the cover.
12. NOTE: Do not discard the gasket. It is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a
new gasket as necessary.
Remove the main control cover gasket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4040
13. Remove the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown.
14. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve.
Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link.
15. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through
the transaxle case.
16. Make sure the manual valve control lever does not fall out of the main control valve body while
removing from the vehicle.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4041
1. Install the manual control lever in the main control valve body.
2. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. If damaged,
install a new O-ring seal, before installing the
connector into the case.
Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector up through the
transaxle case.
3. Position the main control valve body in place while connecting the manual valve link.
4. Install the main control valve body assembly. Tighten the bolts in the sequence indicated.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4042
5. NOTE: The main control cover gasket is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install
a new gasket as necessary.
Install the main control cover gasket.
6. NOTE: Install the cooler bypass valve studs in locations 3 and 11.
Install the main control cover. Tighten the bolts and studs in the indicated sequence. ^
Tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
7. Using a small amount of pipe sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4043
8. Install the LH splash shield.
9. Install the shift cable and bracket.
^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
10. Connect the shift cable end.
11. Connect the vent hose to the main control cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4044
12. Connect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector and the Transmission Range (TR)
sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the intake tube and the air cleaner cover.
14. Install the breather tube and connect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 15.
Install the battery tray. 16. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 17. Start the
engine and run through all the gears and check fluid level.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Clutch Disc: Testing and Inspection
Clutch Disc Check
Special Tool(s)
1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil.
2. Check for a worn clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with
a slide caliper. 3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets.
4. Using the special tool, check the maximum allowable runout of the clutch disc. 5. Use an emery
cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. 6. Check for wear or rust on
the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth. 7. Check the clutch disc for cracking,
scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new clutch disc if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 4049
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 4050
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 4051
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol based solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
7. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ wear or rust on the splines
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 4052
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the clutch pressure plate bolts.
^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) in sequence.
3. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Clutch Fluid Type .................................................................................................... Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Clutch Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
Clutch Master Cylinder Check
1. Check the clutch master cylinder for leaks.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4060
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder.
^ Plug the brake master cylinder.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder hose.
2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod. 4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube
fitting.
^ Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube
adapter. 3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder.
^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
1. Remove the engine air cleaner. 2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the
clutch master cylinder.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder.
^ Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic
fluid tube adapter.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Diagrams
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4070
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4074
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Clutch pressure plate bolts
Tighten .................................................................................................................................................
............................. 29 Nm (21 ft.lbs.) in sequence.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4078
Pressure Plate: Testing and Inspection
Clutch Pressure Plate Check
1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or
discoloration should be removed with a fine emery
cloth.
2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge.
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments.
4. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4079
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4080
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4081
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol based solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
7. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ wear or rust on the splines
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4082
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the clutch pressure plate bolts.
^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) in sequence.
3. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Transmission Selector Lever Cable
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the floor shift selector level in the (D) position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4088
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Remove the shift cable from the gearshift assembly.
1 Disconnect the shift cable end from the gearshift lever.
2 Remove the shift cable from the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4089
6. Remove the 2 nuts for the shift cable.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Loosen the bolt for the Z-bracket and rotate the Z-bracket counterclockwise to allow access to
the shift cable bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
8. Disconnect the shift cable end from the manual lever.
9. Remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4090
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
^ Adjust the shift cable after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4095
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4096
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4097
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4098
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4099
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4100
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4101
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4102
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4103
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4104
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4105
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4106
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4107
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4108
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4109
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4110
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4111
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4112
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4113
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4114
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
37-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4115
Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4116
Shift Interlock: Description and Operation
Shift Interlock System
The shift interlock system prevents the gear shift lever from being moved out of the PARK (P)
position. The ignition switch must be in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed to move the
gearshift lever out of the PARK position. The brake pedal position is detected by the Brake Pedal
Position (BPP) switch.
The manual override button will mechanically bypass the electronic portion of the shift interlock
system and allow the gearshift lever to be moved out of the PARK position. The manual override
button is part of the gearshift lever assembly.
To override the brake shift interlock, remove the tethered cap on the gear shift bezel with a small
screwdriver. With the brake pedal depressed, insert a small screwdriver into the access hole, press
down and pull the gear shift lever out of PARK.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter CVT: > 05-4-5 > Mar > 05 > A/T
- Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
Shifter CVT: Customer Interest A/T - Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
TSB 05-4-5
03/07/05
SHIFTER RELEASE BUTTON CAP FALLS OFF
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape/Mariner and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a loose gear selector
button cap. The button cap may fall off, and will not stay in place when re-seated.
ACTION Replace the gear selector button cap only, it is not necessary to replace the entire gear
selector lever. For additional information, see the latest Escape/Mariner Workshop Manual CD,
Section 307-05 Selector Lever Button.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050405A 2005 Escape/Escape 0.2 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner: Replace Shifter Button
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C488 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter CVT: > 05-4-5 >
Mar > 05 > A/T - Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
Shifter CVT: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shifter Release Button Cap Falls Off
TSB 05-4-5
03/07/05
SHIFTER RELEASE BUTTON CAP FALLS OFF
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape/Mariner and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a loose gear selector
button cap. The button cap may fall off, and will not stay in place when re-seated.
ACTION Replace the gear selector button cap only, it is not necessary to replace the entire gear
selector lever. For additional information, see the latest Escape/Mariner Workshop Manual CD,
Section 307-05 Selector Lever Button.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050405A 2005 Escape/Escape 0.2 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner: Replace Shifter Button
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7C488 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever
Transmission Selector Lever
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4132
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Remove the shift cable from the gearshift assembly.
1 Disconnect the shift cable end from the gearshift lever.
2 Remove the shift cable from the bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4133
6. Remove the shifter.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the 4 bolts and remove the shifter.
Installation
1. Install the shifter assembly.
1 Install the shifter and the 4 bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2 Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the upper center console assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4134
3. Install the upper shift lever trim ring.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
4. Adjust the shift cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4135
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever Bezel
Selector Lever Bezel
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4136
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Disconnect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
6. Remove the set screw.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4137
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the plastic straw inside of the lever does not come out.
Remove the knob and wiring by pulling straight up on the knob.
8. Carefully pry up the 4 bezel clips and remove the bezel.
9. Remove the gearshift bezel.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4138
1. Install the gearshift bezel. 2. Feed the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector wire harness
into the opening in the dash and install the knob.
3. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the set screw or damage to the plastic straw will occur.
Install the set screw.
4. Connect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
5. Install the top finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4139
6. Install the upper shift lever trim ring.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
7. Move the shifter through all gears from PARK to DRIVE several times making sure that the
screw is not too tight.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4140
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever Button
Selector Lever Button
Removal
1. Remove the loose selector lever button by carefully prying the button out with a screwdriver.
Installation
1. Install a new selector lever button by pressing the button into the selector lever until it clicks into
place.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4141
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever Knob
Selector Lever Knob
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Place the floor shift selector lever in the
(D) position.
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Disconnect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4142
6. Remove the set screw.
7. Remove the knob and wiring by pulling straight Up on the knob.
8. Remove and discard the shifter straw by pulling it straight up.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4143
1. Lightly lubricate the shifter straw with multi-purpose grease, and install it into the shifter bore by
pushing straight down. 2. Feed the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector wire harness into
the opening in the dash and install the knob.
3. Install the set screw.
4. Connect the overdrive cancel switch electrical connector.
5. Install the top finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 4144
6. Install the upper shift lever trim ring.
^ To install the upper shift lever trim ring, orient the thick tab on the driver side front of the shifter
and press into place.
7. Move the shifter through all gears from PARK to DRIVE several times making sure that the
screw is not too tight.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 > May > 05 >
Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
TSB 05-10-7
05/30/05
DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H)
FORD: 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle
may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration.
The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels.
ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during
light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised
halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently
characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45
MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs.
Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A427 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 >
May > 05 > Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
TSB 05-10-7
05/30/05
DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H)
FORD: 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle
may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration.
The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels.
ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during
light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised
halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently
characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45
MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs.
Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A427 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4161
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4162
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation
Rear Drive Halfshafts
CAUTION: An inspection of the outer and inner boots is necessary so that if damage or grease
leakage is evident, installation of a new halfshaft can take place immediately. Continued operation
with damage or grease leakage will result in CV joint wear and noise due to contamination and loss
of the CV joint grease.
NOTE: Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation procedures.
^ The inner and outer Constant Velocity (CV) joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper
holds the cross groove inner race assembly (inner CV joint) together.
^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
^ An axle circlip retains the splined inner CV joint to the differential side gear. Install a new axle
circlip each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle.
^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outer CV
joint) to the rear hub. Install a new rear axle wheel hub nut each time the halfshaft is removed from
the vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4165
Removal
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outer Constant Velocity (CV)
joint.
CAUTION: Handle the halfshaft by only the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential
damage to the CV joints.
CAUTION: Do not over-angle the CV joints.
CAUTION: Damage will occur to an assembled inner CV joint if it is over-plunged outward from the
joint housing.
CAUTION: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts.
CAUTION: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always
support the free-ends of the halfshaft.
CAUTION: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components.
CAUTION: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without
evidence of external damage.
1. NOTE: The LH side is shown, the RH side is similar.
Remove the rear coil spring.
2. Remove and discard the rear wheel hub nut.
3. CAUTION: Support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joint.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4166
4. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the rear axle hub assembly.
5. CAUTION: Do not damage the oil seal protector when removing the axle halfshaft from the
differential.
Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the oil seal protector is properly aligned with the differential oil seal
during installation.
Using the special tool, install the halfshaft into the differential.
2. If the axle is equipped with the oil seal protector, make sure the oil seal lip and seal protector are
correctly aligned.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4167
3. Using the special tool, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly. 4. Position the lower
ball joint and install the lower ball joint nut.
^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the rear wheel hub nut.
^ To install, tighten to 300 Nm (221 ft. lbs.).
6. Install the rear coil spring. 7. Fill the axle with the specified quantity of the specified lubricant.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4168
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Halfshaft Joint
Special Tool(s)
Material
Disassembly
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outboard CV joint.
CAUTION: Handle the halfshaft by only the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential
damage to the CV joints.
CAUTION: Do not over-angle the CV joints.
CAUTION: Damage will occur to an assembled inner CV joint if it is over-plunged outward from the
joint housing.
CAUTION: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts.
CAUTION: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always
support the free-ends of the halfshaft.
CAUTION: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components.
CAUTION: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without
evidence of external damage.
1. Remove the halfshaft. 2. Secure the halfshaft and Constant Velocity (CV) joint in a vise using
protective jaw covers. 3. Remove the 2 inner halfshaft boot clamps. 4. Slide the inner halfshaft boot
off the inner CV joint housing.
5. If reinstalling the original inner joint, mark the inner CV joint and the halfshaft to be sure of
correct installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4169
6. Using a soft face hammer, separate the halfshaft from the inner joint housing. 7. Remove and
discard the bearing retainer circlip. 8. Remove and discard the snap ring. 9. Remove the inner
halfshaft boot from the halfshaft.
10. Remove the 2 outer halfshaft boot clamps. 11. Slide the outer halfshaft joint boot back out of
the way exposing the outer CV joint.
12. If reinstalling the original inner CV joint, mark the outer CV joint and the halfshaft to be sure of
correct installation.
13. Using a soft-face hammer, separate the outer CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft. 14.
Remove and discard the bearing retainer circlip. 15. Remove the snap ring from the halfshaft. 16.
Slide the outer halfshaft boot off the halfshaft.
Assembly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4170
1. Lubricate the inner and outer CV joints with joint grease. 2. Install the outer halfshaft boot. 3.
Install the snap ring on the halfshaft. 4. Install a new halfshaft bearing retainer circlip.
5. Using a soft-face hammer, install the inner CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft. 6.
Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outer halfshaft joint boot forward
onto the outer CV joint. 7. Remove any excess air trapped in the outer halfshaft boot using a
cloth-covered screwdriver after adjusting the outer halfshaft boot spacing.
8. Using the special tool, install 2 new outer halfshaft boot clamps. 9. Position the inner halfshaft
boot.
10. Install the snap ring. 11. Install the bearing retainer circlip.
12. Using a soft face hammer, install the halfshaft on the inner CV joint.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4171
13. Position the inner halfshaft boot. 14. Remove any excess air trapped in the inner halfshaft boot
using a cloth-covered screwdriver after adjusting the inner halfshaft boot spacing.
15. Using the special tool, install 2 new inner CV joint boot clamps. 16. Install the halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Diagrams > Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 4176
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4177
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and the brake pads are retracted sufficiently to allow
movement of the wheel and tire assembly.
Grasp the tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the
weight of the tire from the front wheel bearings. If movement exists, a new bearing must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4180
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4181
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4182
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4183
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
4WD vehicles
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) wheel
speed sensor ring.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4184
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle.
4WD vehicles
8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4185
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel
bearing snap ring.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
FWD vehicles
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
4WD vehicles
6. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut
Tighten to .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flexplate and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. ^
Stage l: Tighten to ...............................................................................................................................
..................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten to ...........................................................................................................................
........................................ 80 Nm (50 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 3: Tighten to ...........................................................................................................................
...................................... 112 Nm (83 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4193
Flex Plate: Diagrams
Lower End Components-Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4194
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4195
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
Flexplate
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the automatic transaxle. 3.
Remove the 6 bolts and the flexplate.
Installation
1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flexplate and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. ^
Stage l: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (50 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the automatic transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications
Flywheel: Specifications
^ NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. ^
Stage 1: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
..................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten to ...........................................................................................................................
........................................ 80 Nm (50 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 3: Tighten to ...........................................................................................................................
...................................... 112 Nm (83 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4199
Flywheel: Diagrams
Lower End Components-Exploded View
Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4200
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel Runout Check
Special Tool(s)
1. Mount the special tool so that the indicator contact point rides on the straight edge which spans
the clutch disc contact surface.
2. Rotate the flywheel and check the runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum allowance, install
a new flywheel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 4203
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection
Flywheel Inspection
1. Inspect the flywheel for:
1. Any cracks. 2. Worn ring gear teeth. 3. Chipped or cracked ring gear teeth.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Page 4204
Flywheel: Service and Repair
Flywheel
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the manual transaxle and clutch.
3. Remove the 6 bolts and the flywheel.
Installation
1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (50 ft. lbs.).
^ Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the clutch and manual transaxle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Capacity ........................................................................................................
........................................................ 2.4 qts. (2.3L) *
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4216
Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Type
..................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 75W-90
API GL-4 Gear Oil
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.4 Quarts Note: Service refill capacity is determined by
filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4221
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................. SAE 75W-90 API GL-4 Gear Oil
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4222
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
Material
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug. ^
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4223
5. Remove the transaxle fill plug. 6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level
inspection plug hole.
7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug.
Install the transaxle fill plug. ^
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug. ^
Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Halfshaft Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed anytime the halfshafts are removed. Failure
to install new halfshafts seals may result in transmission oil leak(s).
NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown; LH halfshaft oil seal similar.
1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. 2. Remove the RH intermediate shaft oil seal
or the LH halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4227
1. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft oil seal.
2. CAUTION: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the
LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal protector
may result in transmission oil leaks.
Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the VSS are accessed from the top of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever
Gearshift Lever
Removal
1. Remove the floor console. 2. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips. 3. Disconnect the gearshift
cables from the gearshift lever. 4. Remove the 4 gearshift lever bolts. 5. Remove the gearshift
lever.
Installation
1. Position the gearshift lever.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4237
2. Connect the select cable.
3. Connect the gearshift cable.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully
seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.
5. Install the 4 gearshift lever bolts.
^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
6. Adjust the gearshift cables. 7. Install the floor console.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4238
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot
Gearshift Lever Boot
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob is one assembly.
1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console.
2. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot has been removed for clarity.
Cut the gearshift lever knob crimp ring.
3. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift lever boot assembly.
4. CAUTION: A fully seated knob will conceal the knurled section on the gearshift lever. Failure to
fully seat the gearshift knob may cause
gearshift lever boot damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Crimp the ring to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4239
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Cables
Gearshift Cables
Removal
1. Remove the floor console.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4240
2. NOTE: Both gearshift cables disconnect from the transmission in the same manner.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transmission. 1
Lift the gearshift cables out of the cable bracket.
2 Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly.
3 Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips.
3. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips. 4. Disconnect the 2 gearshift cables from the gearshift lever.
5. Remove the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. 6. Remove the gearshift cables.
Installation
1. CAUTION: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on
the grommet is pointing down.
Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel.
2. Connect the select cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4241
3. Connect the gearshift cable. 4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. CAUTION: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully
seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.
6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly. 7. Adjust the gearshift
cables. 8. Install the floor console.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T >
Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Linkage: Adjustments
Gearshift Cable Adjustment
1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the floor console.
3. Disengage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud.
4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the
ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear,
and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud.
Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable.
5. With the shifter and the transmission in NEUTRAL, engage the primary shift cable lock.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T >
Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4245
6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock. 7. Install the
floor console.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair LH
Transaxle Support Insulator-LH
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the air cleaner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 4250
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the through-bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 4251
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Front
Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 4252
2. Using the special tool, support the engine.
3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember.
1 Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
2 Remove the splash shield screw.
3 Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and nut.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
4 Remove the crossmember.
4. Remove the through-bolt and the transaxle front support insulator.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 4253
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Rear
Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the transaxle rear support
insulator bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through-bolt and washer.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator. 6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the
transaxle rear support insulator bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the VSS are accessed from the top of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls. the position of the TCS.
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch
in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4268
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4269
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4270
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 4275
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 4278
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3. Remove the TSS
sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4281
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4282
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor.
^ To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4283
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the VSS are accessed from the top of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls. the position of the TCS.
Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch
in this section.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4310
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4311
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4312
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct
operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4317
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4320
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3. Remove the TSS
sensor. ^
To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4323
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4324
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor.
^ To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4325
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the VSS are accessed from the top of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4338
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4339
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The ABS module can be
damaged if exposed to these charges.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module it must be configured using the vehicle as-built data and
calibrated.
1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). 2. Remove the 3 ABS module screws.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the ABS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges.
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4343
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 4. Remove the brake
line-to-HCU fittings.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
6. Remove the 3 ABS module screws.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the ABS module. 8. Remove the 3 bracket-to-HCU bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
9. Remove the HCU.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page
4348
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front > Page 4351
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front > Page 4352
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4355
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4356
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4357
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The harness connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the grommet. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor wire from
the retainer. 5. Remove the 2 front wheel speed sensor wire bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4360
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
7. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4361
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Front
Removal and Installation
1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4362
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Using a suitable tool, remove the
grommet. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor wire connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel
speed sensor wire from the retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor wire bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4363
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Rear
Removal and Installation
FWD vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
^ To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4WD vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding, Components
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding, Components
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Material
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU, master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2
diagnostic tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding, Components > Page 4368
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Manual Bleed
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected or a new component is
installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding
of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, to the
RH front wheel, and ending with the LH front
wheel.
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end in a container
partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then
hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until the fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the bleeder screw to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
8. Continue bleeding the brake hydraulic system at each wheel. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding, Components > Page 4369
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Gravity Bleed
Gravity Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected or a new component is
installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding
of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RR wheel, to the LR wheel, to the RF wheel,
and ending with the LF wheel. 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and
submerge the free end in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Loosen the bleeder
screw and leave it open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 5. Tighten the bleeder screw to 16
Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
6. Continue bleeding the brake hydraulic system at each wheel. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 3. On speed-control
equipped vehicles, remove the speed-control deactivator switch. 4. Remove the brake booster
pushrod pin redundant clip. 5. Remove the brake pedal self-locking pin. 6. Remove the brake
booster pushrod outer bushing. 7. Slide the brake booster pushrod off the brake pedal pin and
position the pushrod aside. 8. Remove the brake booster pushrod inner bushing. 9. Remove the
brake pedal bracket upper bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
10. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper nut.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
11. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
12. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly.
^ Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the
brake booster studs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4373
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Brake caliper anchor plate ...................................................................................................................
................................................. 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper guide bolts (disc-drum system)
........................................................................................................................................... 35 Nm (26
ft. lbs.) Brake caliper guide bolts (4-wheel disc brake system)
............................................................................................................................. 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.)
Brake caliper jounce hose (at caliper)
...................................................................................................................................................... 20
Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Loosen
the brake caliper jounce hose at the brake caliper.
^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the 2 brake caliper dust boot caps. 5. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) for disc-drum brake system.
^ To install, tighten to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) for 4-wheel disc brake system.
6. Remove the brake caliper.
^ Unthread the brake caliper from the brake caliper jounce hose.
7. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper jounce hose is not twisted.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4380
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Install new copper washers.
Remove the brake caliper jounce hose flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers. ^
To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the brake caliper. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4381
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake pads. 2. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4382
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly, Front
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the disc brake caliper. 2. Secure the brake caliper in a vise. 3. Remove the bleeder
screw cap. 4. Remove the bleeder screw.
^ To install, tighten to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4383
5. CAUTION: Apply moderate air pressure in short bursts to prevent an uncontrolled release of the
piston.
NOTE: Inspect the brake caliper piston and bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of
these conditions exist, a new caliper must be installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1. Place a block of wood between the brake caliper piston and the
brake caliper housing. 2. Apply compressed air through the caliper jounce hose port to remove the
piston.
6. Remove the dust boot.
7. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
Remove the piston seal from the brake caliper bore.
8. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
^ Lubricate the piston seal with clean brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4384
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly, Rear
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the brake caliper. 2. Secure the brake caliper in a vise. 3. Remove the brake caliper
dust boot. 4. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 5. Remove the bleeder screw.
^ To install, tighten to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4385
6. CAUTION: Apply moderate air pressure in short bursts to prevent an uncontrolled release of the
piston.
NOTE: Inspect the brake caliper piston and bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of
these conditions exist, a new caliper must be installed.
Remove the brake caliper piston. 1. Place a block of wood between the brake caliper piston and
the brake caliper housing. 2. Apply compressed air through the brake caliper jounce hose port to
remove the piston.
7. Remove the dust boot.
8. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
Remove the piston seal using a plastic or wooden tool.
9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
^ Lubricate the piston seal with clean brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 05-13-8 > Jul > 05 > Brakes - Rear Disc Brake
Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
TSB 05-13-8
07/11/05
REAR DISC BRAKE GRIND, RUBBING OR THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-25 to increase the labor operation time.
ISSUE Some 2005 vehicles may exhibit a rear disc brake grind, rubbing or thump. The noise may
be more noticeable during cool or wet conditions, and usually occurs during initial brake application
after setting over night. This may be due to the composition of the brake lining material.
ACTION Machine the rear rotors and install new rear disc brake linings made of revised material.
Refer to Section 206-04 of the Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051308A 2005 Escape, Manner, 1.5 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Machine The Rear Brake Rotors And Install New Rear Disc Brake Linings (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B3P, 2001B3PT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2200 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 05-13-8 > Jul > 05 > Brakes - Rear Disc Brake
Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
TSB 05-13-8
07/11/05
REAR DISC BRAKE GRIND, RUBBING OR THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-25 to increase the labor operation time.
ISSUE Some 2005 vehicles may exhibit a rear disc brake grind, rubbing or thump. The noise may
be more noticeable during cool or wet conditions, and usually occurs during initial brake application
after setting over night. This may be due to the composition of the brake lining material.
ACTION Machine the rear rotors and install new rear disc brake linings made of revised material.
Refer to Section 206-04 of the Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051308A 2005 Escape, Manner, 1.5 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Machine The Rear Brake Rotors And Install New Rear Disc Brake Linings (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B3P, 2001B3PT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2200 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4399
Brake Pad: Specifications
Front Brake Pad
Minimum Thickness .............................................................................................................................
............................................ 3.0 mm (0.118 inch)
Rear Brake Pad
Minimum Thickness .............................................................................................................................
............................................ 3.0 mm (0.118 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front
Brake Pads
Material
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Remove
the 2 brake caliper dust boot caps. 4. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) on disc-drum system.
^ To install, tighten to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) on 4-wheel disc brake system.
5. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang by the brake caliper jounce hose.
Remove the brake caliper and support the brake caliper to the vehicle.
6. Remove the inboard brake pad from the brake caliper. 7. Remove the outboard brake pad from
the brake caliper anchor plate. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 4402
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear
Brake Pads
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang by the brake caliper jounce hose.
Remove the brake caliper and secure the brake caliper to the vehicle.
4. Remove the inboard and outboard brake pads from the brake caliper. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 05-13-8 > Jul > 05 > Brakes - Rear Disc Brake
Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
TSB 05-13-8
07/11/05
REAR DISC BRAKE GRIND, RUBBING OR THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-25 to increase the labor operation time.
ISSUE Some 2005 vehicles may exhibit a rear disc brake grind, rubbing or thump. The noise may
be more noticeable during cool or wet conditions, and usually occurs during initial brake application
after setting over night. This may be due to the composition of the brake lining material.
ACTION Machine the rear rotors and install new rear disc brake linings made of revised material.
Refer to Section 206-04 of the Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051308A 2005 Escape, Manner, 1.5 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Machine The Rear Brake Rotors And Install New Rear Disc Brake Linings (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B3P, 2001B3PT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2200 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 05-13-8 > Jul > 05 > Brakes - Rear
Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Disc Brake
Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
TSB 05-13-8
07/11/05
REAR DISC BRAKE GRIND, RUBBING OR THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-25 to increase the labor operation time.
ISSUE Some 2005 vehicles may exhibit a rear disc brake grind, rubbing or thump. The noise may
be more noticeable during cool or wet conditions, and usually occurs during initial brake application
after setting over night. This may be due to the composition of the brake lining material.
ACTION Machine the rear rotors and install new rear disc brake linings made of revised material.
Refer to Section 206-04 of the Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051308A 2005 Escape, Manner, 1.5 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Machine The Rear Brake Rotors And Install New Rear Disc Brake Linings (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B3P, 2001B3PT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2200 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4416
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc Specifications
Front
Minimum thickness (disc-drum system)
......................................................................................................................................... 22 mm
(0.86 inch) Minimum thickness to machine (disc-drum system)
................................................................................................................... 22.6 mm (0.88 inch)
Minimum thickness (4-wheel disc brake system)
.......................................................................................................................... 24 mm (0.95 inch)
Minimum thickness to machine (4-wheel disc brake system)
..................................................................................................... 24.6 mm (0.97 inch)
Rear
Minimum thickness ..............................................................................................................................
........................................ 11.0 mm (0.43 inch) Minimum thickness to machine
................................................................................................................................................... 11.6
mm (0.45 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Disc Machining
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Disc Machining
Brake Disc Machining
Special Tool(s)
Material
Brake Disc Machining
CAUTION: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs.
NOTE: Read the entire operating manual and view the video shipped with the lathe before
installing, operating, or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct
adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe makes sure that these dimensions are within
specifications.
1. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line from the brake caliper.
Position the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket (if equipped) aside.
2. Machine the brake disc using the on-car brake lathe.
1. Install the hub adapter and silencer belt, if necessary. 2. Install the cutting lathe. 3. If the lathe is
not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total indicated reading (TIR)
target is 0.000 mm (0.000
inch), and the maximum is 0.08 mm (0.003 inch).
4. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits, and install the chip deflector.
5. NOTE: The depth of cut should be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter
cuts cause the bit to heat up and wear faster.
Heavier cuts cause poor brake disc surface finish.
Machine the brake disc.
6. Remove the lathe and, if installed, the silencer belt. 7
Remove the hub adapter.
3. Remove the metal shavings.
4. NOTE: It is not necessary to install new brake pads if the friction material properties are within
specification. Refer to Specifications.
Install the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Disc Machining > Page 4419
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Disc Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Disc
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Brake Disc Machining > Page 4420
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Disc Removal and Installation, Rear
Brake Disc
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Remove the
brake disc. 4. If the brake disc binds on the parking brake shoe and lining, remove the adjustment
hole access plug and retract the parking brake shoe and lining
by rotating the adjuster.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the parking brake shoe and lining, if necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the jounce hose bracket bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.).
3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable
assembly through the backing plate. 4. Remove the rear wheel hub. 5. Remove the 4 backing plate
bolts and the backing plate.
^ To install, tighten to 66 Nm (49 ft. lbs.).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Rear Brake Drum
Maximum inside diameter
........................................................................................................................................................
230.10 mm (9.0590 inch)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4428
Brake Drum: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4429
Drum Brake System-Exploded View
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4430
Brake Drum: Description and Operation
Drum Brake
The rear drum brake uses a pedal actuated rear wheel cylinder to move the rear brake shoes
against the brake drum. After the initial setting, the rear drum brake adjustment is maintained
through periodic parking brake operation. For initial setting, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment.
The drum brake system consists of the following components: ^
bleeder screw dust cap
^ bleeder screw
^ brake adjusting hole cover
^ brake backing plate
^ brake drum
^ brake shoes
^ brake shoe hold-down clip
^ brake shoe hold-down clip pin
^ brake shoe retracting spring
^ parking brake cable
^ parking brake lever
^ parking brake lever pin
^ parking brake return spring
^ self-adjuster
^ self-adjuster lever
^ self-adjuster spring
^ wheel cylinder
^ wheel cylinder bolts
^ wheel cylinder piston dust boot
^ wheel cylinder piston
^ wheel cylinder piston seal
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4431
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Special Tool(s)
Removal
CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both
ends of an axle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes. 1. Move the brake shoe
adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster. 2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to
retract the brake shoes.
3. Remove the brake drum.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
^ Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside
face of the brake drum.
2. Adjust the rear brakes, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment. 3. Position the brake drum on the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Brake Shoe Thickness
Minimum ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 1mm (0.03 in.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4435
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake
drum.
3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly.
4. Install the brake drum.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4436
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Material
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to provide an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions.
Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the parking brake lever clip. 3. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining clips and the 2 pins.
4. Remove the upper return spring. 5. Remove the self-adjuster assembly. 6. Remove the lower
return spring. 7. Remove the parking brake actuator lever. 8. Remove the rear brake shoes.
^ Apply silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
9. Remove the self-adjuster spring and lever.
10. Remove the pivot pin. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the rear brake shoes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line fitting nut.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4441
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Material
Disassembly and Assembly
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 3. Remove the bleeder
screw.
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.).
4. Remove the 2 dust boots. 5. Remove the 2 pistons. 6. Remove the 2 piston seals.
^ To install, lubricate the piston seals with clean brake fluid.
7. Remove the spring.
8. NOTE: Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion, or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4442
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding, Components
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding, Components
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Material
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU, master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2
diagnostic tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding, Components > Page 4448
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Manual Bleed
Manual Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected or a new component is
installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding
of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, to the
RH front wheel, and ending with the LH front
wheel.
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end in a container
partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then
hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until the fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the bleeder screw to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
8. Continue bleeding the brake hydraulic system at each wheel. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding, Components > Page 4449
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Gravity Bleed
Gravity Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected or a new component is
installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding
of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RR wheel, to the LR wheel, to the RF wheel,
and ending with the LF wheel. 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and
submerge the free end in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Loosen the bleeder
screw and leave it open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 5. Tighten the bleeder screw to 16
Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
6. Continue bleeding the brake hydraulic system at each wheel. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder
reservoir with the specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Brake caliper anchor plate ...................................................................................................................
................................................. 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper guide bolts (disc-drum system)
........................................................................................................................................... 35 Nm (26
ft. lbs.) Brake caliper guide bolts (4-wheel disc brake system)
............................................................................................................................. 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.)
Brake caliper jounce hose (at caliper)
...................................................................................................................................................... 20
Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Loosen
the brake caliper jounce hose at the brake caliper.
^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the 2 brake caliper dust boot caps. 5. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) for disc-drum brake system.
^ To install, tighten to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) for 4-wheel disc brake system.
6. Remove the brake caliper.
^ Unthread the brake caliper from the brake caliper jounce hose.
7. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper jounce hose is not twisted.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4455
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Install new copper washers.
Remove the brake caliper jounce hose flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers. ^
To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the brake caliper. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4456
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake pads. 2. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4457
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly, Front
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the disc brake caliper. 2. Secure the brake caliper in a vise. 3. Remove the bleeder
screw cap. 4. Remove the bleeder screw.
^ To install, tighten to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4458
5. CAUTION: Apply moderate air pressure in short bursts to prevent an uncontrolled release of the
piston.
NOTE: Inspect the brake caliper piston and bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of
these conditions exist, a new caliper must be installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1. Place a block of wood between the brake caliper piston and the
brake caliper housing. 2. Apply compressed air through the caliper jounce hose port to remove the
piston.
6. Remove the dust boot.
7. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
Remove the piston seal from the brake caliper bore.
8. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
^ Lubricate the piston seal with clean brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4459
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly, Rear
Brake Caliper
Material
Material
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the brake caliper. 2. Secure the brake caliper in a vise. 3. Remove the brake caliper
dust boot. 4. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 5. Remove the bleeder screw.
^ To install, tighten to 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4460
6. CAUTION: Apply moderate air pressure in short bursts to prevent an uncontrolled release of the
piston.
NOTE: Inspect the brake caliper piston and bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of
these conditions exist, a new caliper must be installed.
Remove the brake caliper piston. 1. Place a block of wood between the brake caliper piston and
the brake caliper housing. 2. Apply compressed air through the brake caliper jounce hose port to
remove the piston.
7. Remove the dust boot.
8. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
Remove the piston seal using a plastic or wooden tool.
9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
^ Lubricate the piston seal with clean brake fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type ..................................................................................................... Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Replacement
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement
Brake Fluid Replacement
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Do not allow the master cylinder brake fluid to overflow from the reservoir. Brake fluid
may damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: Bleeding the HCU is required only when removing or installing the HCU, master cylinder, or
opening the lines to the HCU.
NOTE: Make sure that the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark.
1. NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the service bleed function. Access the service bleed function on the diagnostic tool and
follow the directions.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 4466
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the reservoir cap. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical
connector. 3. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
4. If equipped with a manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 4467
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
5. Remove the reservoir.
^ Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir.
^ Pull the reservoir upwards.
6. NOTE: Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid.
Remove and discard the 2 seals.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4 (Engine Compartment, 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4471
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges.
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4475
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 4. Remove the brake
line-to-HCU fittings.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
6. Remove the 3 ABS module screws.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the ABS module. 8. Remove the 3 bracket-to-HCU bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
9. Remove the HCU.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test
Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test
1. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 2.
Observe the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir while the brake pedal is slowly
applied and released. If the brake fluid level
rises when the brake pedal is applied and drops when the brake pedal is released, but the net
brake fluid level remains unchanged, the brake master cylinder is bypassing. Repair or install a
new brake master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test > Page 4480
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder-Non-Pressure External
Leaks
Brake Master Cylinder-Non-Pressure External Leaks
A low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by the following
non-pressure external leaks: Type 1: An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder filler
cap due to incorrect position of the cap, cap gasket, or cap gasket deterioration. Repair or install
new components as necessary. Type 2: An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder
mounting flange due to internal seal failure. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Type 3:
An external leak may exist at the base of the brake master cylinder reservoir due to deteriorated
reservoir mounting seals. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test > Page 4481
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Compensator Port Check
Compensator Port Check
The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^
Supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system
due to brake lining wear.
^ Allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released.
The returning brake fluid creates a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This is a
normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged.
Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged
compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it
on a hoist. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel. If an excessive amount of
brake drag exists, continue with the test. If an excessive amount
of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake disc caliper, brake
wheel cylinder, or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary.
3. Check the brake stoplamp switch adjustment and the brake pedal free play to verify that the
brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. Loosen the nuts attaching the brake master cylinder to the
power brake booster and pull the brake master cylinder away from the power brake
booster.
5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. If the brake drag disappears, the power brake booster is binding and a
new one must be installed.
If the brake drag continues, the brake master cylinder is binding and a new one must be installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4482
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair
Brake Master Cylinder
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 3.
Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4483
4. If equipped with a manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
5. If installing a new brake master cylinder, remove the brake fluid reservoir. 6. Disconnect the 2
brake line fitting and plug the brake lines and the brake master cylinder ports.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
7. NOTE: Install new master cylinder nuts.
Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts. ^
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the master cylinder.
^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line fitting nut.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4488
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Material
Disassembly and Assembly
WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 3. Remove the bleeder
screw.
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.).
4. Remove the 2 dust boots. 5. Remove the 2 pistons. 6. Remove the 2 piston seals.
^ To install, lubricate the piston seals with clean brake fluid.
7. Remove the spring.
8. NOTE: Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion, or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 4489
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Adjustments
Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments
Parking Brake Cable Adjustment
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot.
^ Pull the parking brake control boot up and over the lever.
2. Turn the parking brake control adjustment nut to adjust the parking brake control stroke.
^ Adjust the parking brake control until the parking brake control stroke is 5 notches when pulled.
3. Verify the parking brake is applied. 4. Install the parking brake control boot.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable-Front
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable-Front
Parking Brake Cable-Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the parking brake control.
3. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable
conduit locking tabs. 4. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the
vehicle underbody. 5. Remove the front parking brake cable by pulling the front parking brake cable
through the equalizer bracket. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable-Front > Page 4496
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable-Rear
Parking Brake Cable-Rear
Removal and Installation
Drum brake vehicles
1. Remove the rear drum brake shoes.
Disc brake vehicles
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
All vehicles
3. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 4. Remove the parking brake control boot.
^ Pull the parking brake control boot up and over the lever.
5. Loosen the front cable adjuster nut. 6. Disconnect the cable connector from the LH rear parking
brake cable at the equalizer. 7. If removing the LH rear parking brake cable, remove the 2 parking
brake equalizer bracket bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
8. If removing the LH rear parking brake cable, remove the cable-to-fuel tank strap clip.
9. If removing the LH rear parking brake cable, disconnect the front parking brake cable from the
equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit
locking tabs.
10. Remove the cable bracket-to-body bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
11. Remove the cable bracket-to-trailing arm bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
Drum brake vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable-Front > Page 4497
12. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly
through the brake backing plate.
Disc brake vehicles
13. Release the rear parking brake cable end from the parking brake actuator lever and compress
the cable conduit locking tabs.
All vehicles
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. 2. Remove the parking brake control boot.
^ Pull the parking brake control boot up and over the lever.
3. Release the parking brake control. 4. Remove the front cable adjusting nut. 5. Remove the 4
parking brake control bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
6. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the parking brake
control.
^ Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component
Information > Adjustments
Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Make sure the parking brake is fully released.
Using the release handle, release the parking brake control.
3. Remove the rear brake disc.
4. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the drum portion of the rear brake disc
and set the locking screw.
^ Record the measurement.
5. Place the special tool over the widest diameter of the parking brake shoes. 6. Adjust the parking
brake shoe clearance to 1.07 mm (0.04 inch) less than the inside diameter of the drum portion of
the rear brake disc.
^ Rotate the parking brake shoe adjuster to achieve the correct parking brake shoe-to-brake disc
clearance.
7. Install the rear brake disc. 8. Test the parking brake for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component
Information > Adjustments > Page 4504
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Shoes
Material
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake disc. 2. Remove the parking brake shoe upper return spring. 3. Remove
the 2 parking brake shoe retaining pins. 4. Remove the 2 parking brake shoe retaining springs. 5.
Remove the parking brake shoe lower return spring. 6. Remove the parking brake shoe adjuster. 7.
Remove the parking brake shoes. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Using anti-seize lubricant, lubricate the parking brake shoe contact points before installation of
the rear parking brake shoes.
^ Lubricate the adjust screw threads with anti-seize lubricant.
^ Adjust the parking brake shoe and lining.
^ Check the parking brake for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4508
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4509
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 2. Remove the warning indicator switch screw. 3. Disconnect the warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the warning indicator switch. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The power brake actuation system includes a vacuum assisted brake booster, vacuum check valve
and vacuum hose. The vacuum hose delivers engine vacuum to the vacuum check valve. The
vacuum check valve is a one-way valve that allows engine supplied vacuum to the booster, and
closes when engine vacuum is removed. The brake booster utilizes engine vacuum to reduce the
amount of effort required at the brake pedal to actuate the foundation brakes.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4514
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
Brake Booster-Operation Check
1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connections must be capped.
Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured
and in good condition with no holes, cracks, or collapsed areas.
2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3.
With the engine off, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking
brake.
4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, a new component must
be installed.
Apply and hold the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum reserve from the
system.
5. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake
pedal will move downward slightly under constant foot pressure. If no movement
occurs, the power brake booster system is not functioning. Turn the engine off.
7. Remove the vacuum hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK (A/T)
or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should be
available from
the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose
connections. Repair as necessary.
9. Connect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds.
10. Turn off the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with
approximately 89 Newtons (20 lbs) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal
power-assisted brake
operation for at least one brake pedal application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, the power brake
booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test.
12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum
does not leak off after 10 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the vacuum does leak off,
install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hoses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4515
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Brake Booster
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. NOTE: Install new master cylinder nuts.
Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts. ^
To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
3. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings.
Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward.
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster. 5. Remove the
brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 6. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4516
7. Remove the brake booster pushrod pin redundant clip. 8. Remove the brake booster pushrod
self-locking pin. 9. Remove the brake booster pushrod outer bushing
10. Slide the brake booster pushrod off of the brake pedal pin and position the pushrod aside. 11.
Remove the 4 nuts and the brake booster.
^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Check Valve
1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after 10 minutes, the check
valve is OK.
Otherwise, install a new check valve.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4524
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4525
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Material
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The ABS module can be
damaged if exposed to these charges.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module it must be configured using the vehicle as-built data and
calibrated.
1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). 2. Remove the 3 ABS module screws.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
3. Remove the ABS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4 (Engine Compartment, 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4530
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4534
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4535
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 2. Remove the warning indicator switch screw. 3. Disconnect the warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the warning indicator switch. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips >
Page 4540
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front > Page 4543
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right/Left Front > Page 4544
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4547
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4548
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4549
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The harness connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the grommet. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor wire from
the retainer. 5. Remove the 2 front wheel speed sensor wire bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4552
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
7. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4553
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Front
Removal and Installation
1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4554
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Using a suitable tool, remove the
grommet. 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor wire connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel
speed sensor wire from the retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor wire bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor-Front > Page 4555
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring-Rear
Removal and Installation
FWD vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
^ To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4WD vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4561
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 4569
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4574
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4575
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
BATTERY CABLES
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4580
Part 2
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the generator B+
terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Position the generator B+ terminal cable aside. 5. Disconnect the generator harness retainer. 6.
Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover. 7. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
8. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Position the starter motor terminals aside.
10. Remove the battery ground cable bolt.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Position the battery ground cable aside. 12. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the left rear
of the engine. 13. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the middle of the intake runners. 14.
Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the front of the engine. 15. Disconnect the clip retainer from
the right front of the engine. 16. Disconnect the clip retainer from the right front of the engine. 17.
Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
18. Open the battery junction box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4581
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
19. Position the BJB terminal aside. 20. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector. 21. Disconnect
the retainers fastening the battery cables to the battery tray. 22. Remove the battery cables. 23. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
...................................................SPECIFICATION
Battery
Voltage.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................12 volts
Generator
Rating..............................................................................................75/120 amp (max) @
1,800-6,000 generator rpm, approximately 500-2,000 engine rpm No Load at 2000 rpm...................
.....................................................................................................................................................betw
een 13.0 - 15.0 volts Load at 2000 rpm................................................................................................
........................................................................................................75 amps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4587
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Connector Views
Alternator: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Connector Views > Page 4590
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4591
Alternator: Application and ID
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
...................................................SPECIFICATION
Generator
Rating..............................................................................................75/120 amp (max) @
1,800-6,000 generator rpm, approximately 500-2,000 engine rpm Generator pulley ratio...................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................2.40:1 Voltage regulator type...........................................................................................
...............................................................Electronic internal with generator
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4592
Alternator: Description and Operation
GENERATOR
The charging system consists of the following components:
- generator
- integral voltage regulator
The generator maximum output provides 120 amps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4593
Alternator: Service and Repair
GENERATOR
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and
internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and burn out the diodes.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery. 3. Rotate the front
end accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside. 4.
Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Position the generator B+ cable aside.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4594
6. Disconnect the generator electrical connector. 7. Remove the generator lower air duct bolt.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Press the locking tab to release the generator lower air duct from the generator and remove the
lower air duct. 9. Remove the pin-type retainer from the bottom of the generator shield.
10. Remove the generator shield nut and the generator shield.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
11. Remove the generator stud nut.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
12. Remove the generator stud.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Remove the 2 generator bolts and the generator.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 4599
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Ignition Lock: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press
the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 4. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4610
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4614
View 151-4 (Engine Compartment, 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4615
Starter Motor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4616
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
STARTER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING: When performing maintenance on the starting system, be aware that heavy gauge
leads are connected directly to the battery. Make sure protective caps are in place when
maintenance is completed.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3.
Remove the starter motor solenoid terminal cover. 4. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut and
position aside the wire.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the starter solenoid battery cable nut and position aside the cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4617
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainer and position aside the wiring harness. 7. Remove the
ground strap nut and position aside the strap.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
8. Remove the 2 starter motor stud bolts.
- Install the upper and lower starter motor stud bolts finger-tight.
- Tighten the upper bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the lower bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
9. Remove the starter motor bracket bolt and the starter motor.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4621
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4622
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4637
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4638
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4639
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4642
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4643
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4644
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4649
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4650
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4651
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4654
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4655
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4656
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4657
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4658
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4659
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4662
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4663
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4664
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4668
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4672
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110-C311
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4677
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4678
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4679
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4680
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4681
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4682
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4683
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C312-C422
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4684
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4685
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4686
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4687
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4688
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4689
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4693
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4694
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4699
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4703
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4707
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4708
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4713
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4714
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4715
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4718
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4719
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4720
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4721
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4722
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4723
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4726
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4727
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4728
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4734
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4735
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4738
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4739
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4740
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4741
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4742
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4743
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4746
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4747
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4748
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines
Wiring Harness: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines
TSB 06-17-8
09/04/06
SERVICE WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2003 Focus 2005-2006 Focus 2005-2007 Mustang 2002 Ranger 2004-2007 F-150,
Freestar 2005 Escape 2005-2007 Expedition 2007 E-Series 2006-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN:
2005-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LI
MERCURY: 2004-2007 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-16-12 to update vehicle lines and model years.
ISSUE Ford Motor Company has "consolidated" high and low content harnesses to make the
service selection easier, and to reduce the number of harnesses required for service. Due to this
consolidation, service replacement harnesses may or may not look exactly like the production
harness being replaced. Service replacement harnesses may come equipped with additional
connectors that will not be used.
ACTION Should replacement of a production wire harness become necessary, determine whether
the harness is to be used in a WET or DRY environment, then refer to the appropriate Service
Procedure below.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF UNSURE WHETHER THE ENVIRONMENT FOR THE HARNESS WILL BE "WET" OR "DRY"
ALWAYS TREAT AS A "WET" ENVIRONMENT.
Extra Open Connectors - Procedure For "Dry" Environment/Interior Wiring Harness:
Any extra open connectors should be tucked, folded, and taped out of the way to avoid creating a
rattle or becoming loose (Figure 1). If space allows,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4753
position the connectors so they point downward this will avoid the connector catching water in case
of a water leak.
Extra Open Connectors - Procedure For "Wet" Environment/Exterior Wiring Harness:
1. Cut each wire from the extra connector as close to the connector as possible (Figure 2).
2. Using dual wall heat shrink tubing, position tubing over each individual wire (Figure 3).
3. Use a shielded, flameless heat gun to heat the repair area until the tubing shrinks and adhesive
flows out of both ends of the shrink tubing. While the adhesive is still hot, use pliers to pinch the
ends of the heat shrink tubing closed to form a moisture proof seal (Figure 4).
4. Use electrical tape to bundle the wires together, then stow the bundle under an existing harness
in the area.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4754
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4755
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4756
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4757
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4758
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4759
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4760
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4761
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4762
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4763
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4764
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box > Page 4779
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box > Page 4780
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box > Page 4781
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4784
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4785
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4786
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4791
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4792
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4793
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 4796
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 4797
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 4798
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 4799
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 4800
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 4801
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box > Page 4804
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box > Page 4805
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box > Page 4806
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 4810
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 4814
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110-C311
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4819
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4820
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4821
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4822
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4823
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4824
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4825
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C312-C422
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4826
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4827
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4828
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4829
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4830
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110-C311 > Page 4831
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 4835
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 4836
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4841
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4845
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4849
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4850
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4855
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4856
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4857
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4860
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4861
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4862
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4863
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4864
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4865
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4868
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4869
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4870
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4875
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4876
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box > Page 4877
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4880
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4881
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4882
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4883
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4884
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4885
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box > Page 4888
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box > Page 4889
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box > Page 4890
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines
Wiring Harness: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines
TSB 06-17-8
09/04/06
SERVICE WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2003 Focus 2005-2006 Focus 2005-2007 Mustang 2002 Ranger 2004-2007 F-150,
Freestar 2005 Escape 2005-2007 Expedition 2007 E-Series 2006-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN:
2005-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LI
MERCURY: 2004-2007 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-16-12 to update vehicle lines and model years.
ISSUE Ford Motor Company has "consolidated" high and low content harnesses to make the
service selection easier, and to reduce the number of harnesses required for service. Due to this
consolidation, service replacement harnesses may or may not look exactly like the production
harness being replaced. Service replacement harnesses may come equipped with additional
connectors that will not be used.
ACTION Should replacement of a production wire harness become necessary, determine whether
the harness is to be used in a WET or DRY environment, then refer to the appropriate Service
Procedure below.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF UNSURE WHETHER THE ENVIRONMENT FOR THE HARNESS WILL BE "WET" OR "DRY"
ALWAYS TREAT AS A "WET" ENVIRONMENT.
Extra Open Connectors - Procedure For "Dry" Environment/Interior Wiring Harness:
Any extra open connectors should be tucked, folded, and taped out of the way to avoid creating a
rattle or becoming loose (Figure 1). If space allows,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4895
position the connectors so they point downward this will avoid the connector catching water in case
of a water leak.
Extra Open Connectors - Procedure For "Wet" Environment/Exterior Wiring Harness:
1. Cut each wire from the extra connector as close to the connector as possible (Figure 2).
2. Using dual wall heat shrink tubing, position tubing over each individual wire (Figure 3).
3. Use a shielded, flameless heat gun to heat the repair area until the tubing shrinks and adhesive
flows out of both ends of the shrink tubing. While the adhesive is still hot, use pliers to pinch the
ends of the heat shrink tubing closed to form a moisture proof seal (Figure 4).
4. Use electrical tape to bundle the wires together, then stow the bundle under an existing harness
in the area.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4896
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4897
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4898
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4899
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4900
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4901
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4902
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4903
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4904
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4905
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Wiring Harness Replacement Guidelines > Page 4906
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4916
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4917
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4918
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4919
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4925
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4926
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4927
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 4928
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 >
Page 4934
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 >
Page 4940
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications > Page 4943
Alignment: Specifications General Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications > Page 4944
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4945
Alignment: Description and Operation
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. When the wheel tilts out at the top, the camber is
positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, the camber is negative (-).
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4946
The vehicle toe setting: ^
affects tire wear and directional stability.
^ must be checked after adding aftermarket equipment to the vehicle that affects the suspension
system.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, the toe is positive (+) (toe in). When
the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, the toe is negative (-) (toe out). This is
measured in degrees, from side-to-side, and totalled.
Wheel Track
Rear Thrust Angle
^ Rear thrust angle can be defined as a line bisecting the rear toe or simply the direction in which
the rear wheels are pointed.
^ Rear thrust angle = (LR toe - RR toe).
^ If the rear wheels are pointed to the right, the thrust angle is positive; if the rear wheels are
pointed to the left, the thrust angle is negative.
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Dog Tracking
Dog tracking is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned
roads can give the illusion of dog tracking.
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4947
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. ^
A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path
and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (i.e., wind, road crown).
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be flat on-center. ^
Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear
teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
^ In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket
downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster
for the
front suspension are adjustable.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4950
Difference From Standard Position (LH Side)
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4951
Difference From Standard Position (RH Side)
6. Install and tighten the front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4952
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new spring with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) label on the driver's side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary. 3. Remove the higher side coil spring.
1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle.
2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side
coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all 3 coil springs and select the 2 most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4953
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Front
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in
the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie-rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4954
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie-rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. CAUTION: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to
the boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
Rear
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. CAUTION: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of debris to ensure proper clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent debris from entering the joint. Clean the area
using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 4955
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
^ Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4961
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 4964
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Front Steering Knuckle: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Routine-Vibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 4969
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the special tool, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the
cotter pin and the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut.
5. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage
to the wheel knuckle can result.
CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 4970
Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod from the wheel knuckle.
6. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt nut and the pinch bolt. 7. Remove the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 8. Separate the lower ball
joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the lower ball joint pinch
bolt and nut.
^ Tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
5. Position the tie rod-end into the wheel knuckle and install the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut and a
new cotter pin.
^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the wheel hub nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
8. Install the brake disc. 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 4976
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4977
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Type
................................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft MERCON(R) ATF
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4981
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
1. Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3.
Release the power steering fluid cooler hose clamp and disconnect the power steering fluid
cooler-to-fluid reservoir hose. 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering gear-to-fluid
cooler return hose. 5. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooler nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
6. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooler bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the power steering fluid cooler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Fill the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4985
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
1. Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. 2. Remove the 2 power steering pump
reservoir bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.)
3. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering fluid cooler-to-fluid reservoir hose. 4.
Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering suction hose. 5. Remove the power steering
pump reservoir. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Fill the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-17-3 > Sep >
06 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps
Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Steering - Front End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps
TSB 06-17-3
09/04/06
STEERING NOISE - CLUNK/RATTLE
FORD: 2005-2007 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-25-9 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some 2005-2007 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a single or multiple clunk/rattle
noise from the front end. This noise typically occurs with the front wheels turned while hitting a
bump such as when turning into a driveway. It is usually more noticeable with hot engine and
ambient air temperatures, and may easily be mistaken for loose sheet metal or a loose
suspension/underhood component. The cause of this noise is an audible hydraulic pressure spike
in the power steering system.
ACTION Install a new power steering return line which contains an internal orifice to reduce the
pressure spike.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the power steering reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Disconnect the power steering return hose from the reservoir by loosening the constant tension
clamp.
4. Remove and discard the lower return line hose clamp, then remove the hose.
5. Install the new return line with the crimped band away from the reservoir. The pre-installed
constant tension clamp will retain the reservoir end of the hose.
6. Install and tighten the screw clamp on the lower end of the hose.
7. Refill the system with Mercon® or Mercon(R)-V fluid and purge the air as described in Section
211-00 of the Workshop Manual.
NOTE
DO NOT FILL WITH TYPE-F FLUID.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
061703A 2005-2007 Escape/Mariner: 0.5 Hr.
Replace Power Steering Return Line (Do Not Use With 3713AE)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 06-17-3 > Sep >
06 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps > Page 4994
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
06-17-3 > Sep > 06 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps
Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Front End Rattle Noise
Turning On Bumps
TSB 06-17-3
09/04/06
STEERING NOISE - CLUNK/RATTLE
FORD: 2005-2007 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-25-9 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some 2005-2007 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a single or multiple clunk/rattle
noise from the front end. This noise typically occurs with the front wheels turned while hitting a
bump such as when turning into a driveway. It is usually more noticeable with hot engine and
ambient air temperatures, and may easily be mistaken for loose sheet metal or a loose
suspension/underhood component. The cause of this noise is an audible hydraulic pressure spike
in the power steering system.
ACTION Install a new power steering return line which contains an internal orifice to reduce the
pressure spike.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the power steering reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Disconnect the power steering return hose from the reservoir by loosening the constant tension
clamp.
4. Remove and discard the lower return line hose clamp, then remove the hose.
5. Install the new return line with the crimped band away from the reservoir. The pre-installed
constant tension clamp will retain the reservoir end of the hose.
6. Install and tighten the screw clamp on the lower end of the hose.
7. Refill the system with Mercon® or Mercon(R)-V fluid and purge the air as described in Section
211-00 of the Workshop Manual.
NOTE
DO NOT FILL WITH TYPE-F FLUID.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
061703A 2005-2007 Escape/Mariner: 0.5 Hr.
Replace Power Steering Return Line (Do Not Use With 3713AE)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A713 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: >
06-17-3 > Sep > 06 > Steering - Front End Rattle Noise Turning On Bumps > Page 5000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5003
Removal and Installation All vehicles
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
NOTE: New O-rings must be installed any time the lines are disconnected from the steering gear.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the power steering fluid into a
suitable drain pan. 3. Remove the power steering pressure line fitting nut.
^ To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.) (2.3L engine).
^ To install, tighten to 73 Nm (54 ft. lbs.) [3.0L (4V) engine].
4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket nut.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) (2.3L engine).
^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.) [3.0L (4V) engine].
3.0L (4V) only
5. Disconnect the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
7. Remove the power steering line clamp plate bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. NOTE: The power steering pressure and return lines are of different diameters and the O-rings
are not interchangeable.
Rotate the clamp plate and remove the power steering pump-to-steering gear pressure line. ^
Install a new high pressure line O-ring.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Fill the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5004
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5005
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
NOTE: New O-rings must be installed any time the lines are disconnected from the steering gear.
1. Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. 2. Release the clamp and disconnect the
steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose from the power steering cooler. 3. Remove the steering
gear-to-fluid cooler return hose bracket-to-steering gear stud.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
4. Remove the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose bracket-to-subframe bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
5. Remove the power steering line clamp plate bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 inch lbs.).
6. NOTE: The power steering pressure and return lines are of different diameters and the O-rings
are not interchangeable.
Rotate the clamp plate and remove the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose. ^
Install a new return hose O-ring seal.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Fill the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump-2.3L
Special Tool(s)
Material
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5010
Removal
CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of
contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result.
1. Rotate the tensioner clockwise and remove the belt from the power steering pump pulley. Refer
to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5011
2. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch electrical connector
3. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Disconnect the power steering pressure line fitting nut from the power steering pump.
4. Remove the 2 lower power steering pump bolts. 5. Remove the power steering pressure line
bracket nut and position the pressure line aside. 6. Release the clamp and disconnect the suction
hose from the power steering pump. 7. Remove the 2 upper power steering pump bolts and
remove the power steering pump.
8. If necessary, using the special tool, remove the steering pump pulley.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install a new power steering pump pulley after the second removal and installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5012
Inspect the pulley for paint marks in the web area near the hub. If there are no paint marks, or one
paint mark, use a paint pencil to mark the web area of the pulley near the hub. Using the special
tool, install the power steering pump pulley.
2. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure hose fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the seal replacer and slide it onto the tube nut.
3. Position the power steering pump and install the upper bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
4. Connect the power steering suction hose and clamp. 5. Position the power steering pressure line
bracket and install the nut.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
6. Raise the vehicle. 7. Install the lower power steering bolts.
^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
8. Connect the power steering line fitting nut.
^ Tighten to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
9. Connect the power steering pressure switch electrical connector.
10. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 11. Fill and leak
check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5013
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley
Power Steering Pump Pulley-2.3L
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside.
2. Using the special tool, remove the power steering pump pulley.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the pulley is flush with the end of the power steering pump shaft.
Using the special tool, install the power steering pump pulley.
2. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5018
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page
5021
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5027
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5028
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5029
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5030
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5031
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5032
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5033
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5034
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5035
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5036
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5037
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear
Steering Gear
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5042
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5043
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Vehicle equipped with 3.0L engine,
remove the EGR valve. Refer to Emission Control Systems.
3. NOTE: 2.3L engine shown, 3.0L engine similar.
Remove the rear transaxle insulator bracket. 1
Remove the rear transaxle insulator bracket bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
2 Remove the 2 rear transaxle insulator bracket nuts.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
3 Remove the rear transaxle insulator-to-bracket through-bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5044
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the rear transaxle mounting plate.
^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
5. NOTE: Do not loosen the tie-rod end nut to align the slot in the nut with the tie-rod end stud
through-hole.
Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end cotter pins and the 2 tie-rod end nuts. ^
To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
^ If necessary, continue to tighten the tie-rod end nut until the slot in the nut aligns with the tie-rod
end stud through-hole.
6. Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod end from the knuckle.
7. CAUTION: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result. If
there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
Refer to Air Bag Systems.
Hold the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position using a suitable tool.
8. Remove the nuts and the steering column boot. 9. Remove the steering column
coupling-to-steering gear pinch bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
10. Remove the steering gear-to-fluid cooler return hose bracket-to-subframe bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
11. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket-to-steering gear bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
12. Remove the steering gear-to-fluid return hose bracket-to-steering gear stud.
^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.).
13. Remove the power steering line clamp plate bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5045
14. NOTE: Install a new high pressure hose O-ring seal and a new return hose O-ring seal.
Remove the power steering pressure and return lines.
15. Remove the 2 steering gear mounting bolts.
^ To install, tighten to 126 Nm (93 ft. lbs.).
16. NOTE: Remove the steering gear from the RH side of the vehicle.
Remove the steering gear.
17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 18. Fill the power steering system. 19. Check and, if
necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5046
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the outer tie-rod end. 3. Remove
the tie-rod end jam nut.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering
Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering
Wheel Is Loose > Page 5055
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is
Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 5061
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 5062
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Removal and Installation
1. Position the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position and remove the ignition key.
^ Rotate the steering wheel until the steering column locks into position.
2. Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to Air Bag Systems. 3. Open the
cover on the underside of the steering wheel. 4. Remove the steering wheel pinion bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the steering wheel.
1 Position the steering wheel rearward.
2 Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Repower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Tie Rod End: Service and Repair
Tie Rod End-Outer
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side is similar.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the cotter pin and the tie-rod end nut.
^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
3. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.).
4. Using the special tool, separate the outer tie-rod end from the front wheel knuckle. 5. Remove
the tie-rod end. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection
Ball Joint Inspection
1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings.
2. NOTE: In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full rebound with
the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame.
Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position.
3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage.
^ If the ball Joint or ball Joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary.
4. CAUTION: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or
suspension components while checking for relative
movement. Suspension damage can occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative
movement that may not exist when using hand force.
Relative movement must be measured using hand force only. ^
Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on
the lower control arm by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and
lower arm at the lower ball joint.
^ If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball Joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint.
^ If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5.
5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close
as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of
the ball joint.
To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the
lower control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud.
6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the lower
control arm, by hand.
^ If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed.
^ If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection > Page 5073
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing
Inspection
TSB 09-5-1
03/23/09
LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the
evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the
technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower
control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components.
ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is
identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts
number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from
the arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 5079
Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes
through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing
is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves.
Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect
the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10
mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement.
Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing
may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a
separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional
requirements. These do not require replacement.
Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The
customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the
arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as
the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be
safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 5080
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Front Steering Knuckle: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Routine-Vibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 5084
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the special tool, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the
cotter pin and the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut.
5. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage
to the wheel knuckle can result.
CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the special tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 5085
Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod from the wheel knuckle.
6. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt nut and the pinch bolt. 7. Remove the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 8. Separate the lower ball
joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the lower ball joint pinch
bolt and nut.
^ Tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
5. Position the tie rod-end into the wheel knuckle and install the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut and a
new cotter pin.
^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the wheel hub nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
8. Install the brake disc. 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
Drum brake vehicles
1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
^ Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
3. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder and remove the brake line bracket bolt.
Disc brake vehicles
4. Remove the parking brake shoes. 5. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5089
6. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the outer Constant Velocity (CV) joint from the
hub. Damage to the threads and internal CV joint
components can result.
Using the special tools, separate the outer CV joint from the wheel hub.
All vehicles
7. Remove the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel
speed sensor wire bolts. 8. Remove and position the wheel speed sensor and harness aside. 9.
Remove the coil spring.
10. Remove the lower ball joint nut.
11. CAUTION: The joint surfaces must be clean.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent debris from entering the joint. Clean using
only mild liquids.
Reference mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam.
12. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt. 13. Remove and discard the cam nut. 14. Remove
the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTION: The joint area must be free of debris to ensure correct clamping.
NOTE: The joint surfaces and the bushing sleeve serrations must be clean before assembly. Clean
the joint surfaces and the bushing sleeve serrations with a wire brush.
NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the reference marks.
Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
2. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the wheel knuckle bolt.
^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.).
3. Position the ABS wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor. 4. Position the lower ball joint into
the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint nut.
^ Tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the coil spring. 6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed
sensor wire bolts.
^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
Disc brake vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5090
7. Using the special tool, install the outer CV joint into the wheel hub. 8. Install a new wheel hub
nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
9. Install the brake shoes.
Drum brake vehicles
10. Connect the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Tighten to 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.).
11. Install the brake line bracket bolt.
^ Tighten to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.).
12. Connect the parking brake cable to the brake backing plate and install the parking brake cable
bracket bolt.
^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
13. Install the parking brake shoes.
All vehicles
14. Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly
oriented with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the rear of the
vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the stabilizer bar
bushing bracket.
^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.).
3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 5103
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On
Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 5109
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5110
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. ^
To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.).
3. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the lower stabilizer bar link nut. ^
To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.).
4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new
parts.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5120
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5121
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5127
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5128
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5129
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5130
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5131
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5132
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5133
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5134
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5135
Front Subframe: Description and Operation
FRONT SUBFRAME
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms.
- provide a mounting point for the engine isolators.
- provide the mounting surface for the steering gear.
- provide the mounting surface for the sway bar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5136
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
FRONT SUBFRAME
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5137
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5138
Part 2
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery.
Escape Hybrid
3. Remove the steering gear.
4. If equipped with 4WD, remove the rear engine mount bracket.
1 Remove the 2 nuts.
2 Remove the bolt. To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
3 Remove the rear engine mount bracket.
All vehicles except Escape Hybrid
5. Remove the 2 rear transaxle mount nuts and bolt
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5139
6. Remove the power steering hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. Using the special tool, support the engine. 8. Remove the bolts and the lateral support
crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
9. Remove the splash shield bolt.
10. Remove the front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
12. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
13. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt and nuts.
- To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
14. Remove the 2 nuts and disconnect the 2 stabilizer bar links.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
15. Remove the 2 steering gear bolts.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
16. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 17. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe
(2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 18. If equipped with 4WD, remove the driveshaft.
19. NOTE: The engine must be lowered to allow the front subframe to clear the transaxle
companion flange.
If equipped with 4WD, use the special tool to lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm
(5.9 in).
20. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5140
- To install, tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft).
21. Support the front subframe and remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
All vehicles
22. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
23. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5149
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5150
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5156
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5157
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5158
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5159
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5160
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5161
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5162
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5163
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5172
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5173
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5179
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5180
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5181
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5182
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5183
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5184
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5185
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5186
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5187
Rear Subframe: Description and Operation
REAR SUBFRAME
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential (4WD).
Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the
suspension parts, and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening
concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by improperly tightened bolts and
body misalignment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5188
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
REAR SUBFRAME
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with 4WD
2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5189
3. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside.
4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 5. With an assistant, remove the 4
bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
4. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
5. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5198
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5199
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5205
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5206
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5207
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5208
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5209
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5210
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5211
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5212
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTE: LH side is shown, RH side is similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove
the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. 4. Remove the ABS wheel
speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5217
Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Remove the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. CAUTION: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod CV joint
can result in the separation of internal parts,
causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4
strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check
the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Disassembly and Assembly
Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5218
1. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove the
strut piston rod-to-bushing nut.
^ To assemble, tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. 6. Remove the coil spring. 7.
Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble,
reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5219
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear
Spring
Removal
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Support the wheel knuckle and remove
the upper ball joint nut. 3. Remove the lower shock absorber nut, washer, and bolt. 4. Remove the
upper arm inner bolt.
^ Loosen the lower arm inner bolt.
5. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulator and coil spring for installation.
Carefully lower the wheel knuckle support.
6. Remove the coil spring.
Installation
1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulator to the previously noted position. 2. Carefully raise
the wheel knuckle support. 3. Install the upper arm inner bolt.
^ Tighten the upper and lower arm inner bolts to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the lower shock absorber bolt, washer, and nut.
^ Tighten the nut to 175 Nm (129 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the upper ball joint nut and remove the wheel knuckle support.
^ Tighten the nut to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5228
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5229
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5235
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5236
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5237
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front
Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
1. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove the
strut piston rod-to-bushing nut.
^ To assemble, tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. 6. Remove the coil spring. 7.
Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5240
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble,
reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5241
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear
Shock Absorber
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 3.
Remove the upper shock absorber nuts, washer, and bushing.
^ To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.).
4. Remove the lower shock absorber nut, washer, and bolt.
^ To install, tighten to 175 (129 ft. lbs.).
5. Remove the shock absorber and the bushing. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5242
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTE: LH side is shown, RH side is similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove
the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. 4. Remove the ABS wheel
speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5243
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Remove the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. CAUTION: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod CV joint
can result in the separation of internal parts,
causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4
strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check
the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams
> Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams
> Front > Page 5248
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 5249
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and the brake pads are retracted sufficiently to allow
movement of the wheel and tire assembly.
Grasp the tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the
weight of the tire from the front wheel bearings. If movement exists, a new bearing must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5252
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5253
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5254
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5255
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
4WD vehicles
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) wheel
speed sensor ring.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5256
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle.
4WD vehicles
8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5257
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel
bearing snap ring.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
FWD vehicles
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
4WD vehicles
6. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut
Tighten to .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING:
- Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause
the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 5266
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning the
hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information >
Description and Operation
Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation
Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tires: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Tires: Customer Interest Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tires: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 5278
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tires: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 5279
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds >
Page 5285
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds >
Page 5286
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Wheels: Customer Interest Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 5295
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 5296
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds
TSB 05-20-6
10/17/05
HIGHWAY SPEED VIBRATION - VEHICLES BUILT BEFORE 7/1/2005 EQUIPPED WITH
CONTITRAC P235/70R16 104T TIRES
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-13 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2006 Escapes/Mariners built before 7/1/2005 equipped with Continental
Contitrac(TM) P235/70R16 104T tires only, may exhibit a vibration at highway speeds over a wide
speed range.
ACTION Refer to the following Service Procedure to check the vehicle tires to determine if any
need replacement. Only replace the individual tires identified as requiring replacement by the
Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS MESSAGE IS INTENDED TO ADDRESS FIRST ORDER TIRE VIBRATIONS.
NOTE
THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO REMOVE FLAT
SPOTS. IF NOT, THE TIRE BALANCE AND ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS WILL NOT BE
ACCURATE.
1. Drive the vehicle at highway speeds for 20 miles (32 km) to evaluate the vibration and eliminate
flat spotting.
NOTE
IF THE VIBRATION GOES AWAY DURING THE 20 MILE (32 KM) VIBRATION EVALUATION,
THE CONCERN IS DUE TO TIRE FLAT SPOTTING, WHICH IS A NORMAL TIRE CONDITION.
NO FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIRS SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
2. If road force measurement equipment (Hunter G5P9700/9712, or equivalent) is available,
proceed to Step 3. If not, balance the tires with a standard balancer and use a dial indicator to
locate and mark the high point of each tire's centerline radial runout. Record the runout
measurement of each tire and wheel assembly. If this measurement exceeds .040" (1.02 mm)
check to see if the wheel is bent or damaged. If the excess runout is attributable to the tire, replace
with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental Part Number for
BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000. Proceed to Steps 5
and 6.
NOTE
DO NOT USE THE SPARE TIRE AS A REPLACEMENT.
NOTE
THE PROCEDURE IN THIS TSB IS FAR MORE EFFECTIVE WHEN USING ROAD FORCE
MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT. ONLY USE A STANDARD BALANCER AND MANUALLY CHECK
RUN OUT WHEN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. THERE IS A WEBSITE AVAILABLE TO LOCATE
THE NEAREST FACILITY WITH ROAD FORCE EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE.
NOTE
SUPPRESS ROUND OFF FUNCTION ON ROAD FORCE BALANCER TO ALLOW ACTUAL
RESIDUALS TO BE DISPLAYED.
3. Perform the road force measurement immediately after driving the vehicle. Remove the wheel
assemblies. Measure the road force variation of all four (4) tires. Measure and mark the tire HIGH
road force variation point (R1H) on all four (4) tires prior to dismounting them from the road force
measurement equipment. Balance as required to 0.35 oz (log) or less of imbalance (check both
two-plane and static). If any wheel assembly measures more than 18 lbs (8 kg) for R1H then
proceed to Step 4. If less proceed to Step 5.
4. Using the road force measurement equipment, determine the low spot of the wheel run out.
Match high point force variation on the tire with the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 5302
low spot of wheel run out. If the wheel assembly is now acceptable, continue with rebalance. If not,
replace the tire with the appropriate (BSW or OWL) Continental P235/70R16 tire. The Continental
Part Number for BSW is 9002 1548250-0000, the OWL Part Number is 9002 1548100-0000.
Proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Install the lowest R1H level tires on the front of the vehicle.
6. Install the lug nuts and torque to 98 lb-ft (133 N-m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052006A 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 0.8 Hr
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, If Concern Is Solved, Return To
Customer
052006B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires
052006C 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.8 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance
052006D 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.2 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 1 Tire
052006E 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 2.6 Hrs
Built Before July 1, 2005: 20 Mile (33Km) Vibration Evaluation, Balance 4 Tires, Re-index 4 Tires,
Re-balance 4 Tires, Replace 4 Tires (Do not use with operation 1007D, 1007AT, 1007AF,
1007AFT, 1OO7AB, 1007ABT, 1007D2A, 1007D2B, 1007AD2C, 1007AD2T, 1007D3T, 1007D3F,
1007D3FT, 1007D3B, 1007D3BT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
(OPERATION A) NPF 82 (NPF)
(OPERATION B, C) ALBAL D9 (ALBAL)
(OPERATION D, E) TIRE 13 (TIRE)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-20-6 > Oct > 05 > Tires - Vibration Highway at Speeds > Page 5303
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract >
Page 5309
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract >
Page 5315
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Diagrams > Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Diagrams > Front > Page 5320
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5321
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and the brake pads are retracted sufficiently to allow
movement of the wheel and tire assembly.
Grasp the tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the
weight of the tire from the front wheel bearings. If movement exists, a new bearing must be
installed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5324
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5325
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5326
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5327
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
4WD vehicles
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) wheel
speed sensor ring.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5328
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles
7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle.
4WD vehicles
8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5329
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel
bearing snap ring.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
FWD vehicles
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut.
^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.).
4WD vehicles
6. Install the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut
Tighten to .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
5 Wheel nuts.
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern. Tighten to ............................................................................
.............................................................................................................. 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the
wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5339
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel studs from the
wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
(A/C) system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 3. Disconnect
the evaporator core outlet tube spring lock coupling and the A/C compressor manifold and tube
spring lock coupling. 4. Remove the 2 suction accumulator bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of PAG oil.
- Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator
Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator
Removal and Installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator > Page 5349
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 auxiliary line floorpan
bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in)
3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket mill remain in place. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel. See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim
4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to
make sure the duct is sealed correctly. Remove
the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct assembly To
install, tighten 12 Nm (18 lb-in)
5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts.
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt end remove the D-pillar bracket. 9.
Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator > Page 5350
10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the
screws. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door
actuator screws. ^
Disconnect the rod.
^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator
12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the
D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the
auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the
housing mounting location.
NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode
door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM)
self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator > Page 5351
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
RECIRCULATION BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Disconnect the recirculation vacuum control motor vacuum supply hose. 3. Remove the 2
recirculation vacuum control motor screws.
4. Rotate the vacuum control motor until it clears the retaining arm and remove the vacuum control
motor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator > Page 5352
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator
TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment door. 2. Turn the temperature selector to the full cold position.
3. Release the locking tab and remove the temperature blend door actuator from the blend door
shaft. 4. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 5. Remove the temperature blend door
actuator. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator > Page 5353
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor
VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vacuum supply hose from the vacuum control motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator > Page 5354
2. Remove the 2 vacuum control motor screws. Rotate the vacuum control motor until it clears the
retaining arm and remove the vacuum control
motor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Duct: Service and Repair
DEFROSTER DUCT
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Remove the 4 side window demister nuts and both side window demisters. 3. Remove the 3
defroster duct screws and the defroster duct. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
FLOOR DUCT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
5358
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Remove the front
door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels. 4. Pull back the carpeting to gain
access to the floor ducts. 5. Separate the wiring harness from the floor ducts and position aside. 6.
Remove the floor duct. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CENTER REGISTER DUCT
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
5359
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the defroster duct. 2. Remove the 6 side register duct screws and the register duct
assembly.
- Separate the side register duct from the center register duct by disengaging the tab from the slot
on the center register duct.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page
5368
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust > Page 5374
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5375
Air Register: Service and Repair
DRIVER SIDE REGISTER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center register duct. 2. Remove the 2 driver side register nuts and the driver side
register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CENTER REGISTERS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5376
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Release the tabs and remove the RH and
LH center registers. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
PASSENGER SIDE REGISTER
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5377
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center register duct. 2. Remove the 2 passenger side register nuts and the
passenger side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PUMP
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the
lower splash shield. 4. Release the 2 clamps and disconnect the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump
heater hoses. 5. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 6. Remove the 2
bolts and the auxiliary coolant flow pump.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with water if needed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5386
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim panel. 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3.
Remove the 3 blower motor screws and the blower motor. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Low
Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Low
Speed Fan Control Relay > Page 5391
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Low
Speed Fan Control Relay > Page 5392
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5393
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5394
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5395
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5399
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5400
Blower Motor Resistor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5401
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim panel. 2. Disconnect the blower resistor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the blower motor resistor. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Press the tabs simultaneously and remove the blower motor switch. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
CABIN AIR FILTER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3.
Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page
5408
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page
5409
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
CABIN AIR FILTER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3.
Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Magnetic clutch
Air gap between pulley and hub...........................................................................................................
....................................0.35-0.75 mm (0.014-0.029 in)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5414
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH AIR GAP ADJUSTMENT
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C
clutch pulley. 2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove
spacers between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft
until the clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5415
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5416
Removal
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
3. Remove the A/C disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacers.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch disc and hub to force it from the compressor
shaft. 2 Lift the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacers from the
compressor shaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5417
4. Remove the A/C clutch pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
6. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
Installation
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
NOTE: Position the A/C clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5418
Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
3. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly
aligned during installation.
Install the A/C clutch pulley.
4. Install the A/C clutch pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place 1 nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5419
7. Using the special tool, install the A/C clutch bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft).
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-4 (Engine Compartment, 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5423
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5424
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5425
Removal
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
3. Remove the A/C disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacers.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch disc and hub to force it from the compressor
shaft. 2 Lift the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacers from the
compressor shaft.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5426
4. Remove the A/C clutch pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
6. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
Installation
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
NOTE: Position the A/C clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5427
Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
3. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly
aligned during installation.
Install the A/C clutch pulley.
4. Install the A/C clutch pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place 1 nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5428
7. Using the special tool, install the A/C clutch bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft).
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
Compressor Shaft Seal: Customer Interest A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
TSB 06-4-9
03/06/06
A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005
Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006
Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non
operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal.
ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal
(F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the
leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual,
Section 412-03.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual
Operation For Compressor Time
Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19D665 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 5437
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06
> A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
Compressor Shaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
TSB 06-4-9
03/06/06
A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005
Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006
Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non
operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal.
ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal
(F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the
leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual,
Section 412-03.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual
Operation For Compressor Time
Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19D665 42
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06
> A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 5443
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5447
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR)
NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and WACF are used to monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR (may be referred to as the wide open throttle A/C cutoff [WAC] relay) is wired normally
open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC module and the A/C
clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this
message is sent through the communications network). When A/C is requested, the PCM will
check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP SW, ACCS). If these inputs indicate
A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine RPM,
throttle position), the PCM will ground the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending
voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5448
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5449
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection
A/C EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to
the core tubes.
Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set
to the evaporator or condenser tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings, or install an adapter that activates the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C
evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45 minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with the gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then check for a loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to set overnight with vacuum applied and
check for a vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core leaks, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser
core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5453
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
CONDENSER CORE
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning (A/C)
system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or
damage to the suction accumulator.
- If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is
removed from the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the
front bumper cover. 4. Remove the 2 condenser core peanut fitting nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 condenser core bracket bolts and the 2 condenser core brackets.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the condenser core.
7. NOTE: A new O-ring seal lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before installing a
new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of PAG oil.
- Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views
Control Assembly: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 5459
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly
CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the climate
control assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 5462
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Temperature Control Switch
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Place the temperature selector switch in the full cold position before disengaging the
temperature blend door actuator.
Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the temperature selector switch knob. 3. Remove the temperature selector switch
screw.
4. Press the tab and rotate the temperature selector switch counterclockwise.
- Remove the temperature selector switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 5463
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Place the temperature selector switch in the full cold position before installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 5464
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Function Selector Switch
FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the function selector switch knob.
3. Press the tabs simultaneously and remove the function selector switch. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Spring Lock Coupling
SPRING LOCK COUPLING
Remover, Refrigerant Coupling Spring
Special Tool(s)
Disconnect
1. Remove the spring lock coupling clip, if equipped.
2. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal grooves, resulting in
refrigerant leaks.
Push the tool into the cage opening to release the female fitting from the spring lock coupling
spring and pull the fitting apart. Remove the O-ring seals using a non-metallic tool.
3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring;
this can cause axial scratches across
the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
Remove the spring lock coupling spring with a small hooked wire.
Cleaning
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 5469
1. Fabricate a cleaning tool from a 1/8-inch diameter brazing rod.
2. Cut an abrasive pad with the dimensions corresponding to the coupling size.
3. Assemble the pad to the tool. 4. Coat the abrasive pad with mineral oil. 5. Roll the pad on the
tool and install it in a variable speed drill motor.
6. CAUTION: Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to
prevent axial scratches which may cause
future leaks.
Polish for 1 minute at moderate speed (less than 1,500 rpm) or until the surface is clean and free of
scratches or foreign material.
7. Clean the fitting with a lint-free cloth. 8. Inspect the surface for grooves or scratches. If grooves
and scratches are still present, install a new component.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 5470
9. Clean the O-ring seal grooves with a 30 cm (1 foot) length of natural fiber string.
- Loop the string around the grooves and pull the string back and forth.
10. Remove any foreign material from the grooves with a lint-free cloth.
Connect
1. Install the spring lock coupling spring.
2. Lubricate the inside of the coupling with mineral oil.
3. CAUTION: Use only new, green, O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified
may result in intermittent leakage during
vehicle operation.
Install the O-ring seals. Lubricate the O-ring seals with mineral oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 5471
4. Connect the spring lock coupling fittings with a twisting motion until the spring lock coupling
spring snaps over the flared end of the female
fitting.
5. Install the spring lock coupling clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 5472
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Line (Peanut) Fitting
AIR CONDITIONING LINE (PEANUT) FITTING
Disconnect
1. Remove the nut and separate the 2 halves of the peanut fitting.
2. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seal. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal groove, resulting in
refrigerant leaks.
Remove the O-ring seal with a non-metallic tool.
Connect
1. Clean all dirt or foreign material from the fittings.
2. CAUTION: Use only new, green, O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than those
specified may result in intermittent leakage
during vehicle operation.
Install the O-ring seal. Lubricate the O-ring seal with mineral oil.
3. Lubricate the inside of the fittings with mineral oil.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 5473
4. NOTE: When correctly assembled, the male and female fittings should be flush.
Assemble the male and female fittings together.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- If an evaporator core leak is suspected, the evaporator core must be vacuum leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or
damage to the suction accumulator.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the instrument panel.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5477
4. Disconnect the 2 evaporator core spring lock couplings.
5. NOTE: Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the
passenger area.
Remove the 4 evaporator core housing nuts and the evaporator core housing.
6. NOTE:
- Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing.
- Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature
switch are correctly positioned.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
A/C EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to
the core tubes.
Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set
to the evaporator or condenser tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings, or install an adapter that activates the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C
evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45 minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with the gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then check for a loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to set overnight with vacuum applied and
check for a vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core leaks, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser
core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5481
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
component or damage to the suction accumulator.
- If an A/C evaporator core leak is suspected, the A/C evaporator core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
- The evaporator core and evaporator housing must be installed as a complete unit.
1. Remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 2. Transfer, the components from the old evaporator
core housing to the new evaporator core housing. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the new A/C evaporator core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart (Part 1)
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart (Part 2)
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost (demist
performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE ORIFICE
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
NOTE:
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or
damage to the suction accumulator.
- New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting any A/C
fitting which has been disconnected.
Removal
1. Remove the condenser to evaporator line. 2. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator spring lock
coupling. 3. Inspect the evaporator core orifice for damage before attempting to remove it from the
evaporator core inlet line.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5488
4. If the evaporator core orifice is intact, engage the special tool. Hold the T-handle stationary while
rotating the tool body to remove the evaporator
core orifice.
5. If the evaporator core orifice is broken, screw the end of the special tool into the broken orifice.
Hold the T-handle stationary while rotating the
tool body to remove the evaporator core orifice.
6. Remove and discard the evaporator core inlet line fitting O-ring.
Installation
1. Lubricate the evaporator core orifice O-rings with clean mineral oil and install the evaporator
core orifice using the special tool. 2. Connect the condenser to evaporator line spring lock coupling.
3. Install the condenser to evaporator line.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
5497
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
5498
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 5504
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 5505
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5506
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
HEATER CORE
WARNING: Carbon monoxide is colorless, odorless and dangerous. If it is necessary to operate
the engine with the vehicle in a closed area such as a garage, always use an exhaust collector to
vent the exhaust gases outside the closed area.
1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores were
good and did not require replacement. If a heater
core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by carrying out the plugged heater core
component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking
the heater system thoroughly as follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose-to-heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and
appear as a leak in the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specification clamps can cause leakage at
the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater
water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: The heater core inlet hose will become too hot to handle if the system is working
correctly.
1. Verify the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3.
When the engine coolant reaches a normal operating temperature, feel the heater core inlet and
outlet hoses to see if they are hot.
If the inlet hose is not hot: the thermostat is not working correctly.
If the outlet hose is not hot: the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be restricted or plugged.
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the pressure tester to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Clamp off the heater hoses.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the pressure tester in the heater
water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, the plug, and the adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the pressure tester to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed
valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7.
Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater
water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater water hoses do not leak, remove
the
heater core from the vehicle and perform the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3.
Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes.
Then connect the pressure tester to the adapter.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5507
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5508
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Release the 2 clamps and disconnect the 2 heater hoses from the
heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the screw and the temperature blend door lever. 5. Remove the 3 screws and the
heater core cover. 6. Remove the heater core from the housing.
7. NOTE:
- Make sure the temperature blend door actuator and switch are in the correct position when
installing the temperature blend door lever.
- Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair
AUXILIARY HEATER CORE HOUSING
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater hoses from the
heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. If equipped with A/C, remove the evaporator core housing.
5. NOTE: Carefully remove the heater core housing to avoid spilling engine coolant in the
passenger area.
Remove the 3 nuts and the heater core housing. -
Transfer any necessary external components from the old evaporator core housing to the new
evaporator core housing.
6. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only, if needed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
5520
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
5521
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 5527
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 5528
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5529
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
HEATER HOSE
Heater Hose To Heater Core Connections
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5530
Heater Hose To Block Connections
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 5531
Heater Hose To Oil Cooler Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. If removing
the heater core hoses, remove the heater hose tie. 4. Release the clamps and remove the
necessary heater hose(s). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Fill the engine cooling system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR TO COMPRESSOR LINE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5536
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH splash shield. 4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater
electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 6. Remove the suction
accumulator to compressor line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line from the A/C compressor. 8. Remove the
2 suction accumulator to compressor line bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line spring lock coupling.
10. Remove the suction accumulator to compressor line.
11. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5537
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
Compressor Connection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5538
Condenser Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the RH splash shield. 5. If equipped,
disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 6. Remove the compressor to condenser
discharge line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the compressor to condenser discharge line from the compressor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
8. Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut and disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting
compressor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor to condenser discharge line.
10. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5539
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
COMPRESSOR MANIFOLD AND TUBE ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the A/C refrigerant. 3. Remove
the 2 compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the spring lock coupling from the suction accumulator. 5. Remove the front bumper
cover. 6. Disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting.
- Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the RH splash shield. 8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater. 9. Disconnect
the A/C compressor electrical connector.
10. Remove the manifold and tube assembly bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5540
11. Remove the A/C compressor manifold and tube assembly.
- Remove and discard the O-rings.
12. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5541
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Evaporator Line
CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch
electrical connector. 5. Remove the condenser to evaporator line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the evaporator core spring lock coupling. 7. Remove the condenser to evaporator
line peanut fitting nut and disconnect the line.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser to evaporator line.
9. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5542
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR TO COMPRESSOR LINE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5543
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH splash shield. 4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater
electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connector. 6. Remove the suction
accumulator to compressor line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line from the A/C compressor. 8. Remove the
2 suction accumulator to compressor line bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Disconnect the suction accumulator to compressor line spring lock coupling.
10. Remove the suction accumulator to compressor line.
11. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5544
Compressor Connection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5545
Condenser Connection
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the RH splash shield. 5. If equipped,
disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 6. Remove the compressor to condenser
discharge line bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
7. Disconnect the compressor to condenser discharge line from the compressor.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
8. Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut and disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting
compressor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Remove the compressor to condenser discharge line.
10. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Compressor Manifold and Tube Assembly
COMPRESSOR MANIFOLD AND TUBE ASSEMBLY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5546
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the A/C refrigerant. 3. Remove
the 2 compressor manifold and tube assembly bracket nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the spring lock coupling from the suction accumulator. 5. Remove the front bumper
cover. 6. Disconnect the condenser core peanut fitting.
- Remove the condenser core peanut fitting nut. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the RH splash shield. 8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater. 9. Disconnect
the A/C compressor electrical connector.
10. Remove the manifold and tube assembly bolt.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).
11. Remove the A/C compressor manifold and tube assembly.
- Remove and discard the O-rings.
12. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5547
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Condenser to Evaporator Line
CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the air conditioning (A/C)
refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch
electrical connector. 5. Remove the condenser to evaporator line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the evaporator core spring lock coupling. 7. Remove the condenser to evaporator
line peanut fitting nut and disconnect the line.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser to evaporator line.
9. NOTE: New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5548
- Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Inlet Line
EVAPORATOR INLET LINE
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Loosen the nuts and disconnect the evaporator inlet line fittings.
- Remove and discard the O-rings.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
4. NOTE: New O-ring seals, lubricated in clean mineral oil, must be installed before reconnecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Charge and leak test the refrigerant system.
Evaporator Inlet Line - Orifice Tube
EVAPORATOR INLET LINE - ORIFICE TUBE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Suction Accumulator to Compressor Line > Page 5549
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Loosen the nut and disconnect the evaporator inlet line fitting.
- Remove and discard the O-ring.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the orifice evaporator inlet line spring lock coupling and remove the orifice
evaporator inlet line.
4. NOTE: New O-ring seals, lubricated in clean mineral oil, must be installed before reconnecting
any A/C fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Charge and leak test the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- If an evaporator core leak is suspected, the evaporator core must be vacuum leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
- Installation of a new accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning system
except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage
to the accumulator.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior
Moulding/Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose. 4. Disconnect the 2 evaporator core spring lock couplings.
5. NOTE: Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the
passenger area.
Remove the 4 evaporator core housing nuts and the evaporator core housing. Transfer any necessary external components from the old evaporator core housing to the new
evaporator core housing.
6. NOTE:
- Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing.
- Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature
switch are correctly positioned.
- New O-ring seals lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before connecting any A/C
fitting which has been disconnected.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of PAG oil.
- Evacuate, leak test, and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 907 g (2 lb.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 5557
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... R134a
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK DETECTION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Fluorescent Dye Detection
NOTE: Vehicles are manufactured with R-134a fluorescent dye installed in the refrigerant system
from the factory. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
fluorescent dye under a UV lamp. Since more than 1 leak can exist, make sure to inspect each
component, line, and fitting in the refrigerant system for a leak.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 5560
1. Check for leaks using an approved UV lamp.
- Inspect all the components, lines, and fittings of the refrigerant system.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant. 3. Repair the refrigerant system leak(s). 4. Evacuate
and charge the refrigerant system. 5. After the leak(s) is/are repaired, remove any traces of
fluorescent dye with a general purpose oil solvent.
6. Verify the repair by running the vehicle for a short period of time and rechecking the area of the
leak with an approved UV lamp.
Fluorescent Dye Injection - Using an A/C Center and Dye Injector
NOTE:
- Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the factory to assist in
refrigerant system leak diagnosis using an approved ultraviolet blacklight. It is not necessary to add
additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of
refrigerant has been removed from the system. New suction accumulators and receiver/driers are
shipped with a fluorescent dye wafer included in the desiccant bag which will dissolve after
approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add dye after flushing
or filtering the refrigerant system because a new suction accumulator or receiver/drier is installed
as part of the flushing or filtering procedure. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added
if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting
separation, hose rupture or other damage.
- Before using the R-134a fluorescent dye injector for the first time, refer to the manufacturer
instructions on evacuation of any non-condensable gasses from the hoses.
- Only connect the R-134a fluorescent dye injector to a manifold and gauge set or R-134a
refrigerant center when fluorescent dye is to be injected. The R-134a fluorescent dye injector has a
one-way check valve that will prevent refrigerant system recovery and evacuation.
- The refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with
the engine off.
1. Connect an R-134a A/C center or a manifold and gauge set to the refrigerant system port valves.
2. Verify that the valves on the fluorescent dye injector are closed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 5561
3. Fill the fluorescent dye injector reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 oz) of fluorescent dye. 4. Install the
fluorescent dye injector between the low-pressure gauge port valve and the R-134a refrigerant
center or manifold gauge set. 5. Open all the valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the
refrigerant system. 6. When the fluorescent dye injection is complete, close all the valves. 7.
Recover the refrigerant from the R-134a fluorescent dye injector. 8. Remove the fluorescent dye
injector from the low-pressure gauge port valve and the R-134a A/C center or manifold gauge set.
Fluorescent Dye Injection - Using a Dye Injector Loop Kit
NOTE:
- Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the factory to assist in
refrigerant system leak diagnosis using an approved ultraviolet blacklight. It is not necessary to add
additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of
refrigerant has been removed from the system. New suction accumulators and receiver/driers are
shipped with a fluorescent dye wafer included in the desiccant bag which will dissolve after
approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add dye after flushing
or filtering the refrigerant system because a new suction accumulator or receiver/drier is installed
as part of the flushing or filtering procedure. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added
if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting
separation, hose rupture or other damage.
- Before using the R-134a fluorescent dye injector for the first time, refer to the equipment
manufacturer instructions on evacuation of non-condensable gasses from the hoses.
- The refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F).
1. Verify that the valves on the injector loop kit are closed.
2. Fill the injector loop kit reservoir with 7 ml (0.24 oz) of fluorescent dye. 3. Install the injector loop
kit between the high-pressure and low-pressure gauge port valves.
4. CAUTION: Make sure all tools and hoses are clear of the engine cooling fan and drive belt
before starting the engine.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 5562
Start the engine.
5. Open the high-pressure valve.
6. Open the injector loop kit valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system.
7. Close the high-pressure valve to allow the pressure inside the injector loop kit to equalize with
the suction side of the refrigerant system.
8. NOTE: Close the valves on the injector loop kit while the A/C compressor is operating.
Close the valves on the injector loop kit.
9. NOTE: Leave all the valves on the special tool closed when not in use.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 5563
Disconnect the high-pressure and low-pressure valves and remove the injector loop kit from the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection > Page 5564
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION
H10PM Refrigerant Leak Detector With Battery
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. Using a fan to ventilate the area to be
tested before proceeding with the leak detection procedure is helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air, but the fan should be turned off during the actual testing.
1. NOTE: The system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
Leak test the refrigerant system using the refrigerant leak detector. Follow the instructions included
with the leak detector for handling and operation techniques.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant.
- Repair the system.
- Test the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM RECOVERY, EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 5567
1. Prior to recovery, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
center to the low- and high-pressure gauge port valves following the operating instructions provided
by the
equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the refrigerant has been recovered, switch the power supply
OFF. 5. Allow the system to set for approximately 2 minutes and observe the system vacuum
reading. If the vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery
equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 5568
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM RECOVERY, EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using an R-134a Refrigerant Center
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 5569
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant center to the low pressure and high pressure gauge port valves
following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as
possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn off the vacuum pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the
system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for 5
minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using an R-134a Manifold Gauge Set
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Connect the R-134a manifold gauge set to the low-side and high-side gauge port valves. 2.
Connect the center (yellow) hose from the manifold gauge set to the suction port on the vacuum
pump. 3. Open all valves on the R-134a manifold gauge set and both gauge port valves. 4. Turn on
the vacuum pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa
(29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the manifold gauge set (not the gauge port valves)
and turn off the vacuum pump. 6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for five minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using an R-134a Refrigerant Center
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 2. Connect an R-134a
A/C center to the low-side and high-side gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment
manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging
NOTE:
- Use of a refrigerant center is recommended to carry out recovery, evacuation, and charging of the
refrigerant system. If a refrigerant center is not available, refrigerant system recovery, evacuation,
and charging may be accomplished using a separate recovery station, vacuum pump, charging
meter, and manifold gauge set.
- Leaks in refrigerant system equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in vacuum that may be
misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are
present.
1. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 2. Assemble the
R-134a manifold gauge set, automatic refrigerant charging meter and R-134a supply tank following
the automatic refrigerant
charging meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the automatic refrigerant charging meter operating
instructions. 4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the
engine, select A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge to
complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 5570
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Identification Testing
REFRIGERANT IDENTIFICATION TESTING
Refrigerant Identifier With Air-Radicator
Special Tool(s)
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: An A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used to identify gas samples taken directly from the
refrigeration system or storage containers prior
to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant identifier to obtain the sample for testing.
2. The diagnostic tool will display 1 of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS light emitting diode
(LED) will light. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons, and air will be
displayed on the digital display.
- If the refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an
alarm will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12,
R-22, and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If the hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
Hydrocarbon High be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the user of
potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, and hydrocarbons will also be
displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The diagnostic tool eliminates the effect of
air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is not considered a contaminant,
although air can affect A/C system performance. When the diagnostic tool has determined that a
refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is 98% or greater by weight) and the air concentration levels are
2% or greater by weight, the diagnostic tool will prompt the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 5571
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT HANDLING
CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the air
conditioning system flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C repair facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this repair.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Flush the air conditioning
system. 4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil Capacity ......................................................................................................................
........................................................... 266 ml. (9 oz.)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 5576
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Oil Type ........................................................................................................................
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R134a Systems)
* Meeting Ford Specification WSH-M1C231-B
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5577
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil
charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part.
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5578
Part 2
1. Refer to the chart for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
Refrigerant Oil Adding for New A/C Compressor Installation
NOTE: A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 full rotations clockwise while collecting the
refrigerant oil in a clean measuring cup.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), add
the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 ounces), add
the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
- If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces), add 85 ml
(3 ounces) plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
Refrigerant Oil Adding for New Suction Accumulator or Receiver/Drier Installation
1. Drill a half-inch hole in the old suction accumulator or receiver/drier cylinder and drain the oil into
a clean measuring cup. 2. Add the quantity of oil drained, plus the amount collected during
refrigerant recovery and 60 ml (2 ounces).
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct
adapters to match the amount of PAG oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
5579
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 5. Install the dye/lubricant
injector between the low-side gauge port valve and the refrigerant station or manifold gauge set. 6.
Open all the valves and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > High Pressure
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the high pressure
cut-off switch.
3. NOTE: A new O-ring seal lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before installing a
new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Low Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Low Speed Fan Control Relay > Page 5589
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Low Speed Fan Control Relay > Page 5590
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5591
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5592
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5593
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5597
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR)
NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and WACF are used to monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR (may be referred to as the wide open throttle A/C cutoff [WAC] relay) is wired normally
open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC module and the A/C
clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this
message is sent through the communications network). When A/C is requested, the PCM will
check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP SW, ACCS). If these inputs indicate
A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine RPM,
throttle position), the PCM will ground the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending
voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5598
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5599
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Press the tabs simultaneously and remove the blower motor switch. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart (Part 1)
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart (Part 2)
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost (demist
performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > High Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
High Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the high pressure
cut-off switch.
3. NOTE: A new O-ring seal lubricated with clean mineral oil must be installed before installing a
new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Service Port HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
5614
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service and Repair
VACUUM HOSE REPAIR
Vacuum Pump Kit
Special Tool(s)
1. Measure the length of the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 2. Cut a piece of
standard 1/8-inch inner diameter vacuum hose approximately 25 mm (1 inch) longer than the
damaged area of the mini-tube
vacuum hose.
3. Cut off the mini-tube vacuum hose on each side of the damaged area.
4. WARNING: Read the warning information on the product label to prevent possible personal
injury.
Dip the mini-tube hose ends in commercially available paint thinner containing methyl ethyl ketone
(MEK). This solvent will seal the mini-tube in the vacuum hose.
5. Insert the ends of the mini-tube vacuum hose approximately 9 mm (3/8 inch) into the ends of the
standard 1/8-inch repair vacuum hose section. 6. Shake the repair joint after assembly to make
sure the solvent is dispersed and the vacuum line is not plugged. 7. Test the system for a vacuum
leak in the repair area.
- Use a vacuum pump.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle
repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control
module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new
deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and
installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried
out.
Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry
out the OCS System Reset procedure as
instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system
removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following
procedures for the specified system:
- For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails.
- For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared.
- NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting
points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat
mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 5623
SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 5624
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION
1. WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt
height adjusters, if so equipped, child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware
should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified
technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress.
Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected
for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must
be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Perform the Functional Test.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5630
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5631
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5632
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5633
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5634
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5635
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5636
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5637
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5638
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5639
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5640
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5645
Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5646
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5647
Air Bag: Locations Side Air Curtain Module
View 151-16 (Full Body, Left Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5648
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5651
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5652
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Curtain Module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
5653
Air Bag: Description and Operation
Driver Air Bag Module
NOTE: The driver air bag (soft pack) and steering wheel can be serviced separately or as an assembly.
- In the event of an air bag deployment, the air bag (soft pack) and steering wheel must be serviced
as an assembly.
The driver air bag module: is installed new as an assembly.
- is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
- will deploy upon receiving a flow of current from the restraints control module (RCM).
Passenger Air Bag Module
The passenger air bag module: is installed new as an assembly.
- is mounted in the passenger side of the instrument panel.
- will deploy upon receiving a flow of current from the restraints control module (RCM).
- is single stage unit on Escape Hybrid vehicles.
- is a dual stage unit on Escape and Mariner vehicles.
Safety Canopy Module
Vehicles With Moon Roof
Vehicles Without Moon Roof
WARNING: Anytime the safety canopy has deployed, the headliner, and all A-, B- and C- upper
trim panels and attaching hardware must be replaced along with any other damaged components
and hardware. Failure to do so can result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy
deployment.
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is equipped
with safety canopy modules.
The side air curtain module or safety canopy: is installed as an assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
5654
- is mounted above the headliner.
- attaches from the A-pillar frame to the C-pillar frame.
- There are 2 different safety canopy modules, 1 for vehicles equipped with a moon roof and 1 for
vehicles without a moon roof. The safety canopy modules are NOT interchangeable. If installing a
new safety canopy module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle
application.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5657
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- When installing a drivers air bag module (soft pack), make sure there are no foreign objects in the
steering wheel cavity or in the driver air bag module (soft pack). Failure to do so may result in
personal injury in the event of an air bag deployment.
- Do not dislodge the fabric from the air bag module (soft pack). In the event that the air bag fabric
becomes dislodged, install a new air bag module (soft pack). Failure to do so may result in
personal injury in the event of an air bag deployment.
- Be careful not to pinch the air bag fabric between the steering wheel and the air bag module
housing. In the event the fabric becomes pinched, install a new air bag module (soft pack). Failure
to do so may result in the air bag not functioning properly.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The driver air bag (soft pack) and steering wheel can be serviced separately or as an assembly.
- In the event of an air bag (soft pack) deployment, the air bag (soft pack) and the steering wheel
must be serviced as an assembly.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5658
1. Depower the system.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors to the
clockspring. 4. Loosen the steering wheel mounting pinion shaft to release the steering wheel from
the steering column shaft.
- To install, tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft).
5. Remove the steering wheel. 6. Remove the screws and the steering wheel front cover. 7.
Remove the nuts and the steering wheel armature.
- To install, tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft).
8. Disconnect the steering wheel accessories and remove the driver air bag module.
1 Disconnect and slide the connector off the wire shield.
2 Route the wire harness out of the wire shield.
3 If equipped, remove the screws.
4 If equipped, separate the switches from the steering wheel.
5 Lift the driver air bag module out of the steering wheel.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5659
Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door face down. This will reduce the
risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Air bag modules with discolored or damaged deployment doors must be replaced, not repainted.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 3. Disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 passenger air bag module bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5660
5. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door.
Through the glove box opening, push up to release the 3 lower deployment door clips (2 shown)
from the instrument panel and push the lower end of the passenger air bag module out of the
instrument panel, so the clips do not engage again.
6. Push down at the top of the deployment door, release the 3 clips and remove the passenger air
bag module.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the J-clips are in place before positioning the passenger air bag module to the
instrument panel.
Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel. With the alignment pins positioned to the instrument panel, push in, seating the top (top shown)
and bottom deployment door retainers.
2. Install the 4 passenger air bag module bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Close the glove compartment
door. 5. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5661
Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module
SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5662
Part 2
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury from an accidental deployment, always carry or place a live
safety canopy module with the safety canopy and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure
to do so can result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment.
- Anytime the safety canopy has deployed, the headliner, and all A-, B- and C-pillar upper trim
panels and attaching hardware must be replaced along with any other damaged components and
hardware. Failure to do so can result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment.
- Vehicles equipped with safety canopy modules require a specific headliner. When installing a new
headliner on a vehicle equipped with safety canopy modules, make sure a headliner for safety
canopy modules is being used. The word "AIRBAG" will appear on the headliner where it meets
each B-pillar trim panel. Failure to do so can result in personal injury in the event of a safety
canopy module deployment.
- Before installing a safety canopy module, inspect the roof line for any damage. If necessary, the
sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. All damaged
fasteners must be replaced and any foreign objects removed. Failure to do so may result in
personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment.
- Inspect the safety canopy before installation. If the safety canopy is damaged or the cover has
separated and the canopy material has been exposed, a new safety canopy module must be
installed. Do not attempt to repair the safety canopy module. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment.
- To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the safety
canopy module. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury in the event of a
safety canopy module deployment.
- Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of the safety canopy module or interior
trim panel. This will prevent the safety canopy module from deploying correctly. Failure to do so
can result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment.
- Never probe the electrical connector on a safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety
canopy deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- The safety canopy must be installed in the vehicle using new torque-prevailing type J-nuts
(W520822, 5 per side). Use of this J-nut is mandatory so as to reduce the risk of loss of fastener
effectiveness. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury in the event of a
safety canopy deployment.
NOTE:
- There are 2 different safety canopy modules, one for vehicles with a moonroof and one for
vehicles without a moonroof. They are not interchangeable. If installing a new safety canopy
module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle application.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side safety canopy module shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. If reusing the same safety canopy module,
separate the tether from the pin-type retainer. If a new safety canopy module is being installed,
detach
the tether with the pin-type retainer.
4. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and or rear window wiper assembly, note position and
routing of the moonroof front drain hose and/or rear
window washer solvent hose for installation purposes.
Remove the A-pillar tether bolt.
5. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A and B-pillars.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5663
6. Disconnect the safety canopy module electrical connector and detach the connector from the
D-pillar.
7. Detach the safety canopy module wiring clip from the roof panel brace. 8. Remove the 2 safety
canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C and D-pillars).
9. If the vehicle is equipped with a moonroof, disconnect the moonroof rear drain hose.
10. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clips and
position the hose aside. 11. Remove the 2 bolts from the safety canopy module tether at the
B-pillar. 12. Remove the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar, 1
between the B and C-pillars).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5664
13. Lift to unhook the safety canopy module from the C-pillar.
14. Move the safety canopy module forward and release the rear hook.
Installation
1. Install new safety canopy module J-nuts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5665
2. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of correct
moonroof drain hose and/or rear window solvent
hose routing.
Install the safety canopy rear hook.
3. Hook the safety canopy module to the C-pillar. 4. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts
located near the top of the A and B-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. If installing the same safety canopy module, join the tether to the pin-type retainer. If a new
safety canopy module is being installed, attach the
tether with the pin-type retainer.
6. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch the front
moonroof drain hose and/or rear window washer
solvent hose.
Install the A-pillar tether bolt. Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B and
C-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Install the 2 bolts to the safety canopy module tether at the B-pillar.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the
hose clips.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5666
10. If the vehicle is equipped with a moonroof, connect the moonroof rear drain hose.
11. Connect the safety canopy module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar.
12. Install the safety canopy module wiring clip to the roof panel brace. 13. Install the remaining 2
safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C and D-pillars).
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
14. Install the headliner. 15. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs
Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Control Module DTCs &
Associated Fault PIDs
TSB 07-12-3
06/25/07
RCM FAULT REPORTING USING DTCS AND BIT-MAPPED PARAMETER IDENTIFIERS (PIDS)
- SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2001-2007 Crown Victoria 2002-2007 Taurus 2004-2007 Focus 2005-2007 Five Hundred,
Freestyle, Mustang 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac
2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2007 Explorer 2003-2007 Expedition 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape 2007 E-Series
LINCOLN: 2001-2007 Town Car 2003-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2003-2005 Aviator
2003-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001-2007 Grand Marquis 2002-2005 Sable 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2002-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-7-8 to update the vehicle application.
ISSUE Various 2001-2007 vehicles are equipped with a restraints control module (RCM) that report
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) which provide general fault information. These DTCs require
accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to identify the specific fault. Most
2001-2006 Workshop Manuals (WSM) were written using New Generation STAR Tester (NGS)
terminology and navigation which does not translate well when using Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS), Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) or Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips to assist with navigation of both the WSM and the scan tool
being used.
SERVICE TIPS
DTCs And Associated Fault PIDs Description
Many of the continuous memory and on-demand DTCs that can be present in the RCM provide
general fault information and require accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to
identify the specific concern. DTCs that use fault PIDs are conceptually different from conventional
DTCs.
Conventional DTCs identify a specific concern for a given component and point to a particular
diagnostic path. In the diagnostic path, PIDs are sometimes used to determine the root cause.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5671
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5672
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5673
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5674
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5675
DTCs that use fault PIDs do not identify the specific concern. The DTC identifies the component(s)
or type of component(s) in which the concern exists. The next level, fault PIDs, identifies the
specific device and fault condition. Fault PIDs are available for both on-demand (active) and
continuous memory (historic or intermittent) DTCs. A scan tool must be used to view the DTCs and
their fault PIDs. The table lists those DTCs that are supported by associated fault PIDs. (Figures
1-5)
VIEWING FAULT PIDS USING SCAN TOOLS WSM Direction to FLAG DTC/View Fault PIDs
The information in viewing fault PIDs in the WSM has evolved over the years as the scan tools
have transitioned. Examples of how the WSM may direct you to view fault PIDs are:
^ FLAG DTC XXXXX/Record All Flagged Faults (2001-2006 WS Ms)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5676
^ View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault PIDs (2007 WSM)
^ DataLogger/View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault Pids (2008 and future WSMs)
In each instance the direction is the same (view fault PIDs to identify the specific component and
fault condition) but how they are accessed by the scan tools, as well as the scan tool terminology,
will vary.
FLAG the DTC - View the Fault PIDs
For example, the "Flag" DTC feature is specific to NGS/NGS+. When using IDS/PDS it is
necessary to view the fault PIDs from DataLogger.
Using IDS/PDS
NOTE
WHEN USING IDS/PDS, MOVE THE CURSOR OVER THE PID OR SELECT THE PID TO
DISPLAY ITS DEFINITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN. WHEN USING PDS,
HIGHLIGHT OR MOVE THE STYLUS OVER THE PID TO SEE THE PID DEFINITION.
1. Perform a self test of the RCM and/or OCS module to retrieve on-demand and continuous
memory DTCs.
2. To view the fault PIDs associated with an on-demand DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
3. Monitor all "_OD" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
^ For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_OD PID reads
"FAULT' indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
4. To view the fault PIDs associated with a continuous memory DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
5. Monitor all "_CM" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_CM PID reads
"FAULT" indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
IDS/PDS Fault PID Naming Conventions
The fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS uses a strategy associating it with the DTC. For example,
the fault PIDs 2296_18_OD and 2296_18_CM break down as follows:
^ 2296 - The DTC number minus the "B" (body) or "C" (chassis) designation.
^ 18 - An identifier used to distinguish between each of the fault PIDs associated with the DTC.
^ OD - Identifies the fault PID as an on-demand fault.
^ CM - Identifies the fault PID as a continuous memory (intermittent) fault.
NOTE
THE DTCS AND FAULT PIDS SUPPORTED BY A VEHICLE WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5677
Table lists each of the fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS and their description. (Figures 1-5)
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5678
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5679
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5680
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5681
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5682
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
WARNING:
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the inadvertent deployment of the safety canopy and risk of personal
injury.
- The RCM orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel
area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, a new
RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area
of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
NOTE: When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM
is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
The restraints control module carries out the following functions:
- deploys the air bag(s) in the event of a deployable crash.
- activates the safety belt buckle pretensioners to remove slack from the safety belt.
- monitors the SRS for faults.
- illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected.
- flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected.
- communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs).
- signals the instrument cluster module to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available
and another SRS fault exists.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the RCM will illuminate the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for 6 seconds and then off for 2 seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the
2-digit LFC if a SRS fault exists. The air bag indicator will flash the LFC 5 times, then it will remain
illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical
DTCs through the DLC, to the diagnostic tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the
system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster module to activate an
audible chime. The chime is a series of 5 sets of 5 tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and
the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If 2 or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority
will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides 150 ms of backup power to
deploy the front air bags and pretensioners in the event that the ignition circuit is lost or damaged
during impact.
The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately 1 minute after the battery
ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5683
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct air bag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) operation. If a vehicle equipped with an SRS system has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM is restored to its original condition.
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the inadvertent deployment of the safety canopy and risk of personal
injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE:
- When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM is
being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5684
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Position back the carpet on the LH
and RH tunnel to access the RCM.
4. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2 Pull out and disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the RCM.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5685
1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag RCM retaining bolts is critical for correct system
operation.
Position the RCM and install the 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
2. Connect the small RCM electrical connector.
3. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the large RCM electrical connector.
4. CAUTION: Putting the large RCM electrical wiring connector into the RCM on an angle can
cause bad electrical connections and
damage components.
NOTE: The RCM has been removed for clarity.
Position the large RCM electrical wiring connector into the RCM.
- CAUTION: Do not push the connector to where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is
needed to get the connector into position on the RCM before using the lever to fully seat the
connector.
With the large RCM electrical wiring connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a
subtle audible click is heard and a slight resistance is felt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5686
5. NOTE: The RCM has been removed for clarity.
Connect the large RCM electrical wiring connector. Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into
the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH
center instrument panel finish panel. 8. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Page 5690
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Description and Operation
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
The passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator is a visual indicator used to inform the front
seat occupants of the passenger air bag deactivation state. The PAD indicator is a stand-alone
lamp installed into the vehicle instrument panel in a position visible to each front seat occupant.
The restraints control module (RCM) controls the state of the PAD indicator through a direct
hardwire connection, based on information provided by the occupant classification sensor (OCS)
system. The PAD indicator is lit to indicate the passenger air bag module is disabled. An exemption
to this is when the front passenger seat is determined to be empty, and therefore indication of a
deactivated passenger air bag module is not necessary. In all other cases, the PAD indicator is
unlit when the passenger air bag module is enabled.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the PAD indicator prove-out period is initiated by the
RCM. The RCM briefly activates the PAD indicator to prove-out the indicator function and verify to
the front occupants correct functional operation of the PAD indicator.
The PAD indicator will lit/unlit within 1.0 to 1.5 seconds of a change of state from the OCS system.
When an OCS system fault is present the SRS defaults the passenger air bag module to enabled
regardless of the size of the occupant in the front outboard passenger seat. The PAD indicator will
be unlit.
Passenger Air Bag PAD Indicator Status
The table indicates the passenger air bag status and the PAD indicator status based the size of the
front outboard passenger occupant.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Page 5691
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the system. 2. Detach the retaining clips and partially remove the instrument panel
center trim panel.
3. Remove the passenger air bag deactivation indicator.
1 Release the red disconnect deterrent tab.
2 Disconnect the connector.
3 Release the 2 tabs (one shown).
4 Remove the passenger air bag deactivation indicator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Page 5692
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Resistor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Air Bag Resistor: Description and Operation
Driver Seat Side Air Bag Bridge Resistor
NOTE: Do not deactivate the seat side air bag circuit by removing the bridge resistor from the
electrical connector.
If the seat side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the seat side air bag electrical connector, a
low-resistance fault will be generated.
The driver seat side air bag bridge resistor: is located beneath the driver seat.
- is equipped only on Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles that are not equipped
with seat side air bag modules.
Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Bridge Resistor
NOTE: Do not deactivate the seat side air bag circuit by removing the bridge resistor from the
electrical connector.
If the seat side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the seat side air bag electrical connector, a
low-resistance fault will be generated.
The passenger seat side air bag bridge resistor: is located beneath the passenger seat.
- is equipped only on Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles that are not equipped
with seat side air bag modules.
Safety Canopy Bridge Resistor
CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit or seat side air bag module circuit
by removing the bridge resistor from the electrical connector.
If the safety canopy or seat side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be
generated by the restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy or seat side air bag electrical
connector, a low-resistance fault will be generated.
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
The safety canopy bridge resistor: is equipped on vehicles without safety canopy modules.
- must not be removed during deactivation.
- is attached to the headliner near the LH D-pillar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5699
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation
CLOCKSPRING
The clockspring:
- is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.
- continuously transfers electrical signals from the restraints control module (RCM) to the driver air
bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5700
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
CLOCKSPRING
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5701
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 3.
Remove the steering wheel. 4. If equipped with tilt steering, position the steering column
completely downward and lock in place.
5. Push in where indicated, releasing the retaining tabs, and remove the upper steering column
shroud. 6. Release the tilt column locking lever, allowing the steering column to move upward. Do
not lock the tilt column locking lever back in place. 7. Remove the 3 screws and position the lower
steering column shroud aside.
8. If installing the same clockspring, apply 2 strips of masking tape across the clockspring to
prevent accidental rotation when the clockspring is
removed.
9. Remove the 3 clockspring screws.
10. NOTE: If the clockspring is to be reinstalled, do not allow the clockspring to turn from its
removal position.
Partially remove the clockspring, then disconnect the 2 electrical connectors and remove the
clockspring.
Installation
Vehicles needing clockspring recentering
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5702
1. WARNING: Incorrect centralization may result in premature component failure. If in doubt when
centralizing the clockspring, repeat
the centralizing procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
If the vehicle's clockspring has rotated out of center, follow these steps to center the clockspring. 1
Hold the clockspring outer housing stationary.
2 CAUTION: Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and
can be broken from its internal connection.
While turning the rotor clockwise, carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length and for a
slight resistance. Stop turning at this point.
3 Turn the clockspring counterclockwise until the yellow indicator shows anywhere in the window
(window will be near the 1 o'clock position) and the arrow on the rotor lines up with the arrow on
the top of the housing. The clockspring is now centered. Do not allow the rotor to turn from this position.
All vehicles 2. Connect the 2 clockspring electrical connectors to the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5703
3. NOTE:
- Slight turning of the clockspring rotor is allowable for alignment purposes to the steering column.
- The clockspring is shown from the back for clarity.
Align the clockspring for installation. Align the large slot to the large tab in the clockspring.
- Align the small slot to the small tab in the clockspring.
4. Install the 3 clockspring screws. 5. For vehicles reusing a clockspring that was removed, remove
the tape. For vehicles installing a new clockspring, remove the retaining pin. 6. Install the lower
steering column shroud and the 3 screws. 7. Position the steering column completely downward
and lock in place. 8. Install the upper steering column shroud and engage the retaining tabs. 9.
Install the steering wheel.
10. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5708
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor
View 151-16 (Full Body, Left Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5709
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5710
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5711
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Forward Crash Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5714
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5715
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5716
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
SENSORS
WARNING:
- The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle
equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in
which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, a new RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed.
In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and correctly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
For these vehicles, the SRS uses up to 5 satellite sensors in addition to the RCM. The RCM is
mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles will have a front impact severity
sensor and it is located in the front-center of the vehicle, mounted on the radiator support bracket.
If the vehicle is equipped with safety canopies, there are 4 additional side impact sensors. The 4
additional sensors are located at the base of each B-pillar and mounted on the C-pillar. The LH and
RH C-pillar mounted side impact sensors are interchangeable. Mounting orientation is critical for
correct operation of all impact and rollover sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5719
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Position the hood latch assembly aside. 1
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2 Remove the hood latch bolts.
3 Position the hood latch aside.
3. Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the radiator support bracket bolt. 5.
Remove the front impact severity sensor bolt. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove
the front impact severity sensor.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the front impact severity sensor.
2. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Align the locator tabs of the front impact severity sensor to the openings in the radiator support
bracket.
3. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag front impact severity sensor retaining bolt is
critical for correct system operation.
Install the front impact severity sensor bolt. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. Install the radiator support bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5720
6. NOTE: Align the hood latch position as previously marked during removal.
Install the hood latch assembly. 1
Position the hood latch.
2 Install the hood latch bolts. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3 Tighten the hood latch nut. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch.
8. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5721
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor
electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5722
1. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Align the side impact sensor locator tabs to the openings in the B-pillar sheet metal.
2. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolts is critical for
correct system operation.
Install the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Connect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 5. Repower
the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5723
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Remove the side impact sensor bolt.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the side impact sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5724
2. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Align the side impact sensor locator tabs to the openings in the C-pillar sheet metal.
3. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for
correct system operation.
Install the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Install the C-pillar trim panel. 5. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Pressure Sensor
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Pressure Sensor > Page 5729
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Pressure Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Pressure Sensor > Page 5732
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5733
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR
CAUTION:
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing of the OCS system. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C
(32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum 5-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE:
- For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
- To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCS
ECU electrical connector.
A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the electrical connector from the OCS ECU.
An OCS system service kit (OCS service kit) has the OCS ECU electrical connector glued to the
ECU, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. An OCS system service kit also has an
in-line 10-pin connector between the OCS ECU and the seat wiring harness.
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
The seat occupant classification sensor system is found only on the front passenger seat. The front
passenger seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is comprised of a silicone gel-filled
bladder mounted in the seat cushion, a pressure sensor that is mounted to the seat frame and an
electronic control unit which is also mounted to the seat frame. Pressure is applied to the OCS
bladder when the weight of any occupant or object in the front passenger seat is present. The
pressure is then transferred through a tube, is sensed by the OCS pressure sensor, then
electronically communicated to the OCS electronic control unit. Based on programmed limits, the
OCS electronic control unit will inform the restraints control module (RCM), via a High Speed
Controller Area Network (CAN), of the necessary information. The RCM uses this information in
determining if the passenger air bag module or passenger seat side air bag module is to be
deployed in the event of a deployable collision. The OCS system components (seat cushion foam
pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If installing a
new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad, a new OCS system service
kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be
installed as an assembly.
The OCS system is also used for operation of the passenger Belt Minder. To deactivate or
reactivate the passenger Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators or the owner literature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5736
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- Do not separate components.
CAUTION:
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as
an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS
system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5737
and ECU) must be installed as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the
disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU
electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
- If removing an OCS service kit, refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion element
electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5738
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the set cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU.
10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the
OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly
with the bladder.
Installation
NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. See:
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5739
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for
any foreign objects, before installing the occupant classification sensor to the seat cushion pan. If
any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the
event of an air bag deployment.
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor components through the correct seat
cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly, be careful
not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS
bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can
set a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the restraints control module (RCM).
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result
in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
Install seat cushion trim cover to seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat.
10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5740
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
12. Install the passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the system. Do not prove out the
system at this time.
14. CAUTION:
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing the OCS system: -
Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C
(32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum eight second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE: For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
NOTE: To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5741
- The ignition switch must be cycled after rezeroing the OCS system.
Rezero the occupant classification sensor. With the front passenger seat empty, use a diagnostic tool to trigger the active command and
rezero the occupant classification sensor.
15. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5742
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5743
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- Do not separate components.
CAUTION:
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed
as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit)
inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the
disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU
electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
- If removing an OEM OCS, refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5744
a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion element
electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5745
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan.
9. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through
the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5746
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor assembly, seat cushion pan and support assembly for
any foreign objects before installing the occupant classification sensor assembly to the seat
cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal
injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor components through the correct seat
cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly, be careful
not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness, and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE:
- When installing a service part occupant classification sensor, the seat wire harness pressure
sensor electrical connector is not used.
- Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2 Slide the electronic control unit (ECU) into the seat cushion pan bracket. The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the restraints control module (RCM).
3 Install the rivets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5747
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
7. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips.
1 Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely out of the
way.
5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely out of the way.
8. Install the passenger seat into the vehicle. 9. Repower the system. Do not prove out the system
at this time.
10. CAUTION:
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing the OCS system: Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5748
If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed
and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30
minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum eight second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE: For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
NOTE: To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
- The ignition switch must be cycled after rezeroing the OCS system.
Rezero the occupant classification sensor. With the front passenger seat empty, use a diagnostic tool to trigger the active command and
rezero the occupant classification sensor.
11. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
12. NOTE: When installing a new occupant classification sensor, a prepaid return postcard is
provided with the new occupant classification sensor.
The serial number for the new part and the vehicle identification number (VIN) must be recorded
and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the occupant classification sensor traceability card and return
it along with the complete inoperative occupant classification sensor to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative occupant classification sensor, include the following: seat cushion
foam pad, bladder, electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors
and wire harness (service part occupant classification sensor only).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation
Driver Seat Side Air Bag Module
NOTE: References to seat side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the SRS.
- For additional information, when servicing a seat equipped with a seat side air bag module, refer
to Seats.
A seat side air bag module provides protection of the thorax area (between the neck and abdomen)
of the body, working in conjunction with the head protection provided by a safety canopy module.
Only Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles equipped with safety canopy modules
are equipped with seat side air bag modules.
The driver seat side air bag module: will deploy upon receiving a flow of current from the RCM initiated by the driver seat side impact
sensor and internal RCM circuitry.
- is installed as an assembly.
- is mounted in the driver seat back.
- is used in conjunction with a safety canopy module on Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build
Escape vehicles only (seat side air bag modules are not equipped on early build Escape vehicles).
Passenger Seat Side Air Bag Module
NOTE: References to seat side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the SRS.
- For additional information, when servicing seat equipped with a seat side air bag module, refer to
Seats.
A seat side air bag module provides protection of the thorax area (between the neck and abdomen)
of the body, working in conjunction with the head protection provided by a safety canopy module.
Only Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles equipped with safety canopy modules
are equipped with seat side air bag modules.
The passenger seat side air bag module: will deploy upon receiving a flow of current from the RCM initiated by the passenger seat side
impact sensor and internal RCM circuitry.
- is installed as an assembly.
- is mounted in the passenger seat back.
- is used in conjunction with a safety canopy module on Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build
Escape vehicles only (seat side air bag modules are not equipped on early build Escape vehicles).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5752
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Side air bag modules with damaged covers must be replaced.
- Front seat back trim covers installed on seats equipped with side air bags cannot be repaired,
they are to be replaced. Cleaning is permissible.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5753
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- If a side air bag deployment took place a new seat back pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
- When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- Passenger seat side air bag module shown, driver side similar.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat and depower the system.
2. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the rear screw.
2 Push the inboard seat cushion side shield forward to release.
3. Loosen the safety belt buckle pretensioner bolt.
4. WARNING: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed
wiring harness could become damaged
when the seat is moved. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach the wiring retainers.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust 5. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing
all tension on the manual lumbar support cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5754
6. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob.
All seats 7. Fully recline the seat backrest.
8. Release the seat back trim cover J-clip. 9. Move the seat backrest to the upright position.
10. WARNING: Front seat back trim covers installed on seats equipped with side air bags cannot
be repaired; they are to be replaced
(cleaning is permissible).
CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The
hook and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam.
Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and foam pad and carefully separate the hook
and loop strips.
11. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module.
12. Release the hook and loop retainer from around seat backrest frame.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5755
13. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
14. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute, J-clips, and hook and loop retainer out
through the side air bag module seat back foam opening. 15. Continue to roll seat trim cover up to
access the side air bag module.
16. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame.
17. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag module.
Installation
WARNING:
- Inspect the mounting surfaces of the side air bag module and the seat back frame mounting
bracket for any foreign objects before installing the side air bag module. If any foreign objects are
found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5756
event of an air bag deployment.
- Inspect the seat side air bag deployment chute and the seat side air bag cavity in the seat back
pad for any foreign objects. If any foreign objects are found remove them. Failure to do so may
result in personal injury in the event of an air bag deployment.
- Before installing the side air bag module, check it for damage and foreign objects. If the air bag
module is damaged, replace it. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may
result in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
- If the air bag deployment chute is not properly positioned, the side air bag may not deploy
properly.
- If the air bag cover has separated or the air bag material has been exposed, install a new side air
bag module. Do not attempt to repair the air bag module. Failure to do so may result in personal
injury in the event of an air bag deployment.
CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
All seats
1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. 3. Roll
down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module.
4. WARNING: Check the side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must
not be repaired. If there is any damage to
the deployment chute, the seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed new as a
unit.
Feed the side air bag module deployment chute, J-clips, and hook and loop retainer back through
the side air bag module seat back foam opening.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5757
5. WARNING: If the air bag deployment chute is not properly positioned, the side air bag may not
deploy properly.
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
6. Install the hook and loop fastener around the seat backrest frame. 7. Roll the seat trim cover
down in position and attach the hook and loop strips. 8. Feed the seat back trim cover rear J-clip
through seat between the seat backrest and seat cushion. 9. Fully recline the seat backrest.
10. Attach the seat back trim cover J-clips. 11. Move seat backrest to the upright position.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 5758
12. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
All seats
13. Connect the side air bag electrical connector and attach the wiring retainers.
14. Tighten the safety belt buckle pretensioner bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
15. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw. 16. Install the front seat and repower the
system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs
Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Control Module DTCs &
Associated Fault PIDs
TSB 07-12-3
06/25/07
RCM FAULT REPORTING USING DTCS AND BIT-MAPPED PARAMETER IDENTIFIERS (PIDS)
- SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2001-2007 Crown Victoria 2002-2007 Taurus 2004-2007 Focus 2005-2007 Five Hundred,
Freestyle, Mustang 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac
2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2007 Explorer 2003-2007 Expedition 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape 2007 E-Series
LINCOLN: 2001-2007 Town Car 2003-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2003-2005 Aviator
2003-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001-2007 Grand Marquis 2002-2005 Sable 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2002-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-7-8 to update the vehicle application.
ISSUE Various 2001-2007 vehicles are equipped with a restraints control module (RCM) that report
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) which provide general fault information. These DTCs require
accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to identify the specific fault. Most
2001-2006 Workshop Manuals (WSM) were written using New Generation STAR Tester (NGS)
terminology and navigation which does not translate well when using Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS), Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) or Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips to assist with navigation of both the WSM and the scan tool
being used.
SERVICE TIPS
DTCs And Associated Fault PIDs Description
Many of the continuous memory and on-demand DTCs that can be present in the RCM provide
general fault information and require accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to
identify the specific concern. DTCs that use fault PIDs are conceptually different from conventional
DTCs.
Conventional DTCs identify a specific concern for a given component and point to a particular
diagnostic path. In the diagnostic path, PIDs are sometimes used to determine the root cause.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5764
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5765
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5766
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5767
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5768
DTCs that use fault PIDs do not identify the specific concern. The DTC identifies the component(s)
or type of component(s) in which the concern exists. The next level, fault PIDs, identifies the
specific device and fault condition. Fault PIDs are available for both on-demand (active) and
continuous memory (historic or intermittent) DTCs. A scan tool must be used to view the DTCs and
their fault PIDs. The table lists those DTCs that are supported by associated fault PIDs. (Figures
1-5)
VIEWING FAULT PIDS USING SCAN TOOLS WSM Direction to FLAG DTC/View Fault PIDs
The information in viewing fault PIDs in the WSM has evolved over the years as the scan tools
have transitioned. Examples of how the WSM may direct you to view fault PIDs are:
^ FLAG DTC XXXXX/Record All Flagged Faults (2001-2006 WS Ms)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5769
^ View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault PIDs (2007 WSM)
^ DataLogger/View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault Pids (2008 and future WSMs)
In each instance the direction is the same (view fault PIDs to identify the specific component and
fault condition) but how they are accessed by the scan tools, as well as the scan tool terminology,
will vary.
FLAG the DTC - View the Fault PIDs
For example, the "Flag" DTC feature is specific to NGS/NGS+. When using IDS/PDS it is
necessary to view the fault PIDs from DataLogger.
Using IDS/PDS
NOTE
WHEN USING IDS/PDS, MOVE THE CURSOR OVER THE PID OR SELECT THE PID TO
DISPLAY ITS DEFINITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN. WHEN USING PDS,
HIGHLIGHT OR MOVE THE STYLUS OVER THE PID TO SEE THE PID DEFINITION.
1. Perform a self test of the RCM and/or OCS module to retrieve on-demand and continuous
memory DTCs.
2. To view the fault PIDs associated with an on-demand DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
3. Monitor all "_OD" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
^ For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_OD PID reads
"FAULT' indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
4. To view the fault PIDs associated with a continuous memory DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
5. Monitor all "_CM" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_CM PID reads
"FAULT" indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
IDS/PDS Fault PID Naming Conventions
The fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS uses a strategy associating it with the DTC. For example,
the fault PIDs 2296_18_OD and 2296_18_CM break down as follows:
^ 2296 - The DTC number minus the "B" (body) or "C" (chassis) designation.
^ 18 - An identifier used to distinguish between each of the fault PIDs associated with the DTC.
^ OD - Identifies the fault PID as an on-demand fault.
^ CM - Identifies the fault PID as a continuous memory (intermittent) fault.
NOTE
THE DTCS AND FAULT PIDS SUPPORTED BY A VEHICLE WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5770
Table lists each of the fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS and their description. (Figures 1-5)
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5771
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5772
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5773
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5774
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5775
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
WARNING:
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the inadvertent deployment of the safety canopy and risk of personal
injury.
- The RCM orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel
area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, a new
RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area
of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
NOTE: When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM
is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
The restraints control module carries out the following functions:
- deploys the air bag(s) in the event of a deployable crash.
- activates the safety belt buckle pretensioners to remove slack from the safety belt.
- monitors the SRS for faults.
- illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected.
- flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected.
- communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs).
- signals the instrument cluster module to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available
and another SRS fault exists.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the RCM will illuminate the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for 6 seconds and then off for 2 seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the
2-digit LFC if a SRS fault exists. The air bag indicator will flash the LFC 5 times, then it will remain
illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical
DTCs through the DLC, to the diagnostic tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the
system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster module to activate an
audible chime. The chime is a series of 5 sets of 5 tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and
the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If 2 or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority
will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides 150 ms of backup power to
deploy the front air bags and pretensioners in the event that the ignition circuit is lost or damaged
during impact.
The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately 1 minute after the battery
ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5776
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct air bag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) operation. If a vehicle equipped with an SRS system has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM is restored to its original condition.
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the inadvertent deployment of the safety canopy and risk of personal
injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE:
- When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM is
being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5777
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 3. Position back the carpet on the LH
and RH tunnel to access the RCM.
4. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2 Pull out and disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the RCM.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5778
1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag RCM retaining bolts is critical for correct system
operation.
Position the RCM and install the 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
2. Connect the small RCM electrical connector.
3. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the large RCM electrical connector.
4. CAUTION: Putting the large RCM electrical wiring connector into the RCM on an angle can
cause bad electrical connections and
damage components.
NOTE: The RCM has been removed for clarity.
Position the large RCM electrical wiring connector into the RCM.
- CAUTION: Do not push the connector to where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is
needed to get the connector into position on the RCM before using the lever to fully seat the
connector.
With the large RCM electrical wiring connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a
subtle audible click is heard and a slight resistance is felt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5779
5. NOTE: The RCM has been removed for clarity.
Connect the large RCM electrical wiring connector. Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into
the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH
center instrument panel finish panel. 8. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs
Seat Belt Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Control Module DTCs &
Associated Fault PIDs
TSB 07-12-3
06/25/07
RCM FAULT REPORTING USING DTCS AND BIT-MAPPED PARAMETER IDENTIFIERS (PIDS)
- SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2001-2007 Crown Victoria 2002-2007 Taurus 2004-2007 Focus 2005-2007 Five Hundred,
Freestyle, Mustang 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac
2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2007 Explorer 2003-2007 Expedition 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape 2007 E-Series
LINCOLN: 2001-2007 Town Car 2003-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2003-2005 Aviator
2003-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001-2007 Grand Marquis 2002-2005 Sable 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2002-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-7-8 to update the vehicle application.
ISSUE Various 2001-2007 vehicles are equipped with a restraints control module (RCM) that report
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) which provide general fault information. These DTCs require
accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to identify the specific fault. Most
2001-2006 Workshop Manuals (WSM) were written using New Generation STAR Tester (NGS)
terminology and navigation which does not translate well when using Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS), Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) or Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips to assist with navigation of both the WSM and the scan tool
being used.
SERVICE TIPS
DTCs And Associated Fault PIDs Description
Many of the continuous memory and on-demand DTCs that can be present in the RCM provide
general fault information and require accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to
identify the specific concern. DTCs that use fault PIDs are conceptually different from conventional
DTCs.
Conventional DTCs identify a specific concern for a given component and point to a particular
diagnostic path. In the diagnostic path, PIDs are sometimes used to determine the root cause.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5784
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5785
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5786
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5787
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5788
DTCs that use fault PIDs do not identify the specific concern. The DTC identifies the component(s)
or type of component(s) in which the concern exists. The next level, fault PIDs, identifies the
specific device and fault condition. Fault PIDs are available for both on-demand (active) and
continuous memory (historic or intermittent) DTCs. A scan tool must be used to view the DTCs and
their fault PIDs. The table lists those DTCs that are supported by associated fault PIDs. (Figures
1-5)
VIEWING FAULT PIDS USING SCAN TOOLS WSM Direction to FLAG DTC/View Fault PIDs
The information in viewing fault PIDs in the WSM has evolved over the years as the scan tools
have transitioned. Examples of how the WSM may direct you to view fault PIDs are:
^ FLAG DTC XXXXX/Record All Flagged Faults (2001-2006 WS Ms)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5789
^ View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault PIDs (2007 WSM)
^ DataLogger/View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault Pids (2008 and future WSMs)
In each instance the direction is the same (view fault PIDs to identify the specific component and
fault condition) but how they are accessed by the scan tools, as well as the scan tool terminology,
will vary.
FLAG the DTC - View the Fault PIDs
For example, the "Flag" DTC feature is specific to NGS/NGS+. When using IDS/PDS it is
necessary to view the fault PIDs from DataLogger.
Using IDS/PDS
NOTE
WHEN USING IDS/PDS, MOVE THE CURSOR OVER THE PID OR SELECT THE PID TO
DISPLAY ITS DEFINITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN. WHEN USING PDS,
HIGHLIGHT OR MOVE THE STYLUS OVER THE PID TO SEE THE PID DEFINITION.
1. Perform a self test of the RCM and/or OCS module to retrieve on-demand and continuous
memory DTCs.
2. To view the fault PIDs associated with an on-demand DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
3. Monitor all "_OD" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
^ For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_OD PID reads
"FAULT' indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
4. To view the fault PIDs associated with a continuous memory DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
5. Monitor all "_CM" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_CM PID reads
"FAULT" indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
IDS/PDS Fault PID Naming Conventions
The fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS uses a strategy associating it with the DTC. For example,
the fault PIDs 2296_18_OD and 2296_18_CM break down as follows:
^ 2296 - The DTC number minus the "B" (body) or "C" (chassis) designation.
^ 18 - An identifier used to distinguish between each of the fault PIDs associated with the DTC.
^ OD - Identifies the fault PID as an on-demand fault.
^ CM - Identifies the fault PID as a continuous memory (intermittent) fault.
NOTE
THE DTCS AND FAULT PIDS SUPPORTED BY A VEHICLE WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page
5790
Table lists each of the fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS and their description. (Figures 1-5)
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5796
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5797
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5798
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5799
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5800
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5801
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5802
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5803
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5804
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5805
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5806
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation
Child Safety Seat Tether Anchors
WARNING: The child safety seat tether anchor/bolt MUST be securely tightened to specification.
Otherwise, the child safety seat may not be correctly secured and the child could be injured if the
vehicle is involved in a collision or stops suddenly.
The child safety seat tether anchors are attached to the roof near the rear liftgate.
If the child safety seat tether anchors were in use during a collision, inspect and install new anchors
as necessary. Return the vehicle structure to its original production configuration.
Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps
Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as
an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
The lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system is a standardized and uniform
attachment system for installing child safety seats in passenger vehicles. LATCH-equipped child
safety seats have two lower attachments that connect to the vehicle portion of the LATCH system.
The vehicle portion of the system consists of two attachment points (6 mm wires) welded to the 60
percent and the 40 percent rear seat backrest frame. The attachment points protrude from the
biteline between the seat cushion and seat backrest.
If a child safety seat was in use during a collision, inspect the vehicle portion of the system for
damage. If any of the attachment points (6 mm wires) are damaged, install a new seat backrest
frame.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5811
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ANCHOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if
equipped, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height
adjusters, if equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching
hardware should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be
installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies
installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover
first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5812
2. Remove the bolt and the child safety seat tether anchor.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
3. WARNING: It is important that the bolt/anchor be securely tightened to specification. Otherwise,
the child's safety seat may not be
properly secured, and the child can be injured in case of a sudden stop or accident.
NOTE: Rework the sheet metal to its original condition and structural integrity.
- Make sure to tighten the bolts to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
TSB 05-3-10
02/21/05
SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE
FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty
2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005
Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding
down when not in use), a service kit is now available.
ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow
the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of
the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed.
NOTE
ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B09 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 5817
Seat Belt: Description and Operation
FASTENING SAFETY BELTS
WARNING: Do not introduce slack into the safety belt system because the belt locks upon impact
where it is positioned. Use the shoulder safety belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder safety belt under the arm. Never swing the shoulder safety belt around the neck over the
inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person. Make sure the lap portion of the
belt is fitted snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Failure to follow these
precautions could increase the chance and severity of injury in a collision.
Always follow the preceding safety precautions when fastening the safety belts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Safety Belt Cleaning
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Safety Belt Cleaning
SAFETY BELT CLEANING
1. WARNING: Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing, as the webbing may weaken.
Clean the safety belt webbing only with a mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery
or carpets. Follow the instructions provided with the soap.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Safety Belt Cleaning > Page 5820
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Safety Belt With Anchor Plate Thread Damage
SAFETY BELT WITH ANCHOR PLATE THREAD DAMAGE
1. Remove the broken or stripped bolt and discard. 2. Drill out the internal threads in the safety belt
anchor plate with a 10.7 mm (27/64 in.) drill. 3. Rethread the anchor plate with a 1/2-13 tap (seat
belt). 4. Clean out the chips. 5. Install the attachment parts. Original parts are to be replaced with
the repair parts indicated in the Safety Belt Parts Replacement Guidelines. 6. When repairing a
multiple belt and attachment, install the nut to the bolt in the tunnel area from the underside of the
floorpan.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Safety Belt Cleaning > Page 5821
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Safety Belt Tongue Rotated on Belt
SAFETY BELT TONGUE ROTATED ON BELT
1. Fold the safety belt as indicated.
2. Pull the safety belt tongue over the fold in the safety belt.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if equipped,
front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height adjusters, if
equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching hardware should
be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be installed unless a
qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5826
and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The driver seat safety belt buckle pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Depower the SRS.
2. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the front and rear side shield screws (front shown).
2 Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
4. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors.
5. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
Detach the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connectors and wire harness from the seat.
6. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Repower the SRS. 9. Check the active restraint
system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5827
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Buckle
REAR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if
equipped, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height
adjusters, if equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching
hardware should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be
installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies
installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5828
injury in collisions.
1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat
cushion forward and the rear seat backrest rearward.
Remove the bolt and the rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly. To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 3. Check the active restraint system for correct
operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCHES
As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the front safety belt buckles are equipped with
safety belt buckle switches. The safety belt buckle switches are comprised of integrated circuits
called Hall-effect sensors. The safety belt buckle switches (Hall-effect sensors) are located in the
driver and passenger safety belt buckles. The safety belt buckle switches indicate to the restraints
control module (RCM) whether the safety belts are connected or disconnected. The RCM uses this
information in determining the deployment rate of the dual-stage driver and passenger air bag
modules. The RCM also communicates the driver safety belt buckle switch status to the instrument
cluster module, which monitors the information to control the safety belt warning indicator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs
Seat Belt Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Control Module DTCs &
Associated Fault PIDs
TSB 07-12-3
06/25/07
RCM FAULT REPORTING USING DTCS AND BIT-MAPPED PARAMETER IDENTIFIERS (PIDS)
- SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2001-2007 Crown Victoria 2002-2007 Taurus 2004-2007 Focus 2005-2007 Five Hundred,
Freestyle, Mustang 2006-2007 Fusion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac
2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2007 Explorer 2003-2007 Expedition 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar
2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, Escape 2007 E-Series
LINCOLN: 2001-2007 Town Car 2003-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2003-2005 Aviator
2003-2007 Navigator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001-2007 Grand Marquis 2002-2005 Sable 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2002-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-7-8 to update the vehicle application.
ISSUE Various 2001-2007 vehicles are equipped with a restraints control module (RCM) that report
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) which provide general fault information. These DTCs require
accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to identify the specific fault. Most
2001-2006 Workshop Manuals (WSM) were written using New Generation STAR Tester (NGS)
terminology and navigation which does not translate well when using Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS), Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) or Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
ACTION Refer to the Service Tips to assist with navigation of both the WSM and the scan tool
being used.
SERVICE TIPS
DTCs And Associated Fault PIDs Description
Many of the continuous memory and on-demand DTCs that can be present in the RCM provide
general fault information and require accessing the associated bit-mapped PIDs (fault PIDs) to
identify the specific concern. DTCs that use fault PIDs are conceptually different from conventional
DTCs.
Conventional DTCs identify a specific concern for a given component and point to a particular
diagnostic path. In the diagnostic path, PIDs are sometimes used to determine the root cause.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5836
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5837
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5838
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5839
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5840
DTCs that use fault PIDs do not identify the specific concern. The DTC identifies the component(s)
or type of component(s) in which the concern exists. The next level, fault PIDs, identifies the
specific device and fault condition. Fault PIDs are available for both on-demand (active) and
continuous memory (historic or intermittent) DTCs. A scan tool must be used to view the DTCs and
their fault PIDs. The table lists those DTCs that are supported by associated fault PIDs. (Figures
1-5)
VIEWING FAULT PIDS USING SCAN TOOLS WSM Direction to FLAG DTC/View Fault PIDs
The information in viewing fault PIDs in the WSM has evolved over the years as the scan tools
have transitioned. Examples of how the WSM may direct you to view fault PIDs are:
^ FLAG DTC XXXXX/Record All Flagged Faults (2001-2006 WS Ms)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5841
^ View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault PIDs (2007 WSM)
^ DataLogger/View and Record DTC XXXXX Fault Pids (2008 and future WSMs)
In each instance the direction is the same (view fault PIDs to identify the specific component and
fault condition) but how they are accessed by the scan tools, as well as the scan tool terminology,
will vary.
FLAG the DTC - View the Fault PIDs
For example, the "Flag" DTC feature is specific to NGS/NGS+. When using IDS/PDS it is
necessary to view the fault PIDs from DataLogger.
Using IDS/PDS
NOTE
WHEN USING IDS/PDS, MOVE THE CURSOR OVER THE PID OR SELECT THE PID TO
DISPLAY ITS DEFINITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN. WHEN USING PDS,
HIGHLIGHT OR MOVE THE STYLUS OVER THE PID TO SEE THE PID DEFINITION.
1. Perform a self test of the RCM and/or OCS module to retrieve on-demand and continuous
memory DTCs.
2. To view the fault PIDs associated with an on-demand DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
3. Monitor all "_OD" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
^ For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_OD PID reads
"FAULT' indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
4. To view the fault PIDs associated with a continuous memory DTC:
a. Toolbox
b. DataLogger
c. Modules
d. RCM
5. Monitor all "_CM" PID(s) matching the DTC present; follow diagnostic procedure for the PID that
reads "FAULT".
For example, a B2296 fault is present. In DataLogger the fault PID 2296_18_CM PID reads
"FAULT" indicating a front internal crash sensor fault.
IDS/PDS Fault PID Naming Conventions
The fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS uses a strategy associating it with the DTC. For example,
the fault PIDs 2296_18_OD and 2296_18_CM break down as follows:
^ 2296 - The DTC number minus the "B" (body) or "C" (chassis) designation.
^ 18 - An identifier used to distinguish between each of the fault PIDs associated with the DTC.
^ OD - Identifies the fault PID as an on-demand fault.
^ CM - Identifies the fault PID as a continuous memory (intermittent) fault.
NOTE
THE DTCS AND FAULT PIDS SUPPORTED BY A VEHICLE WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Control Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Control Module DTCs & Associated Fault PIDs > Page 5842
Table lists each of the fault PIDs as displayed on IDS/PDS and their description. (Figures 1-5)
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT EXTENSION ASSEMBLY
In certain cases, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. About 20 cm (8 in)
can be added to the belt length by using a safety belt extension. Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer parts department. Safety belt
extensions are only available with black webbing.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer
identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension
only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use an extension to change
the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster With Stripped Weld Nuts
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster With Stripped
Weld Nuts
SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER WITH STRIPPED WELD NUTS
D-Ring Installation Kit
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the trim panels.
2. Use the half-inch drill provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent to
drill out the damaged threads in the upper
B-pillar structure.
3. NOTE: After each rotation, back tap off slightly to remove new cuttings and be sure to clean out
any chips before proceeding.
Apply a suitable lubricant to the M14 x 1.5 tap provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) and tap new threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster With Stripped Weld Nuts > Page 5850
4. Use a threaded insert (N807170-S190) provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018)
or equivalent and screw it into the retapped hole
until it is slightly below the surface of the hole.
5. NOTE: If the two hex-head bolts on the front seat shoulder strap adjuster are not stripped, refer
to Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster to install
the height adjuster to the body. If the front seat shoulder strap adjuster bolts are stripped, install a
new adjuster.
Use a hammer to lightly tap the installation tool provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) several times to drive down the insert keys.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster With Stripped Weld Nuts > Page 5851
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER
Removal and Installation
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if
equipped, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height
adjusters, if equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching
hardware should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be
installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies
installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
NOTE: The passenger side safety belt shoulder height adjuster is shown, the driver side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster With Stripped Weld Nuts > Page 5852
2. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Note the position of the lower locator tab for installation.
Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster. To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Check the active restraint system for correct
operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime
The warning indicator and chime are reminders to fasten the safety belt. The system operates as
follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the safety
belt warning light illuminates for one to two minutes and the warning chime sounds for four to eight
seconds.
- If the safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is on and the chime is sounding, the
warning light and warning chime turn off.
- If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, the warning indicator will
come on for 4 to 8 seconds with no chime.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides an additional reminder to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument
cluster.
The passenger safety Belt Minder feature is activated only when the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) system detects a passenger in the right front seat and the passenger weight exceeds a
programmed set point.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime
The warning indicator and chime are reminders to fasten the safety belt. The system operates as
follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the safety
belt warning light illuminates for one to two minutes and the warning chime sounds for four to eight
seconds.
- If the safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is on and the chime is sounding, the
warning light and warning chime turn off.
- If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, the warning indicator will
come on for 4 to 8 seconds with no chime.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides an additional reminder to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument
cluster.
The passenger safety Belt Minder feature is activated only when the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) system detects a passenger in the right front seat and the passenger weight exceeds a
programmed set point.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts
Slow to Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts
Slow to Retract > Page 5867
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 5873
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5874
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Escape Hybrid
The Escape Hybrid driver safety belt retractor uses a safety belt pretensioner system. This works in
conjunction with the safety belt buckle pretensioner, front air bag system and, if equipped, side air
bag system. The pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing slack from the
safety belt. When activated by the restraints control module (RCM), the pretensioner deploys in the
retractor, removing excess slack from the lap and shoulder safety belt. The pretensioners are
activated when the RCM detects an impact force exceeding a programmed limit.
If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the safety belt pretensioners, a
new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and pretensioners or
safety belt retractor and pretensioners, safety belt retractors, safety belts, buckles and height
adjusters), must be installed.
For safety belt retractor pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
For safety belt retractor pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Dual Locking Mode Retractors
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at all outboard seating positions
(except driver, which has no automatic locking retractor feature) must be checked by a qualified
technician to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning
properly, in addition to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor
assembly must be replaced if the safety belt assembly's automatic locking retractor feature or any
other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
NOTE: When replacing a dual locking mode retractor, the retractor should be checked to make
sure it is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode after installation in the stowed position.
All outboard continuous-loop, 3-point retractor systems, except the driver position, are equipped
with the dual locking mode system.
The emergency locking retractor (ELR) mode will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking
tight only on hard braking, hard cornering, or an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph). The ELR
mode helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. The ELR mode is
continuously in operation at all seating positions.
The ALR portion of this system does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. The ALR mode
is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position or when a tight belt fit is desired.
The ALR mode is disengaged when the webbing is free to move in or out of the retractor. The ALR
mode is automatically engaged when the webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is
made, indicating that the retractor is in ALR mode. The ALR mode is automatically disengaged
when most of the webbing is retracted back onto the spool.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front or rear
passenger seating positions where dual locking mode retractors are provided.
Energy Management Retractor
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seating
positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
The energy management retractor feature is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner.
This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on an occupant's chest.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front Safety Belt Retractor
FRONT SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if equipped,
front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height adjusters, if
equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching hardware should
be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be installed unless a
qualified technician
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5877
finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Safety belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or
incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The passenger side safety belt retractor is shown, the driver side is similar.
All front retractors 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
Front passenger retractor 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Disconnect the belt tension sensor electrical
connector.
All front retractors 4. Remove the safety belt retractor anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. Remove the safety belt retractor upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the safety belt retractor lower bolt and the safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Front passenger retractor 8. Repower the SRS.
All front retractors 9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
- Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic
locking retractor (ALR) mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5878
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Retractor
REAR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if
equipped, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height
adjusters, if equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching
hardware should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be
installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies
installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5879
when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
NOTE: The RH rear safety belt retractor is shown, LH side similar.
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the rear safety belt retractor anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the bolt and the rear safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Check the active restraint system for correct
operation.
- Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic
locking retractor (ALR) mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5880
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
REAR CENTER SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if
equipped, front seat belt buckle support
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5881
assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height adjusters, if equipped, child safety seat
tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any
collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be installed unless a qualified technician
finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Safety belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or
incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest. 2. Remove the bolt and the LH riser bracket.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
3. Remove the bolt and the RH riser bracket.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
4. Remove the head restraints. 5. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover. 6. Remove the 2 seat
latch release cover screws.
7. Remove the seat latch release lever.
1 Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever.
2 Remove the seat latch release lever.
8. Remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield.
9. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 5882
10. Unzip the 2 backrest trim cover zippers (one each side).
11. NOTE:
- The inboard and outboard head restraint sleeves are not interchangeable.
- The head restraint sleeves incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when
installed.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint sleeve and pull the 4 sleeves out of the frame tube.
12. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook and loop strip, or the
hook and loop strip can be torn from the
seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook and loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
13. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
14. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor. 15. Remove the 2 nuts and the safety belt
guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
16. Remove the nut and the rear center safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 18. Check the active restraint system for correct
operation.
- Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic
locking retractor (ALR) mode.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT TENSION SENSOR
The safety belt tension sensor:
- is part of the front outboard passenger safety belt and retractor assembly.
- is located at the safety belt anchor point.
- is used in conjunction with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system.
- is a 3-wire Hall-effect sensor that is part of the front passenger safety belt and retractor assembly.
The safety belt tension sensor is used by the OCS system to identify the presence of a child safety
seat on the front outboard passenger seat, when the child safety seat is installed according to
manufacturer instructions. The safety belt tension sensor senses the tension on the safety belt
assembly then provides an output to the OCS system electronic control unit (ECU), indicating that
the safety belt assembly is cinched. After sensing the weight applied to the seat by the occupant
and using the safety belt tension sensor input, the OCS system determines how the occupant
should be classified and communicates this information to the restraints control module (RCM). If
the occupant is classified to be a child, the RCM will then automatically deactivate the passenger
air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger Seat
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger Seat > Page 5890
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger Seat > Page 5891
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Safety Belt System
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Safety Belt System
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner - All vehicles
The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from
the safety belt when deployed. The pretensioner works in conjunction with the front air bag system.
When the front air bags deploy, the pretensioners deploy, causing the buckle to move downward,
removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts.
If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the front air bags and safety belt
pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and
pretensioners, safety belt retractors, and height adjusters), must be installed.
For safety belt buckle pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
For safety belt buckle pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The safety belt tension sensor (BTS) is part of the passenger front outboard safety belt and
retractor assembly. The BTS is located at the safety belt anchor point and is used in conjunction
with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Safety Belt System > Page 5894
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Supplemental Restraint System
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners - All Vehicles
As part of the SRS, the safety belt buckles are equipped with pretensioners. The safety belt buckle
pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt webbing. The pretensioners are activated
by the restraints control module (RCM) when the module detects a impact event force exceeding a
programmed limit.
Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner - Escape Hybrid Only
As part of the SRS, the driver safety belt retractor for the Escape Hybrid is equipped with a
pretensioner. The pretensioner removes excess slack from the safety belt webbing. The
pretensioner is activated by the RCM when the module detects an impact event force exceeding a
programmed limit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, belt tension sensor (BTS), if equipped,
front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), if equipped, shoulder belt height adjusters, if
equipped, child safety seat tether bracket assemblies, if equipped, and attaching hardware should
be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends new safety belt assemblies be installed unless a
qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5897
and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child seat is functioning properly, in addition
to other checks for proper safety belt system function. A belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly's "automatic locking retractor" feature or any other safety belt
function is not operating properly when inspected according to the functional inspection
procedures. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The driver seat safety belt buckle pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Depower the SRS.
2. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the front and rear side shield screws (front shown).
2 Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
4. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors.
5. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
Detach the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connectors and wire harness from the seat.
6. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Repower the SRS. 9. Check the active restraint
system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5898
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Safety Belt Pretensioner Disposal
Deployed
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - DEPLOYED
1. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling a
safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
Inoperative
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE
WARNING:
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- Carry a live safety belt retractor pretensioner or safety belt buckle pretensioner so as to keep
fingers and clothing away from moveable parts. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have
been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and
safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt
buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner from the vehicle. 3. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle
pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company.
Scrapped Vehicle
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, SCRAPPED VEHICLE
Remote Deployment
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This
will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- Carry a live safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly so as to keep fingers and clothing away
from moveable parts. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1-meters (20-feet)
away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed,
hearing protection is required.
- Do not position the safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly so that moveable parts contact the
support surface, as the forces of the deploying pretensioner can cause it to ricochet and cause
personal injury.
NOTE: A typical safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioner is shown that is similar for all vehicles.
All pretensioners 1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
Safety belt buckle pretensioner
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5899
3. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
4. Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1-meters (20-feet) long and attach 1 end of each
wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires.
Safety belt retractor pretensioner
5. Cut off 125 mm (4.92 in) of the vehicle body harness with the connector and strip 25 mm (1 inch)
of insulation off the wires.
6. Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1-meters (20-feet) long and attach 1 end of each
wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires.
All pretensioners 7. Position the safety belt retractor/buckle pretensioner assembly on a flat surface
in an open outdoor area so that moveable parts do not contact the
support surface.
8. Remain at least 6.1-meters (20-feet) away from the safety belt pretensioner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5900
9. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the 2 wires to the terminals of a
12-volt battery.
10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt
pretensioner. 11. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any
other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver > Page 5905
Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver > Page 5906
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Seat Belt Buckle Sensor > Page 5909
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5910
Seat Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
The seat track position sensor is a Hall-effect sensor located on the driver seat track. The seat
track position sensor informs the restraints control module (RCM) of the driver seat position. Based
on programmed limits, the seat track position sensor will inform the RCM of the driver seat position.
The RCM uses this information in determining the deployment rate of the dual-stage driver air bag
module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5911
Seat Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The seat must be in rearward position.
1. Depower the system. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the
screw and the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the
system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5917
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor
View 151-16 (Full Body, Left Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5918
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5919
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5920
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5923
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5924
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5925
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
SENSORS
WARNING:
- The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle
equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in
which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, a new RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed.
In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and correctly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
For these vehicles, the SRS uses up to 5 satellite sensors in addition to the RCM. The RCM is
mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles will have a front impact severity
sensor and it is located in the front-center of the vehicle, mounted on the radiator support bracket.
If the vehicle is equipped with safety canopies, there are 4 additional side impact sensors. The 4
additional sensors are located at the base of each B-pillar and mounted on the C-pillar. The LH and
RH C-pillar mounted side impact sensors are interchangeable. Mounting orientation is critical for
correct operation of all impact and rollover sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5928
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Position the hood latch assembly aside. 1
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2 Remove the hood latch bolts.
3 Position the hood latch aside.
3. Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the radiator support bracket bolt. 5.
Remove the front impact severity sensor bolt. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove
the front impact severity sensor.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the front impact severity sensor.
2. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are
clean and free of foreign material.
Align the locator tabs of the front impact severity sensor to the openings in the radiator support
bracket.
3. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag front impact severity sensor retaining bolt is
critical for correct system operation.
Install the front impact severity sensor bolt. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
4. Install the radiator support bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
5. Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5929
6. NOTE: Align the hood latch position as previously marked during removal.
Install the hood latch assembly. 1
Position the hood latch.
2 Install the hood latch bolts. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3 Tighten the hood latch nut. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch.
8. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5930
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor
electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5931
1. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Align the side impact sensor locator tabs to the openings in the B-pillar sheet metal.
2. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolts is critical for
correct system operation.
Install the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Connect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 5. Repower
the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5932
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. Remove the side impact sensor bolt.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the side impact sensor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5933
2. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Align the side impact sensor locator tabs to the openings in the C-pillar sheet metal.
3. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for
correct system operation.
Install the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Install the C-pillar trim panel. 5. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE SWITCHES
As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the front safety belt buckles are equipped with
safety belt buckle switches. The safety belt buckle switches are comprised of integrated circuits
called Hall-effect sensors. The safety belt buckle switches (Hall-effect sensors) are located in the
driver and passenger safety belt buckles. The safety belt buckle switches indicate to the restraints
control module (RCM) whether the safety belts are connected or disconnected. The RCM uses this
information in determining the deployment rate of the dual-stage driver and passenger air bag
modules. The RCM also communicates the driver safety belt buckle switch status to the instrument
cluster module, which monitors the information to control the safety belt warning indicator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT TENSION SENSOR
The safety belt tension sensor:
- is part of the front outboard passenger safety belt and retractor assembly.
- is located at the safety belt anchor point.
- is used in conjunction with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system.
- is a 3-wire Hall-effect sensor that is part of the front passenger safety belt and retractor assembly.
The safety belt tension sensor is used by the OCS system to identify the presence of a child safety
seat on the front outboard passenger seat, when the child safety seat is installed according to
manufacturer instructions. The safety belt tension sensor senses the tension on the safety belt
assembly then provides an output to the OCS system electronic control unit (ECU), indicating that
the safety belt assembly is cinched. After sensing the weight applied to the seat by the occupant
and using the safety belt tension sensor input, the OCS system determines how the occupant
should be classified and communicates this information to the restraints control module (RCM). If
the occupant is classified to be a child, the RCM will then automatically deactivate the passenger
air bag module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Pressure Sensor
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Pressure Sensor > Page 5944
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Pressure Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Pressure Sensor > Page 5947
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5948
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR
CAUTION:
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing of the OCS system. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C
(32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum 5-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE:
- For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
- To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCS
ECU electrical connector.
A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the electrical connector from the OCS ECU.
An OCS system service kit (OCS service kit) has the OCS ECU electrical connector glued to the
ECU, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. An OCS system service kit also has an
in-line 10-pin connector between the OCS ECU and the seat wiring harness.
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
The seat occupant classification sensor system is found only on the front passenger seat. The front
passenger seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is comprised of a silicone gel-filled
bladder mounted in the seat cushion, a pressure sensor that is mounted to the seat frame and an
electronic control unit which is also mounted to the seat frame. Pressure is applied to the OCS
bladder when the weight of any occupant or object in the front passenger seat is present. The
pressure is then transferred through a tube, is sensed by the OCS pressure sensor, then
electronically communicated to the OCS electronic control unit. Based on programmed limits, the
OCS electronic control unit will inform the restraints control module (RCM), via a High Speed
Controller Area Network (CAN), of the necessary information. The RCM uses this information in
determining if the passenger air bag module or passenger seat side air bag module is to be
deployed in the event of a deployable collision. The OCS system components (seat cushion foam
pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are
serviced as an assembly. OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If installing a
new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad, a new OCS system service
kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be
installed as an assembly.
The OCS system is also used for operation of the passenger Belt Minder. To deactivate or
reactivate the passenger Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators or the owner literature.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5951
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- Do not separate components.
CAUTION:
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as
an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS
system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5952
and ECU) must be installed as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the
disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU
electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
- If removing an OCS service kit, refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion element
electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5953
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the set cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU.
10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the
OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly
with the bladder.
Installation
NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. See:
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5954
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for
any foreign objects, before installing the occupant classification sensor to the seat cushion pan. If
any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the
event of an air bag deployment.
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor components through the correct seat
cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly, be careful
not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS
bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can
set a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the restraints control module (RCM).
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result
in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
Install seat cushion trim cover to seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat.
10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5955
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
12. Install the passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the system. Do not prove out the
system at this time.
14. CAUTION:
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing the OCS system: -
Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C
(32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum eight second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE: For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
NOTE: To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5956
- The ignition switch must be cycled after rezeroing the OCS system.
Rezero the occupant classification sensor. With the front passenger seat empty, use a diagnostic tool to trigger the active command and
rezero the occupant classification sensor.
15. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5957
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT
Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5958
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- Do not separate components.
CAUTION:
- There are 2 occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kits available for this vehicle
(base seat and heated seat). Always make sure the correct OCS service kit is installed.
- It is necessary to rezero the OCS system when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover installed, or an OCS service kit is installed. A diagnostic tool is used to trigger the
active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system,
OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit
(seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed
as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit)
inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the
disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU
electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
- If removing an OEM OCS, refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5959
a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion element
electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5960
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan.
9. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through
the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5961
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor assembly, seat cushion pan and support assembly for
any foreign objects before installing the occupant classification sensor assembly to the seat
cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to do so may result in personal
injury, in the event of an air bag deployment.
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor components through the correct seat
cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly, be careful
not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness, and
connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE:
- When installing a service part occupant classification sensor, the seat wire harness pressure
sensor electrical connector is not used.
- Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2 Slide the electronic control unit (ECU) into the seat cushion pan bracket. The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the restraints control module (RCM).
3 Install the rivets.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5962
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor assembly,
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
7. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips.
1 Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely out of the
way.
5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely out of the way.
8. Install the passenger seat into the vehicle. 9. Repower the system. Do not prove out the system
at this time.
10. CAUTION:
- Make sure the seat is completely assembled before rezeroing.
- The following precautions must be taken before rezeroing the OCS system: Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the rezeroing process.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5963
If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed
and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30
minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before rezeroing and nothing is placed on
the seat during the rezeroing process.
- Make sure a minimum eight second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the rezeroing process.
NOTE: For best results in rezeroing, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to
29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- When using an NGS+ (NGS with Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) and the latest software
update) to rezero the OCS system: select "FUNCTION TEST"
- select "SYSTEM RESET"
- view the on-screen information, then press "TRIGGER"
The NGS+ screen will then display "OCS RESET: REZERO." Press "DONE" (button 8) to rezero
the OCS system. The NGS+ will display "TEST/FUNCTION SUCCESSFUL" once rezeroing of the
OCS system is complete.
NOTE: To rezero the OCS system using the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS): select the "Toolbox" icon
- select "Body" from the menu
- select "Restraints" from the menu
- select "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero"
After selecting "Seat Weight Sensor ReZero", follow the on-screen prompts to carry out rezeroing
of the OCS system.
- If the first attempt to rezero the OCS system is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made.
- The ignition switch must be cycled after rezeroing the OCS system.
Rezero the occupant classification sensor. With the front passenger seat empty, use a diagnostic tool to trigger the active command and
rezero the occupant classification sensor.
11. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
12. NOTE: When installing a new occupant classification sensor, a prepaid return postcard is
provided with the new occupant classification sensor.
The serial number for the new part and the vehicle identification number (VIN) must be recorded
and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the occupant classification sensor traceability card and return
it along with the complete inoperative occupant classification sensor to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative occupant classification sensor, include the following: seat cushion
foam pad, bladder, electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors
and wire harness (service part occupant classification sensor only).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver > Page 5968
Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Position Sensor, Driver > Page 5969
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Seat Belt Buckle Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt Buckle Sensor > Page 5972
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5973
Seat Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
The seat track position sensor is a Hall-effect sensor located on the driver seat track. The seat
track position sensor informs the restraints control module (RCM) of the driver seat position. Based
on programmed limits, the seat track position sensor will inform the RCM of the driver seat position.
The RCM uses this information in determining the deployment rate of the dual-stage driver air bag
module.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5974
Seat Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The seat must be in rearward position.
1. Depower the system. 2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the
screw and the seat position sensor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the
system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5980
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5981
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Antenna, Navigation: Service and Repair
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Remove the GPS antenna bolt and the
GPS antenna. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair
ANTENNA LEAD-IN CABLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Disconnect the antenna lead-in cable from the antenna cable. 3.
Release the antenna lead-in cable pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the antenna lead-in cable. 5. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5994
Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel steering column cover. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3.
Remove the 3 steering column shroud screws and the lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove
the PATS transceiver screw. 5. Disconnect and remove the transceiver assembly electrical
connector.
6. NOTE: No key replacement or re-initialization needs to occur with the removal or installation of a
new PATS transceiver.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 5998
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 6004
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 6005
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6006
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6007
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6008
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the RKE
keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the RKE keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
CAUTION: All remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
1. The vehicle must be electronically unlocked before entering program mode (via the RKE
transmitter or the door lock control switch while the
driver door is open).
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to RUN 8 times within 10 seconds, with the eighth turn ending
in RUN. If the module has successfully entered
program mode, it locks and then unlocks all doors.
3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on a RKE transmitter; and the doors lock and then unlock
to confirm that each remote transmitter has been
programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter.
4. If the door locks do not respond for any RKE transmitter, wait several seconds and press the
button again. If the door locks still fail to respond,
refer to Inspection and Verification. Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE
transmitters are attempted to be programmed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing
and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification
5. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if 1 of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position.
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed.
- The maximum number of RKE transmitters have been programmed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 6021
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page
6027
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6028
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6029
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6030
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the
2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6039
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6040
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6041
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6042
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6048
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6049
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6050
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6051
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6054
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6055
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6056
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6059
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6060
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6061
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6062
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6066
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6067
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the
parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 6076
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 >
Page 6082
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6083
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6087
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6088
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation
INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER
The message center is a fixed format LCD display, integrated into the instrument cluster. The
message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The message center
displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle systems. The
message center notifies the driver of a potential vehicle problem by displaying a warning message
pertaining to the system in which a fault has been detected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles of Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The message center electronic functions use both hardwired and controller area network (CAN)
circuits to transmit and receive information. It is very important to understand:
- where the input (command) originates.
- all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate.
- which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message.
- does the module which received the input (message) control the output of the feature, or does it
output a message over the CAN circuits to another module?
- which module controls the output of the feature.
Display Information The display modes are: information
- setup
- system check
- warning
- temporary alert
- display off
Using the message center, various information can be selected and reset by pressing the following
buttons: SET
- INFO
The select display and the reset display time-out and default to the information display mode. The
temporary alert display interrupts the current display to show the status of an event that has just
happened. The warning display interrupts the current display until cleared or reset by the driver.
Information Displays The information displays are as follows: compass
- average fuel economy
- distance to empty
- instantaneous fuel economy
- fuel available
- units (US/metric)
- language
- display off
Setup Displays The setup displays are timed modes and default back to the information display
function. The setup display modes are: language
- units (US/metric)
- system check
System Check The system check display is a sub-routine of the setup menu. These sub-routines
are timed modes that terminate after a finite interval, then default back to the information display
function. The system check display modes are: oil life XXX%
- charging system
- door ajar
- brake fluid level
- check headlamps
- check brake lamps
- check front turn lamps
- check parking lamps
- fuel level
- miles to empty
- emission system
- 4x4 OK
Warning Messages
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6091
The warning messages can interrupt the display until cleared or reset by the driver. The warning
messages are either single cycle, non-resettable, or repetitive warning messages.
The single cycle warning messages display once whenever the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or a fault occurs in a system, and can be cleared by pressing the RESET button. The
single cycle warning messages are: liftgate ajar
- liftgate glass ajar
- service emission system
- low brake fluid
- service brake system
- check left headlamp
- check right headlamp
- check left turn lamps
- check right turn lamps
- check left high beam
- check right high beam
- check brake lamps
- check parking lamps
- washer fluid low
- check fuel cap
- change oil soon
- change oil now
- low fuel
- service 4x4
- turn signal on
The repetitive warning message (park brake ON) displays whenever the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or a fault occurs in a system. The repetitive warning message appears again after
a 10-minute interval until the condition is corrected.
The non-resettable warning messages display whenever the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and a fault occurs in a system. The fault must be corrected to clear the non-resettable
warning messages.
The non-resettable warning messages are: high engine temperature
- driver door ajar
- passenger door ajar
- driver rear door ajar
- passenger rear door ajar
Temporary Alert Messages The temporary alert display interrupts the current display to show the
status of an event that has just happened. The temporary alert messages are: 4x4 locked temporarily
- 4x4 disabled temporarily
- 4x4 auto restored
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION - ESCAPE HYBRID
The message center electronic functions use both hardwired and CAN circuits to receive
information. It is very important to understand:
- where the input (command) originates.
- all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate.
- which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message.
- which module controls the output of the feature.
Display Information The display modes are: information
- setup
- system check
- warning
- temporary alert
Various message center information can be selected and reset by pressing the following buttons: SET
- INFO
The select display and the reset display time-out and default to the information display mode. The
temporary alert display interrupts the current display
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6092
to show the status of an event that has just happened and disappears after a few seconds. The
warning display interrupts the current display until cleared or reset by the driver.
Message Center General Displays The message center display is a 2 row by 12 character LCD
display. The display is controlled by a 2 button switch module that includes INFO and SET buttons
outside of the instrument cluster. The information displayed in the message center display falls into
4 main categories: jump start mode
- info
- warnings
- temporary alerts
Message Center Information Displays The INFORMATION DISPLAY mode is entered by pressing
the INFO button. Subsequent presses of the INFO button scroll through the menu features of the
information display.
System Check When the SET FOR SYSTEM CHECK information is currently displayed, pressing
the SET button leads the instrument cluster to initiate the system check function. The system check
function provides the driver with the current status of certain vehicle functions. The status of each
function is displayed sequentially on the message center. The driver has the ability to scroll through
the system check displays by repeatedly pressing the SET button, or the display automatically
scrolls at 2 seconds time out per display. The system check function can be terminated at any time
by pressing any message center switch other than the SET button.
Warning Indicators and Messages
Warning Indicators And Messages
The warning messages have precedence over all other messages. Every warning message is
displayed. The messages can be single cycle, non-resettable, or repetitive. The instrument cluster
indicators that are illuminated when a fault occurs and the message that follows are shown in the
table.
Warning Messages
The instrument cluster messages that are displayed when a fault occurs are shown in the table.
The warning messages continue to cycle in order until the vehicle condition causing the warning is
corrected, until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, or until the message center is reset
while the warning is displayed. A warning is removed from the display when the message center is
reset unless the warning is non-resettable. A repeated warning message is removed from the
display when the message center is reset and displays again after 10 minutes if the warning
condition is not corrected. The single cycle warning message is removed from the display when the
message center is reset and is not displayed again until the next ignition cycle. Multiple messages
are cycled through in a fixed order with a display of 4 seconds for each warning. No other display
modes are allowed while a warning message is displayed.
Inspection and Verification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6093
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for
an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step. 4. If the concern is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link
connector (DLC) and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
5. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 6. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or ISO circuit fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for the instrument cluster, refer to Instrument Cluster.
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs, and carry out self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster.
7. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Instrument Cluster Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnosis. For all
other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See:
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
8. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart to continue diagnosis.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6094
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
B1205-B1212
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6095
B1212-B1243
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6096
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6097
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6098
Symptom Chart (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6099
Symptom Chart (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6100
Symptom Chart (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6101
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests
Compass Sensor Module C909
Instrument Cluster C220
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6102
Message Center INFO Switch C253a
Message Center SET Switch C253b
Test A: The Message Center Does Not Operate Correctly
PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6103
A1-A2
Normal Operation
The message center display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The messages are
dependant on various vehicle inputs.
Possible Causes
- instrument cluster
- message center switch(es)
Test B: The Turn Signal On Warning Display Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST B: THE TURN SIGNAL ON WARNING DISPLAY IS INOPERATIVE
B1-B3
Normal Operation
The turn signal on reminder warning feature alerts the operator that one of the turn signals has
been on for 1/2 mile or more.
Possible Causes
- turn signals
- circuitry
- instrument cluster
Test C: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6104
PINPOINT TEST C: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
C1-C2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6105
C3-C4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6106
C5-C6
Normal Operation
The instrument cluster sends a signal to the message center INFO switch on circuit 1411 (GY/OG),
and to the message center SET switch on circuit 1410 (TN/OG), which communicates the
requested switch function to the message center. The switches are grounded through circuit 570
(BK/WH).
Possible Causes
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 1411 (GY/OG) open or short to ground
- circuit 1410 (TN/OG) open or short to ground
- message center SET switch
- message center INFO switch
- instrument cluster
Test D: The Compass Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST D: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE
D1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6107
D1-D3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6108
D3 Continued
Normal Conditions
The compass sensor module receives voltage from circuit 1002 (BK/PK) and is grounded through
circuit 570 (BK/WH). The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the
instrument cluster, which is displayed in the message center. The compass sensor module uses
circuit 702 (WH/BK) and circuit 703 (WH/OG) to communicate to the instrument cluster.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1002 (BK/PK) open
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 702 (WH/BK) open or short to ground
- circuit 703 (WH/OG) open or short to ground
- compass sensor module
Test E: The Compass Is Inaccurate
PINPOINT TEST E: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6109
E1-E3
Normal Operation
The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the instrument cluster to
display in the message center.
Possible Causes
- compass sensor module
- vehicle is magnetized
- zone setting
- compass out of calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6110
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair
MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the
message center switch(es). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6111
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair
AUDIO CONTROL PROTOCOL (ACP) MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Lower the glove box. 3. Remove the 2 ACP module screws. 4.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the ACP module. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Navigation System: Description and Operation
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The navigation system is integral to the audio unit. The audio unit controls the operation of the
navigation system, the audio system and the 6 compact disc (CD) changer. A map CD stored in the
audio unit visually guides the user with the maneuvers required to arrive at the destination entered.
The 6 CD changer provides audio CD capability while the navigation CD in the audio control unit
provides navigation.
In order to calculate initial vehicle position, a global positioning system (GPS) antenna is used to
track several available satellites simultaneously. The GPS antenna only receives data and does not
communicate with the satellites. A hardwired reverse input from the smart junction box (SJB) and a
hardwired vehicle speed input from the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module are also used to
improve the accuracy of the navigation system.
The navigation system also displays separate user selected screens for high voltage power flow
and fuel economy. The data is supplied from the controller area network (CAN) and then translated
from CAN messages into audio control protocol (ACP) messages by the ACP module. These ACP
messages are used by the audio unit to calculate the high voltage power flow and fuel economy
screens.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Navigation System: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for
an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Upgrading The Audio/Navigation Unit Software
To carry out an audio/navigation unit software upgrade, the following steps must be taken:
1. CAUTION: Do not remove power from the audio unit during the software update.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position.
2. Turn the audio/navigation unit ON. 3. Install a new navigation database CD. 4. If the audio unit
recognizes a revised level of software, it prompts the user to confirm whether they would like to
carry out a software upgrade.
When the Updating System Software screen is displayed, press the YES button on the display
screen to accept the software update.
5. The audio unit carries out a unit reset, upgrades the software and carries out a second unit reset
upon completion. When the audio unit returns to
normal mode, the software upgrade is complete.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6121
Navigation System: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6122
Navigation System: Pinpoint Tests
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module C1462
Audio Control Protocol (ACP) Module C2294a
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6123
Audio Control Protocol (ACP) Module C2294b
Audio Unit C229a
Audio Unit C229c
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6124
Audio Unit C229e
Instrument Cluster C220
Test A: The Navigation System Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST A: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6125
A1-A2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6126
A2-A4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6127
A5
Normal Operation
The audio unit receives voltage on circuits 137 (YE/BK), 1786 (BN/PK) and 956 (OG/LG) and is
grounded by circuit 694 (BK/LG).
Possible Causes
- circuit 137 (YE/BK) open
- circuit 956 (OG/LG) open
- circuit 694 (BK/LG) open
- audio unit
Test B: The Navigation System Does Not Operate Correctly - No Reverse Tracking
PINPOINT TEST B: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO
REVERSE TRACKING
B1-B2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6128
B3
Normal Operation
The audio unit receives a voltage signal from the smart junction box (SJB) to indicate the vehicle is
in reverse on circuit 140 (BK/PK).
Possible Causes
- circuit 140 (BK/PK) open or short to ground
- SJB
- audio unit
Test C: The Navigation System Does Not Operate Correctly - No Speedometer Signal
PINPOINT TEST C: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO
SPEEDOMETER SIGNAL
C1-C2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6129
C2-C4
Normal Operation
The audio unit monitors the vehicle speed over circuit 679 (GY/BK).
Possible Causes
- circuit 679 (GY/BK) open or short to ground
- anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
- audio unit
Test D: The Navigation System Does Not Operate Correctly - No Global Positioning System (GPS)
Antenna Signal
PINPOINT TEST D: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA SIGNAL
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6130
D1-D2
Normal Operation
The audio unit receives signals from the GPS satellites through the GPS antenna and computes
the vehicle position.
Possible Causes
- GPS antenna
- audio unit
Test E: The Navigation System Does Not Operate Correctly - The Navigation System Is Inaccurate
PINPOINT TEST E: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM IS INACCURATE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6131
E1-E4
Normal Operation
The audio unit receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS) satellites through the
GPS antenna and computes the vehicle position. The vehicle position is then displayed based on
the map CD.
Possible Causes
- circuit 140 (BK/PK) open or short to ground
- map CD version
- anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
- audio unit
Test F: The Navigation System Does Not Operate Correctly - The Fuel Economy & Energy Flow
Screens Do Not Display Real Time Data
PINPOINT TEST F: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE
FUEL ECONOMY AND ENERGY FLOW SCREENS DO NOT DISPLAY REAL TIME DATA
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6132
F1-F3
Normal Operation
The audio unit receives input signals through the medium speed CAN and the audio control
protocol (ACP) module. The navigation system then computes and displays the high energy power
flow and miles per gallon data when selected.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1847 (WH/OG) open
- circuit 1848 (PK/OG) open
- instrument cluster
Test G: The Navigation System Does Not Operate Correctly - The Fuel Economy and Energy Flow
Screens Cannot Be Selected or Do No
PINPOINT TEST G: THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE
FUEL ECONOMY AND ENERGY FLOW SCREENS CANNOT BE SELECTED OR DO NOT
REMAIN SELECTED
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6133
G1-G3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6134
G3-G4
Normal Operation
The audio unit receives input signals through the medium speed CAN and the audio control
protocol (ACP) module. The navigation system then computes and displays the high energy power
flow and miles per gallon data when selected.
Possible Causes
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 137 (YE/BK) open
- circuit 833 (TN) open
- circuit 856 (VT) open
- circuit 1068 (LG/BK) open
- ACP module
- medium speed CAN
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 6135
Navigation System: Service and Repair
NAVIGATION SYSTEM CALIBRATION
1. Access the current set of regional map compact discs (CDs). 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Turn the
audio unit on. 4. Insert the appropriate regional map CD into the CD slot at the top of the audio unit.
5. Press the NAV button. 6. Press ACCEPT after reading the disclaimer. 7. Press the MAP button.
8. Road test the vehicle until the red compass heading indicator turns green/white. 9. Leave the CD
in the audio unit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 6136
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6141
Amplifier: Service and Repair
SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. Disconnect the subwoofer
amplifier electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier. 5. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 > Audio
System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
Speaker: Customer Interest Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
TSB 06-9-2
05/15/06
SPEAKER BUZZ - FRONT DOOR SPEAKERS ONLY
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE
Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, and 2006 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a
buzz from the front door speakers. This may be due to the resonant characteristics of the door
vapor barrier (poly shield), or in some cases loose speaker mounting hardware.
ACTION
Use the following Service Procedure to resolve buzz from front door speaker.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-05 for door panel removal.
2. Remove both front door poly shields and operate radio to verify buzz is eliminated. If buzz is still
present, go to Step 3. If buzz is eliminated, replace both front poly shields. Be sure to take care that
the adhesive sections make full contact with the inner door panel and not the speaker
3. Verify speaker fasteners are properly torqued to 17 lb-in (1.9 N.m). If buzz is still present this
TSB does not apply and refer to WSM for additional diagnostics.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060902A 2005-2006 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Vapor Barriers On Both Front Doors Includes
Time To Perform Diagnosis Outlined In Procedure (Do Not Use With 23943A, 23943AT, 18808AF,
18808AFT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
78237A05 12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 > Audio
System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing > Page 6150
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 >
Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
TSB 06-9-2
05/15/06
SPEAKER BUZZ - FRONT DOOR SPEAKERS ONLY
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE
Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, and 2006 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a
buzz from the front door speakers. This may be due to the resonant characteristics of the door
vapor barrier (poly shield), or in some cases loose speaker mounting hardware.
ACTION
Use the following Service Procedure to resolve buzz from front door speaker.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-05 for door panel removal.
2. Remove both front door poly shields and operate radio to verify buzz is eliminated. If buzz is still
present, go to Step 3. If buzz is eliminated, replace both front poly shields. Be sure to take care that
the adhesive sections make full contact with the inner door panel and not the speaker
3. Verify speaker fasteners are properly torqued to 17 lb-in (1.9 N.m). If buzz is still present this
TSB does not apply and refer to WSM for additional diagnostics.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060902A 2005-2006 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Vapor Barriers On Both Front Doors Includes
Time To Perform Diagnosis Outlined In Procedure (Do Not Use With 23943A, 23943AT, 18808AF,
18808AFT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
78237A05 12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 >
Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing > Page 6156
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6157
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker
Speaker: Diagrams Speaker
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 6160
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 6161
Speaker: Diagrams Tweeter
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker
DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
All Speakers 1. Remove the door trim panel.
Front Door Tweeter Speaker 2. Release the pin-type retainer and remove the front door tweeter
speaker.
Front or Rear Door Speaker 3. Remove the 4 speaker screws and the speaker.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
All Speakers 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 6164
Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker Enclosure
SPEAKER ENCLOSURE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 3.
Remove the 3 bolts and the speaker enclosure.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6170
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6171
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair
AUDIO CONTROL PROTOCOL (ACP) MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Lower the glove box. 3. Remove the 2 ACP module screws. 4.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the ACP module. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: >
06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 6183
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 6189
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 05-13-8 > Jul > 05 > Brakes - Rear Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
TSB 05-13-8
07/11/05
REAR DISC BRAKE GRIND, RUBBING OR THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-25 to increase the labor operation time.
ISSUE Some 2005 vehicles may exhibit a rear disc brake grind, rubbing or thump. The noise may
be more noticeable during cool or wet conditions, and usually occurs during initial brake application
after setting over night. This may be due to the composition of the brake lining material.
ACTION Machine the rear rotors and install new rear disc brake linings made of revised material.
Refer to Section 206-04 of the Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051308A 2005 Escape, Manner, 1.5 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Machine The Rear Brake Rotors And Install New Rear Disc Brake Linings (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B3P, 2001B3PT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2200 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6200
View 151-18 (Full Body, Right Rear - 2 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6201
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6202
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the
2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6207
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6216
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6217
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6218
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6219
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6225
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6226
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6227
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6228
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6231
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6232
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6233
View 151-17 (Full Body, Right Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6236
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6237
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6238
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6239
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6243
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6244
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the
parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
TSB 06-7-1
04/17/06
NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS
FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape,
Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac
LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart.
ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral
tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make
the vehicle neutral tow capable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 6250
ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable.
Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions
are included with the kit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 6251
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6257
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6258
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6259
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6260
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6261
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6262
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6263
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6264
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6265
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6266
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6267
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6268
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6269
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6270
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6271
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6272
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6273
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6274
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6275
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6276
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6277
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6282
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6283
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6284
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6285
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6286
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6287
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6288
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6289
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6290
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6291
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6292
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6293
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6294
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6295
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6296
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6297
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6298
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6299
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6300
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6301
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating
correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. See: Pinpoint Tests 3. Visually inspect for
obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 2 (25A)
- 3 (25A)
- 21 (40A)
- Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s): 1 (15A) (trailer parking lamps)
- 6 (15A)
- 17 (15A)
- SJB
- Circuity
- Trailer
4. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
- Make sure the multifunction switch is in the low beam position.
5. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector (DLC)
and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: Check that the program card is correctly installed.
- Check the connections to the vehicle.
- Check the ignition switch position.
6. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 7. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or ISO circuit fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for SJB, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module).
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
NOTE: When diagnosing the trailer tow lamps, begin by verifying that the vehicle lamp systems are
all functioning correctly with the trailer disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6304
B1342-B2070
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6305
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6306
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280c
Trailer Tow C439
Test Y: Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6307
Y1-Y2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6308
Y2-Y4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6309
Y4-Y5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6310
Y5-Y6
Normal Operation
Voltage to the trailer tow lamps is controlled by the smart junction box (SJB). Circuits 52 (YE) and
64 (DG) supply voltage to the trailer tow LH and RH stop/turn lamps respectively. Circuit 962
(BN/WH) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamps. Ground for the trailer lamps is provided
on circuit 57 (BK).
Possible Causes
- circuit 52 (YE) open, or short to ground
- circuit 57 (BK) open
- circuit 64 (DG) open, or short to ground
- circuit 962 (BN/WH) open
- trailer
- SJB
Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Z1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6311
Z1-Z2
Normal Operation
Voltage to the trailer tow lamps is controlled by the smart junction box (SJB). Circuits 52 (YE) and
64 (DG) supply voltage to the trailer tow LH and RH stop/turn lamps respectively. Circuit 962
(BN/WH) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamps.
Possible Causes
- circuit 64 (DG) short to voltage
- circuit 52 (YE) short to voltage
- circuit 962 (BN/WH) short to voltage
- SJB
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6312
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15 (Full Body, Left Rear - 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6337
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6338
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
Removal and Installation
1. CAUTION: Prior to removal of the SJB, it is necessary to upload module configuration
information to a diagnostic tool. This
information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the floor console SJB cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the
floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from
the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6344
7. Remove the SJB screw. 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the SJB. 9. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the SJB. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
RUNNING BOARD
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 6 running board bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2. Remove the running board. 3. Remove the 6 running board support bracket bolts and the 3
running board support brackets.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER COVER
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6353
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 2)
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper
cover and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 6 pin-type retainers (3 each
side). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the 4 air deflector bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the 2 center front bumper cover pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the 2 front bumper cover outer pin-type retainers (1 each side). 7. If equipped,
disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 upper bolts and the front bumper
cover.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Position the front bumper cover.
- Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until you
feel the bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6357
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 2)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 4 front bumper nuts. 3. Remove the front
bumper.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER COVER
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Page 6362
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 2)
Removal and Installation
CAUTION:
- Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover and
below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint.
- On Mariner vehicles, when removing and installing the rear bumper cover, carefully remove the
RH outer bumper cover mount around the exhaust pipe to avoid breaking the RH outer bumper
cover mount.
1. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover-to-splash shield bolts (1 each side).
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in).
2. CAUTION: When removing the outer rear bumper cover pin-type retainers, use caution to
prevent breaking the outer rear bumper
cover mounts.
Remove the 2 center and 2 outer rear bumper cover pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the 6 rear bumper cover screws. 4. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and
the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear bumper
cover. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information
> Service and Repair > Page 6366
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar (Part 2)
Exploded Views
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the 4 rear bumper nuts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. Remove the rear bumper. 4. If necessary, remove the rivets and the rear bumper isolator.
- Use the special tool to install the new rivets.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the 8 cowl panel grille pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the 8 cowl panel grille caps and screws. 5. Remove the LH cowl panel grille. 6. Remove
the RH cowl panel grille. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle
EXTERIOR FRONT DOOR HANDLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Loosen the exterior door handle reinforcement screw.
4. Remove the exterior door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior door handle.
2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing the cover.
5. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding the handle towards the rear of the vehicle. 6.
Remove the 2 exterior door handle seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6379
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches Exploded View
FRONT DOOR HANDLES, LOCKS AND LATCHES - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
FRONT DOOR HANDLES, LOCKS AND LATCHES - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View > Page 6384
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Latch
FRONT DOOR LATCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior front door handle.
2. Loosen the exterior door handle reinforcement screw until the exterior door handle reinforcement
slides free.
3. Release the interior door handle clip.
4. Remove the interior door handle.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the door latch cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View > Page 6385
5. Remove and discard the 3 door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in)
6. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 7. Remove the door latch assembly.
- Slide the door latch towards the front of the vehicle.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 > Audio System - Front Door Speaker
Buzzing
Front Door Panel: Customer Interest Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
TSB 06-9-2
05/15/06
SPEAKER BUZZ - FRONT DOOR SPEAKERS ONLY
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE
Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, and 2006 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a
buzz from the front door speakers. This may be due to the resonant characteristics of the door
vapor barrier (poly shield), or in some cases loose speaker mounting hardware.
ACTION
Use the following Service Procedure to resolve buzz from front door speaker.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-05 for door panel removal.
2. Remove both front door poly shields and operate radio to verify buzz is eliminated. If buzz is still
present, go to Step 3. If buzz is eliminated, replace both front poly shields. Be sure to take care that
the adhesive sections make full contact with the inner door panel and not the speaker
3. Verify speaker fasteners are properly torqued to 17 lb-in (1.9 N.m). If buzz is still present this
TSB does not apply and refer to WSM for additional diagnostics.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060902A 2005-2006 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Vapor Barriers On Both Front Doors Includes
Time To Perform Diagnosis Outlined In Procedure (Do Not Use With 23943A, 23943AT, 18808AF,
18808AFT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
78237A05 12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 > Audio System - Front Door Speaker
Buzzing > Page 6394
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Panel: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 >
Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
Front Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
TSB 06-9-2
05/15/06
SPEAKER BUZZ - FRONT DOOR SPEAKERS ONLY
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE
Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, and 2006 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a
buzz from the front door speakers. This may be due to the resonant characteristics of the door
vapor barrier (poly shield), or in some cases loose speaker mounting hardware.
ACTION
Use the following Service Procedure to resolve buzz from front door speaker.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-05 for door panel removal.
2. Remove both front door poly shields and operate radio to verify buzz is eliminated. If buzz is still
present, go to Step 3. If buzz is eliminated, replace both front poly shields. Be sure to take care that
the adhesive sections make full contact with the inner door panel and not the speaker
3. Verify speaker fasteners are properly torqued to 17 lb-in (1.9 N.m). If buzz is still present this
TSB does not apply and refer to WSM for additional diagnostics.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060902A 2005-2006 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Vapor Barriers On Both Front Doors Includes
Time To Perform Diagnosis Outlined In Procedure (Do Not Use With 23943A, 23943AT, 18808AF,
18808AFT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
78237A05 12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Panel: > 06-9-2 > May > 06 >
Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing > Page 6400
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Panel: > 05-13-8 > Jul > 05 > Brakes Rear Disc Brake Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Disc Brake
Grinding/Rubbing/Thumping
TSB 05-13-8
07/11/05
REAR DISC BRAKE GRIND, RUBBING OR THUMP NOISE
FORD: 2005 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-9-25 to increase the labor operation time.
ISSUE Some 2005 vehicles may exhibit a rear disc brake grind, rubbing or thump. The noise may
be more noticeable during cool or wet conditions, and usually occurs during initial brake application
after setting over night. This may be due to the composition of the brake lining material.
ACTION Machine the rear rotors and install new rear disc brake linings made of revised material.
Refer to Section 206-04 of the Workshop Manual.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051308A 2005 Escape, Manner, 1.5 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Machine The Rear Brake Rotors And Install New Rear Disc Brake Linings (Do Not
Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B3P, 2001B3PT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
2200 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Panel: > Page 6406
Front Door Panel: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-9-2 Date: 060515
Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
TSB 06-9-2
05/15/06
SPEAKER BUZZ - FRONT DOOR SPEAKERS ONLY
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE
Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, and 2006 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a
buzz from the front door speakers. This may be due to the resonant characteristics of the door
vapor barrier (poly shield), or in some cases loose speaker mounting hardware.
ACTION
Use the following Service Procedure to resolve buzz from front door speaker.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-05 for door panel removal.
2. Remove both front door poly shields and operate radio to verify buzz is eliminated. If buzz is still
present, go to Step 3. If buzz is eliminated, replace both front poly shields. Be sure to take care that
the adhesive sections make full contact with the inner door panel and not the speaker
3. Verify speaker fasteners are properly torqued to 17 lb-in (1.9 N.m). If buzz is still present this
TSB does not apply and refer to WSM for additional diagnostics.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060902A 2005-2006 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Vapor Barriers On Both Front Doors Includes
Time To Perform Diagnosis Outlined In Procedure (Do Not Use With 23943A, 23943AT, 18808AF,
18808AFT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
78237A05 12
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Panel: > Page 6407
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-9-2 Date: 060515
Audio System - Front Door Speaker Buzzing
TSB 06-9-2
05/15/06
SPEAKER BUZZ - FRONT DOOR SPEAKERS ONLY
FORD: 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE
Some 2005-2006 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, and 2006 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a
buzz from the front door speakers. This may be due to the resonant characteristics of the door
vapor barrier (poly shield), or in some cases loose speaker mounting hardware.
ACTION
Use the following Service Procedure to resolve buzz from front door speaker.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-05 for door panel removal.
2. Remove both front door poly shields and operate radio to verify buzz is eliminated. If buzz is still
present, go to Step 3. If buzz is eliminated, replace both front poly shields. Be sure to take care that
the adhesive sections make full contact with the inner door panel and not the speaker
3. Verify speaker fasteners are properly torqued to 17 lb-in (1.9 N.m). If buzz is still present this
TSB does not apply and refer to WSM for additional diagnostics.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060902A 2005-2006 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Vapor Barriers On Both Front Doors Includes
Time To Perform Diagnosis Outlined In Procedure (Do Not Use With 23943A, 23943AT, 18808AF,
18808AFT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Panel: > Page 6408
BASIC PART NO. CODE
78237A05 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6409
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR TRIM PANEL
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: LH side is shown; RH side is similar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6410
Disconnect the battery.
2. Open the cover, remove the screw and the interior door handle bezel. 3. Remove the door
handle cup screw. 4. Remove the front door trim panel cover, screws and the front door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Front
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Front
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3.
Position the watershield aside. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the
window control switch electrical connector. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Using the window control
switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 8.
Disconnect the battery. 9. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
10. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
11. Remove the front door window glass. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the front door window glass to make sure it is engaged correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6418
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View
FRONT DOOR GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front > Page 6423
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6426
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3.
Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5.
Connect the battery. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain
access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window
control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position. 11. Disconnect the front door
window motor electrical connector. 12. Remove the 3 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle
EXTERIOR REAR DOOR HANDLE
Removal and Installation
Exterior Rear Door Handle 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the 2 bolts. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
2 Position the rear door glass top run aside.
4. Loosen the 2 exterior door handle reinforcement screws until the exterior door handle
reinforcement slides free.
5. Remove the exterior door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior door handle.
2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing the cover.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6436
6. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding the handle towards the rear of the vehicle. 7.
Remove the 2 exterior door handle seals.
Exterior Rear Door Handle Reinforcement
8. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
9. Slide the exterior door handle toward the front of the vehicle and remove the reinforcement.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6437
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
REAR DOOR HANDLES, LOCKS AND LATCHES - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
REAR DOOR HANDLES, LOCKS AND LATCHES - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View > Page 6442
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Latch
REAR DOOR LATCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the interior door handle.
2. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the 2 bolts. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
2 Position the rear door glass top run aside.
3. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
5. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
6. Remove the rear door latch from inside the door frame. 7. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View > Page 6443
- Lubricate the rear door latch to striker surfaces after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR TRIM PANEL
Escape Is Shown, Mariner Is Similar
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side is shown. RH side is similar.
1. Remove the rear door trim moulding. 2. Open the cover, remove the screw and the rear door
handle bezel. 3. Remove the rear door handle cup screw. 4. Remove the rear door trim panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6447
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View
REAR DOOR GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View > Page 6455
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass
REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door glass top run. 2. Remove the rear door window glass. 3. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the rear door window glass to make sure it is engaged correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3.
Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using
the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window
glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position. 9. Disconnect the rear door window
motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the 3 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
11. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch
HOOD LATCH
Removal
1. Remove the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts.
Remove the 2 hood latch bolts.
3. Remove the hood latch.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
Installation
1. Connect the hood latch release cable and conduit to the hood latch.
1 Connect the cable.
2 Engage the cable conduit.
2. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the
latch is installed and aligned correctly.
Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 6464
3. Install the hood latch nut.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 6465
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
HOOD LATCH AND COMPONENTS - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the hood latch.
2. Remove the 3 hood latch release handle cable locators. 3. Remove the 2 hood latch release
handle screws.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the dash
panel into the passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6473
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6478
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4.
Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1
Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6482
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE HANDLE, LOCK AND LATCH - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6494
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6495
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6496
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6497
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6498
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6499
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6500
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6501
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6502
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04
> Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6512
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6513
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6514
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6515
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6516
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6517
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6518
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6519
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6520
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: >
NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release
Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
LIFTGATE HANDLE, LOCK AND LATCH - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6527
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6528
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
LIFTGATE LATCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
4. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the liftgate latch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the liftgate latch to striker surfaces with Krytox grease after installation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6529
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Remote Control
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOTE CONTROL
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch remote control actuating rods.
1 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate window latch actuating rod.
2 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod.
3. Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate handle actuating rod.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
1 If equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector.
2 Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6530
5. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly.
- Remove the screw and 2 nuts. To install, tighten the nuts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- To install, tighten the screw to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer all necessary components.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 6531
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate window Latch
LIFTGATE WINDOW LATCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch.
1 Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
2 Open the clip and disconnect the actuating rod.
3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch
bolts.
Remove the 2 liftgate window latch bolts and the liftgate window latch. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System
Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE HANDLE, LOCK AND LATCH - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE LATCH ACTUATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate latch remote control.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate latch actuator screws and the liftgate latch actuator. 3. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the 8 cowl panel grille pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the 8 cowl panel grille caps and screws. 5. Remove the LH cowl panel grille. 6. Remove
the RH cowl panel grille. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER SPLASH SHIELD
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield
screws. 4. Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 6557
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 6558
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6564
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6565
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6566
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6567
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6568
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6569
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6570
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6571
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6572
Front Subframe: Description and Operation
FRONT SUBFRAME
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms.
- provide a mounting point for the engine isolators.
- provide the mounting surface for the steering gear.
- provide the mounting surface for the sway bar.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6573
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
FRONT SUBFRAME
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6574
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6575
Part 2
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the battery.
Escape Hybrid
3. Remove the steering gear.
4. If equipped with 4WD, remove the rear engine mount bracket.
1 Remove the 2 nuts.
2 Remove the bolt. To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
3 Remove the rear engine mount bracket.
All vehicles except Escape Hybrid
5. Remove the 2 rear transaxle mount nuts and bolt
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6576
6. Remove the power steering hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. Using the special tool, support the engine. 8. Remove the bolts and the lateral support
crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
9. Remove the splash shield bolt.
10. Remove the front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
12. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
13. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt and nuts.
- To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
14. Remove the 2 nuts and disconnect the 2 stabilizer bar links.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
15. Remove the 2 steering gear bolts.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
16. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 17. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe
(2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 18. If equipped with 4WD, remove the driveshaft.
19. NOTE: The engine must be lowered to allow the front subframe to clear the transaxle
companion flange.
If equipped with 4WD, use the special tool to lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm
(5.9 in).
20. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6577
- To install, tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft).
21. Support the front subframe and remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
All vehicles
22. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
23. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6586
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6587
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6593
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6594
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6595
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6596
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6597
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6598
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6599
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6600
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 6609
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 6610
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6616
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6617
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6618
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6619
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6620
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6621
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6622
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6623
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6624
Rear Subframe: Description and Operation
REAR SUBFRAME
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential (4WD).
Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the
suspension parts, and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening
concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by improperly tightened bolts and
body misalignment.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6625
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
REAR SUBFRAME
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with 4WD
2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6626
3. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside.
4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 5. With an assistant, remove the 4
bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
4. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
5. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6635
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6636
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6642
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6643
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6644
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6645
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6646
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6647
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6648
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6649
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
RADIATOR GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Remove the 2 radiator grille nuts.
3. Release the 4 clips and remove the radiator grille 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Console: Service and Repair
FLOOR CONSOLE
Removal and Installation
All Vehicles 1. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 rear bolts. 2. Position the seats
rearward and disconnect the battery. 3. Position the parking brake handle to the full-up position. 4.
Remove the transmission selector lever bezel. 5. Release the parking brake handle boot from the
floor console finish panel.
Mariner 6. Remove the floor console top panel.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6657
All Vehicles
7. NOTE: On Escape, if removing the floor console storage bin, squeeze the front and rear of the
storage bin to release the retaining tabs from the
floor console finish panel.
Remove the floor console finish panel. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. Remove the 6 bolts and remove the floor console. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6663
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6664
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6665
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6666
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6667
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6668
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6669
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6670
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6671
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6672
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6673
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 06C12 Date: 060512
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance > Page 6682
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 5, 2006.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. FSA VIN lists will be available through the website by May 15, 2006. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 26, 2006.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related
damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
Refunds are not authorized for this program.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ "MT" labor must be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance > Page 6683
ONE TIME CLAIM REIMBURSEMENT FOR LOCALLY OBTAINED 5/8 INCH AUGER BIT
Dealers will be reimbursed for the cost of one auger bit. For this reimbursement, the actual cost of
the auger bit must be submitted on one of the initial claims for this recall using the miscellaneous
expense code "OTHER".
NOTE:
Any additional reimbursement claims for an auger bit will result in a charge-back.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
To perform this recall, the technician will require a special drill guide and a 5/8 inch auger bit.
^ Drill Guide: On or about May 12, 2006, one drill guide tool was sent to each dealer at no cost.
The tool was shipped by DHL Express Ground Transportation and addressed, "ATTN: Service
Manager". Questions regarding the drill guide should be directed to the Special Service Support
Center.
^ 5/8 Inch Auger Bit: This tool must be obtained locally. For tool cost reimbursement, refer to
Attachment I of this document.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
No parts are required for this recall.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance > Page 6684
This program involves lowering the headliner enough to inspect the structural foam blocks which
are mounted above the front corners of the headliner. Depending on the results of the inspection,
dealers will either release the vehicle, or modify the structural foam blocks using a special tool and
a 5/8 inch auger bit. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all disassembly steps as outlined increases the possibility of damaging the
headliner.
CAUTION:
Make sure your hands are clean before performing this repair.
NOTE:
Although the headliner does not have to be removed to carry out the inspection or modification, a
number of trim panels and components must be removed or repositioned in order to lower the front
of the headliner for access.
Performing all steps as outlined will position the headliner adequately for access to the repair area.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with any aftermarket or dealer-installed options, such as a DVD player
that interferes with adequately lowering the headliner, they must be removed.
DISASSEMBLY FOR INSPECTION
NOTE:
Perform the following steps on both sides of the vehicle.
1. Open the A-pillar assist handle bolt covers, then remove the bolts and the assist handles.
2. Remove the A-pillar trim panels.
3. At the B-pillars, remove the D-ring covers and the safety belt bolts.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar bolt covers and the bolts, then remove the B-pillar trim panels.
5. If equipped, remove the overhead console retaining screws and disconnect the electrical
connector, then remove the console from the vehicle.
6. Remove the sunvisors and sunvisor clips. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Open the rear seat overhead assist handle bolt covers, then remove the bolts and the assist
handles.
8. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips down away from the headliner.
9. Allow the headliner to hang down loosely at the front corners. Do not pull down on the headliner
or otherwise stress it, or damage may result.
INSPECTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance > Page 6685
1. Without pulling the headliner down beyond its natural hanging rest position, carefully inspect the
structural foam blocks mounted at the passenger and drivers side front corners on the top of the
headliner to see if they have one (1) or two (2) indentations. See Figure 2.
^ If the blocks have only one (1) indentation, proceed to DISASSEMBLY FOR MODIFICATION.
^ If the blocks have two (2) indentations, no modification is required. Proceed to ASSEMBLY.
DISASSEMBLY FOR MODIFICATION
1. Remove the interior lamp lens.
2. Remove the two (2) screws and the interior lamp, then disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Proceed to STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK MODIFICATION.
STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK MODIFICATION
1. Using fender covers, seat covers or suitable rags, cover the defroster and instrument panel
ducts so chips cannot fall into the heater plenum while drilling.
2. Install a drill stop or apply suitable tape onto the drill bit 140 mm (5-1/2 in) from the end of the
cutting portion of the bit (not from the threaded tip). See Figure 3.
3. CAUTION: The weight of the tool when positioned on the foam block increases the risk of
headliner damage. Hold the headliner up when the tool is positioned on the foam block.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance > Page 6686
Starting on either side of the vehicle, position the supplied drill guide onto the foam block so that
the locating pin is set into the indentation on top of the block and the "wings" are resting on either
side of the block, preventing the guide from moving side-to-side. See Figure 4.
4. WARNING: WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE an air-powered drill for this operation. Oil spray from the tool may damage the foam
block or other interior trim.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep the drill motor at full speed and frequently clear the chips from the bit while drilling
each hole. Bore the holes at a slow to moderate pace using light to moderate pressure on the drill.
Attempting to bore the holes at a fast pace using excessive pressure on the drill, or failing to clear
the chips from the bit, may cause the foam blocks to crack.
NOTE:
Be sure to allow the drill motor to achieve full speed before attempting to bore the hole.
Drill the holes as follows:
A. Holding the drilling guide securely in place, position the drill bit in either of the two (2) guide
holes. See Figure 5.
B. Start the drill motor and allow it to achieve full speed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance > Page 6687
C. Drill the hole at a slow to moderate pace, occasionally pulling the bit out to clear the chips.
D. Drill the hole to the proper depth using the stop on the bit as your depth gauge. See Figure 6.
E. Drill the second hole in the same foam block in the same manner.
F. Repeat steps A - E on the foam block on the other side of the headliner.
5. Remove the covers from the instrument panel and clean all foam chips from the vehicle.
Proceed to ASSEMBLY.
ASSEMBLY
1. Position the B-pillar trim panels and install the bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in), then install the
bolt covers.
2. Position the safety belt and install the safety belt bolts at the B-pillar. Tighten to 53 Nm (39 lb-ft),
then install the D-ring covers.
3. Install the A-pillar trim panels.
4. Install the passenger A-pillar assist handles and bolts. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in), then install the
bolt covers.
5. Install the front and rear door weatherstrips.
6. Connect and install the overhead console, if equipped.
7. Install and connect the interior lamp and screws.
8. Install the interior lamp lens.
9. Install the sunvisors, connecting the electrical connectors if equipped, and the sunvisor clips.
10. Install the rear seat overhead assist handles and bolts. Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in), then install
the bolt covers.
Owner Letter
Owner Notification Letter will be mailed on May 19, 2006.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
TSB 05-8-3
05/02/05
HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH
FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch
perimeter edge.
ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1).
2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the
back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel.
3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to
the back side of the headliner (Figure 2).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch > Page 6693
4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or
wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the
adhesive to cure for 45 minutes.
5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With
51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 06C12 Date: 060512
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance > Page 6699
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 5, 2006.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. FSA VIN lists will be available through the website by May 15, 2006. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 26, 2006.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related
damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
Refunds are not authorized for this program.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ "MT" labor must be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance > Page 6700
ONE TIME CLAIM REIMBURSEMENT FOR LOCALLY OBTAINED 5/8 INCH AUGER BIT
Dealers will be reimbursed for the cost of one auger bit. For this reimbursement, the actual cost of
the auger bit must be submitted on one of the initial claims for this recall using the miscellaneous
expense code "OTHER".
NOTE:
Any additional reimbursement claims for an auger bit will result in a charge-back.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
To perform this recall, the technician will require a special drill guide and a 5/8 inch auger bit.
^ Drill Guide: On or about May 12, 2006, one drill guide tool was sent to each dealer at no cost.
The tool was shipped by DHL Express Ground Transportation and addressed, "ATTN: Service
Manager". Questions regarding the drill guide should be directed to the Special Service Support
Center.
^ 5/8 Inch Auger Bit: This tool must be obtained locally. For tool cost reimbursement, refer to
Attachment I of this document.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
No parts are required for this recall.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance > Page 6701
This program involves lowering the headliner enough to inspect the structural foam blocks which
are mounted above the front corners of the headliner. Depending on the results of the inspection,
dealers will either release the vehicle, or modify the structural foam blocks using a special tool and
a 5/8 inch auger bit. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all disassembly steps as outlined increases the possibility of damaging the
headliner.
CAUTION:
Make sure your hands are clean before performing this repair.
NOTE:
Although the headliner does not have to be removed to carry out the inspection or modification, a
number of trim panels and components must be removed or repositioned in order to lower the front
of the headliner for access.
Performing all steps as outlined will position the headliner adequately for access to the repair area.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with any aftermarket or dealer-installed options, such as a DVD player
that interferes with adequately lowering the headliner, they must be removed.
DISASSEMBLY FOR INSPECTION
NOTE:
Perform the following steps on both sides of the vehicle.
1. Open the A-pillar assist handle bolt covers, then remove the bolts and the assist handles.
2. Remove the A-pillar trim panels.
3. At the B-pillars, remove the D-ring covers and the safety belt bolts.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar bolt covers and the bolts, then remove the B-pillar trim panels.
5. If equipped, remove the overhead console retaining screws and disconnect the electrical
connector, then remove the console from the vehicle.
6. Remove the sunvisors and sunvisor clips. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Open the rear seat overhead assist handle bolt covers, then remove the bolts and the assist
handles.
8. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips down away from the headliner.
9. Allow the headliner to hang down loosely at the front corners. Do not pull down on the headliner
or otherwise stress it, or damage may result.
INSPECTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance > Page 6702
1. Without pulling the headliner down beyond its natural hanging rest position, carefully inspect the
structural foam blocks mounted at the passenger and drivers side front corners on the top of the
headliner to see if they have one (1) or two (2) indentations. See Figure 2.
^ If the blocks have only one (1) indentation, proceed to DISASSEMBLY FOR MODIFICATION.
^ If the blocks have two (2) indentations, no modification is required. Proceed to ASSEMBLY.
DISASSEMBLY FOR MODIFICATION
1. Remove the interior lamp lens.
2. Remove the two (2) screws and the interior lamp, then disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Proceed to STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK MODIFICATION.
STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK MODIFICATION
1. Using fender covers, seat covers or suitable rags, cover the defroster and instrument panel
ducts so chips cannot fall into the heater plenum while drilling.
2. Install a drill stop or apply suitable tape onto the drill bit 140 mm (5-1/2 in) from the end of the
cutting portion of the bit (not from the threaded tip). See Figure 3.
3. CAUTION: The weight of the tool when positioned on the foam block increases the risk of
headliner damage. Hold the headliner up when the tool is positioned on the foam block.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance > Page 6703
Starting on either side of the vehicle, position the supplied drill guide onto the foam block so that
the locating pin is set into the indentation on top of the block and the "wings" are resting on either
side of the block, preventing the guide from moving side-to-side. See Figure 4.
4. WARNING: WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE an air-powered drill for this operation. Oil spray from the tool may damage the foam
block or other interior trim.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep the drill motor at full speed and frequently clear the chips from the bit while drilling
each hole. Bore the holes at a slow to moderate pace using light to moderate pressure on the drill.
Attempting to bore the holes at a fast pace using excessive pressure on the drill, or failing to clear
the chips from the bit, may cause the foam blocks to crack.
NOTE:
Be sure to allow the drill motor to achieve full speed before attempting to bore the hole.
Drill the holes as follows:
A. Holding the drilling guide securely in place, position the drill bit in either of the two (2) guide
holes. See Figure 5.
B. Start the drill motor and allow it to achieve full speed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact
Non-Compliance > Page 6704
C. Drill the hole at a slow to moderate pace, occasionally pulling the bit out to clear the chips.
D. Drill the hole to the proper depth using the stop on the bit as your depth gauge. See Figure 6.
E. Drill the second hole in the same foam block in the same manner.
F. Repeat steps A - E on the foam block on the other side of the headliner.
5. Remove the covers from the instrument panel and clean all foam chips from the vehicle.
Proceed to ASSEMBLY.
ASSEMBLY
1. Position the B-pillar trim panels and install the bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in), then install the
bolt covers.
2. Position the safety belt and install the safety belt bolts at the B-pillar. Tighten to 53 Nm (39 lb-ft),
then install the D-ring covers.
3. Install the A-pillar trim panels.
4. Install the passenger A-pillar assist handles and bolts. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in), then install the
bolt covers.
5. Install the front and rear door weatherstrips.
6. Connect and install the overhead console, if equipped.
7. Install and connect the interior lamp and screws.
8. Install the interior lamp lens.
9. Install the sunvisors, connecting the electrical connectors if equipped, and the sunvisor clips.
10. Install the rear seat overhead assist handles and bolts. Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in), then install
the bolt covers.
Owner Letter
Owner Notification Letter will be mailed on May 19, 2006.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near
Rear Hatch
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
TSB 05-8-3
05/02/05
HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH
FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch
perimeter edge.
ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1).
2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the
back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel.
3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to
the back side of the headliner (Figure 2).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near
Rear Hatch > Page 6709
4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or
wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the
adhesive to cure for 45 minutes.
5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With
51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear
Hatch
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
TSB 05-8-3
05/02/05
HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH
FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch
perimeter edge.
ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1).
2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the
back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel.
3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to
the back side of the headliner (Figure 2).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear
Hatch > Page 6715
4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or
wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the
adhesive to cure for 45 minutes.
5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With
51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 06C12 Date: 060512
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
> Page 6721
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 5, 2006.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. FSA VIN lists will be available through the website by May 15, 2006. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 26, 2006.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related
damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
Refunds are not authorized for this program.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ "MT" labor must be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
> Page 6722
ONE TIME CLAIM REIMBURSEMENT FOR LOCALLY OBTAINED 5/8 INCH AUGER BIT
Dealers will be reimbursed for the cost of one auger bit. For this reimbursement, the actual cost of
the auger bit must be submitted on one of the initial claims for this recall using the miscellaneous
expense code "OTHER".
NOTE:
Any additional reimbursement claims for an auger bit will result in a charge-back.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
To perform this recall, the technician will require a special drill guide and a 5/8 inch auger bit.
^ Drill Guide: On or about May 12, 2006, one drill guide tool was sent to each dealer at no cost.
The tool was shipped by DHL Express Ground Transportation and addressed, "ATTN: Service
Manager". Questions regarding the drill guide should be directed to the Special Service Support
Center.
^ 5/8 Inch Auger Bit: This tool must be obtained locally. For tool cost reimbursement, refer to
Attachment I of this document.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
No parts are required for this recall.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
> Page 6723
This program involves lowering the headliner enough to inspect the structural foam blocks which
are mounted above the front corners of the headliner. Depending on the results of the inspection,
dealers will either release the vehicle, or modify the structural foam blocks using a special tool and
a 5/8 inch auger bit. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all disassembly steps as outlined increases the possibility of damaging the
headliner.
CAUTION:
Make sure your hands are clean before performing this repair.
NOTE:
Although the headliner does not have to be removed to carry out the inspection or modification, a
number of trim panels and components must be removed or repositioned in order to lower the front
of the headliner for access.
Performing all steps as outlined will position the headliner adequately for access to the repair area.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with any aftermarket or dealer-installed options, such as a DVD player
that interferes with adequately lowering the headliner, they must be removed.
DISASSEMBLY FOR INSPECTION
NOTE:
Perform the following steps on both sides of the vehicle.
1. Open the A-pillar assist handle bolt covers, then remove the bolts and the assist handles.
2. Remove the A-pillar trim panels.
3. At the B-pillars, remove the D-ring covers and the safety belt bolts.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar bolt covers and the bolts, then remove the B-pillar trim panels.
5. If equipped, remove the overhead console retaining screws and disconnect the electrical
connector, then remove the console from the vehicle.
6. Remove the sunvisors and sunvisor clips. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Open the rear seat overhead assist handle bolt covers, then remove the bolts and the assist
handles.
8. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips down away from the headliner.
9. Allow the headliner to hang down loosely at the front corners. Do not pull down on the headliner
or otherwise stress it, or damage may result.
INSPECTION
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
> Page 6724
1. Without pulling the headliner down beyond its natural hanging rest position, carefully inspect the
structural foam blocks mounted at the passenger and drivers side front corners on the top of the
headliner to see if they have one (1) or two (2) indentations. See Figure 2.
^ If the blocks have only one (1) indentation, proceed to DISASSEMBLY FOR MODIFICATION.
^ If the blocks have two (2) indentations, no modification is required. Proceed to ASSEMBLY.
DISASSEMBLY FOR MODIFICATION
1. Remove the interior lamp lens.
2. Remove the two (2) screws and the interior lamp, then disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Proceed to STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK MODIFICATION.
STRUCTURAL FOAM BLOCK MODIFICATION
1. Using fender covers, seat covers or suitable rags, cover the defroster and instrument panel
ducts so chips cannot fall into the heater plenum while drilling.
2. Install a drill stop or apply suitable tape onto the drill bit 140 mm (5-1/2 in) from the end of the
cutting portion of the bit (not from the threaded tip). See Figure 3.
3. CAUTION: The weight of the tool when positioned on the foam block increases the risk of
headliner damage. Hold the headliner up when the tool is positioned on the foam block.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
> Page 6725
Starting on either side of the vehicle, position the supplied drill guide onto the foam block so that
the locating pin is set into the indentation on top of the block and the "wings" are resting on either
side of the block, preventing the guide from moving side-to-side. See Figure 4.
4. WARNING: WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE an air-powered drill for this operation. Oil spray from the tool may damage the foam
block or other interior trim.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep the drill motor at full speed and frequently clear the chips from the bit while drilling
each hole. Bore the holes at a slow to moderate pace using light to moderate pressure on the drill.
Attempting to bore the holes at a fast pace using excessive pressure on the drill, or failing to clear
the chips from the bit, may cause the foam blocks to crack.
NOTE:
Be sure to allow the drill motor to achieve full speed before attempting to bore the hole.
Drill the holes as follows:
A. Holding the drilling guide securely in place, position the drill bit in either of the two (2) guide
holes. See Figure 5.
B. Start the drill motor and allow it to achieve full speed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 06C12 > May > 06 > Recall - Interior Impact Non-Compliance
> Page 6726
C. Drill the hole at a slow to moderate pace, occasionally pulling the bit out to clear the chips.
D. Drill the hole to the proper depth using the stop on the bit as your depth gauge. See Figure 6.
E. Drill the second hole in the same foam block in the same manner.
F. Repeat steps A - E on the foam block on the other side of the headliner.
5. Remove the covers from the instrument panel and clean all foam chips from the vehicle.
Proceed to ASSEMBLY.
ASSEMBLY
1. Position the B-pillar trim panels and install the bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in), then install the
bolt covers.
2. Position the safety belt and install the safety belt bolts at the B-pillar. Tighten to 53 Nm (39 lb-ft),
then install the D-ring covers.
3. Install the A-pillar trim panels.
4. Install the passenger A-pillar assist handles and bolts. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in), then install the
bolt covers.
5. Install the front and rear door weatherstrips.
6. Connect and install the overhead console, if equipped.
7. Install and connect the interior lamp and screws.
8. Install the interior lamp lens.
9. Install the sunvisors, connecting the electrical connectors if equipped, and the sunvisor clips.
10. Install the rear seat overhead assist handles and bolts. Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in), then install
the bolt covers.
Owner Letter
Owner Notification Letter will be mailed on May 19, 2006.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6727
Headliner: Service and Repair
HEADLINER
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6728
Part 2
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Open the 4 A-pillar passenger assist handle covers. 3. Remove the 4
bolts and the 2 A-pillar passenger assist handles.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 2 A-pillar trim panels. 5. Remove the 2 B-pillar trim panels. 6. Remove the 2 C-pillar
trim panels. 7. Remove the 2 D-pillar trim panels. 8. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead
console.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Remove the 4 screws, the 2 sun visors and the 2 clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
10. Remove the interior lamp lens. 11. Remove the 2 interior lamp screws and the front interior
lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
12. Remove the cargo lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
13. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers. 14. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether
anchors.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
15. If equipped, remove the 2 screws and the coat hooks.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
16. Remove the 4 passenger assist handle bolts and the 2 passenger assist handles.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
17. NOTE: When installing the retainer it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and have no
gaps or overlaps.
If equipped, remove the headliner retainer.
18. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6729
19. CAUTION: Do not disconnect the delete resistor during headliner removal.
If equipped, cut and remove the lanyard between the delete resistor and the headliner.
20. Remove the headliner. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel
Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring cover and remove the safety belt bolt. To install, tighten to 53 Nm (39 lb-ft).
2. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 3. Remove the cover, bolt and the upper
B-pillar trim panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel. 5. Remove the pin-type
retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 7. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 6734
Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring cover and remove the safety belt bolt. To install, tighten to 53 Nm (39 lb-ft).
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 3. Position the liftgate
weatherstrip aside. 4. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down.
5. NOTE: Insert a tape-wrapped screwdriver between the D-pillar trim panel and rear quarter trim
panel to release the trim panel.
Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
6. Position the rear door weatherstrip aside. 7. Remove the cover, the bolt, and the C-pillar trim
panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 6735
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Liftgate Trim Panel
LIFTGATE TRIM PANEL
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 4 screws and the liftgate trim panel. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a
new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a
detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the front door latch.
2. Remove the 3 screws and position the anti-theft guard aside.
3. Open the clip and disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6741
4. Disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod and separate the front door latch from the exterior
door handle reinforcement.
5. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1 Release the clips.
2 Remove the lock cylinder.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 6747
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 6748
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6749
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6750
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6751
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the RKE
keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the RKE keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
CAUTION: All remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
1. The vehicle must be electronically unlocked before entering program mode (via the RKE
transmitter or the door lock control switch while the
driver door is open).
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to RUN 8 times within 10 seconds, with the eighth turn ending
in RUN. If the module has successfully entered
program mode, it locks and then unlocks all doors.
3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on a RKE transmitter; and the doors lock and then unlock
to confirm that each remote transmitter has been
programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter.
4. If the door locks do not respond for any RKE transmitter, wait several seconds and press the
button again. If the door locks still fail to respond,
refer to Inspection and Verification. Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE
transmitters are attempted to be programmed. See: Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification
5. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if 1 of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position.
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed.
- The maximum number of RKE transmitters have been programmed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
View 151-24 (Rear Door (RH Side Shown, LH Side Similar))
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 6761
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Power Door Lock Switch, Passenger
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Power Door Lock Switch, Passenger > Page 6766
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 6769
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6772
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6773
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6774
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6775
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 6776
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. On Mariner vehicles, remove the 3 screws and the front
door trim panel arm rest. 3. Release the bezel retaining clip from the door trim panel. 4. Release
the locking clips and remove the window control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE HANDLE, LOCK AND LATCH - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR MIRROR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. 2. Remove the 3 exterior mirror motor screws. 3. Disconnect
the electrical connector and remove the exterior mirror motor. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6787
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6788
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6789
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6790
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6791
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain
Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain
Article No. 04-9-6
BODY - PAINT - IRON PARTICLE REMOVAL - INDUSTRIAL FALLOUT - ACID RAIN
NEUTRALIZATION
FORD: 2004-2005 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT ZX2, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS,
THUNDERBIRD
2005 FIVE HUNDRED, FORD GT 2005 FIVE HUNDRED, FORD GT 2004-2005 ECONOLINE,
ESCAPE, EXCURSION, EXPEDITION,EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER, F SUPER DUTY,
FREESTAR, RANGER, F SERIES, F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2004-2005 LS, TOWN CAR, AVIATOR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2004-2005 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
2005 MONTEGO 2004-2005 MONTEREY, MOUNTAINEER 2005 MARINER
This article supersedes TSB 99-12-10 to update the vehicle lines, model years and service
procedure.
ISSUE
Ford Motor Company has released a private labeled material to be used for iron particle/acid rain
service repairs.
ACTION
To remove these particles/contaminates, use ONLY the following Motorcraft products and
procedure. No polishing, compounding, color sanding, or repainting should be done before this
procedure is performed. This procedure uses products that are acidic, alkaline, and neutral and
must be properly mixed and used in their specific order. Refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE ANY CHANGES TO THIS PROCEDURE WILL CAUSE AN INCOMPLETE OR
UNSATISFACTORY REPAIR. THE USE OF ANY OTHER PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE MAY
CAUSE DAMAGE TO ALUMINUM OR PAINTED SURFACES.
NOTE THE PRODUCTS USED TO REMOVE SURFACE CONTAMINATION FROM PAINT ARE
DESIGNED FOR VEHICLES, WHICH HAVE EXPERIENCED EXPOSURE FOR LESS THAN 120
DAYS. VEHICLES THAT EXCEED 120 DAYS OF EXPOSURE MAY REQUIRE THE
PROCEDURE BE REPEATED TO RESOLVE THE CONCERN. ONCE THIS PROCEDURE IS
COMPLETED, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO PERFORM POLISHING OR REFINISHING
PROCEDURES AFTER VEHICLE INSPECTION.
IDENTIFICATION
Ferrous metal particles (hot iron dust) are generated by manufacturing facilities, rail shipments, etc.
Moisture and heat combine with particles to create a chemical reaction. This reaction creates an
acid, causing the iron to corrode and etch into the paint surface. Additionally, industrial fallout and
acid rain generate corrosive compounds that fall on the vehicle's painted surfaces. When subjected
to moisture and temperature, chemical compounds are created that etch the paint surface. To
assist in identifying surface contamination, use a (Tandy-Radio Shack #63-851) 30x lighted
magnifier.
CONCERN DESCRIPTION
Ferrous Metal
- Light Colored Vehicles: Small orange stains the size of "mechanical pencil lead." The surface is
rough to the touch.
- Dark Colored Vehicles: Small white or silver appearing dots with a rainbow ring around the dot.
The surface is rough to the touch.
Industrial Fallout
- Water spots containing ferrous metal are present and the surface is rough to the touch.
Acid Rain/Etching
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain > Page 6797
- Surface will exhibit irregular discolored spotting.
- Dark colored vehicles may exhibit cloudy or graying spots where the acid has begun to etch the
paint.
- Extreme cases of etching may be felt.
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE
Use Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer, Alkaline Neutralizer, and Detail Wash to decontaminate and
neutralize the paint surface. Perform the procedure only on vehicle when the paint surface
temperature is cool. Follow the step-by-step procedure listed below to perform this service
operation.
1. Rinse off dust, dirt, and debris with cold water. Flush liberally. 2. Prepare Motorcraft Acid
Neutralizer by mixing eight (8) parts of water to one (1) part Acid Neutralizer in a bucket. 3. Wear
gloves and use a clean wash mitt to apply mixture of Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer to the entire
vehicle starting at the top of the vehicle
working toward the side. Work fast and keep the vehicle wet with solution, lightly agitating and
moving quickly around the vehicle repeatedly for five to seven (5-7) minutes. For vehicles with
severe conditions, work the product for up to eight (8) minutes.
NOTE USE A SEPARATE MITT FOR EACH PRODUCT. DO NOT INTERMIX MITTS.
4. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cold water to remove Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer. 5. Dry only
the horizontal surfaces of the vehicle at this time. Do not dry glass.
NOTE MOTORCRAFT ALKALINE NEUTRALIZER IS READY TO USE. DO NOT MIX WITH
WATER. DO NOT SPRAY MOTORCRAFT ALKALINE NEUTRALIZER ON THE PAINTED
SURFACE.
6. Pour the Alkaline Neutralizer into a dispenser (squirt bottle). Squirt the neutralizer directly onto a
clean wash mitt. Apply the product to the
vehicle, keeping the areas wet and lightly agitated for five to seven (5-7) minutes. For vehicles with
severe conditions, work the product for up to eight (8) minutes.
7. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cold water. 8. Prepare Motorcraft Detail Wash by mixing 29.5
mL (1 ounce) of Detail Wash to 3.7 L (1 gallon) of water. 9. Shampoo the vehicle with Motorcraft
Detail Wash using a clean wash mitt. Rinse the vehicle with cold water and dry the vehicle
completely.
SURFACE CORRECTION FOLLOWING DECONTAMINATION/NEUTRALIZATION
1. Visually inspect paint surface for evidence of removal of ferrous metal particles and water spots.
NOTE ACID RAIN DISCOLORING OR ETCHING WILL REQUIRE ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
DEPENDENT ON DEPTH OF DAMAGE; POLISHING, BUFFING, COLOR SANDING, OR IN
EXTREME CASES, REFINISHING.
2. DO NOT intermix buffing products. Use only one manufacturer's products. 3. Always follow the
manufacturer's product usage sequence. Use the appropriate recommended pad at recommended
buffing speeds as specified by
the product manufacturer.
NOTE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO AFFECT A REPAIR BY BUFFING, POLISHING, OR COLOR
SANDING, DO NOT REMOVE AN EXCESS OF 0.3 MIL OF PAINT FILM OR REFINISHING WILL
BE REQUIRED. USE OF AN ELECTRONIC MIL GAUGE (ROTUNDA 164-R4025) IS HIGHLY
RECOMMENDED TO INSURE CONTROL OF PAINT FILM REMOVAL.
4. Use a dual action sander with a Velcro backing plate and foam pad to fine polish and remove
any swirls created by a rotary buffer or pad. 5. Use an alcohol and water mixture (1 to 1 ratio) to
clean the buffed areas and to verify removal of scratches and swirls before application of the
final polish.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes
Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes
PAINT CODES
Vehicle Certification Label
The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb.
Exterior Paint Code
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 6800
Exterior Paint
Exterior paint codes may be listed as a two-part code. The first set of characters identify the
primary body color. The second set of characters (if applicable) identify the vehicle accent or
two-tone body color.
Exterior Color Codes C2 - Gold Ash Metallic
- CX - Dark Shadow Gray (clearcoat)
- DV - Light Tundra
- G2 - Redfire
- GW - Fossil Orange
- KR - Norcea Blue Pearl
- R1 - Dark Teal (clearcoat)
- SN - Sonic Blue (clearcoat)
- T5 - Dark Copper Metallic
- UA - Ebony (clearcoat)
- YN - Silver Metallic (clearcoat)
- YZ - Oxford White (clearcoat)
Interior Trim
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 6801
Interior Trim
Interior trim codes are listed as a two-part code. The first character identifies the interior trim type.
The second character identifies the interior trim color.
Interior Trim Type 5 - Nudo leather seats
- A - Captains cloth seats
- B - No Boundaries cloth seats
- B - Impulse cloth seats
- C - Imola leather seats
- N - Toscana leather seats
- W - XLS cloth seats
Interior Trim Color 2 - Medium Dark Flint
- B - Ebony
- T - Dark Flint
Tape/Paint Stripe
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 6802
Tape/Paint Stripe
Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 6803
Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location
PAINT CODE STICKER LOCATION
Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Locator
The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module, Driver Side Front
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module, Driver Side Front > Page 6809
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module, Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module, Passenger Side Front > Page 6812
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6813
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6814
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the front seat and depower the SRS.
2. Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the heated seat module off
the bracket.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 4. Install the front seat and repower the SRS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Luggage Rack: Service and Repair
ROOF RACK
Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6819
Part 2
NOTE: Individual components can be removed without following the entire sequence shown. LH
and RH stopblocks are not interchangeable. Have an assistant help with sliding the inner roof rack
assembly from the upper slide rails.
1. Remove the 4 screws and the roof rack air deflector.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Remove the 2 screws and the 2 roof rack inner rack stop blocks.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
3. Remove the roof rack inner rack. 4. Remove the 2 screws and the roof rack cross bar.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
5. Remove the 6 screws and the 2 roof rack side bars.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. Remove the 8 screws and the 2 roof rack side bar bases.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Sunroof / Moonroof: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6824
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6825
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6826
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6827
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6828
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6829
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6830
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6831
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6832
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6833
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6834
Sunroof / Moonroof: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6835
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6836
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6837
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6838
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6839
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6840
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6841
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6842
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6843
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6844
Sunroof / Moonroof: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
101-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6849
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6850
Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair
FRONT SEAT TRACK MOTOR
Removal
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and
when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental
deployment.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
- The tightening torque of the seat track fasteners is critical for proper seat track system operation.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the failure of the seat to perform as designed with
resultant risk of personal injury to the vehicle occupant.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Wear protective gloves as needed when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges.
1. Move the seat so the front and rear vertical motors are positioned in the middle of their travel.
2. NOTE: If the seat does not move while activating the seat control switch, push on the seat
cushion in the direction needed while activating the
switch.
If the seat cannot be moved, a new seat track assembly must be installed.
Remove the seat and depower the SRS.
3. Remove the seat track.
4. Disconnect the seat track motor electrical connector. To change the seat track horizontal
position, apply power and ground to the pins shown.
5. Mark the position of the electrical connector bracket, remove the two bolts and then remove the
bracket.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6851
6. Remove the two bolts, then remove the seat position sensor interrupt bracket.
7. Detach the seat motor wiring harness from the seat track.
8. NOTE:
- If not correctly positioned, the seat track motor assembly cannot be removed from the seat track.
- If the seat track does not move, manually turn the drive tube while applying power to the
horizontal motor.
Position the seat track horizontally by applying power and ground to the seat track motor pins.
Position the outboard track most of the way forward so that two teeth are showing next to the
outboard retainer clip and a flat spot on the drive tube is positioned upward.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6852
9. NOTE: This step is critical so that during installation the inboard and outboard tracks can be
checked to make sure they are in alignment with
each other.
Mark the position of the outboard track C-channel to the plastic coated slide as shown.
10. NOTE: This step is critical so that during installation the inboard and outboard tracks can be
checked to make sure they are in alignment with
each other.
Mark the position of the inboard track C-channel to the plastic coated slide as shown.
11. CAUTION:
- The splines on the stud are very shallow. Do not use excessive force while turning the nut.
- If the stud turns free from the seat track while removing the nut, a new seat track must be
installed.
Remove the seat position sensor bracket nut.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6853
12. Remove the two nuts at the lift links, then remove the seat position sensor and bracket.
13. NOTE:
- The drive tube is press-fit to stub shafts on each end. A hammer may be necessary to separate
the drive tube.
- The drive tube must be clamped at the inboard track gear stub shaft to allow the drive tube to
separate at the seat track motor gear stub shaft.
Clamp the locking pliers on the flats of the drive tube where it reaches over the inboard track gear
stub shaft. Tap on the locking pliers, separate the drive tube from the seat track motor assembly
stub shaft and remove the inboard track and drive tube.
14. Remove the two nuts.
15. Remove the outboard retainer clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6854
16. Remove the two bolts holding the seat track motor assembly to the outboard track.
17. NOTE: The pinion cage will be removed with the outboard track.
Carefully pry between the seat track motor assembly and the outboard track and remove the
outboard track.
18. Carefully pry and remove the two support straps.
19. Pry and remove the seat track motor assembly from the upper support assembly.
Installation
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6855
1. NOTE: This step is critical in getting the inboard and outboard tracks in alignment. Otherwise,
when installing the seat in vehicle, the holes in the
track mounting ears will not align to the holes in the floor pan and the seat track may prematurely
fail due to binding.
Position the new and old seat track motor assembly side by side. Position the new seat track motor
assembly stub shaft flat spots (splines) in the same position as the old seat track motor assembly
flat spots. If necessary, apply power and ground to the new seat track motor electrical connector as
shown during removal to obtain the same position.
2. NOTE: The front and rear height adjustment gears do not have to mesh with the seat track motor
assembly gears at the same teeth as when
disassembled.
Install the seat track motor assembly to the upper support assembly.
1 NOTE: Make sure the motor is positioned right side up.
Install the seat track motor assembly pivots through the front and rear height adjustment gear
brackets. Apply multi-purpose grease to the motor pivots.
2 Mesh the seat track motor assembly gears to the front and rear height adjustment gears. There should not be a gap between the upper support assembly gears and the seat track motor
assembly housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6856
3. WARNING: The support straps are load-bearing components during a crash event. The support
straps must be correctly installed
during assembly of the seat track. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the failure of the
seat to perform as designed with resultant risk of personal injury to the vehicle occupant.
Install the support straps. The support straps must fit flush against the front and rear height adjustment gears.
4. Check to make sure the index marks on the outboard track C-channel and plastic coated slide
are still in alignment.
5. WARNING: The pinion cage is a load-bearing component during a crash event. The pinion cage
must be correctly installed during
assembly of the seat track. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the failure of the seat to
perform as designed with resultant risk of personal injury to the vehicle occupant.
Position the pinion cage onto the outboard track.
6. Install the outboard track.
1 Position the track studs through the seat track motor assembly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6857
2 While sliding the track studs through the seat track motor assembly, position the pinion cage
opening around the seat track motor assembly gear.
3 Fit the support straps and seat track motor assembly gear bushing alignment pins into the track
openings.
7. When assembled, make sure the outboard track, support straps, front and rear height
adjustment gears and seat track motor assembly all fit flush
against each other. Make sure the support straps and seat track motor assembly gear bushing alignment pins fit into
the track openings.
8. CAUTION: Do not overtighten or damage will occur.
Install the two bolts holding the seat track motor assembly to the outboard track.
9. Install the two nuts.
10. Install the outboard retainer clip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6858
11. Check to make sure the index marks on the outboard track C-channel and plastic coated slide
are still in alignment.
- The index marks on the outboard track C-channel and plastic coated slide must align at this step.
If the index marks do not match up, repeat Steps 1 through 10.
12. Check to make sure the index marks on the inboard track C-channel and plastic coated slide
are still in alignment.
13. NOTE: When assembled, a small gap between one of the gears and the drive tube may exist.
Assemble the seat track motor assembly, upper support assembly and inboard track together. 1
Align the drive tube to the motor stub shaft. Tap the nose of the inboard track gear toward the seat
track motor stub shaft. Positioning a block of metal or wood behind the motor gear can aid assembly.
2 While tapping the parts together, simultaneously engage the front and rear lift links to the inboard
track. When the lift links are up against the inboard track, with the bushings through the hole and seated,
the drive tube is fully engaged.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6859
14. Position the seat position sensor and bracket onto the inboard track, then install the nuts
holding the inboard track to the upper support assembly
lift links.
15. Check to make sure the index marks on the inboard track C-channel and plastic coated slide
are still in alignment.
- The index marks on the inboard track C-channel and plastic coated slide must align at this step. If
the index marks do not match up, repeat Steps 12 through 14.
16. CAUTION:
- The splines on the stud are very shallow. Do not use excessive force while turning the nut.
- If the stud turns free from the seat track while installing the nut, a new seat track must be
installed.
Install the seat position sensor bracket nut.
17. Attach the seat motor wiring harness to the seat track.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6860
18. Position the seat position sensor interrupt bracket, then install the two bolts.
19. Position the electrical connector bracket and install the two bolts.
20. Position the seat track in the vehicle.
- The left and right front mounting feet holes should align with the floor pan mounting holes, without
pushing or pulling the seat track to force alignment. Check the witness marks (indentations) in the
carpet. The tracks should line up closely with them.
- If the seat track does not align to the vehicle, check to make sure the index marks on the inboard
and outboard track rails and guides are still in alignment. Repeat the necessary steps until the
index marks align.
21. Install the seat track. 22. Install the seat and repower the SRS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6864
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6865
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6866
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6867
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The seat belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an
air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the recliner handle cover. 3. Remove the seat control switch knob. 4. Remove the 3
screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If equipped, disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the 3 seat control switch screws.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 05-20-12 > Oct > 05 > Interior - Cloth Seat Cover Threads Fraying/Shredding
Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - Cloth Seat Cover Threads Fraying/Shredding
TSB 05-20-12
10/17/05
SEAT MATERIAL - BLACK THREADS FRAYING
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape XLT and XLT Sport vehicles built prior to July 19, 2004, may exhibit
premature wear of the cloth seat covers under normal vehicle usage. This wear appears as
fraying/shredding of the black threads within the patterned center insert portion of the seat cover.
ACTION Inspect for obvious signs of abuse that are not warrantable repairs such as burns, soil
marks, cuts, scuffs, tears or punctures, etc. If the seat cover is not damaged due to abuse and the
material shows evidence of the black threads fraying/shredding, replace the affected seat cover as
described in section 501-10 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862900 30
OASIS CODES: 101000, 107000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 05-20-12 > Oct > 05 > Interior - Cloth Seat Cover Threads
Fraying/Shredding
Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cloth Seat Cover Threads Fraying/Shredding
TSB 05-20-12
10/17/05
SEAT MATERIAL - BLACK THREADS FRAYING
FORD: 2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2005 Escape XLT and XLT Sport vehicles built prior to July 19, 2004, may exhibit
premature wear of the cloth seat covers under normal vehicle usage. This wear appears as
fraying/shredding of the black threads within the patterned center insert portion of the seat cover.
ACTION Inspect for obvious signs of abuse that are not warrantable repairs such as burns, soil
marks, cuts, scuffs, tears or punctures, etc. If the seat cover is not damaged due to abuse and the
material shows evidence of the black threads fraying/shredding, replace the affected seat cover as
described in section 501-10 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862900 30
OASIS CODES: 101000, 107000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal And Installation
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
Front Seat Cushion
FRONT SEAT CUSHION
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and is
replaced as an assembly.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the front seat cushion cover and depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the front seat cushion. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 4. Install the front
seat cushion cover and repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Rear Seat Cushion
REAR SEAT CUSHION
Removal and Installation
1. Release the latch and tilt the rear seat cushion to the forward position. 2. Release the locking tab
and slide the rear seat cushion outward to remove. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Seat Cushion Cover
FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal And Installation > Page 6885
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Make sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and is
replaced as an assembly.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the front seat and depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the 4 front seat track bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. If equipped, disconnect the front seat cushion heated seat grid electrical connector. 4. Remove
the front seat cushion cover from the front seat cushion pan. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure. 6. Install the front seat and repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal And Installation > Page 6886
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
REAR SEAT CUSHION
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Separate the J-strip and unzip the 2 zippers on each side of
the cover and remove the rear seat cushion cover. 3. Remove the rear seat base cushion. 4.
Remove the rear seat base. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the rear seat base bracket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6891
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6892
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6893
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6894
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6895
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6896
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6897
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6898
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6899
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6900
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6901
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6902
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6903
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6904
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6905
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6906
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6907
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6908
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6909
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6910
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6911
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
119-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6912
119-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations >
Heated Seat Module, Driver Side Front
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations >
Heated Seat Module, Driver Side Front > Page 6917
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Heated Seat Module, Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Heated Seat Module, Passenger Side Front > Page 6920
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 6921
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 6922
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the front seat and depower the SRS.
2. Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the heated seat module off
the bracket.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 4. Install the front seat and repower the SRS.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Side
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Side > Page 6927
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Side > Page 6930
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
6931
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the recliner handle cover. 3. Remove the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If removing the outboard passenger seat side cushion shield, remove the 2 screws and slide the
shield forward. Disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- If removing the driver seat side cushion shield, remove the 3 screws. Disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the heated seat switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions,
notes and instructions in the
supplemental restraint system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Track: Service and Repair
SEAT TRACK
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
6935
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the front seat and depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the 4 front seat track bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the front seat track and remove the front seat track. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
5. Install the front seat and repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Vacuum/Pressure Pump, Seats > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Vacuum/Pressure Pump: Service and Repair
LUMBAR ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the SRS depower/repower
procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the front seat backrest cover and depower the SRS.
2. Remove the front seat backrest cushion. 3. Remove the 2 manual lumbar control screws and the
manual lumbar assembly.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6944
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Power Door Lock Switch, Passenger
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Power Door Lock Switch, Passenger > Page 6949
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 6952
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6955
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6956
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6957
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 6958
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6959
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. On Mariner vehicles, remove the 3 screws and the front
door trim panel arm rest. 3. Release the bezel retaining clip from the door trim panel. 4. Release
the locking clips and remove the window control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6963
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6964
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6965
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6966
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6967
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6971
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6972
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6973
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6974
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The seat belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an
air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the recliner handle cover. 3. Remove the seat control switch knob. 4. Remove the 3
screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If equipped, disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
5. Remove the 3 seat control switch screws.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
7. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Driver Side
View 151-20 (Driver Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 6979
View 151-21 (Passenger Seat)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 6982
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6983
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module or pretensioner. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and may result in personal injury. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so may result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front air bag or side air curtain supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before repairing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front air bag or side air curtain sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches,
strikers, seats and hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate Component or System to determine the location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the negative battery cable and wait at
least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- The driver seat and passenger seat are similar.
- The power seat and manual seat are similar.
1. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions
and notes in the supplemental restraint
system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
2. Remove the recliner handle cover. 3. Remove the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If removing the outboard passenger seat side cushion shield, remove the 2 screws and slide the
shield forward. Disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- If removing the driver seat side cushion shield, remove the 3 screws. Disconnect the heated seat switch electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the heated seat switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious personal injury, read and follow all warnings, cautions,
notes and instructions in the
supplemental restraint system (SRS) depower/repower procedure. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation
INSULATION
Insulation is made of urethane, PVC, and recycled felt. The insulation is installed:
- under the roof.
- above and below the instrument panel.
- at the cowl side panels.
- over the front and rear floor pans.
- inside the A, B, D pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
It has heat-bondable mastic deadeners for improved NVH characteristics.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the 8 cowl panel grille pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the 8 cowl panel grille caps and screws. 5. Remove the LH cowl panel grille. 6. Remove
the RH cowl panel grille. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking
Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Door Seal Squeaking
TSB 05-22-11
11/14/05
DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the
shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of
the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body
is put into a twist.
ACTION Replace the seals.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851222 41
OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking
Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Seal Squeaking
TSB 05-22-11
11/14/05
DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the
shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of
the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body
is put into a twist.
ACTION Replace the seals.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851222 41
OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch > Page 7010
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch > Page 7013
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 7016
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake
Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS)/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The BPS, also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control
deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the
brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens
and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open brake pedal position
(BPP) switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to
the PCM did not change states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can
be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 7017
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees
counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket.
Installation
CAUTION: The initial installation of a speed control deactivator switch allows for adjustment. If
additional adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
- Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the speed control deactivator switch.
1 Position the speed control deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 7018
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page
7022
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page
7023
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7027
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7028
Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR
Removal
1. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7029
2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley.
1 Gently push the retaining spring.
2 Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed control actuator pulley.
3. Remove the 3 speed control actuator screws and the speed control actuator.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
CAUTION: A new speed control cable must be installed.
1. Install the speed control actuator and the 3 speed control actuator screws.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot.
1 Gently push the retaining spring.
2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot.
3. CAUTION:
- It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control
actuator pulley.
- Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result
in high idle conditions.
NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap.
Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7030
4. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL CABLE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 7034
Removal
NOTE: 2.3L is shown, 3.0L is similar.
1. Remove the accelerator cable snow shield. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the
throttle lever and accelerator cable bracket.
3. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 7035
4. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley.
1. Gently push the retaining spring. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed
control actuator pulley.
Installation
1. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot.
1 Gently push the retaining spring.
2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot.
2. CAUTION:
- It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control
actuator pulley.
- Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result
in high idle conditions.
NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap.
Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 7036
3. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages. 4. Connect the speed control
cable to the throttle lever and accelerator cable bracket. 5. Install the accelerator cable snow
shield.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 steering wheel cover screws and the
steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the 4 steering wheel brace nuts and the steering wheel brace.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in)
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Remove the 4 speed control switch screws and the
speed control switches.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 7045
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 7048
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 7051
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake
Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS)/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The BPS, also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control
deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the
brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens
and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open brake pedal position
(BPP) switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to
the PCM did not change states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can
be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7052
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees
counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket.
Installation
CAUTION: The initial installation of a speed control deactivator switch allows for adjustment. If
additional adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
- Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the speed control deactivator switch.
1 Position the speed control deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7053
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7057
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7058
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 steering wheel cover screws and the
steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the 4 steering wheel brace nuts and the steering wheel brace.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in)
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Remove the 4 speed control switch screws and the
speed control switches.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7066
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Description and Operation
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
The passenger air bag deactivation (PAD) indicator is a visual indicator used to inform the front
seat occupants of the passenger air bag deactivation state. The PAD indicator is a stand-alone
lamp installed into the vehicle instrument panel in a position visible to each front seat occupant.
The restraints control module (RCM) controls the state of the PAD indicator through a direct
hardwire connection, based on information provided by the occupant classification sensor (OCS)
system. The PAD indicator is lit to indicate the passenger air bag module is disabled. An exemption
to this is when the front passenger seat is determined to be empty, and therefore indication of a
deactivated passenger air bag module is not necessary. In all other cases, the PAD indicator is
unlit when the passenger air bag module is enabled.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the PAD indicator prove-out period is initiated by the
RCM. The RCM briefly activates the PAD indicator to prove-out the indicator function and verify to
the front occupants correct functional operation of the PAD indicator.
The PAD indicator will lit/unlit within 1.0 to 1.5 seconds of a change of state from the OCS system.
When an OCS system fault is present the SRS defaults the passenger air bag module to enabled
regardless of the size of the occupant in the front outboard passenger seat. The PAD indicator will
be unlit.
Passenger Air Bag PAD Indicator Status
The table indicates the passenger air bag status and the PAD indicator status based the size of the
front outboard passenger occupant.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7067
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the system. 2. Detach the retaining clips and partially remove the instrument panel
center trim panel.
3. Remove the passenger air bag deactivation indicator.
1 Release the red disconnect deterrent tab.
2 Disconnect the connector.
3 Release the 2 tabs (one shown).
4 Remove the passenger air bag deactivation indicator.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7068
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the system.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7074
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7075
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7076
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7077
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7078
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7079
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7080
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7081
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7082
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7083
Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7084
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7085
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7086
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7087
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7088
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7089
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7090
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7091
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7092
Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
66-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7093
66-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7098
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7099
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7100
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7101
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7102
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7103
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7104
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7105
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7106
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7107
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7108
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7109
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7110
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7111
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7112
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7113
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7114
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7115
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7116
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7117
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7118
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7119
44-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment
COMPASS ZONE ADJUSTMENT
1. NOTE: The compass zone setting is preset from the factory to Zone 8.
Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Press the message center switch INFO button until
the compass information is displayed in the message center. 4. Press the RESET and SETUP
button simultaneously until RESET FOR ZONE is displayed in the message center display.
5. NOTE: To exit the compass zone adjustment mode before carrying out a compass zone
adjustment, press the INFO button.
Press the RESET button until SETUP ZONE XX is displayed in the message center.
6. Press the SETUP button repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is
displayed. 7. Press the RESET button to exit the zone setting mode and lock your individual zone.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7125
Compass: Adjustments Vehicle Demagnetizing
VEHICLE DEMAGNETIZING
CAUTION: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil will be pulled toward the vehicle. Place a
cloth over the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth
covers the front third and the entire width of the roof.
NOTE:
- The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by television
repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes.
- To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the
demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained
in the vehicle.
- During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side opposite
the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface.
1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof.
1 Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 2 Holding the demagnetizer
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the passenger side, demagnetize
the front third of
the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius
within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the
windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times.
3 After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from
the vehicle. 4 Turn the demagnetizer off.
2. Carry out the Compass Zone Adjustment procedure. See: Compass Zone Adjustment 3. Carry
out the Compass Calibration Adjustment procedure. See: Compass Calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7126
Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration
COMPASS CALIBRATION
1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects
or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (rear window defrost, heater A/C, map lamps, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
doors are closed.
Start the vehicle.
2. Press the RESET button until RESET FOR CAL is displayed in the message center display.
3. NOTE: To exit the calibration adjustment mode before carrying out a compass adjustment, press
the INFO button.
Press the RESET button until CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CAL is displayed in the message center
display.
4. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle no more than 5 times at no more than 5 km/h (3 mph) until
CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CAL changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED in the message center.
5. The compass is now calibrated.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7132
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7133
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7134
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7135
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7136
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7137
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7138
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7139
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7140
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7141
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7142
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7146
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7147
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7152
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7155
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7159
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7160
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation
INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER
The message center is a fixed format LCD display, integrated into the instrument cluster. The
message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The message center
displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle systems. The
message center notifies the driver of a potential vehicle problem by displaying a warning message
pertaining to the system in which a fault has been detected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles of Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The message center electronic functions use both hardwired and controller area network (CAN)
circuits to transmit and receive information. It is very important to understand:
- where the input (command) originates.
- all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate.
- which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message.
- does the module which received the input (message) control the output of the feature, or does it
output a message over the CAN circuits to another module?
- which module controls the output of the feature.
Display Information The display modes are: information
- setup
- system check
- warning
- temporary alert
- display off
Using the message center, various information can be selected and reset by pressing the following
buttons: SET
- INFO
The select display and the reset display time-out and default to the information display mode. The
temporary alert display interrupts the current display to show the status of an event that has just
happened. The warning display interrupts the current display until cleared or reset by the driver.
Information Displays The information displays are as follows: compass
- average fuel economy
- distance to empty
- instantaneous fuel economy
- fuel available
- units (US/metric)
- language
- display off
Setup Displays The setup displays are timed modes and default back to the information display
function. The setup display modes are: language
- units (US/metric)
- system check
System Check The system check display is a sub-routine of the setup menu. These sub-routines
are timed modes that terminate after a finite interval, then default back to the information display
function. The system check display modes are: oil life XXX%
- charging system
- door ajar
- brake fluid level
- check headlamps
- check brake lamps
- check front turn lamps
- check parking lamps
- fuel level
- miles to empty
- emission system
- 4x4 OK
Warning Messages
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7163
The warning messages can interrupt the display until cleared or reset by the driver. The warning
messages are either single cycle, non-resettable, or repetitive warning messages.
The single cycle warning messages display once whenever the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or a fault occurs in a system, and can be cleared by pressing the RESET button. The
single cycle warning messages are: liftgate ajar
- liftgate glass ajar
- service emission system
- low brake fluid
- service brake system
- check left headlamp
- check right headlamp
- check left turn lamps
- check right turn lamps
- check left high beam
- check right high beam
- check brake lamps
- check parking lamps
- washer fluid low
- check fuel cap
- change oil soon
- change oil now
- low fuel
- service 4x4
- turn signal on
The repetitive warning message (park brake ON) displays whenever the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or a fault occurs in a system. The repetitive warning message appears again after
a 10-minute interval until the condition is corrected.
The non-resettable warning messages display whenever the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and a fault occurs in a system. The fault must be corrected to clear the non-resettable
warning messages.
The non-resettable warning messages are: high engine temperature
- driver door ajar
- passenger door ajar
- driver rear door ajar
- passenger rear door ajar
Temporary Alert Messages The temporary alert display interrupts the current display to show the
status of an event that has just happened. The temporary alert messages are: 4x4 locked temporarily
- 4x4 disabled temporarily
- 4x4 auto restored
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION - ESCAPE HYBRID
The message center electronic functions use both hardwired and CAN circuits to receive
information. It is very important to understand:
- where the input (command) originates.
- all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate.
- which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message.
- which module controls the output of the feature.
Display Information The display modes are: information
- setup
- system check
- warning
- temporary alert
Various message center information can be selected and reset by pressing the following buttons: SET
- INFO
The select display and the reset display time-out and default to the information display mode. The
temporary alert display interrupts the current display
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7164
to show the status of an event that has just happened and disappears after a few seconds. The
warning display interrupts the current display until cleared or reset by the driver.
Message Center General Displays The message center display is a 2 row by 12 character LCD
display. The display is controlled by a 2 button switch module that includes INFO and SET buttons
outside of the instrument cluster. The information displayed in the message center display falls into
4 main categories: jump start mode
- info
- warnings
- temporary alerts
Message Center Information Displays The INFORMATION DISPLAY mode is entered by pressing
the INFO button. Subsequent presses of the INFO button scroll through the menu features of the
information display.
System Check When the SET FOR SYSTEM CHECK information is currently displayed, pressing
the SET button leads the instrument cluster to initiate the system check function. The system check
function provides the driver with the current status of certain vehicle functions. The status of each
function is displayed sequentially on the message center. The driver has the ability to scroll through
the system check displays by repeatedly pressing the SET button, or the display automatically
scrolls at 2 seconds time out per display. The system check function can be terminated at any time
by pressing any message center switch other than the SET button.
Warning Indicators and Messages
Warning Indicators And Messages
The warning messages have precedence over all other messages. Every warning message is
displayed. The messages can be single cycle, non-resettable, or repetitive. The instrument cluster
indicators that are illuminated when a fault occurs and the message that follows are shown in the
table.
Warning Messages
The instrument cluster messages that are displayed when a fault occurs are shown in the table.
The warning messages continue to cycle in order until the vehicle condition causing the warning is
corrected, until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, or until the message center is reset
while the warning is displayed. A warning is removed from the display when the message center is
reset unless the warning is non-resettable. A repeated warning message is removed from the
display when the message center is reset and displays again after 10 minutes if the warning
condition is not corrected. The single cycle warning message is removed from the display when the
message center is reset and is not displayed again until the next ignition cycle. Multiple messages
are cycled through in a fixed order with a display of 4 seconds for each warning. No other display
modes are allowed while a warning message is displayed.
Inspection and Verification
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7165
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for
an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step. 4. If the concern is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link
connector (DLC) and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
5. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 6. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or ISO circuit fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for the instrument cluster, refer to Instrument Cluster.
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs, and carry out self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster.
7. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Instrument Cluster Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnosis. For all
other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See:
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
8. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart to continue diagnosis.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7166
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
B1205-B1212
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7167
B1212-B1243
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7168
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7169
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7170
Symptom Chart (Part 3)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7171
Symptom Chart (Part 4)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7172
Symptom Chart (Part 5)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7173
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests
Compass Sensor Module C909
Instrument Cluster C220
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7174
Message Center INFO Switch C253a
Message Center SET Switch C253b
Test A: The Message Center Does Not Operate Correctly
PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7175
A1-A2
Normal Operation
The message center display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The messages are
dependant on various vehicle inputs.
Possible Causes
- instrument cluster
- message center switch(es)
Test B: The Turn Signal On Warning Display Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST B: THE TURN SIGNAL ON WARNING DISPLAY IS INOPERATIVE
B1-B3
Normal Operation
The turn signal on reminder warning feature alerts the operator that one of the turn signals has
been on for 1/2 mile or more.
Possible Causes
- turn signals
- circuitry
- instrument cluster
Test C: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7176
PINPOINT TEST C: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
C1-C2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7177
C3-C4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7178
C5-C6
Normal Operation
The instrument cluster sends a signal to the message center INFO switch on circuit 1411 (GY/OG),
and to the message center SET switch on circuit 1410 (TN/OG), which communicates the
requested switch function to the message center. The switches are grounded through circuit 570
(BK/WH).
Possible Causes
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 1411 (GY/OG) open or short to ground
- circuit 1410 (TN/OG) open or short to ground
- message center SET switch
- message center INFO switch
- instrument cluster
Test D: The Compass Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST D: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE
D1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7179
D1-D3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7180
D3 Continued
Normal Conditions
The compass sensor module receives voltage from circuit 1002 (BK/PK) and is grounded through
circuit 570 (BK/WH). The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the
instrument cluster, which is displayed in the message center. The compass sensor module uses
circuit 702 (WH/BK) and circuit 703 (WH/OG) to communicate to the instrument cluster.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1002 (BK/PK) open
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 702 (WH/BK) open or short to ground
- circuit 703 (WH/OG) open or short to ground
- compass sensor module
Test E: The Compass Is Inaccurate
PINPOINT TEST E: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7181
E1-E3
Normal Operation
The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the instrument cluster to
display in the message center.
Possible Causes
- compass sensor module
- vehicle is magnetized
- zone setting
- compass out of calibration
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7182
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair
MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the
message center switch(es). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7183
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
FUEL CAP INDICATOR LAMP
The fuel cap indicator lamp (FCIL) is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The
PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines that there is a failure
in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be
detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
NOTE: The FCIL on the Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Explorer Sport Trac, and Ranger is a
dedicated output signal that is controlled by the PCM.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 7191
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 7192
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page 7193
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Doing so can result in safety canopy
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS) component is being serviced, the
SRS must be depowered.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is
ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- Seat side air bag modules or seat side air bag bridge resistors are available on Escape Hybrid,
Mariner and late build Escape vehicles only.
All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart
junction box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the
restraints control module (RCM) fuse F33
(15A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7199
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The front impact severity sensor is located on the radiator support bracket.
The first row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
The second row side impact sensors (if equipped) are located on the C-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
7. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
8. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, release the pin-type retainer and slide the
driver air bag module electrical connector off of the pin-type retainer.
2 Release the tab and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7200
10. Open the glove compartment door past its stops.
11. Through the glove compartment opening, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
12. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid vehicles
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Vehicles without safety canopies
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7201
14. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the safety canopy module circuit by removing the safety canopy
bridge resistor from the safety canopy
electrical connector.
If the safety canopy bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the
restraints control module (RCM).
If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the safety canopy electrical connector, a low
resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Vehicles with safety canopies
NOTE: If the headliner near each B-pillar has the word "AIRBAG" embossed on it, the vehicle is
equipped with safety canopy modules.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
17. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7202
18. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
19. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Slide and disengage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Push in to release the tab and disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical
connector.
20. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver side safety
canopy module electrical connector.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles without side air bags
21. CAUTION: Do not deactivate the side air bag module circuit by removing the side air bag
bridge resistor from the side air bag electrical
connector.
If the side air bag bridge resistor is removed, an open circuit fault will be generated by the restraints
control module (RCM). If a restraint system diagnostic tool is installed at the side air bag floor
electrical connector, a low resistance fault will be generated by the RCM.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7203
22. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
23. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
24. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
25. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles 26. Install the RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB. 27. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7204
Reactivation
All vehicles 1. Remove the RCM fuse F33 (15A) from the SJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait at least one minute.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner and late build Escape vehicles with side air bags
3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver seat side
air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger seat
side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7205
6. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
Vehicles with safety canopies
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the driver side
safety canopy module electrical connector.
8. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
9. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7206
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger
side safety canopy module electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
1 Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
2 Slide and engage the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector locking clip.
12. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
Escape and Mariner vehicles
13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7207
Escape Hybrid vehicles
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
15. Through the glove compartment opening, connect the passenger air bag module electrical
connector. 16. Close the glove compartment.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
18. Connect and install the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
2 Through the steering wheel access cover opening, slide the driver air bag module electrical
connector onto the pin-type retainer.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7208
19. Install the steering wheel access cover.
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
21. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 22. Install RCM fuse F33 (15A) to the SJB and install
the cover.
23. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in
front of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
24. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7209
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the ON position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with all SRS components connected or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag indicator will:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will
need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Instrument Cluster Bulb
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BULB
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. NOTE: To remove the illumination bulb, rotate the bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise and lift
it straight out from the instrument cluster.
Remove the illumination bulb(s) in question.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb > Page 7214
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Warning Indicator Bulb
WARNING INDICATOR BULB
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. NOTE: To remove the warning indicator bulbs, rotate the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise and lift it
straight out from the instrument cluster.
Remove the warning indicator bulb(s) in question.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an OBD
emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs an OBD diagnostic trouble code
(DTC) will be set.
^ The MW is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the ISO standard engine symbol.
^ The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
^ For applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit the PCM will illuminate the MIL until a
profile ignition pickup (PIP) signal is detected. For 2OO5 the following vehicles use a hard wire
circuit: Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis Explorer Sport Trac and Ranger.
^ The MIL will remain illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if:
^ an emission related concern and DTC exists.
^ no PIP signal is detected (applications with a dedicated hard-wire MIL circuit). The PIP signal is
generated in the PCM using the crankshafi position (CKP) sensor. For these applications the MIL
can be helpful in diagnosing a no start.
^ the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
^ the PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (KLOS).
^ the MIL circuit is shorted to ground (applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit).
^ The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if:
^ an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present.
^ the MIL circuit is open (applications with a dedicated hard wire MIL circuit).
^ To turn off the MIL afier a repair a reset command from the diagnostic tool must be sent or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
^ For all MIL concerns go to Symptom Charts.
^ If the MIL flashes at a steady rate a severe misfire condition may exist.
^ If the MIL flashes erratically the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON/ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 5% or less. When oil life left is between 5% and 0%,
the ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed. When oil life left reaches 0%, the
ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW message will be displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change [approximately 5,000 miles (8,000
km) or 12 months] perform the following.
1. Press the SET control to access the system check function.
2. Press and release the SET control to display "OIL CHNG XXX% HOLD SET NEW".
3. Press and hold the SET control for 2 seconds to display "OIL CHANGE SET TO 100%".
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-7 (Engine, front)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7224
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7225
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Material
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.).
3. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure sender.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Apply pipe sealant with Teflon to the oil pressure sender threads.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 >
Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 >
Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7237
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator:
> 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator:
> 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7243
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7244
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7248
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7249
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 2. Remove the warning indicator switch screw. 3. Disconnect the warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the warning indicator switch. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime
The warning indicator and chime are reminders to fasten the safety belt. The system operates as
follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the safety
belt warning light illuminates for one to two minutes and the warning chime sounds for four to eight
seconds.
- If the safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is on and the chime is sounding, the
warning light and warning chime turn off.
- If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, the warning indicator will
come on for 4 to 8 seconds with no chime.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides an additional reminder to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument
cluster.
The passenger safety Belt Minder feature is activated only when the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) system detects a passenger in the right front seat and the passenger weight exceeds a
programmed set point.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime
The warning indicator and chime are reminders to fasten the safety belt. The system operates as
follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the safety
belt warning light illuminates for one to two minutes and the warning chime sounds for four to eight
seconds.
- If the safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is on and the chime is sounding, the
warning light and warning chime turn off.
- If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, the warning indicator will
come on for 4 to 8 seconds with no chime.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides an additional reminder to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument
cluster.
The passenger safety Belt Minder feature is activated only when the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) system detects a passenger in the right front seat and the passenger weight exceeds a
programmed set point.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Seat Belt Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7260
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7261
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7266
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7269
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir
FUEL PUMP MODULE AND RESERVOIR
Fuel Pump Module And Reservoir
The fuel pump module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge
check valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition key has been turned off to
minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle
maneuvers with low tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page
7274
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page
7275
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Module and Reservoir > Page
7276
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel
pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold
to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and
a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19 (Center Console)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7280
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7281
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake control boot clips at the floor console by pressing inward on the base
of the boot. 2. Remove the warning indicator switch screw. 3. Disconnect the warning indicator
switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the warning indicator switch. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System
Information > Description and Operation
Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation
Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to the PCM Inputs Transmission Control Switch.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7292
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7293
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
LIGHT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7299
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7302
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7303
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REVERSING LAMP SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7308
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7309
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7310
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7311
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7312
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7313
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7314
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7315
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7316
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7317
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7318
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7319
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7320
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7321
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7322
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7323
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7324
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7325
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7326
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7327
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7328
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7329
90-2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7330
90-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for
an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
- Make sure the multifunction switch is in the low beam position.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector (DLC)
and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: Check that the program card is correctly installed.
- Check the connections to the vehicle.
- Check the ignition switch position.
5. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 6. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or ISO circuit fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for SJB, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module).
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
7. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
8. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7333
B1342-C1789
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7334
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7335
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
High Mounted Stoplamp C475
RH Rear Lamp C418, LH Rear Lamp C419
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7336
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280c
Stoplamp Switch C278
Test J: The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7337
J1-J3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7338
J3-J4
Normal Operation
The stoplamp switch is supplied battery voltage through circuit 10 (LG/RD) from the smart junction
box (SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch allows voltage to flow through
circuit 511 (LG). Circuit 511 (LG) sends voltage to the high mounted stoplamp and SJB, which in
turn provides voltage to the LH and RH rear lamps.
Possible Causes
- circuit 10 (LG/RD) open
- circuit 511 (LG) open
- stoplamp switch
- SJB
Test K: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST K: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
K1-K2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7339
K2-K5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7340
K5-K7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7341
K7-K8
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch allows voltage to flow through circuit 511
(LG). Circuit 511 (LG) provides voltage to the high mounted stoplamp and the smart junction box
(SJB). The SJB then provides voltage to the LH and RH rear lamps through circuits 22 (LB/BK) and
810 (RD/LG), respectively. All the stoplamp are provided ground through circuit 57 (BK).
Possible Causes
- circuit 22 (LB/BK) open or short to ground
- circuit 57 (BK) open
- circuit 511 (LG) open
- circuit 810 (RD/LG) open or short to ground
- high mounted stoplamp
- SJB
Test L: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST L: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
L1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7342
L2-L8
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7343
L9-L10
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch allows voltage to flow through circuit 511
(LG). Circuit 511 (LG) provides voltage to the high mounted stoplamp and the smart junction box
(SJB). The SJB then provides voltage to the LH and RH rear lamps through circuits 22 (LB/BK) and
810 (RD/LG), respectively.
Possible Causes
- circuit 22 (LB/BK) short to voltage
- circuit 511 (LG) short to voltage
- circuit 810 (RD/LG) short to voltage
- stoplamp switch
- speed control module
- SJB
- PCM
- ABS module
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7344
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7348
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7349
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7350
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
STOPLAMP SWITCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the stoplamp switch.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Initial installation of the stoplamp switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new
stoplamp switch.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise to the stop to unlock.
2. With the engine running, fully apply the brake pedal. 3. Install the stoplamp switch and slowly
release the brake pedal. 4. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7361
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7362
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7363
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7364
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7365
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7366
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7367
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7368
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7369
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7370
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7371
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7372
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7373
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7374
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7375
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7376
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7377
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7378
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7379
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7380
Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7381
Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
89-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7382
89-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles of Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage and ground to the interior lighting system. The
interior lighting system illuminates the interior lamps to enhance visibility of the interior while a
vehicle door is open or ajar, and the vehicle speed is lower than 15 km/h (9 mph). The SJB controls
all interior lighting functions and timing by monitoring inputs from the door ajar switches, liftgate ajar
switch, liftgate glass ajar switch and vehicle speed.
Interior Lighting Delay
The purpose of the interior lighting delay feature is to provide temporary illumination of the interior
lamps after doors are opened, then closed. The interior lighting delay feature will keep the interior
lamps on for a period of up to 25 seconds, or until the ignition cycles from OFF, or the vehicle is
locked using the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter.
Illuminated Entry
The illuminated entry requests the interior lamps to be illuminated when the ignition is off and the
RKE transmitter unlock button is pressed. The illuminated entry requests the interior lamps off after
25 seconds elapse, the ignition is switched to ON, or when the RKE transmitter lock is pressed.
Illuminated Exit
The illuminated exit requests the interior lamps be illuminated for 25 seconds when all doors are
closed and the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder. The illuminated exit will
request the interior lamps be deactivated when any door becomes ajar, the key is inserted into the
ignition lock cylinder, or 25 seconds expire.
Theater Lighting
The theater lighting option ramps up the interior lamps over 0.7 seconds when interior lamp
activation is requested. The theater lighting feature ramps down the interior lamps over 1.7
seconds when interior lighting deactivation is requested by any other feature other than the panic
alarm or battery saver.
Interior Lamp Arbitrator
The interior lamp arbitrator (located in the SJB) chooses between the interior lighting, interior
mode, interior lighting delay, illuminated entry, illuminated exit and battery saver to determine which
feature has precedence of activating and deactivating the interior lamps. The features are
prioritized as follows: battery saver, interior mode, interior lighting, interior light delay, illuminated
entry, and illuminated exit.
Battery Saver
The battery saver is internal to the SJB and provides automatic shut-off of the demand lamps
(vanity lamps and map lamps) and interior lamps after a period of 10 minutes has elapsed in order
to save battery voltage. A timer in the SJB is started when the ignition key is turned to the OFF
position. When the time-out period for the lamps has elapsed, the voltage is automatically shutoff to
the lamps by the battery saver. While battery saver has voltage disabled, if the ignition is turned to
any position other than OFF, any door or liftgate becomes ajar or the unlock button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, the battery saver will restore voltage and start the timer again. The amount
of time that is required to elapse before the voltage to the lamps is shut off is 10 minutes.
Inspection and Verification
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7385
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for
an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link
connector (DLC) and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
5. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 6. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or UBP circuits fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to
Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for SJB, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module).
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs, and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
7. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
8. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7386
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
B1314-B1335
B1342-B2902
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7387
Courtesy Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7388
Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Cargo Lamp C926a
Cargo Lamp C926b
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7389
Door Ajar Switch LH Front C525, RH Front C609, LH Rear C704, RH Rear C804
Interior Lamp C918
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7390
Interior Lamp C931
Liftgate Ajar Switch C478
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7391
Liftgate Glass Ajar Switch C479
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280b
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280c
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7392
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280d
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280e
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7393
Vanity Lamps C906 (RH), C907 (LH)
Test A: The Interior Lamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST A: THE INTERIOR LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7394
A1-A4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7395
A4-A6
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7396
A7
Normal Operation
When a door or liftgate is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the SJB. The SJB grounds
the interior lamp 401 (PK) circuit, illuminating the interior lamps.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1695 (YE/WH) open
- circuit 1005 (VT/OG) open or short to ground
- circuit 401 (PK) open or short to voltage
- SJB
Test B: The Interior Lamps Stay On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST B: THE INTERIOR LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY
B1-B3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7397
B3-B5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7398
B5-B7
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7399
B7-B8
Normal Operation
When a door or liftgate is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the SJB. The SJB grounds
the interior lamp 401 (PK) circuit, illuminating the interior lamps.
Possible Causes
- circuit 401 (PK) short to ground
- circuit 570 (BK/WH) open
- circuit 700 (WH/PK) open or short to voltage
- circuit 701 (LB/BK) open or short to voltage
- circuit 760 (PK/LB) open or short to voltage
- circuit 867 (DB) open or short to voltage
- circuit 1312 (LG/BK) open or short to voltage
- circuit 1742 (VT/LG) open or short to voltage
- circuit 1758 (WH/PK) open or short to voltage
- ajar switches
- SJB
Test C: The Interior Lamps Do Not Turn On With One Door Open
PINPOINT TEST C: THE INTERIOR LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7400
C1-C3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7401
C3-C5
Normal Operation
When a door or liftgate is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the SJB. The SJB grounds
the interior lamp 401 (PK) circuit, illuminating the interior lamps.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1312 (LG/BK) short to ground
- circuit 867 (DB) short to ground
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7402
- circuit 760 (PK/LB) short to ground
- circuit 700 (WH/VT) short to ground
- circuit 701 (LB/BK) short to ground
- ajar switches
- SJB
Test D: The Demand Lighting Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST D: THE DEMAND LIGHTING IS INOPERATIVE
D1-D2
Normal Operation
Circuit 1005 (VT/OG) provides voltage to each demand lamp when activated. The demand lamps
are grounded through circuit 570 (BK). The battery saver in the SJB deactivates the voltage and
ground circuits after time-out.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1005 (VT/OG) open
- circuit 570 (BK) open
Test E: An Individual Interior Lamp Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST E: AN INDIVIDUAL INTERIOR LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7403
E1-E2
Normal Operation
Circuit 1005 (VT/OG) provides voltage to each interior lamp when activated. The interior lamps are
grounded through circuit 401 (PK). The battery saver in the SJB deactivates the voltage and
ground circuits after time-out.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1005 (VT/OG) open
- circuit 401 (PK) open
- lamp assembly
Test F: The Illuminated Entry Is Inoperative When Using The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter
PINPOINT TEST F: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER
F1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7404
F2
Normal Operation
The illuminated entry provides interior lighting whenever the SJB receives a lamps ON/doors
UNLOCK request from the RKE transmitter. The SJB provides the voltage and ground circuits for
the interior/map lamps.
Possible Causes
- RKE transmitter
- SJB
Test G: The Battery Saver Does Not Deactivate After Time-Out
PINPOINT TEST G: THE BATTERY SAVER DOES NOT DEACTIVATE AFTER TIME-OUT
G1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7405
G2
Normal Operation
The battery saver provides voltage to circuit 1005 (VT/OG). Circuit 1005 (VT/OG) provides voltage
to each demand lamp. Each demand lamp switch, when activated, provides ground to the selected
lamp. The lamps are grounded through circuit 570 (BK/WH) or 57 (BK). The battery saver
deactivates the voltage circuit when the SJB has timed out.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1005 short to voltage
- SJB
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7406
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7411
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7412
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7413
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7414
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7415
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7416
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7417
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7418
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7419
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7420
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7421
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7422
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7423
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7424
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7425
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7426
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7427
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7428
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7429
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7430
Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
97-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7431
97-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7432
Daytime Running Lamp: Description and Operation
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
The daytime running lamps system operates the low-beam headlamps at a reduced intensity. The
smart junction box (SJB) supplies pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage, 80% of battery voltage, to
the low-beam headlamps when the following conditions are met:
- the headlamp switch is not in the headlamps ON position
- the ignition switch is in the RUN position
- the transmission is not in PARK (automatic transmission only)
- the parking brake control is released (manual transmission only)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7433
Daytime Running Lamp: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
NOTE: When installing a new smart junction box (SJB), it must be reconfigured for this feature if
originally equipped.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the daytime running lamps (DRL) following these
steps:
1 Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. 2 Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. 3
Fully apply the brake. 4 Release the parking brake. 5 Place the transmission in DRIVE. 6 If the
DRL does not operate, make sure the SJB is configured for DRL before proceeding to the next
step.
2. Verify the parking lamp operation.
- Place the headlamp switch in the parking lamps ON position. If the parking lamps do not operate correctly, refer to Parking Lamp.
- If the parking lamps operate correctly, go to the next step.
3. Verify the high beam operation.
1 Place the headlamp switch in the headlamps ON position. 2 Place the multifunction switch in the
high beam position.
- If the high beams operate correctly and the DRL operation is incorrect, install a new SJB. Refer to
Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). Test the system for normal
operation.
- If the high beams do not operate correctly, refer to Headlamp for correct diagnosis.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7437
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7438
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Page 7443
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Page 7446
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP BULB
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The halogen fog lamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 4 front fender splash shield
bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 4 front fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
- Position the front fender splash shield aside.
4. Disconnect the fog lamp bulb electrical connector. 5. Rotate the fog lamp bulb counterclockwise
and remove the fog lamp bulb. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7454
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7455
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7459
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7460
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The fog lamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Remove the fog lamp switch from the instrument panel. Disconnect the fog lamp switch electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Application and ID
Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID
"The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Electronic Flasher Module and the "Generic
Electronic Module."
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7468
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HEADLAMP BULB
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The halogen headlamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7473
LH Headlamp Assembly
1. Remove the battery.
Both
2. Release the rear cover retainer and remove the rear cover. 3. Disconnect the electrical
connector and remove the low beam or high beam bulb. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 7477
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7481
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7482
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7483
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Horn: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7489
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7490
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7491
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7492
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7493
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7494
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7495
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7496
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7497
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7498
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7499
Horn: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7500
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7501
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7502
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7503
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7504
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7505
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7506
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7507
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7508
Horn: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7509
Horn: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 7510
44-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7511
Horn: Description and Operation
HORN
There are 2 separate conditions that can cause the horn to sound. The horn will sound if the driver
presses the horn switch and when the vehicle security system is armed. The horn system uses the
smart junction box (SJB) to provide voltage to the horns, while the horn switch or the SJB can
provide the ground to engage the horn relay. The horn switch is integrated into the air bag. For the
removal and installation of the air bag, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Horn: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Principles of Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The horn relay B+ power and the horn relay switched power are supplied through circuit 1682
(RD/LB). The horn relay is controlled by the horn switch. The horn relay is grounded through the
horn switch by circuit 6 (YE/LG). When the horn switch is pressed, the horn relay control circuit 6
(YE/LG) is grounded. The relay is then closed causing B+ voltage to be applied to circuit 1 (DB),
sounding the horns.
The horn relay is powered on both the control and controlled sides by circuit 1682 (RD/LB). When
the horn switch is pressed, the horn relay control circuit 6 (YE/LG) is grounded through the horn
switch. The horn relay is then energized, allowing battery voltage to flow through the horn relay to
each horn through circuit 1 (DB), enabling the horns to sound. When the vehicle security system is
armed, the smart junction box (SJB) provides a momentary ground to the horn relay control side to
indicate the system is armed, and a continuous ground when an intrusion is detected.
Inspection and Verification
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for
an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link
connector (DLC) and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
5. If diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 6. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or ISO circuit fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for the SJB, go to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module).
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs, and carry out self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart to continue diagnosis.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7514
B1217-B1218
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7515
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7516
Horn: Pinpoint Tests
Clockspring C218a
LH Horn C1101, RH Horn C1102
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280a
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7517
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280b
Test A: The Horn Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST A: THE HORN IS INOPERATIVE
A1-A2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7518
A2-A3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7519
A3-A5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7520
A5-A8
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7521
A8-A9
Normal Operation
The horn relay B+ power is supplied through circuit 1682 (RD/LB). The horn relay is controlled by
the horn switch. The horn relay is grounded through the horn switches by circuit 6 (YE/LG). When
the horn switch is pressed, the horn relay control circuit 6 (YE/LG) is grounded through circuit 57
(BK). The relay is then closed causing B+ voltage to be applied to circuit 1 (DB), sounding the
horns.
Possible Causes
- circuit 1 (DB) open
- circuit 6 (YE/LG) open
- circuit 57 (BK) open
- circuit 1682 (RD/LB) open
- clockspring
- horn relay
- horn
- horn switch
- SJB
Test B: The Horn Is Always On
PINPOINT TEST B: THE HORN IS ALWAYS ON
B1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7522
B2-B6
Normal Operation
The horn relay is controlled by the horn switch. The horn relay is grounded through the horn switch
by circuit 6 (YE/LG). When the horn switch is pressed, the horn relay control circuit 6 (YE/LG) is
grounded through circuit 57 (BK). The relay is then closed causing B+ voltage to be applied to
circuit 1 (DB), sounding the horns. The SJB can also supply a ground for the horn relay coil.
Possible Causes
- circuit 6 (YE/LG) shorted to ground
- circuit 1 (DB) shorted to power
- clockspring
- horn relay
- horn switch
- horn switch harness
- SJB
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7523
Horn: Service and Repair
HORN
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the horn bolt and the horn. Disconnect the electrical connector.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7524
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7529
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7530
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7531
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7532
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7533
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7534
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7535
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7536
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7537
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7538
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7539
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7540
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7541
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7542
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7543
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7544
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7545
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7546
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7547
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7548
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7549
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7550
92-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7551
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Removal and Installation
1. Push the license plate lamp housing to the right and pull it out. 2. Disconnect the electrical
connector. 3. Remove the license plate lamp holder and lamp. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7556
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7557
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7558
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7559
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7560
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7561
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7562
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7563
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7564
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7565
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7566
Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7567
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7568
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7569
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7570
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7571
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7572
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7573
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7574
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7575
Marker Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7576
Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7577
92-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7582
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7583
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7588
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7589
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7593
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7594
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7599
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7600
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
LIGHT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
View 151-10 (Automatic Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7605
View 151-11 (Manual Transmission)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7608
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7609
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REVERSING LAMP SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14 (Under Dash Panel, LH Side)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7613
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7614
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on
some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control
deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in
the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake pedal is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM, or REM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) traction control/stability assist
module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and
generate an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to
the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
NOTE: On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stop lamp circuit, if all
stop lamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop lamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7615
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
STOPLAMP SWITCH
Removal
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the stoplamp switch.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Initial installation of the stoplamp switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new
stoplamp switch.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise to the stop to unlock.
2. With the engine running, fully apply the brake pedal. 3. Install the stoplamp switch and slowly
release the brake pedal. 4. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7620
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7623
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7627
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7628
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The fog lamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Remove the fog lamp switch from the instrument panel. Disconnect the fog lamp switch electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7632
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7636
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7640
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7641
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7642
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7646
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7651
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7652
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7653
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7654
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7655
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7656
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7657
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7658
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7659
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7660
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7661
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7662
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7663
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7664
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7665
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7666
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7667
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7668
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7669
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7670
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7671
92-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7676
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7677
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7678
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7679
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7680
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7681
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7682
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7683
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7684
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7685
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7686
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7687
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7688
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7689
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7690
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7691
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7692
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7693
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7694
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7695
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating
correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. See: Pinpoint Tests 3. Visually inspect for
obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 2 (25A)
- 3 (25A)
- 21 (40A)
- Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s): 1 (15A) (trailer parking lamps)
- 6 (15A)
- 17 (15A)
- SJB
- Circuity
- Trailer
4. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
- Make sure the multifunction switch is in the low beam position.
5. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector (DLC)
and select the vehicle to be tested from the
diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: Check that the program card is correctly installed.
- Check the connections to the vehicle.
- Check the ignition switch position.
6. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
operating manual. 7. Carry out the diagnostic tool data link test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CAN or ISO circuit fault; all electronic control units no response/not equipped, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- No response/not equipped for SJB, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module).
- System passed, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the
continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Smart Junction Box (SJB) Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
NOTE: When diagnosing the trailer tow lamps, begin by verifying that the vehicle lamp systems are
all functioning correctly with the trailer disconnected.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7698
B1342-B2070
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7699
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7700
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280c
Trailer Tow C439
Test Y: Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7701
Y1-Y2
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7702
Y2-Y4
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7703
Y4-Y5
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7704
Y5-Y6
Normal Operation
Voltage to the trailer tow lamps is controlled by the smart junction box (SJB). Circuits 52 (YE) and
64 (DG) supply voltage to the trailer tow LH and RH stop/turn lamps respectively. Circuit 962
(BN/WH) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamps. Ground for the trailer lamps is provided
on circuit 57 (BK).
Possible Causes
- circuit 52 (YE) open, or short to ground
- circuit 57 (BK) open
- circuit 64 (DG) open, or short to ground
- circuit 962 (BN/WH) open
- trailer
- SJB
Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Z1
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7705
Z1-Z2
Normal Operation
Voltage to the trailer tow lamps is controlled by the smart junction box (SJB). Circuits 52 (YE) and
64 (DG) supply voltage to the trailer tow LH and RH stop/turn lamps respectively. Circuit 962
(BN/WH) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamps.
Possible Causes
- circuit 64 (DG) short to voltage
- circuit 52 (YE) short to voltage
- circuit 962 (BN/WH) short to voltage
- SJB
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7706
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application
and ID
Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID
"The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Electronic Flasher Module and the "Generic
Electronic Module."
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams >
Turn Lamp
Turn Signal Lamp: Diagrams Turn Lamp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams >
Turn Lamp > Page 7715
Turn Signal Lamp: Diagrams Park/Turn Lamp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams >
Turn Lamp > Page 7716
Turn Signal Lamp: Diagrams Side Turn Signal Lamp
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7717
Turn Signal Lamp: Service and Repair
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the side marker lamp.
1 Push the side marker lamp rearward. 2 Pull outward from the front of the side lamp and remove.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7721
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 7726
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7732
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7733
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7737
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair
Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair
TSB 04-24-5
12/13/04
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER GRID/INTEGRAL ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR TERMINAL TAB REPAIR
FORD: 1999-2000 Contour 1999-2002 Escort 1999-2003 Escort ZX2 1999-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2005 Focus 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2005
Expedition, Explorer 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape
2004-2005 F-150, Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1999-2002 Continental 1999-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1999-2005 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1999 Tracer 1999-2000 Mystique 1999-2005 and Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego
1999-2002 Villager 1999-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-18-9 to update vehicle applications and service procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit inoperative electric rear window defroster (heated back lite) grid
lines, integral antenna concerns causing radio reception issues or terminal tabs pulled from the
rear window glass.
ACTION Follow the diagnostic and repair procedures included in this article to inspect and service
rear defroster grid lines, integral antenna concerns or broken terminal tabs.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Warrantable/Non Warrantable repairs
Warrantable grid line repairs typically can be identified by one inoperative grid line with a small
discoloration at the area of concern, approximately the size of a pinhead. Grid line(s) that are
scratched or have the silver material removed are not warrantable and should be addressed with
the customer. Replacement of backglass for grid line or bus bar tarnishing is not a warrantable
repair. Tarnishing of the silver lines or bus bars is a normal condition. Please refer to the Heated
Back Lite Damageability Job Aid for additional information and examples of defects and damage.
NOTE
THE GRID LINE MATERIAL IS NOT EMBEDDED INTO THE GLASS BUT IS BAKED TO THE
GLASS SURFACE AND CONSEQUENTLY CAN BE SCRAPED OFF. INOPERATIVE LINES MAY
APPEAR TO THE EYE TO BE UNDAMAGED DUE TO RESIDUE REMAINING ON
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 7742
THE GLASS AND WILL REQUIRE DIAGNOSIS WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP AS
EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE.
Examples Of Non-Warrantable Grid Line Damage
^ Ice scraper damage to grid lines
^ Animal scratches on grid lines
^ Window tint film/removal of the film which damages grid lines
^ Stickers placed over grids which upon removal, removes the grid line material
^ License plate (steel type placed against the inside of back glass) which rubs on the grid line
causing damage
^ Temporary license plate (paper stuck on to the inside of the back glass) which upon removal
removes grid line material
^ Cargo or lumber rubbing against the glass which removes grid line material
^ Cellular phone antenna installation/removal which damages grid line material
NOTE
AN UNDAMAGED GRIDLINE WILL HAVE SMALL RIDGES THAT PROJECT ABOVE THE
SURFACE OF THE GLASS AND CAN EASILY BE FELT WHEN RUNNING A FINGERNAIL
ACROSS THEM.
GRIDLINES THAT HAVE BEEN "RAZOR BLADED" WILL FEEL SMOOTH WHEN A FINGERNAIL
IS DRAGGED ACROSS THE AFFECTED AREA. THERE MAY BE SOME RESIDUE LEFT ON
THE GLASS THAT APPEARS TO BE GRID MATERIAL BUT A CHECK WITH A VOLTMETER OR
12V TEST LAMP, AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE, WILL CONFIRM AN OPEN CIRCUIT. GRID
LINE INOPERATIVE - DIAGNOSTICS
1. Reference Workshop Manual Section 501-11 and the Wiring Diagram Section 56 to verify power
and ground to the back-glass.
2. Connect a test lamp or DVOM to a good body ground.
3. Turn the ignition key to the run position and depress and release the rear defroster button to turn
the system on. THE GRID IS ENERGIZED FOR APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES EACH TIME
THE DEFROSTER BUTTON IS PRESSED.
4. Starting from the top grid line at the center of the back-glass, touch the test lamp or DVOM +
lead to each grid line. (Use caution not to damage grid lines). The DVOM should read
approximately 1/2 of the battery voltage on each line at the center of the back-glass. If using a test
light, the bulb should be approximately the same brightness on each line from top to bottom. If the
DVOM or light indicates a high voltage or no voltage on any grid line, move along the concern grid
line with the + test lead or test lamp until the voltage changes suddenly. This is the area of
concern, use chalk to mark the area of concern and mark the outside of the glass at that same
area.
5. Repair per the Grid Line Repair Procedure.
GRID LINE REPAIR PROCEDURE
NOTE
LONG GAPS ARE ALMOST ALWAYS DUE TO DAMAGE AND ARE NOT WARRANTABLE,
HOWEVER THEY CAN BE REPAIRED. THE LONGER THE GAP THE MORE IMPORTANT IT IS
TO APPLY A MINIMUM SIX (6) COATS OF CONDUCTIVE REPAIR MATERIAL WITH THE FIVE
(5) MINUTE DRY TIME BETWEEN EACH COAT. APPLYING LESS COATS OR NOT ALLOWING
DRY TIME BETWEEN COATS WILL PRODUCE REPAIRED RESISTANCE THAT IS GREATER
THAN OEM RESISTANCE, RESULTING IN POOR DEFROST PERFORMANCE AND
EXCESSIVE LOCALIZED HEATING. REPAIRED LONG GAPS ARE GENERALLY NOT
VISUALLY PLEASING UNLESS EXTREME CARE IS TAKEN WHEN TAPING AFFECTED GRID
LINE AREAS.
NOTE
IF THE BROWN COLOR UNDER THE GRID LINE IS DAMAGED OR MISSING (THIS IS VERY
RARE), IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO APPLY BROWN ACRYLIC LACQUER TOUCH-UP PAINT
FOR COLOR MATCH. THIS PAINT MUST MEET SPECIFICATION ESR-M2P100-C AND
SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE GLASS PRIOR TO APPLYING THE REAR WINDOW
DEFROSTER REPAIR COMPOUND.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 7743
Service inoperative grid lines on rear window glass using Motorcraft Defroster Repair PM-11 or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESB-M4J58-A as follows:
Surface Preparation
1. Bring vehicle inside and warm it to 60° F (16° C) or above.
2. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the rear window glass as this may cause damage to the grid lines. Clean the entire grid line service
area with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC-23 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the
repair area be clean and dry.
NOTE
THE REPAIR AREA HOWEVER SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH STEEL WOOL OR AN ABRASIVE
PAD SUCH AS SCOTCHBRITE TO REMOVE GRIME.
Mixing
The bottle of Rear Window Defroster Repair compound and touch-up paint (if needed) must be at
room temperature. Shake the bottle for at least one (1) minute for thorough mixing. Shake
frequently during use.
Application
1. Mark location of open grid on the outside of the back window glass (performed in diagnostics).
Place protective covering over the package tray as necessary.
2. Using "fine line tape", mask off the area directly above and below open grid line (Figure 1). It is
best to extend the tape 26 mm (1") beyond the concern area in both directions. The open should
be at the center of the mask and tape gap must be no wider than the existing grid line. Other types
of tape may be used but end results of the repair may not appear as visually acceptable due to
ease of application and tape edge finish.
3. If the brown layer of the grid is not broken or missing, apply only the silver grid repair compound
to the open grid line. Apply the correct coating in several smooth continuous strokes (allowing five
(5) minutes drying time between coats) across the open grid line area using the brush applicator in
the cap. Extend the service coating at least 6 mm (.25") on both sides of the open grid line area.
Apply a minimum of six (6) coats of the grid repair compound.
4. If both brown and silver layers of the grid are broken or missing, apply a coating of brown
lacquer touch-up paint across the open line area first. Take care to paint only the area missing the
color. Two (2) coats may be necessary to obtain the proper color. Allow the touch-up paint to dry at
least five (5) minutes between coats. Apply six (6) coats of grid repair compound.
NOTE
THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE GRID LINES ARE NOT PAINTED, BUT DUE TO THE SILVER
TARNISHING WILL TEND TO CHANGE THE GRID TO A GOLD OR BROWN COLOR. THE
REPAIRED AREA WILL BE BRIGHT SILVER AND WILL ALSO TARNISH OVER
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 7744
TIME TO MATCH THE REST OF THE GRID.
5. After five (5) minutes of dry time of the final coat of grid repair compound, remove the tape, step
outside and inspect the repaired area. If the repair compound is visible above or below the grid, the
excess can be removed. This may be done by placing a single-edge razor blade on the back
window glass parallel to grid and scrape gently toward grid. A wider/thicker line will perform better
but may not be cosmetically appealing.
CAUTION
BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE GRID LINE WITH RAZOR BLADE. VERIFY ALL OF THE GRID
LINES FUNCTION PROPERLY WHEN FINISHED.
Curing
The service coating will air-dry in approximately one (1) minute and the system can be energized
after five minutes. Maximum hardness and adhesion occur after approximately 24 hours.
SOLDER METHOD OF LEAD TERMINAL
NOTE
THE REAR WINDOW MUST BE AT A MINIMUM OF 60° F (16° C) BEFORE A REPAIR IS MADE.
PLACE PROTECTIVE COVERING OVER THE PACKAGE TRAY AS NECESSARY.
The new terminal will cover the original terminal location, but must be placed so that the new
terminal conductive areas will be placed on a good conductive base. This area should be cleaned
with steel wool or an abrasive pad to remove grime from the buss-bar. The area should then be
cleaned with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23, or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the
repair area be clean and dry and appear metallic. Depending on the buss-bar condition, rigorous
polishing with steel wool may be required. Please note that the entire buss-bar may be cleaned to
improve appearance.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE ANY TYPE OF FLAME TORCH OR FLAME HEATED SOLDERING GUN FOR THIS
PROCEDURE. TESTING INDICATED INADEQUATE HEAT GENERATION AT THE TIP AND THE
EXHAUST HEAT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PLASTIC TRIM PARTS IN THE AREA. USE ONLY
AN ELECTRIC SOLDERING GUN WITH 100 WATTS OR MORE OF POWER.
BEFORE USING THE SOLDERING GUN, BE SURE TO MELT A SMALL AMOUNT OF ROSIN
CORE SOLDER TO THE TIP. THE SOLDER WILL ASSIST IN ACHIEVING BETTER HEAT
TRANSFER FROM THE SOLDERING GUN TIP TO THE NEW TERMINAL.
The new terminal has pre-applied solder, flux and temperature sensitive paint. The paint provides a
visual indication when the terminal has reached the proper temperature to melt the solder on the
terminal. When the proper temperature is achieved the temperature paint will liquefy and change
color.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 7745
Use terminal type A (Figure 2) for all tab locations except on the Focus vehicle line. For the Focus,
use type B (Figure 3).
NOTE
DEPENDING ON THE ORIGINAL TERMINAL LOCATION, AND WHETHER THE TERMINAL IS
COVERED BY PILLAR TRIM, WILL DETERMINE WHERE TO LOCATE THE NEW TERMINAL.
SOME GRID LINE BUSS-BARS MAY ONLY ALLOW THE PLACEMENT OF THE TERMINAL
ABOVE OR BELOW THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS, BUT FOR
MOST VEHICLE APPLICATIONS THE REPLACEMENT TAB LOCATION WILL COVER THE
ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION BUT STILL ALLOW THE REPLACEMENT TAB TO ATTACH TO THE
BUSS-BAR ON GOOD CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL.
1. Place the replacement terminal over the original tab location making sure the conductive areas
of the terminal will be on a good conductive area. Do not place the terminal tab foot on the original
location which does not have conductive material (figure 4).
2. Hold the terminal in place with an item such as regular lead pencil at a 90 degree angle from the
terminal. (Terminal type B can be held in place with tape.) (Holding at other than a 90 degree angle
may allow the terminal to slip when the solder liquefies).
3. Place the soldering gun tip on the top of the terminal but not on the painted areas of the tab.
Energize the soldering gun and watch for the painted area of the terminal to liquefy and change
color. The paint should liquefy in approximately 25-45 seconds after heating. As soon as the paint
color completely changes on either side of the terminal, de-energize the soldering gun and
continue to hold the terminal in place with the soldering gun and pencil for an additional thirty (30)
seconds.
4. Remove the soldering gun and pencil from the terminal. The terminal should be allowed to cool
for another two (2) minutes before the wiring lead is attached to the terminal.
5. Attach the electrical lead connection to this terminal, turn on the rear defroster, and verify
operation.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 7746
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042405A Repair Grid Lines (Includes 0.7 Hr.
Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
042405B Replace Terminal (Includes 0.4 Hr.
Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
042405C Repair Grid Lines And 0.8 Hr.
Replace Terminal (Includes Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7042006 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7751
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7752
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12 (Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7757
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7762
View 151-24 (Rear Door (RH Side Shown, LH Side Similar))
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7763
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7766
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7767
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7770
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7771
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7772
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7773
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7774
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7775
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7776
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- The LH front window control switch is shown, all others are similar.
- The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control
switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control
switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front > Page 7783
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 7786
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch
View 151-23 (Right Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch > Page 7791
View 151-24 (Rear Door (RH Side Shown, LH Side Similar))
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch > Page 7792
View 151-22 (Left Front Door)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7795
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7796
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7799
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7800
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7801
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7802
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7803
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7804
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 7805
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
NOTE:
- The LH front window control switch is shown, all others are similar.
- The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control
switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control
switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run
Window Frame: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Top Run
FRONT DOOR GLASS TOP RUN
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 7810
Window Frame: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Top Run
REAR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down
position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door
glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the 2 rear door
glass top run bolts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Front
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3.
Position the watershield aside. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the
window control switch electrical connector. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Using the window control
switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 8.
Disconnect the battery. 9. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
10. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
11. Remove the front door window glass. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the front door window glass to make sure it is engaged correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7816
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View
FRONT DOOR GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7820
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4.
Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1
Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife Kit
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses
and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
LH Rear Quarter Window Glass 1. If equipped, remove the auxiliary climate control housing. 2. If
equipped, remove the bolt and the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket.
All Rear Quarter Window Glass 3. Remove the headliner.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7824
4. NOTE:
- Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
- Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new
quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top
center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass.
5. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
All Rear Quarter Window Glass
CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the
urethane adhesive has cured. The curing time at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative
humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours. (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as
temperatures and humidity vary.) Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive will adversely affect
the strength of the urethane bond.
1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. CAUTION: Use caution when applying metal primer. Apply a light amount of primer. Too much
primer will run and damage the
painted surface.
Use a wool applicator to apply metal primer to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10
minutes to dry.
4. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass surface with alcohol-free cleaner, making sure
the ceramic coated area is clean.
5. CAUTION: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane
glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of
the window assembly.
NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
Apply glass prep twice around the glass surface to be urethaned.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7825
6. Apply glass primer to the same area that was prepped in the previous step. Allow 5 minutes to
dry.
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
8. NOTE:
- Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins on the
glass surface.
- Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less
effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear
quarter window glass.
9. Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of 1 hour before testing for air or water
leaks.
After the urethane has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed.
11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window
glass. 12. Install the headliner.
LH Quarter Window Glass 13. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control upper housing
bracket and the bolt. 14. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control housing.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View
REAR DOOR GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View > Page 7830
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass
REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door glass top run. 2. Remove the rear door window glass. 3. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the rear door window glass to make sure it is engaged correctly.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3.
Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5.
Connect the battery. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain
access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window
control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position. 11. Disconnect the front door
window motor electrical connector. 12. Remove the 3 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3.
Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using
the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window
glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position. 9. Disconnect the rear door window
motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the 3 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
11. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > General
Procedures
Windshield: Service and Repair General Procedures
WINDSHIELD RESEAL
1. Remove the 4 covers, the 4 bolts and the 2 A-pillar passenger assist handles. 2. Remove the 2
windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws
and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the 6 screws, 2 sun visors and 2 clips. 5. Partially lower the front portion of the
headliner and block with a suitable material. 6. Remove the cowl panel grille. 7. Clean the interior
and exterior of the windshield glass surface with non-alcohol based glass cleaner. 8. Cut the
urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
9. NOTE:
- Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less
effort and a continuous bead.
- Make sure all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead.
Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive. Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of 1 hour before testing for air or water
leaks.
After the urethane has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane
adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Position the front portion of the headliner. 13. Position the 2 sun
visors, 2 clips and install the 6 six screws. 14. Position the overhead console and install the 2
overhead console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 16. Position the 2 A-pillar passenger assist
handles, and install the 4 bolts and the 4 covers.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > General
Procedures > Page 7842
Windshield: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > General
Procedures > Page 7843
Removal
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses
and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
1. Remove the 4 A-pillar passenger assist handle covers, the 4 bolts and the 2 A-pillar passenger
assist handles. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead
console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 5. Remove the 6 screws, 2 sun visors and 2 clips. 6.
Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 7. Remove the
cowl panel grille. 8. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the
pinch weld.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top
center and working toward the bottom corners.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > General
Procedures > Page 7844
10. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body. 11. Using the special tool,
cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. 12. Using a soft brush or
vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
CAUTION:
- After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane
adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity
above 50% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures
and humidity vary). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect the strength
of the urethane bond.
- Open the windows to prevent the windshield glass from being pushed out by air pressure if the
doors are closed.
1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or a non-staining grease pencil.
2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. Use a wool applicator to apply metal primer to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to
10 minutes to dry. 4. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane
adhesive and the windshield moulding. 5. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with an
alcohol-free cleaner making sure the ceramic-coated area is clean.
6. CAUTION: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply glass prep twice around the glass surface to be
urethaned.
7. If installing a new windshield, apply glass primer to the same area that was prepped in the
pervious step. Allow 5 minutes to dry.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > General
Procedures > Page 7845
8. Apply foam dam to the bottom of the windshield glass.
9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
10. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive to the sides and top of the windshield glass.
11. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield glass outside the foam dam.
12. Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
13. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of 1 hour before testing for air and
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
14. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield
glass. 15. Install the cowl panel grille. 16. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 17. Position
the 2 sun visors and 2 clips and install the 4 sun visor screws and 2 clip screws. 18. Install the
interior rear view mirror. 19. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console
screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
20. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > General
Procedures > Page 7846
21. Position the 2 A-pillar passenger assist handles and install the 4 A-pillar passenger assist
handle bolts and 4 covers.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7852
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7856
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7857
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7858
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7859
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7860
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
WASHER HOSE REPAIR
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a
windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) i.d. black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7867
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7871
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded View
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded
View
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW, WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP AND
RESERVOIR
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded View > Page 7874
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash
shield. 3. Disconnect the windshield and rear window washer pump electrical connectors.
4. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the front and rear washer pump hoses.
5. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield or rear window washer pumps prior to filling the
windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump
failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded View > Page 7875
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash
shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: When replacing the windshield washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber
grommet.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Remove the windshield washer pump. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
4. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded View > Page 7876
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump
REAR WINDOW WASHER PUMP
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash
shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: When replacing the rear window washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber
grommet.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Remove the rear window washer pump. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the rear window washer pump.
4. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded View
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir Exploded View
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW, WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP AND
RESERVOIR
Removal and Installation
1. For additional information, refer to the procedures.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir - Exploded View > Page 7881
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump and Reservoir
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash
shield. 3. Disconnect the windshield and rear window washer pump electrical connectors.
4. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the front and rear washer pump hoses.
5. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield or rear window washer pumps prior to filling the
windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump
failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 7885
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws. 4. Remove
the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them to the
correct locations.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 7890
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct location.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them to the
correct locations.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 7895
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct location.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor
View 151-3 (Engine Compartment, 1 Of 2)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 7900
View 151-25 (Liftgate)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Wiper Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7903
Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Use a Starter, Alternator, Battery, Regulator and Electrical (SABRE) tester to test the wiper motor
on the vehicle.
To test the wiper motor, disconnect the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft from the
windshield wiper motor.
Disconnect the wiper motor. Connect the (1) green lead from the (2) SABRE tester to the battery
negative (-) post. Connect the (3) red lead from the SABRE to the wiper motor (4) common brush
terminal (terminal 3).
Test the low-speed mode by connecting a (5) cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (6)
low-speed brush terminal (terminal 2) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 3.5 amperes, install a new windshield wiper motor.
Test the high-speed mode by connecting a cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (7)
high-speed brush terminal (terminal 1) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 5.5 amperes, install a new wiper motor.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 2. Remove the wiper motor linkage
bolt.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft).
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 7906
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
1. Make sure the rear window wiper motor is in the PARK position. Turn the rear window wiper
motor ON and allow it to operate for at least one
cycle.
2. Turn the rear window wiper motor switch to OFF and mark the position of the end of the wiper
blade on the back glass for reinstallation.
3. Remove the rear pivot arm.
1 Lift the pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
4. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove the rear wiper motor cover. 7. Remove the rear wiper motor bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the bolt and the rear wiper motor.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the rear wiper pivot arm.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft
assembly bolts and the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft).
3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13 (Behind Dash Panel)
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7913
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7914
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7915
Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L VIN Z (2005))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7916
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
1. Remove the clockspring.
